Sunteți pe pagina 1din 714

4011746 Rev P

Digital Content Manager (DCM)


Configuration Guide
Software Package Release 5.1
For Your Safety

For Your Safety


Explanation of Warning and Caution Icons
Avoid personal injury and product damage! Do not proceed beyond any symbol
until you fully understand the indicated conditions.
The following warning and caution icons alert you to important information about
the safe operation of this product:
You may find this symbol in the document that accompanies this product.
This symbol indicates important operating or maintenance instructions.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a live
terminal where a dangerous voltage may be present; the tip of the flash points
to the terminal device.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a
protective ground terminal.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol indicates a
chassis terminal (normally used for equipotential bonding).
You may find this symbol affixed to the product. This symbol warns of a
potentially hot surface.
You may find this symbol affixed to the product and in this document. This
symbol indicates an infrared laser that transmits intensity-modulated light
and emits invisible laser radiation or an LED that transmits
intensity-modulated light.

Important
Please read this entire guide. If this guide provides installation or operation
instructions, give particular attention to all safety statements included in this guide.

4011746 Rev P iii


Notices

Notices
Trademark Acknowledgments
Cisco, Cisco Systems, the Cisco logo, the Cisco Systems logo, Scientific Atlanta,
the Scientific Atlanta logo, ROSA, Copernicus, and SciCare are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the U.S.
and certain other countries.
All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners.

Publication Disclaimer
Cisco Systems, Inc., assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions that may
appear in this publication. We reserve the right to change this publication at any time
without notice. This document is not to be construed as conferring by implication,
estoppel, or otherwise any license or right under any copyright or patent, whether or
not the use of any information in this document employs an invention claimed in any
existing or later issued patent.

Copyright
2008 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.
Information in this publication is subject to change without notice. No part of this
publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form, by photocopy, microfilm,
xerography, or any other means, or incorporated into any information retrieval
system, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express permission of
Cisco Systems, Inc.

Comments About This Document


If you have comments about your experience with this documentation, please visit
the Scientific Atlanta web site and complete the user documentation satisfaction
survey at the following address:
http://www.scientificatlanta.com/my2cents/doc_survey.htm
Your completed survey will be forwarded to the documentation manager directly
responsible for publishing this document.

4011746 Rev P v
Contents

For Your Safety iii

Notices v

Safe Operations xiii

Preface xv

Chapter 1 Introduction 1
Introducing the Digital Content Manager............................................................................ 2
General ......................................................................................................................... 2
Modular Concept ........................................................................................................ 4
Principle ....................................................................................................................... 5
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ...................................................................... 6
About the Web Browser User Interface ................................................................... 6
Using the Web Browser User Interface.................................................................... 7
Web Browser User Interface Security ................................................................................. 10
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 10
Logging On or Off the Web Browser User Interface............................................ 11
Configuring the Security.......................................................................................... 12
Login Page Information ........................................................................................... 15
Licensing ................................................................................................................................. 17
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 17
Obtaining License Files ............................................................................................ 18
Checking the License Overview ............................................................................. 18
Install a New License File ........................................................................................ 19
Checking the Version Information ...................................................................................... 22
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 22
To Check the Version Information ......................................................................... 23
Importing and Exporting Device Settings.......................................................................... 24
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 24
Exporting Configuration Settings........................................................................... 24
Importing Configuration Settings .......................................................................... 26
Restarting the System............................................................................................................ 28
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 28
To Restart the DCM System .................................................................................... 29

4011746 Rev P iii


Contents

Using the Identify Me Utility ............................................................................................... 31


Introduction ............................................................................................................... 31
To Use the Identify Me Utility ................................................................................ 31

Chapter 2 Configuration 33
Device Configuration ............................................................................................................ 34
Changing the Device Name..................................................................................... 34
Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations................................................... 36
Activating or Deactivating the DCM ..................................................................... 39
Setting the Device Clock .......................................................................................... 41
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports ....................... 45
Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports ............................ 48
Configuring IP Security ........................................................................................... 50
Card Configuration ............................................................................................................... 55
Changing the Name of an Interface Card.............................................................. 55
ASI Port Configuration ......................................................................................................... 56
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 56
To Configure an ASI Input Port.............................................................................. 57
To Configure an ASI Output Port .......................................................................... 59
To Configure a Mirror Port ..................................................................................... 61
Checking the ASI Port Parameters ......................................................................... 62
GbE Port Configuration ........................................................................................................ 64
Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port ........................................... 64
Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries....................................................... 71
Adapting the Static Route Table ............................................................................. 74
Configuring VLAN................................................................................................... 77
Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups.................................. 80
Checking the Routes to Destination Devices ........................................................ 83
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature ...................................................................... 85
Checking the GbE Statistics..................................................................................... 88
Changing the Display Mode ................................................................................................ 92
Introduction ............................................................................................................... 92
To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs .............. 92
To Change the Display Mode of Private Data and Generated EMM
PIDs.......................................................................................................................... 93

Chapter 3 Multiplexing 95
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services ........................................................................ 96
Introducing the Services Trees................................................................................ 96
Changing Tree Settings .......................................................................................... 107
Representation Mode of the Incoming Services ................................................. 112
Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree ............................................... 116
Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams................................... 118
Settings of Incoming Services................................................................................ 118
Settings of Incoming Transport Streams ............................................................. 120

iv 4011746 Rev P
Contents

Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams ............................................... 127


Creating Outgoing Transport Streams ................................................................ 127
Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................... 141
Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams ................. 149
Configuring Automatic Pass Rules ...................................................................... 153
Forward Error Correction................................................................................................... 155
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 155
Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams ...................... 160
Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams ...................... 169
Service Re-Multiplexing...................................................................................................... 176
Passing Individual Services................................................................................... 176
Preconfiguring Services ......................................................................................... 178
Service Auto Passing Rules ................................................................................... 181
Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream...................................... 183
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components ........................................................... 185
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 185
Passing Individual Components .......................................................................... 187
Merging Components ............................................................................................ 190
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components................................. 200
EMM Components.................................................................................................. 214
Private Data Components...................................................................................... 220
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components.................................... 226
Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors ........................................................... 235
Modifying PSI/SI Information........................................................................................... 246
Viewing PSI/SI Information ................................................................................. 246
Changing the PSI/SI Generation Mode............................................................... 250
Changing the PSI/SI Table Playout Rate ............................................................ 255
Determining the Network PID Insertion into the PAT ..................................... 259
Remapping PSI-Tables ........................................................................................... 261
Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service ................................................. 263
Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT.................... 267
Exporting and Importing PSI ................................................................................ 269
Changing Service Parameters ............................................................................................ 272
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 272
To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing Transport
Stream.................................................................................................................... 272
To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services..................................................... 274
To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services ...................................... 275
To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing Services ................. 276
To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services.................................................. 278
Activating or Stopping Streaming..................................................................................... 282
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 282
To Activate a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream........................................ 282
To Activate All Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port .................................... 283
To Stop a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream............................................... 283
To Stop all Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port ............................................ 284

4011746 Rev P v
Contents

Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams.................................................... 285


Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream ................................. 285
Removing Outgoing Transport Streams.............................................................. 288
Viewing Service Grooming ................................................................................................ 290
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 290
To View Service Grooming ................................................................................... 293

Chapter 4 Transrating 295


Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 296
General ..................................................................................................................... 296
Applications............................................................................................................. 296
Bit Rate Limiting ..................................................................................................... 297
Statistical Re-multiplexing..................................................................................... 298
Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams ............................................................... 300
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 300
Transrating Board Settings .................................................................................... 302
Creating a Transrating Group............................................................................... 305
Adding Services to a Transrating Group............................................................. 307
Changing the Transrating Group Parameters .................................................... 309
Adapting the Transrating Properties of a Service .............................................. 310
Removing Services from a Transrating Group ................................................... 312
Deleting a MPTS Group......................................................................................... 313
Checking the Transrating Comparison................................................................ 314
Single Program Transport Stream Transrating................................................................ 317
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 317
Transrating Board Settings .................................................................................... 317
Creating a Multi-TS Transrating Group .............................................................. 320
Changing Transrating Settings ............................................................................. 321
Adding SPTSs to a Multi-TS Transrating Group................................................ 323
Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS ............................................... 327
Moving an SPTS from or to a Transrating Group .............................................. 328
Removing Multi-TS Transrating Groups ............................................................ 329
Checking a Transrating Comparison ................................................................... 331
Transrating Examples.......................................................................................................... 333
Transport Stream with Multiple Transrating Groups ....................................... 333
Statistical Re-multiplexing of a SPTS Transrating Group ................................. 335
Statistical Multiplexing in Combination with Rate Limiting ........................... 336

Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion 339


Introducing Digital Program Insertion ............................................................................. 340
General ..................................................................................................................... 340
Splicing Event Triggered by an AD-Server......................................................... 342
Splicing Event Triggered by a Cue Insertion Device ......................................... 344
Splicing Event Triggered by the DCM................................................................. 345

vi 4011746 Rev P
Contents

Configuring Splice Channels.............................................................................................. 346


Introduction ............................................................................................................. 346
To Configure Splice Channels............................................................................... 346
Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries .............................................................. 350
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers .................................................................... 353
Triggering Splicing Events Manually ............................................................................... 354
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 354
To Trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel Substitution.................................... 354
To Trigger a Insertion / Primary Channel Substitution.................................... 354

Chapter 6 Scrambling 357


Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 358
General ..................................................................................................................... 358
ROSA NMS Components ...................................................................................... 358
Introducing Conditional Access System........................................................................... 360
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 360
Scrambling, Control Word, and Cryptoperiod................................................... 361
Access Criteria and Access Rights........................................................................ 361
Entitlement Control Messages .............................................................................. 362
Entitlement Management Messages .................................................................... 364
Event Information Scheduler ................................................................................ 365
PSI/SI Generator..................................................................................................... 367
Private Data Generator .......................................................................................... 368
Scrambling levels .................................................................................................... 369
Simulcrypt Scrambling........................................................................................... 371
Timing Parameters.................................................................................................. 372
Steps To Take........................................................................................................................ 375
Allowing Scrambling for Services ..................................................................................... 378
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 378
Changing the Scrambling Parameter of a Service .............................................. 378
Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters ........................................................... 380
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 380
Changing the Scrambler Properties ..................................................................... 382
Entitlement Control Message Generators ........................................................... 384
Entitlement Management Message Generators.................................................. 396
Event Information Schedulers............................................................................... 404
PSI/SI Generators ................................................................................................... 407
Configuring the Access Criteria......................................................................................... 409
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 409
General Settings ...................................................................................................... 410
Setting up the Transport Stream Model .............................................................. 410
Defining Access Criteria ........................................................................................ 419
Scrambling Control.............................................................................................................. 427
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 427
General Settings ...................................................................................................... 432
Changing the ECM ID Mode................................................................................. 434

4011746 Rev P vii


Contents

Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream Belongs ................ 435
Starting and Stopping Scrambling ....................................................................... 436
Event logging........................................................................................................... 437
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................. 438

Chapter 7 Additional Features 441


Digital Transport Formatter ............................................................................................... 442
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 442
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode .............................................................. 443
Configuring a DTF Transport Stream .................................................................. 444
IP Statmux Controller.......................................................................................................... 446
DCM IP Statmux Concept ..................................................................................... 446
IP Statmux Configuration...................................................................................... 450
Checking Statmux Pool Settings on the DCM GUI............................................ 460

Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios 463


GbE Port Backup .................................................................................................................. 464
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 464
Changing the GbE Port Backup Parameters ....................................................... 466
Service Backup ..................................................................................................................... 467
Introducing Service Backup .................................................................................. 467
Assigning Backup Services to Main and Merged Services ............................... 470
Performing a Backup Transition........................................................................... 472
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters...................................................... 473
Transport Stream Backup ................................................................................................... 474
Introducing Transport Stream Backup ................................................................ 474
Assigning Backup Transport Streams.................................................................. 476
Performing a Manual Backup Transition ............................................................ 482
Changing the Backup Switching Parameters...................................................... 484
Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager .............................................................. 485
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 485
Steps to Take............................................................................................................ 489
Standalone Device Backup ................................................................................................. 492
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 492
Steps to Take............................................................................................................ 493
Special Cases............................................................................................................ 495
Configuring the Device Backup Settings............................................................. 497
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager.......................................... 498
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 498
Steps to Take............................................................................................................ 499

Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring 501


Alarm Overview .................................................................................................................. 502
Interface Card Related Alarms.............................................................................. 502

viii 4011746 Rev P


Contents

Device Related Alarms........................................................................................... 507


Configuring the Alarms ...................................................................................................... 509
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 509
Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms .................... 510
Generating Test Messages ..................................................................................... 510
Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms .................................................. 511
Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms............................................... 512
Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers........................................................... 514
Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers......................................... 520
Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm................................................. 524
Checking the Alarms ........................................................................................................... 525
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 525
Alarms Related to Incoming Transport Streams ................................................ 527
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Transport Streams................................... 528
Alarms Related to Incoming Services .................................................................. 529
Alarms Details Related to Incoming Services ..................................................... 531
Alarms Related to Outgoing Transport Streams................................................ 532
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Transport Streams................................... 533
Alarms Related to Outgoing Services .................................................................. 534
Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Services..................................................... 535
To Check the Device Status Overview Table ...................................................... 536

Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates 537


Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree.......................................... 538
To Check the Bit Rates in the Service Overview Trees ...................................... 538
Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bit Rates .......................... 539
Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables.......................................................................... 541
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 541
Checking the Input Bit Rates................................................................................. 542
Checking the Output Bit Rates.............................................................................. 549
Restarting the Bit Rate Measurement................................................................... 557

Chapter 11 Software Upgrade 559


Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 560
About the Upgrade Software ................................................................................ 560
System Requirements ............................................................................................. 560
Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package .................................................................... 561
Upgrading the DCM Software ........................................................................................... 565

Appendix A Customer Information 571


Product Support................................................................................................................... 572
Obtaining Support .................................................................................................. 572
Support Telephone Numbers................................................................................ 572

4011746 Rev P ix
Contents

Return Products for Repair................................................................................................. 574


Introduction ............................................................................................................. 574
Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address ......................................... 574
Packing and Shipping the Product....................................................................... 575

Appendix B Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS 577


Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 578
About ROSA NMS .................................................................................................. 578
Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers..................................................................................... 579
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 579
To Install the ROSA Drivers .................................................................................. 580
Making Task Instances ........................................................................................................ 584
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 584
To Make a Task Instance........................................................................................ 584
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS .................................................................................... 586
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 586
To Map a DCM into ROSA NMS.......................................................................... 586
Working with the Graphical User Interfaces ................................................................... 589
Opening the Web Browser User Interface........................................................... 589
Opening the Graphical User Interface of a Task or Component...................... 590
Using DCM Scripts .............................................................................................................. 593
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 593
Installing the DCM Macros ................................................................................... 594
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules ...................................................... 595
Removing Service Component Tracking Rules .................................................. 600
Importing SI Data ................................................................................................... 602
Starting or Stopping Streaming ............................................................................ 604

Appendix C Extended Operations 607


Downloading MIBs from the DCM................................................................................... 608
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 608
To Download MIB files .......................................................................................... 608
Viewing Trace Logs ............................................................................................................. 610
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 610
Filtering the Card Trace Logs................................................................................ 611
Changing the ORB Trace Level............................................................................. 612
Checking the Trace Logs........................................................................................ 612
Downloading Trace Logs....................................................................................... 612
Capturing Live Network Data ........................................................................................... 615
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 615
To Capture Network Data ..................................................................................... 615

x 4011746 Rev P
Contents

Appendix D Additional Configuration 617


Configuring IPsec on Windows......................................................................................... 618
Introduction ............................................................................................................. 618
To Configure IPsec on a PC Running Windows XP or Windows 2000
Server..................................................................................................................... 618
To Configure IPsec on a PC Running Windows Vista ...................................... 641

Glossary 655

Index 671

4011746 Rev P xi
Safe Operations

Safe Operations
The software described in this guide is used to monitor and / or manage Cisco
equipment. Certain safety precautions should be observed when operating
equipment of this nature.
For product specific safety requirements refer to the appropriate section of the
documentation accompanying your product.

4011746 Rev P xiii


Preface

Preface
Introduction
This configuration guide provides the necessary information to configure and to
operate the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 using the web browser
user interface of the device. In this configuration guide the Digital Content Manager
(DCM) Model D9900 is further indicated by DCM.

Audience
The audience of this configuration guide includes authorized and trained personnel
who are responsible for the configuration and operation of the DCM.

Required Knowledge
To use this configuration guide, the personnel should have a basic knowledge about
the technology used in relation to this product.

Related Publication
Refer to the following Scientific Atlanta publications for more information
concerning the DCM:
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - System Guide, part number 4011745.
This guide is shipped with the DCM.
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 - Data Sheet, this data sheet can be
found on the Scientific Atlanta web site at the following location:
http://www.scientificatlanta.com/products/customers/catalog_transmission.htm

Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note, part
number 4022070
ROSA Network Management System - User's Guide, part number 4014778
ROSA Element Manager - User's Guide, part number 4005743
ROSA Element Manager - Installation and Operation Guide, part number 4006813
IIOP Protocol Driver - User's Guide, part number 6985041
SI Editor Task Driver - User's Guide, part number 6985061
Statmux Pool Manager - User's Guide, part number 4022297
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide, part number 6985066

4011746 Rev P xv
Preface

Document Version
This is the thirteenth release of this configuration guide.

xvi 4011746 Rev P


1 Chapter 1
Introduction
General
This chapter provides an introduction to the Digital Content Manager
(DCM) Model D9900 system and description how to work with the
web browser user interface of the DCM.

In This Chapter
Introducing the Digital Content Manager........................................... 2
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface ..................................... 6
Web Browser User Interface Security ................................................ 10
Licensing ................................................................................................ 17
Checking the Version Information ..................................................... 22
Importing and Exporting Device Settings......................................... 24
Restarting the System........................................................................... 28
Using the Identify Me Utility .............................................................. 31

4011746 Rev P 1
Chapter 1 Introduction

Introducing the Digital Content Manager


General
The Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 is a compact 2RU modular system
configurable with up to four interface cards with each having ten ASI ports (ASI
Interface Card) or two pairs Gigabit Ethernet ports (GbE Interface Card).
The ports of the ASI Interface Card can individually be configured as either input or
output. The GbE Interface Card has a total throughput of two Gbps in and two Gbps
out and each port pair can be configured for port backup or for port mirroring. The
interface cards supports both Multi Program Transport Streams (MPTS) and Single
Program Transport Streams (SPTS).
For advanced MPEG processing functions like transrating, digital program insertion
(DPI), etc..., each interface card can be populated with a Co-Processor Card. The FEC
option for the GbE Interface Card performs forward error correction on the incoming
as well as on outgoing content.
The illustration below depicts a Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900.


Scientific
Atlanta

Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Cont
PS 1 ent Manager
(DCM)
PS 2

The main purposes of the DCM are re-multiplexing and grooming of content. The
DCM supports advanced PSI and descriptor handling capabilities. To facilitate the
configuration of content into logical outgoing program groups the DCM also
supports extensive Transport Stream and program analysis including program level
bit rate measurements on both the incoming and outgoing streams.

2 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Digital Content Manager

The Co-Processor card allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity optimization
purposes, like re-compression to lower bit rates of individual services and open loop
statistical re-multiplexing. This card can also be used for Digital Program Insertion
(ad splicing) on Standard Definition (SD) stream as well as on High Definition (HD)
streams. Splicing on component level allows for seamless insertion of regional
content into existing Transport Streams. The built-in DVB compliant scrambler of the
Co-Processor Card allows easy integration with several Conditional Access (AC)
systems. Integrating multiple CA systems at the same time is possible through the
Simulcrypt interface. These Co-Processor Card functionalities are enabled via
licenses.
DCM's Statmux feature controls statistical multiplexing of Scientific Atlanta encoders
via IP communication.
The DCM supports hot swappable and redundant power supply units and hot
swappable cooling fans. The DCM can be configured in a hot 1: 1 configuration and
supports port and service redundancy.
The DCM is controlled via a simple and intuitive Graphical User Interface (GUI) and
can also be integrated into Scientific Atlanta's ROSA Network Management System
(NMS).

4011746 Rev P 3
Chapter 1 Introduction

Modular Concept
The DCM is a fully modular concept built around a 2 RU high housing. The flexible
modular concept ensures easy system capacity upgrades. The following illustration
represents the modular concept of the DCM.

I/O GbE
10/100 3 4
1 2
PS 1
PS 2

The following DCM equipment is available:


DCM housing
- 48 - - 60 V dc or 100 - 240 V ac Power Supply Unit (PSU)
ASI Interface Card
GbE Interface Card with or without FEC option
Co-Processor Card
PSU slot cover plate
Interface card slot cover plate
When the DCM leaves Scientific Atlanta's assembly line, the device is configured as
ordered. When the device is not fully populated, the device can always be upgraded
at a later date by adding interface cards and Co-Processor Cards.
WARNING:
The number of Co-Processor Cards and GbE Interface Cards with FEC option
installed into the DCM can not be more than 6.

4 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Digital Content Manager

Principle
The DCM contains the following functional blocks:
Power supply units (PSU)
Power Distribution Card
Main Card
ASI Interface Card
GbE Interface Card with or without FEC option
Co-Processor Card
The following block diagram depicts the functional blocks of a DCM equipped with
two ASI Interface Cards and two GbE Interface Cards each provided with
Co-Processor Card and FEC option.

Mains PSU Power


Distribution
Card
Mains PSU

Co-Processor
Card GbE

10/100/BaseT
Interfaces
10 ASI

ASI Interface Main Card I/O Contacts


Card

Front Panel
Status LEDs
Co-Processor FEC
Card Card
Interfaces
4 GbE

GbE Interface
Card

Co-Processor
Card
Interfaces
10 ASI

ASI Interface
Card

Co-Processor FEC
Card Card

Data
Interfaces
4 GbE

Control
GbE Interface
Card Power Supply
Status

4011746 Rev P 5
Chapter 1 Introduction

Introducing the Web Browser User Interface


About the Web Browser User Interface
The web browser user interface of the DCM is a pure HTML based Graphical User
Interface (GUI) that can be opened using Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher.
By entering the IP address of the DCM in the address box of the Internet Explorer
web browser, the web browser user interface of the device will be opened. The
following illustration shows the opening page (Login page) of the DCM GUI.

Notes:
The procedure to log on the web browser user interface can be found in topic Web
Browser User Interface Security on page 10.
The Login page of the DCM can be provided with additional information. More
information concerning Login page information can be found in topic Login Page
Information on page 15.

6 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface

Using the Web Browser User Interface


Browsing through a Tree
The incoming and outgoing services of the DCM as well as the DCM configuration
are represented using trees. You can browse through a tree by collapsing or
expanding branches. A branch that can be expanded is indicated by a + sign and an
expanded leave is indicated by a - sign.
To expand a branch, point to the + sign in front of the branch.

To collapse a branch, point to the - sign in front of the branch.

Using Short-Cut Menus


Particular branches in a tree are provided with a short-cut menu. A short-cut menu
can be activated by right-clicking the branch.

Some of the short-cut menu options carry out commands immediately, and other
options display a sub page so that additional parameters can be entered or checked.

4011746 Rev P 7
Chapter 1 Introduction

Using the Apply and Reload Command Button


Particular pages and sub pages of the web browser user interface of the DCM can be
provided with a Reload command button and an Apply command button.

When changes are made to settings on a certain page or sub page, clicking on the
Apply command button will send these new settings to the DCM.
Note: When settings are changed on multiple pages or sub pages, only the settings
on the page or sub page for which the Apply command button is pressed, are sent to
the DCM.
When settings are accidentally changed on a certain page or sub page, clicking on the
Reload command button restores these settings to the previous settings as long as the
Apply command button on this page or sub page is not pressed. The Reload
command button can also be used to update readouts on the page or sub page to
which the command button belongs to.

Image Legend
A description of the icons used by the web browser user interface of the DCM can be
found on the help - Legend sub page. The following procedure explains how to
display the help - Legend sub page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Legend link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The help - Legend sub page is displayed.

8 4011746 Rev P
Introducing the Web Browser User Interface

Using Popup Windows


Particular information is given by the DCM using popup windows. When popup
blocking software is active on your PC, these popup windows might be blocked. In
this case a message box is displayed.

Deactivate this popup blocking software if you use the web browser user interface of
the DCM.

About Web Browser Toolbars


Some toolbars for web browsers (e.g. Google Toolbar) offer an automated form fill in
option. This option tries to fill in some fields in forms on web pages that were
already visited once in the past (e.g. to automatically fill in name and address if
possible).
Because the embedded user interface of the DCM consists of pages with large forms
this feature can slow down your page considerably. Therefore it is recommended to
disable this option when you work with the DCM GUI.

Checking the Version of the Web Browser User Interface


The software version of the embedded web browser user interface of the DCM can be
found on the Help - About sub page of the user interface. The following procedure
explains how to check the version of the embedded web browser user interface.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the About link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - About sub page containing the version information of the web
browser user interface is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 9
Chapter 1 Introduction

Web Browser User Interface Security


Introduction
To prevent people from gaining access to the DCM, the web browser user interface of
the DCM is provided with a security feature. This security feature confirms the
identity of the users who are attempting to access the device, protects the device
configuration from inappropriate access by users, and provides a simple and efficient
way to set up and maintain the security of the DCM.
To configure the DCM security, Security Accounts should be defined. A Security
Account consists of a unique user name with password. By adding Security
Accounts to Security Groups, particular access permissions and rights can be given to
users. Three Security Groups are defined each having a different access level, viz.:
Guests: read-only access
Users: read-write access (without security configuration)
Administrators: full control (with security configuration)
The security of the DCM is provided with three pre-defined User Accounts. The
table below shows these pre-defined accounts.

User Name Password Security Groups


Guest Guest Guests (read-only access)
User User Users (read-write access, without security configuration)
Administrator Administrator Administrators (full control)

Notes:
Both the User Name and Password are case-sensitive.
Similar user names cannot be used, even when uppercase and lowercase
characters are combined, e.g. user and User.
For security reason each action done to the DCM using the web browser user
interface will be logged into the Security Log or Action Log. More information
concerning these logs can be found in topic Viewing Trace Logs on page 610.

10 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security

Logging On or Off the Web Browser User Interface


To Log On
Perform the following steps to log on to the DCM web browser user interface.
Note: When the web browser user interface of the DCM is uploaded from the device
after entering the IP address in the Address box of the web browser, the Login page
of the web browser user interface is displayed.

1 On the Login page of the DCM web browser user interface, enter the user name in
the User Name box and the password in the Password box.
Note: Both parameters are case sensitive.
2 Press the Login command button to confirm.
Result: You are logged on to the web browser user interface and the Service page is
displayed. The user name of the security account that is logged on appears in the
Login link.

Note: After 30 minutes user interface inactivity, the web browser user interface of the
DCM will automatically be logged off.

To Log Off
The following step explains how to log off the DCM web browser user interface.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Logout link.
Result: The web browser user interface is logged off and the Login page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 11
Chapter 1 Introduction

Configuring the Security


Adding Security Accounts
Perform the following steps to add a Security Account.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 Point to the Security link.
Result: The Security page is displayed.

Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.
3 In the User Name box of the Add New User table, enter a name for the new
account.
4 In the Security Group drop down box, select the Security Group to which the
new account has to belong.
5 In the Password and Re-enter Password box, enter the password for the new
account.
6 Press the Add command button.
Result: The new Security Account is added to the Security Accounts table.

Changing Security Account Settings


Perform the following steps to change Security Account settings.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 Point to the Security link.
Result: The Security page is displayed.

12 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security

Note: When a user is logged on using a Security Account that belongs to the Users or
Guests Security Group, the Security link is not applicable.
3 In the Security Accounts table, adapt the following parameters of the Security
Account for which settings should be changed:

When the name of the Security Account should be changed, enter the new
name in the corresponding User Name box.
When the Security Account has to belong to another Security Group, select the
desired group in the Security Group drop down box.
When the password should be changed, tick the corresponding check box and
enter the new password in both password boxes.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing the parameter header.

Deleting Security Accounts


The following procedure explains how to delete security accounts.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 Point to the Security link.
Result: The Security page is displayed.
Note: When a user is logged on using a Security Account that belongs to the Users or
Guests Security Group, the Security page is not applicable.
3 In the Security Accounts table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of the
Security Account that must be removed.

4011746 Rev P 13
Chapter 1 Introduction

Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Security Accounts table, tick
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick
the check box of the last row.
The rows in the Security Accounts table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
4 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
Security Accounts are removed from the Security Accounts table.

Notes:
At least one Security Account belonging to the Administrators Security Group
must be present in the Security Accounts table.
When a Security Account is deleted from a Security Group while a user is logged
on to the DCM using this Security Account, the user has access to the DCM as
long as he is logged on.

14 4011746 Rev P
Web Browser User Interface Security

Login Page Information


Introduction
To inform the user about the DCM during logging on (maintenance, reconfiguration,
etc.), additional information can be added to the Login page of the DCM. The
following picture shows a Login page with additional information.

Adding Login Page Information


The following steps explain how to add information to the Login page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link
after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
2 In the Display Login screen info text box, enter the text that must be displayed
on the Login page.

3 Press the Enable command button.

Changing Login Information


The procedure below describes how to change the information text on the Login
page.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link
after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
2 In the Display Login screen info text box, modify the text that must be displayed
on the Login page.
3 Press the Change command button.

4011746 Rev P 15
Chapter 1 Introduction

Disabling Login Information


The following procedure explains how to enable the login information.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Maintenance link
after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
2 Press the Disable command button.

16 4011746 Rev P
Licensing

Licensing
Introduction
Particular options of the DCM are license based; meaning licenses are required to use
these options. A number of these options are on a per license basis:
Each transrated or spliced service needs one or more licenses depending on the
definition of the service. The following table reflects the license consumption in
relation with the service definition.

Service Definition Number of Licenses Required for:


Transrating Splicing
Standard Definition (SD) 1 1
High Definition (HD) 4 2

Each service that must be scrambled or each service that contains components
that must be scrambled needs one Scrambling license.
Each incoming or outgoing Transport Stream for which forward error correction
is enabled consumes one FEC_COP3_CODEC license.
Each ASI Interface Card participating in a DTF/MTR application needs 1
DTF_CONCENTRATOR license. And for each ASI Interface Card for which the
encapsulated services must be scrambled, a DTF_SCRAMBLING license is
required.
For the DCM, Scientific Atlanta provides permanent licenses as well as temporary
licenses. Options with permanent license(s) can be used without time limitation
while the use of options with temporary license(s) is time limited.
Licenses for license based options are offered to the DCM using a license file. When
the DCM leaves Scientific Atlanta's assembly line, the device is provided with a
license file containing the licenses you ordered. If your DCM needs more licenses
than its license file provides, the licenses can be upgraded by installing a new license
file. The procedure to install a new license file can be found in sub topic Install a New
License File on page 19.

4011746 Rev P 17
Chapter 1 Introduction

Obtaining License Files


Scientific Atlanta's Hesule web server application provides retrieval of licenses 24
hours a day 7 days a week. After submitting the equipment's Device Host ID and a
certificate key, an option kit will be provided. The Device Host ID can be found on
the Configuration - Licenses sub page of the web browser user interface of the DCM.
The procedure to open the Configuration - Licenses sub page containing the Device
Host ID of the DCM can be found in sub topic Checking the License Overview on page
18.
The Hesule web server interface can be accessed by entering the following URL in
your web browser:
http://online.sciatl.com/license-it
Once the license file is available, the corresponding licenses can be enabled by
uploading this file, see topic Install a New License File on page 19.

Checking the License Overview


The following procedure explains how to check the license overview of a DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the License link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Licenses sub page is displayed with the following
information:

Device Host ID: a unique identifier of the DCM that is used for creating new
license files
Type: represents the license type, for instance TRANSRATING.
Installed: represents the installation status of the option to which the license
belongs.
Count: represents the total number of licenses for this license type.
Usage: represents the number of licenses in use for this license type.
Expiration Date: represents the moment the temporary license(s) will
expired. Permanent licenses are indicated by 00-000-0000.
Remaining Time: for future use
Expired: represents the expired state of this license(s).
Key: represents the license key for this license(s).

18 4011746 Rev P
Licensing

Install a New License File


Introduction
A new license file can be installed into the DCM via the web browser user interface of
the DCM or using FTP.

Installing a License File using the Web Browser User Interface


The following procedure describes how to install a new license file using the web
browser user interface.
Note: A license file can only be installed via the web browser user interface if you are
logged on to the web browser user interface using a Security Account belonging to
the Administrators Security Group. More information concerning security groups can
be found in topic Web Browser User Interface Security on page 10.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Licenses link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Licenses sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Browse... command button.
Result: The Choose File dialog is displayed.

4 Browse to the new license file and select this file.

4011746 Rev P 19
Chapter 1 Introduction

The following picture gives an example of a license file.

5 Click on the Open command button.


Result: The Choose File dialog is closed and the name of the new license file appears
in the Update License File box.
6 Press the Update command button.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.

7 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.
Note: After pressing the OK command button, it takes about 15 seconds before the
new licenses become active.

Installing a License File using FTP


Perform the following steps to install a new license file using the File Transfer
Protocol (FTP).
1 Open Windows Explorer and browse to the new license file.
2 Launch the Internet Explorer browser.
3 In the Address line of the browser, enter the following instruction:
ftp://X.X.X.X
With X.X.X.X the IP address of your DCM.
Note: The octets of the IP Address must be separated using dots.
Result: The Log On As dialog is displayed.

20 4011746 Rev P
Licensing

4 Enter the following information on the Log On As dialog.


User Name: guest
Password: guest
5 Point to the Log On command button.
Result: The following window appears.

6 Simply drag-and-drop the license file into the Internet Explorer window.
Note: Once the new license file is copied to the device, it takes about 15 seconds
before the new licenses become active.
7 Close the Internet Explorer browser to end the FTP session.

4011746 Rev P 21
Chapter 1 Introduction

Checking the Version Information


Introduction
The Configuration - Version Info sub page of the web browser user interface of the
DCM represents the version numbers of the software, hardware, and firmware of the
different DCM components. The following picture shows the Configuration -
Version Info sub page of a DCM populated with an ASI Interface Card and a GbE
Interface Card populated with Co-Processor and FEC Card.

Note: By pointing to the parameter header in a version table, an ascending or


descending order of the rows can be chosen.

22 4011746 Rev P
Checking the Version Information

To Check the Version Information


Perform the following steps to check the version information of the DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Version Info link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Version Info sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 23
Chapter 1 Introduction

Importing and Exporting Device Settings


Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows exporting and importing of the
configuration setting file. This feature is useful for backup or (re-)configuration
purposes.
Note: A configuration setting file can only be imported if you are logged on to the
web browser user interface using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group. More information concerning security groups can be found in topic
Web Browser User Interface Security on page 10.

Exporting Configuration Settings


The following procedure explains how to export the configuration setting file of the
DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Backup sub page is displayed.
2 Press the Export command button.

Result: The File Download dialog is displayed.

3 Click on the Save command button.


Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.
Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.

24 4011746 Rev P
Importing and Exporting Device Settings

4 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.


5 Click on the Save command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 25
Chapter 1 Introduction

Importing Configuration Settings


The procedure below describes how to import the configuration setting files.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the Backup link that appears after
clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Backup sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the Browse command button.
Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.
4 Browse to the configuration file and select this file.

5 Tick the check boxes of the settings that must be excluded during the importing
process.
Note: After setting are clearing Import Device Settings check boxes and pressing the
Apply command button, these settings (called Settings Backup's Own Settings) are
stored on the device. Each time configuration settings are imported into the DCM,
these Settings Backup's Own Settings will be used to determine the imported
configuration settings. To avoid overwriting the Settings Backup's Own Settings of the
device by these of the configuration file during the importing process, the Settings
Backup's Own Settings can be excluded by ticking the Exclude Settings Backup's Own
Settings check box.
6 Click on the Open command button.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and the file name appear in the
Import Device Settings from File box.
7 Click on the Import command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.

8 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.

26 4011746 Rev P
Importing and Exporting Device Settings

Result: After pressing the OK command button, the DCM will be rebooted.
WARNING:
During booting the DCM, the outgoing services will be interrupted.
Note: Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the
features of the device.

4011746 Rev P 27
Chapter 1 Introduction

Restarting the System


Introduction
The DCM can be restarted from a remote location using its web browser user
interface. A device restart can be performed with its previous settings (called Warm
Restart) or with factory settings (called Cold Restart). When a cold restart is
performed, all previous configuration settings will be lost except the IP settings of the
10/100 and 10/100/1000Base-T port of the device. After restarting the device
remains accessible by the web browser user interface.
Note: Performing a cold restart can only be done when you are logged on to the DCM
with a security account belonging to the Administrators security group.
When the device participates into a device backup application and the device is
active, a manual main-to-backup or backup-to-main transition must be performed
before restarting the device (Warm Restart). The following steps explain how to
perform a manual transition:
1 Check if the inactive device is up and running.
2 Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the
active device and modify if required.
3 Perform a manual transition:
Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task
On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM
section, and point to the Backup command button to inactivate a main device
or to the Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.
Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager
On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on
the Backup tab of the main device to:
Backup to inactivate a main device
Inactive to inactivate a backup device
More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be
found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager or in the ROSA
Element Manager - User's Guide.

28 4011746 Rev P
Restarting the System

Standalone device backup


On the web browser user interface of the main DCM, click on the
Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on the Manual
Backup command button to inactivate a main device or to the Manual
Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone
Device Backup on page 492.

To Restart the DCM System


The following steps explain how to restart a DCM.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group when the device must be restarted using a Cold Restart.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the Maintenance link that appears
after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Warm or Cold selection button.

WARNING:
After restarting the DCM using a Cold Restart, all configuration settings will
be lost.
After restarting the DCM using a Warm Restart, the outgoing services will be
interrupted.
4 Press the Reboot command button.
Result: A confirmation popup window is displayed.
Warm Restart confirmation popup window

4011746 Rev P 29
Chapter 1 Introduction

Cold Restart confirmation popup window

5 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.
Notes:
Booting the DCM can take some time depending on the configuration and the
features of the device.
After changing settings using the web browser user interface, it takes at most 5
minutes before these settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When the DCM
is powered down during this time, these settings will be lost. To deal with this,
wait 5 minutes before powering down the DCM or trigger a Warm Restart and
wait 20 seconds before powering down the DCM by unplugging the power cord.

30 4011746 Rev P
Using the Identify Me Utility

Using the Identify Me Utility


Introduction
When a headend is populated with multiple DCM devices, a particular DCM can be
identified by means of the Identify My utility of its web browser user interface. This
utility starts blinking the red front panel LEDs of the on the front of the device
simultaneously for 30 seconds.

To Use the Identify Me Utility


The following steps describe how to use DCM's Identify Me utility.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM that must be located, point to the
Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
2 Click on the Identify Me command button.

4011746 Rev P 31
2 Chapter 2
Configuration
Introduction
This chapter covers the configuration of the DCM. This chapter
provides the device configuration procedures, card configuration
procedures as well as port configuration procedures.

In This Chapter
Device Configuration ........................................................................... 34
Card Configuration .............................................................................. 55
ASI Port Configuration ........................................................................ 56
GbE Port Configuration ....................................................................... 64
Changing the Display Mode ............................................................... 92

4011746 Rev P 33
Chapter 2 Configuration

Device Configuration
Changing the Device Name
Introduction
To facilitate the identification of the DCM in an application, a name with maximum
40 characters can be given to the device.
Note: The name of the DCM appears in the title bar of the web browser.

Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box.
Clicking on an interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the
Configuration - Interface configuration sub page of the corresponding interface
card.

34 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

To Change the Device Name


The following procedure explains how to change the device name.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page with System sub page is displayed.
2 In the System Settings table, enter a name in the Name box.
3 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
Note: The System Settings table also contains the DCM model to which the web
browser user interface belongs.

4011746 Rev P 35
Chapter 2 Configuration

Adding or Removing SNMP Trap Destinations


Introduction
The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol used to manage
remote devices. This protocol was designed for managing all kinds of devices such as
routers, switches, and also broadcast equipment. More information concerning
SNMP can be found in RFC 1157.
The DCM is able to generate SNMP Traps, containing information about an
error/informational condition, and to send these Traps to particular Trap
destinations. The SNMP Trap Destinations table on the SNMP page represents to
which IP address(es) the traps are sent and the community string for these
destinations.
The DCM is also accessible using a standard MIB browser. To provide
authentication, privacy, and authorization, the standard community-based security is
used. A Read Community string (default: public) has to be used for retrieval SNMP
operations and a Write Community string (default: private) for modification SNMP
operations. The procedure to change these community strings can be found in topic
Changing the Read and Write Community Strings on page 38.
The MIB files available on the DCM can be downloaded to the hard disk of a PC.
These MIB files can then be used to create for instance an application-specific user
interface. The procedure to download the MIBs from the DCM to the hard disk of a
PC can be found in appendix Downloading MIBs on page 607.

Defining SNMP Trap Destinations


The following explains how to define a SNMP Trap destination.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - SNMP sub page is displayed.
2 In the IP Address box of the Add New SNMP Trap Destination table, enter the
IP address of the trap destination.
Note: The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.

3 In the Community String box, enter a community string for this trap destination.
4 Click on the Add command button to confirm.

36 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Trap destination is added
to the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.

Tip: To sort the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between the ascending and
descending order by clicking on the parameter header.

Changing the SNMP Trap Format


The following procedure explains how to change the SNMP Trap format.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - SNMP sub page is displayed.
2 In the SNMP Trap - Format drop down box, select one of the formats, viz.:
- Standard: standard SNMP handling (default)
- Standard + Mystro: SNMP handling as defined by the mystro-videoport MIB

3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Removing Trap Destinations


Perform the following steps to remove Trap Destinations.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - SNMP sub page is displayed.
2 In the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table, set the check box(es) in front of the
Trap destination row(s) that should be removed.

4011746 Rev P 37
Chapter 2 Configuration

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the SNMP Trap Destination
Settings table, point to the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row.
3 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the Trap
destinations are removed from the SNMP Trap Destination Settings table.

Changing the Read and Write Community Strings


The following procedure explains how to change the Read Community and Write
Community strings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the SNMP link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - SNMP sub page is displayed.
2 In the Read Community box, enter the community string for the retrieval of
SNMP operations.

3 In the Write Community box, enter the community string for the modification
SNMP operations.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

38 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Activating or Deactivating the DCM


Introduction
For reconfiguration purposes or for participating in for instance device backup
applications, it can be useful to deactivate the DCM.
Deactivating a DCM performs following actions:
When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming
through these ports is switched off.
When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the
Entitlement Control Message Generator will be lost. More information
concerning this parameter can be found in topic Overruling the ECMG Channel
Status Message Parameter Values on page 389.
When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing
feature becomes inactive. More information about IP Aliasing feature can be
found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface
Card on page 85 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management
Ports on page 45.
Activating a DCM performs the following actions
When the Output Streaming parameter for ports is set to Auto, streaming
through these ports is switched on.
When the Enable Hot Backup parameter is cleared, the connection with the
Entitlement Control Message Generator is established.
When the IP Alias - Mode parameter for ports is set to Auto, the IP aliasing
feature becomes active. More information about IP Aliasing feature can be found
in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card
on page 85 or in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports
on page 45.

To Activate or Deactivate a DCM


The following procedure describes how to deactivate or activate a DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the System link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - System sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 39
Chapter 2 Configuration

2 In the Power Up Activation drop down box in the System Settings table, select
Active to activate or select Inactive to deactivate the DCM after a reboot action of
the DCM.

3 In the Current Activation drop down box, select Active to activate or select
Inactive to deactivate the DCM.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

40 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Setting the Device Clock


Introduction
The internal clock of the DCM can be set manually or can be synchronized at regular
time with an external device (e.g. Time Server...) by using the Network Time Protocol
(NTP). When the settings on the Configuration - Clock sub page of the DCM are
properly configured and after pressing the Apply command button, the
synchronization cycles are started by executing a time synchronization action.
Note: For applications that require accurate clock synchronization, such as DPI, make
sure that the following conditions are met:
Use an accurate time server. The lower the jitter of the clock of the time server, the
higher the accuracy of the clock of the DCM will be.
Make sure that the DCM is in a temperature-controlled environment.
The network between DCM and time server must be symmetric; the average time
required for a network packet to travel from DCM to time server must be the
same as the average time required for a network packet to travel from time server
to DCM.
Avoid persistent high loads on the network between DCM and time server, such
as a network backup of a server.

Changing the Device Time


Perform the following steps to change the current time of the DCM.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Clock sub page is displayed.
2 In the Synchronization drop down box, select Disabled.
Result: The User Time setting is displayed.

3 In the User Time box, enter the time and date using the following notation:
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss with:
YYYY: year
MM: month

4011746 Rev P 41
Chapter 2 Configuration

DD: day
hh: hour
mm: minutes
ss: seconds
4 In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
Note: After changing the time zone and pressing the Apply command button, the
graphical user interface will be restarted and the message The User Interface is
restarting. This can take a minute. After the restart you will have to reconnect to the device.
appears. By pressing a link or command button after a while the Logon page will be
displayed. Log on as usual.

Synchronizing with a NTP Server


The following steps explain how to synchronize the DCM with a Time-Server using
NTP.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Clock sub page is displayed.
2 In the Synchronization Type drop down box, select NTP.
Result: The NTP Server Configuration settings are displayed.

3 In the Time Zone Selection drop down box, select the desired time zone.

42 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

4 In the NTP Server IP Address box, enter the IP Address of the Time-Server and
press the Add Server To List command button. The octets of the IP address must
be separated by dots.
Result: The IP address of the Time-Server is added to the NTP Servers table.
Repeat this step for all Time-Servers that should be used for time synchronization.
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.
Note: Time-Servers can be removed from the NTP Servers table by ticking the check
box(es) in front of the corresponding IP Address(es) and pressing the Removed
Checked Items command button. To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the
NTP Servers table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.

Checking NTP Statistics


The NTP statistics table gives the list of NTP servers each accompanied by their
current states. Each row in the NTP statistics table also provides a summary of the
remote peer associated with the NTP server. The following procedure explains how
to check the NTP statistics.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Clock link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Clock sub page is displayed.
2 Click on the NTP Statistics command button.
Result: The Configuration - Clock - NTP Statistics sub page containing the NTP
Statistics table is displayed.

The following parameters are displayed:


IP Address: represents the IP address of the NTP server
Tally: represents the status of the NTP server selection for time
synchronization. The following values are used:
space: the NTP server is not reachable.
x : the NTP server is a false ticker.
. : the NTP server is not a member of the ten closest NTP servers.
- : the NTP server is an outlier
+ : the NTP server is a candidate for time synchronization.
# : the NTP server is almost used for time synchronization.
* : the NTP server is used for time synchronization.

4011746 Rev P 43
Chapter 2 Configuration

Ref ID: identifies the time source to which the NTP server is synchronized.
.INIT. means that no response has been received so far.
Stratum: represents the level defining the distance from the reference clock.
A stratus 1 NTP server is directly linked to the reference clock. A stratus 2
NTP server is linked to a stratus 1 NTP server. A stratus 3 NTP server is
linked to a stratus 3 NTP server, etc... If a NTP server is not responding, the
value 16 is displayed.
REF Type: represents the NTP server type. The following values are used:
l : local
u : unicast
m : multicast
b : broadcast
Last Poll: represents the time that elapsed since the last poll attempt,
expressed in seconds.
Poll Int: represents the polling interval, expressed in seconds.
Reach: represents the reachability status of the NTP server. This is an 8-bit
octal number representing whether the NTP server responded during the last
eight poll attempts. When the value differs from 377, check the IP network.
Delay (ms): represents the packet roundtrip delay, expressed in milliseconds.
Offset (ms): the time offset expressed in milliseconds between the clock of the
DCM and the NTP server.
Jitter (ms): represents the time variation expressed in milliseconds between
the NTP servers and the DCM.

44 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports


Introduction
To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCMs in a backup application or to
avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover
by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM works as follows:
When a client has to send IP packages to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP
table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client
broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packages.
When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM
responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the
port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the
mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP
packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several
gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it refreshes
the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the IP packets
with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main DCM port will
be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Three modes can be used for IP aliasing, viz.:
Inactive: the IP alias feature is not active.
Active: the IP alias feature is active.
Auto: the IP alias feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is
active when the DCM status is active and vice versa.
The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a
management port and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from a management
port. The GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card also support IP Aliasing. The
procedures to change the IP alias mode for a GbE port of an interface card and how to
add or remove IP aliases to or from such port is described in topic Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
Note: IP Aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.

4011746 Rev P 45
Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the IP Alias Mode


The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of a management
port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP alias
mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.

3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the Port drop down box in the Add New Alias table, select the port to which an
IP alias must be added.

3 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias.


4 Press the Add Row command button to confirm.
Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias table.

5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

46 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP Alias from a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the IP Alias 10/100 Port or IP Alias GbE Port table, set the check box in the row
of the IP alias that must be removed.

3 Press the Remove Checked Rows button.


Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.

4011746 Rev P 47
Chapter 2 Configuration

Modifying the Static Route Table for the Management Ports


Introduction
During the IP settings configuration of both management ports (10/100 and GbE
port) using Scientific Atlanta IP Configuration Tool, only one default gateway for
both ports can be defined. If both networks connected to the management ports
consist of more than one subnet, then additional routes (called static routes) must be
configured on the device.
Tip: The IP settings of both management ports can be checked in the Network
Settings table on the Configuration - System sub page.

Note: When the IP Address of a management port is changed using Scientific


Atlanta's IP Configuration Tool, the Static Route entries for this port will be removed
automatically.

Adding Static Route Entries


The following procedure describes how to add static route entries for a management
port.
1 On the web browser user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears
after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Routes sub page is displayed.
2 In the Add New Static Route table, complete the following parameters:

a In the Port selection box, select the 10/100 Port or GbE Port selection button.
b In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: Using an IP address in the range from 169.254.0.0 up to 169.254.255.255
is not allowed.

48 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

c In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network
(this parameter is not relevant when a host IP address is entered). The octets
of the Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
d In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.
Notes:
Using the default gateway is not allowed.
The gateway must be in the same subnet of the selected interface.
e Press the Add command button.
Result: The new static route is added to the Static Route Settings table

Removing Static Routes Entries


The procedure below explains how to delete static route entries.
1 On the web browser user interface DCM, point to the Routes link that appears
after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Routes sub page is displayed.
2 In the Static Route Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each static route
entry that must be removed and press the Remove Checked Rows command
button.

Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table,
tick the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected static route entries are removed from the Static Route Settings
table.

4011746 Rev P 49
Chapter 2 Configuration

Configuring IP Security
Introducing IP Security
IP security (IPsec) ensures secure communication by providing authentication and
encryption mechanisms for network traffic between two peers. IPsec can use several
different encryption and authentication mechanisms to accommodate various
implementations and security needs. To ensure that two peers use the same
protocols when communicating with each other, a policy is set up that defines a set of
security parameters and encryption algorithms that can be configured in each of both
peers.
The DCM allows setting up IPsec for both the 10/100 management port and GbE
management port separately.
Note:
Setting up IPsec for third party equipment (e.g. CA system) is not part of this
User's Guide. Please refer to the documentation that is shipped with the
equipment.
When the communication between the DCM and the computer running the web
browser user interface of the DCM must be secured by using IPsec, IPsec must
also be configured for this computer. The procedures to setup IPsec for a
computer running Windows can be found in appendix Configuring IPsec on
Windows on page 618.

Key Exchange
To establish an IPsec session, the peers need to exchange encryption keys in a secure
way. The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for this purpose. IKE is configured
to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. IKE will use 3DES encryption and
MD5/SHA1 hashing.

IPsec Packets
After a key is exchanged, the peers negotiate the structure of the IP packets. IPsec
modifies IP packets between the two peers by adding optional headers and
encrypting the data. Potentially, two headers can be used for this purpose: the
Authentication Header (AH) and the Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP).
To meet current requirements, however, the DCM uses only ESP; AH is not used.
When using ESP, two options ensure data integrity: the encryption algorithm (e.g.
3DES) and the hashing algorithm (e.g. MD5). The DCM is configured to accept a
number of ESP proposals, that is, a number of combinations of encryption and hashing
algorithms. Any combination of the following encryption protocols with the MD5
and SHA1 authentication protocol is accepted: AES 256, AES 128, 3DES, and NULL.
Note: To establish an IPsec session, the computer communicating with the DCM
must support at least one of the above combinations.

50 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Adding IPsec Peers


The following steps describe how to add peers to the IPsec peer list of the DCM.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the System link that appears after
clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - System sub page is displayed.
3 In the Add New IPsec table, complete the following parameters:

a In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the new IPsec peer. The octets of
the IP address must be separated by dots.
b In the Pre Shared key and Retype Pre Shared Key box, enter the pre shared
key for the new IPsec peer.
c Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new IPsec peer is added to the IPsec Settings table

4 Continue adding IPsec peers by repeating step a up to c or press the Apply


command button to confirm or the Reload command button to abort the
operation.

Deleting IPsec Peers


The following steps describe how to remove peers from the IPsec peer list of the
DCM.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the System link that appears after
clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - System sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 51
Chapter 2 Configuration

3 In the IPsec Settings table, tick the check boxes preceding each IPsec peer that
must be removed and press the Remove Checked Rows command button.

Tip: To tick the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IPsec Settings table, tick the
first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
last row that must be removed.
Result: All selected IPsec peers are removed from the IPsec Settings table.

Note: If IPsec is enabled, at least one IPsec peer must be present in the IPsec Settings
table. When all IPsec peers are ticked and the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only,
the following message appears in the Invalid User Input table on top of the
Configuration - System sub page.
Remove Checked Rows - Removing all IPsec settings when IPsec Traffic Only is active is not
allowed.

To deal with this, set the IPsec parameter to Allow All Traffic before removing all
peers.

52 4011746 Rev P
Device Configuration

Changing the IPsec Filter


The IPsec filter determines if non-IPsec traffic on a management port is allowed or
not. The settings of this filter are:
Allow All Traffic: the traffic on the corresponding port is not filtered
IPsec Traffic Only: only IPsec traffic matching the settings of an IPsec peer is
allowed.

WARNING:
When the IPsec mode is set to IPsec Traffic Only for the management port that is
used by the computer running the web browser user interface, and no valid IPsec
peer for this computer is added to the IPsec Settings table, the DCM becomes
inaccessible for this computer. This can be fixed by opening the web browser
user interface on a computer with valid IPsec peer or IPsec can be bypassed by
using the DCM hardware key. The procedure to bypass IPsec by using the
hardware key can be found in following topic.

Perform the following procedure to change the IPsec mode.


1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 On the web browser user interface, point to the System link that appears after
clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - System sub page containing the Network Settings table
is displayed.

3 In the row of the corresponding management port, select one of the following
settings in the IPsec drop down box.
IPsec Traffic Only
Allow All Traffic
Note: The IPsec drop down box is only applicable when IPsec peers are added to the
IPsec Settings table.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 53
Chapter 2 Configuration

Bypassing IPsec by using the Hardware Key


When the DCM becomes inaccessible due to wrong IPsec peer entries in the IPsec
Settings table, the IP security can be bypassed by:
plugging in the DCM hardware key into the I/O connector at the rear panel of the
DCM
and

unassigning IPsec on the computer running the web browser user interface as
described in topic To Unassign IPSec on page 639.
Note: The DCM hardware key can be made by connecting pin 1 to pin 6 of the mating
field-wiring connector for this I/O connector.

I/O GbE
10/100 3 4
1 2
PS 1
PS 2

When IPsec is bypassed, the web browser user interface becomes accessible as a
device without IPsec and the IPsec configuration can be fixed. During this IPsec
bypassing process, a No IP SEC warning icon is displayed in the top pane of the web
browser user interface, see picture below.

Note: When the DCM hardware key is plugged in, the Hardware Key Inserted alarm is
active and a ROSA message can be generated.

54 4011746 Rev P
Card Configuration

Card Configuration
Changing the Name of an Interface Card
Introduction
Each interface card of the DCM can be labeled with a name. A logical card name will
facilitate the identification of the card in the web browser user interface.

To Change the Card Name


Perform the following procedure to change the name of an interface card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card that must be
renamed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface card is displayed.
3 Enter a name in the Name box of the Card Settings table.

4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.

4011746 Rev P 55
Chapter 2 Configuration

ASI Port Configuration


Introduction
General
The ASI Interface Card of the DCM is provided with 10 ASI ports, which can be
configured individually either as input or output port. The configuration parameters
of the ASI ports can be found on the Configuration - Interface sub page of the ASI
interface card. The ASI port numbering used by the GUI is shown in the illustration
below.

6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5

ASI Output Port Mirroring


An ASI input or output port can be mirrored to one or multiple ASI output ports
belonging to the same ASI Interface Card. When an ASI port is configured as a port
mirror for another ASI output port (mirror port), the output of this port is an exact
copy of the output of the mirrored port. For a single ASI interface Card, maximum 5
ports can be mirrored and one port can have maximum nine mirror ports.
Once a port is mirrored to a port, additional configuration has to be done on the
mirrored port. Configuring mirror ports is not possible. When an alarm arises on a
mirrored port, only an alarm will be generated for the mirrored port, not for the
mirror ports.
In the DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page, a mirrored output
port and its mirror ports are combined in one port branch. The following illustration
depicts a branch of output port 3 mirrored to port 2, 4, and 5.

When an input port is mirrored to one or multiple output ports, the mirror output
port(s) is (are) not visible in the DCM Outputs tree.
For more information concerning the DCM Inputs and Outputs tree, please refer to
topic Introducing the Services Trees on page 96.
Note: When a port is mirrored to a port, all settings for this mirror port and all
routings to this port are removed.

56 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration

To Configure an ASI Input Port


The following procedure explains how to configure an input port of an ASI Interface
Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card for which
a port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O Settings of the ASI
Interface Card is displayed.
Tip: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the ASI Interface Card can also be
displayed by right-clicking the card in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.

Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a
mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 61.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this input port. A
logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI input port in the web
browser user interface.
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Input.
Result: When the Type parameter is set to Input, both the Packet Format and Output
Mode parameter are grayed out.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI input port or Disabled to disable the port.

4011746 Rev P 57
Chapter 2 Configuration

6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note:

- If the ASI connector is fed with a valid signal, the packet format (188 Bytes or
204 Bytes) of this incoming signal is displayed in the Packet Format box of the
ASI port, otherwise the packet format is indicated by Undefined.
- Changing an Input port to an Output port is not possible when services or
components of the port are passed to the output.

58 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration

To Configure an ASI Output Port


The following procedure explains how to configure an output port of an ASI Interface
Card.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI interface card for which
a port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O Settings table of
the ASI Interface Card is displayed.
Tip: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the ASI Interface Card can also be
displayed by right-clicking the card in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.

Note: The Name, Type, Enabled, Packet Format, and Output Mode parameter of a
mirror port are not applicable, see topic To Configure a Mirror Port on page 61.
3 In the Name box of the ASI port in question, enter a name for this output port. A
logical name will facilitate the identification of the ASI output port in the web
browser user interface.
4 In the Type drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Output.
WARNING:
When the port type is changed, the related Transport Stream and service
settings are removed!
5 In the Enable drop down box of the ASI port in question, select Enabled to enable
the ASI output port or Disabled to disable the port.
6 In the Packet Format drop down box, select 188 Bytes or 204 Bytes. When the
packet format is set to 204, 16 null bytes for Reed Solomon FEC bytes are added to
the outgoing packets.

4011746 Rev P 59
Chapter 2 Configuration

7 In the Output Mode drop down box, set the output mode of the outgoing ASI
stream to Byte (burst mode) or to Packet mode. This parameter is default set to
Byte.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

60 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration

To Configure a Mirror Port


The following procedure describes how to configure a mirror port.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card for which
a mirror port must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the I/O Settings table of
the ASI Interface Card is displayed.
Tip: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the ASI Interface Card can also be
displayed by right-clicking on the card in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.

3 In the Mirror of Port drop down box of the corresponding port, enter the port
number of the mirrored port.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note:
After pressing the Apply command button, all settings for this port and all
routings to this port are removed and the selected port is mirrored to this port.
With the exception of the Mirror of Port parameter, all port parameters of a
mirror port are not applicable.
Port mirroring can be disabled by setting the Mirror of Port parameter of the
mirror port to None.

4011746 Rev P 61
Chapter 2 Configuration

Checking the ASI Port Parameters


A parameter overview per ASI port together with a graphical representation of the
port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found on the port Configuration
sub page of the web browser interface. The following illustration depicts a port
Configuration sub page.

Perform the following steps to view the parameter overview of a particular ASI port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a
port must be checked.
3 Double click this port.
Result: The Configuration sub page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface information.

- Number: port number


- Name: port name
- Type: input or output port
- State: state of the port
- Packet format: 188 or 204 bytes
- Output mode: Burst (byte) or Packet mode

62 4011746 Rev P
ASI Port Configuration

Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box. The corresponding ASI port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the settings to configure the
corresponding port can directly be accessed by pressing the Configure Port
command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 63
Chapter 2 Configuration

GbE Port Configuration


Configuring the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port
Introduction
A GbE Interface Card of the DCM is provided with four Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) ports
making 2 GbE port pairs. Since both GbE ports of a port pair are considered as one
virtual port, particular settings are configurable per individual port and particular
settings configurable per port pair. The illustration below shows the input pairs of a
GbE Interface Card.

1 2 3 4

GbE 1 GbE 2 GbE 3 GbE 4

Port Pair 1-2 Port Pair 3-4


Note: The GbE ports within a port pair can be configured in such a way that they can
participate into GbE port backup applications. More information concerning GbE
port backup can be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Backup Parameters on page
464.

Configuring the GbE Port Settings


To configure GbE ports, the following parameters can be changed:
Name parameter
IP Address parameter
The IP addresses in the following ranges are not allowed:

- 0.0.0.0 - 0.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)


- 127.0.0.0 - 127.255.255.255 (reserved by IANA)
- 224.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255 (multicast addresses)
Subnet Mask parameter

64 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Auto Negotiation parameter


Auto-Negotiation is a function where a device learns the capabilities of the device at
the other end of the link and configures itself to the highest common set of
capabilities. This setting must be equal to the auto-negotiation setting of the
connected system. For Electrical GbE SFP Transceivers without 1000Base-X
auto-negotiation capabilities, this parameter must be disabled. For Electrical GbE SFP
Transceivers with 1000Base-X auto-negotiation capabilities, this parameter must be
enabled. More information concerning SFP transceivers can be found in the System
Guide shipped with your DCM.

Filtering parameter
As described in topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 68, UDP packets are
filtered using the destination UDP port number. All UDP packets for which the
destination UDP port number is greater than the GbE UDP boundary setting
parameter are considered as MPEG data packets. A second filtering on these MPEG
data packets is by default done by using IP address filtering. All UDP packets for
which the destination IP address matches the IP address of the GbE port will be
processed. For certain reasons, e.g. IP aliasing, this second MPEG data packet
filtering must be done by using MAC address filtering. All MPEG data packets for
which the MAC address matches the MAC address of the GbE port will be processed.
The following filters can be used:

- Disabled: all MPEG data IP packets will be processed.


- MAC Only: all MPEG data IP packets matching the MAC address of the GbE
port will be processed.
- IP Only (default): all MPEG data IP packets matching the IP address of the
GbE port will be processed.
- MAC and IP: all MPEG data IP packets matching the IP address and the MAC
address of the GbE port will be processed.
Note: Both the IP Address and Subnet Mask parameter for a port become
inapplicable if IP aliases are added to this port. More information concerning the IP
Aliasing feature can be found in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the GbE
Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.

4011746 Rev P 65
Chapter 2 Configuration

The following procedure explains how to change the interface parameters of a GbE
port.
WARNING:
After changing network settings of a GbE port, the routes will be removed and
should be reapplied.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE port interface parameters must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the GbE Name and Network Settings table:

a In the Name box of the port in question, enter a name of maximum 40


characters. A logical port name facilitates the identification of the GbE port in
the application.
b In the IP Address box of the port in question, enter the IP address that should
be assigned to this port. The octets of the IP address must be separated by
dots.
c In the Subnet Mask box of the port in question, enter the mask that
determines the subnet to which the IP address belongs. The octets of the
Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
d Switch on or off auto-negotiation by selecting On or Off in the Auto
Negotiation drop down box of the port in question.
e In the Filtering drop down box, select one of the following values: Disabled,
MAC Only, IP Only, or MAC & IP.
4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to reload the previous setting.

66 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Changing GbE Port Pair Settings


To configure a GbE port pair, the following parameters can be changed.
Enable parameter: determines the status of a GbE port pair, Enabled/Disabled.
Disable Mode parameter: determines the disable state of the port pair.
- Port Only Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled.
- Full Link Disabled: the GbE port pair is disabled in such a way that the device
connected to this port pair detects link loss. This setting is useful in case of
device backup with the Digital Headend Backup Task of ROSA NMS.
Mirroring parameter: determines the mirroring mode of the GbE port pair.
- Disabled: only the active port of the GbE port pair streams out MPEG data
packets.
- Enabled: the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main
port.
Note: Port mirroring works only correctly for multicast destinations. Streaming out
unicast traffic to different destinations is not possible with this as the streams are an
exact copy of each other.

Output Streaming parameter: determines the outgoing MPEG data packet


streaming through this port pair.
- On: output streaming is switched on.
- Off: output streaming is switched off.
- Auto: output streaming follows the active/inactive state of the device,
meaning output streaming is switched off when the DCM is inactive and vice
versa.
Note: The actual streaming state is an internal port state. This does not mean that the
Transport Streams will be streamed out at this port. Physically output streaming
needs:

The Enabled parameter of the GbE port pair is Enabled.


Output Streaming parameter for the port pair is set to On (or set to Auto
for an active device).
The selected port is active (not in port backup state).
The Streaming parameter of the Transport Streams is set to Activate.

4011746 Rev P 67
Chapter 2 Configuration

The following procedure explains how to configure a GbE Port Pair.


1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE port interface parameters must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Perform the following settings in the GbE Settings table.

a In the Enable drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or
Disabled.
b In the Disable Mode drop down box, select Port Only or Full Link.
c In the Mirroring drop down box of the port pair in question, select Enabled or
Disabled.
d In the Output Streaming drop down box of the port pair in question, select
one of the following values: On, Off, or Auto.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Settings the GbE UDP Boundary


The GbE UDP boundary setting acts as a filter for the incoming traffic. All traffic
with UDP port greater than this setting will be considered and processed by the DCM
as MPEG data. All traffic below this setting will be processed as non MPEG data.
The Boundary parameter can be set between 0 (default) and 65535 for each GbE
Interface Card. The following procedure explains how to set the GbE UDP boundary
setting.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
the boundary setting must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 In the Boundary box, enter the UDP Port value for the GbE UDP boundary
setting.

68 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Checking the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port


The interface parameters of a GbE port together with a graphical representation of
the port location on the rear panel of the DCM can be found in the Info table on the
Configuration sub page of the port. The following illustration depicts a port
Configuration sub page.

Perform the following steps to view the Info sub page of a particular GbE port.
1 On the web browser user browser interface of the DCM, point to the
Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, expand the interface card branch for which a
port must be checked.
3 Double click on this port.
Result: The Configuration page of the port in question is displayed with the
following interface parameters:
Number: port number
Name: port name
Type
State: state of the port pair to which this port belongs

4011746 Rev P 69
Chapter 2 Configuration

MAC Address: MAC address of the port


IP Address: IP address of the port
Subnet Mask: Subnet Mask of the subnet to which this port belongs
Auto-Negotiation: the auto-negotiation state of the port
Note: More information concerning the interface parameters of a GbE port can be
found in topic To Configure the Interface Parameters of a GbE Port on page 64.

Tips:
The hardware configuration of the DCM is depicted in the Hardware
configuration box. The corresponding GbE port is highlighted. Clicking on an
interface card in the hardware configuration picture opens the Configuration -
Interface sub page of the corresponding interface card.
The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card to which the
port belongs can be accessed by pressing the Configure Port command button.
The Configuration page of a particular port can also be displayed by
right-clicking on the port in the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Configuration in the short-cut menu.

70 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries


Introduction
For unicast IP streaming (1 sender and 1 receiver) within a particular LAN the DCM
needs the knowledge of the MAC address of the device to which must be streamed.

LAN


Scientific Scientific
Atlanta Atlanta

Alarm
Model D9900 Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Digital Content
PS 1 Manager (DCM) PS 1 Manager (DCM)
PS 2 PS 2

Before the DCM starts streaming to a device with a particular IP address, it starts the
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to identify the MAC address of this device by
broadcasting an ARP request message and receiving an ARP reply message, which
contains the MAC address, from the device.
When a DCM is integrated into a unidirectional application, the system is not able to
receive ARP reply messages after broadcasting ARP request messages. To deal with
this the MAC address can manually be mapped to the IP address by adding a static
ARP table entry.
Note: Static ARP combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static ARP is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 77.

To Add a Static ARP Table Entry


The following procedure explains how to add a static ARP entry to the ARP table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
static ARP entries should be added to the ARP table.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the ARP link.
Result: The Configuration - ARP sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 71
Chapter 2 Configuration

4 In the Add New Static ARP Entry table, tick the Port check box(s) of the port(s)
for which a static ARP entry must be added.

5 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address. The octets of the IP address must be
separated by dots.
6 In the MAC address box, enter the MAC address associated with the entered IP
address. The octets of the MAC address must be separated by colons.
7 Click on the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Static ARP entry is added
to the Static ARP Settings table.

Deleting Static ARP Entries


The following procedure explains how to delete Static ARP entries from the ARP
table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface card for which
static ARP entries should be removed from the ARP table.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the ARP link.
Result: The Configuration - ARP sub page is displayed.
4 Tick the check box(es) in front of the Static ARP entry (entries) that must be
removed.

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static ARP Settings table, tick
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
check box of the last row.

72 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: The selected entry (entries) is (are) removed from the Static ARP Settings
table.

4011746 Rev P 73
Chapter 2 Configuration

Adapting the Static Route Table


Introduction
When the DCM has to stream to a device situated outside the subnet the DCM
belongs to, the Address Resolution Protocol is inadequate. To deal with this a Static
Route Table must be setup containing the necessary information about the routes to
that second network.
Router

LAN 1 LAN 2


Scientific Scientific
Atlanta Atlanta

Alarm
Model D9900 Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Digital Content
PS 1 Manager (DCM) PS 1 Manager (DCM)
PS 2 PS 2

DCM device A DCM device B

In the illustration above DCM A requires the knowledge of the router port that
participates into the subnet of the DCM and the IP settings of LAN 2 of DCM B.
Note: Static Routes combined with VLAN is partially supported. If a static route is
required on a VLAN port, a configuration on the underlying physical port is needed.
Meaning this configuration applies to all VLAN ports attached to the physical port.
More information concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in
topic Configuring VLAN on page 77.

To Add a New Static Route Entry


The procedure below explains how to add a new static route entry to the static route
table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
static route entries should be added to the Static Route table.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.

74 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

3 Point to the Routes link.


Result: The Configuration - Routes sub page is displayed.
4 In the Add New Static Route table, tick the Port check box(es) of the port(s) for
which a static route entry must be created.

5 Tick the Default Gateway check box if a direct reachable IP router is used.
Note: When the Default Gateway check box is set, both the IP address and the Subnet
Mask parameter are not applicable.
6 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the destination network or
destination host. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
7 In the Subnet Mask box, enter the Subnet Mask of the destination network (when
a host IP address is entered, this parameter is not relevant). The octets of the
Subnet Mask must be separated by dots.
8 In the Gateway box, enter the IP address of the port of the router to the
destination port. The octets of the Gateway must be separated by dots.
9 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button, the new Static Route entry is added
to the Static Route Settings table.

To Remove a Static Route Entry


Perform the following steps to remove a static route entry from the static route entry
table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the icon of the GbE Interface
card for which static route entries should be removed from the Static Route table.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Select the Routes link.
Result: The Configuration - Routes sub page is displayed.
4 Tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries) that must be removed from
the Static Route Settings table.

4011746 Rev P 75
Chapter 2 Configuration

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Static Route Settings table,
point to the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and point to the check box of the last row that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
route entry (entries) will be removed from the Static Route Setting table.

76 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Configuring VLAN
Introduction
About Virtual Local Area Network
A Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a network configuration in which devices
communicate using Local Area Network (LAN) protocols as if they were the same
physical LAN, but where they are in fact on physical separate LAN. Broadcast and
other LAN traffic remains within the LAN.
Software masks the physical topology of the devices and provides a logical topology,
which is more suitable to the users requirements.

About a DCM in a VLAN Environment


VLAN port pairs can be configured for a GbE port pair with VLAN identifier and
with own IP address and subnet mask for each port in the port pair.

Remark
When a VLAN port pair is defined:
the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream coming from the
corresponding VLAN must match the IP address of the VLAN port pair.
the filtering of the GbE ports must be set to MAC only or Disabled and not the
default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be found in
topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

Notes
The DCM with software version 5.1 supports:
- VLAN tagging of outgoing Transport Stream packets
- VLAN Tagging of IGMP packets
- VLAN tagging of dynamic ARP packets (both request and replies)
- The source IP address of a VLAN tagged outgoing Transport Stream is the IP
address of the VLAN port. If no such port exists, the IP address of the GbE
port (physical port) is used.
The following list describes the VLAN functionality of the DCM:
Streaming different Transport Streams with same destination multicast IP
address and same UDP port, and different VLAN ID is not allowed.
Receiving multicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical IP
address/UDP port from two different VLANs is not possible.
Receiving unicast Transport Streams on the same GbE port with identical UDP
port from two different VLANs is not possible.

4011746 Rev P 77
Chapter 2 Configuration

IP aliasing on VLAN ports is not possible.


Static ARP and static Routing (in particular default gateway) on VLAN ports are
only partially supported. More information about static ARP can be found in
topic Adding or Deleting Static ARP Table Entries on page 71 and about static
Routing in topic Adapting the Static Route Table on page 74.

Adding VLAN Port Pairs


Perform the following procedure to add VLAN port pairs to a particular port pair.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
VLAN port pairs must be added.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Click on the VLAN link.
Result: The Configuration - VLAN sub page is displayed.
4 Perform the following settings in the Add New VLAN table.

a In the Port Pair selection box, point to the port pair for which a VLAN port
pair must be added.
b In the VLAN ID box, enter a unique VLAN identifier for the corresponding
VLAN port pair. A VLAN ID in the range from 1 up to 4094 can be used.
c In the First IP Address box, enter an IP address for the first port in the port
pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
d In the First Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the first port in the
port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
e In the Second IP Address box, enter an IP address for the second port in the
port pair. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: The IP addresses of both ports must not be in use by a GbE port,
another VLAN port pair, or IP aliasing.

78 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

f In the Second Subnet Mask box, enter the subnet mask for the second port in
the port pair. The octets of the subnet mask must be separated by dots.
g Click on the Add command button.
Result: The VLAN port pair is added to the VLAN Settings table.

Note: The number of VLAN port pairs is limited to 118/GbE Interface Card.

Removing VLAN Port Pairs


The following steps explain how to remove VLAN port pairs from a particular GbE
port pair.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
VLAN port pairs must be removed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Click on the VLAN link.
Result: The Configuration - VLAN sub page is displayed.
4 In the VLAN Settings table, tick the check box(es) of the VLAN port pair rows
that must be removed.

Tips:
To sort the VLAN Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows, tick the check box of the first row,
press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected row(s) is (are) removed from the VLAN Settings table.

Note: When a VLAN port is in use (e.g. if an IGMP Multicast Group with
corresponding VLAN ID is joined) the port pair can not be removed.

4011746 Rev P 79
Chapter 2 Configuration

Joining or Leaving GbE Ports to IGMP Multicast Groups


Introduction
The Internet Group Multicast Protocol (IGMP) is a dynamic protocol to register hosts
in a multicast group on a particular LAN by exchanging IGMP messages. The DCM
is compatible with IGMP version 1, 2, and 3.
When the DCM participates into a VLAN environment, the IGMP packets must be
VLAN tagged corresponding the VLAN port pairs. More information concerning
VLAN can be found in topic Configuring VLAN on page 77.

Joining a GbE Port to a Multicast Group


Perform the following steps to join one or more GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card to
a multicast group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE port pair(s) must be added to a Multicast Group.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the IGMP link.
Result: The IGMP sub page is displayed.
4 In the Join or Modify Multicast Group table,

a In the Port Pair selection box, select the Port Pair selection button of the port
pair that should be added to the Multicast Group.
b In the Available VLAN IDs drop down box, select the VLAN ID
corresponding the VLAN port pair. Select None to choose the native GbE port
pair (without VLAN tags).
c In the Multicast IP Address box enter the IP address of the multicast group.
The octets of the multicast IP address must be separated by dots.

80 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

d In the Filter drop down box, select the source filtering:


Include: adds the IP address(es) to the include list of sources. An Include
source list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is
allowed.
Exclude: adds the IP address(es) to exclude list of sources. An Exclude
source list contains the IP addresses from which multicast reception is not
allowed.
e In the Source IP Address box, enter the IP address that must be added to the
Include or Exclude source list.
Notes:
When multiple IP addresses must be added to the source list, point to the
Insert Row command button to enlarge the Join or Modify Multicast
Group table and enter the IP address in the corresponding Source IP
Address box.
Successive IP addresses can be added to the source list by inserting a
range. The following steps explain how to insert a range:
Tick the Insert IP Address Range check box.
In the First Source IP Address box, enter the first IP address of the
range.
In the Count box, enter the number of successive IP addresses.
Point to the Insert Range command button.
Result: The IP addresses are added to the Join or Modify Multicast Group
table.
f Click on the Join command button.
Result: The IP addresses are added to the source list and appear in the IGMP
Settings table.

Notes:
The source filtering can always be adapted by changing the filter parameters and
pressing the Join command button.
When no source IP addresses must be specified, select Exclude in the Filter drop
down box without specifying source IP addresses.
In an IGMPv2 environment the Filter parameter must be set to Exclude.

4011746 Rev P 81
Chapter 2 Configuration

When the network between a router and the DCM (using IGMPv3) is populated
with snooping switches supporting IGMPv2, the Unsolicited IGMP Message
parameter must be set to IGMPv2.

Leaving the Multicast Group Membership of a GbE Port


The following steps explain how to cancel a multicast group membership of a GbE
port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE ports must be removed from a multicast group.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the IGMP link.
Result: The IGMP sub page is displayed.
4 In the IGMP Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the entry (entries)
that must be removed.

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the IGMP Settings table, point to
the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and point to the
check box of the last row.
5 Press the Leave Checked Items command button to confirm or the Reload
command button to abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Leave Checked Items command button, the entries are
removed from the IGMP Settings table.

82 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Checking the Routes to Destination Devices


Introduction
Particular status parameters of the routes to destination devices to which should be
streamed are categorized on the Status - Destinations sub page of the web browser
user interface. The route parameters that can be found on the Status - Destinations
sub page are.

Port: represents the port number for the route.


VLAN ID: represents the VLAN identifier.
IP Address: represents the IP Address of the destination device.
Routing: represents the status of the route to the destination device, possible
values:
Not Routable: no route to the destination device
Routable (via Gateway): a route to the destination device exists, the destination
device is situated in another subnet of the DCM port and the connection is
established using a router.
Routable (Destination in LAN): a route to the destination device exists. The
destination device is situated in the same subnet of the DCM port.
Not Applicable
ARP: represents the result of ARP, possible values:
Destination Resolved: the DCM received an ARP reply message from the
destination device that is situated in the same subnet.
Destination Unresolved: the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from
the destination device in the same subnet after broadcasting ARP request
messages.

4011746 Rev P 83
Chapter 2 Configuration

Gateway Resolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and the
DCM receive an ARP reply message from the router to this subnet.
Gateway Unresolved: the destination device is situated in another subnet and
the DCM doesn't receive an ARP reply message from the router after
broadcasting ARP request messages.
Destination has Static ARP: the static ARP entry is used for the route to the
destination device (same subnet) or to the router (different subnet).
Multicast
Not Applicable
Tip: To sort the Destinations Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the parameter header.

To Check the Routes to Destination Devices


The following steps explain how to check the connection parameters of destination
devices.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Destinations link
after clicking on the Status link.
Result: The Status - Destinations sub page is displayed.
2 In the drop down box, select the interface card for which status parameters of the
routes to destination devices must be checked.
Result: The Destinations Overview table of the selected interface card is displayed.

84 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature


Introduction
To eliminate additional clients to feed backup DCMs in a backup application or to
avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM supports IP address takeover
by using IP aliasing. The IP aliasing feature of the DCM works as follows:
When a client has to send IP packages to a port of the main DCM and the client's ARP
table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this port, the client
broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address of these packages.
When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the main DCM, the DCM
responds with an ARP reply message containing IP address and MAC address of the
port. When the client receives the ARP reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the
mapping between IP address and MAC address for this port and starts sending IP
packets to this port. When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several
gratuitous ARP messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it refreshes
the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now the IP packets
with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for the main DCM port will
be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.
Three modes can be used for IP aliasing, viz.:
Inactive: the IP alias feature is not active.
Active: the IP alias feature is active.
Auto: the IP alias feature matches the DCM status, meaning the IP alias Mode is
active when the DCM status is active and vice versa.
Notes:
The following procedures describe how to change the IP alias mode for a GbE
port on a GbE Interface Card and how to add or remove IP aliases to or from such
port. The management ports also support IP Aliasing. The procedures to change
the IP alias mode for management port and how to add or remove IP aliases to or
from such port is described in topic Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the
Management Ports on page 45.
IP aliasing can only be used for Advertising Servers.
IP aliasing can not be combined with VLAN port pairs. For more information
concerning the VLAN functionality of the DCM can be found in topic Configuring
VLAN on page 77.
For IP Aliasing, the filtering of the GbE port must be set to MAC only or Disabled
and not the default value (IP only). More information concerning Filtering can be
found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

4011746 Rev P 85
Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the IP Alias Mode


The following procedure describes how to change the IP alias mode of GbE port on a
GbE Interface Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card
containing the GbE port for which the IP alias Mode must be changed.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 In the Mode drop down box in the IP Alias table of the port for which the IP alias
mode must be changed, select Inactive, Active, or Auto.

4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Adding an IP Alias
The following steps explain how to add a new IP alias to a GbE port on a GbE
Interface Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card
containing the GbE port for which the IP aliases must be added.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 In the Port drop down box in the Add New Alias table, select the port to which an
IP alias must be added.

4 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address for the alias. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
5 Press the Add Row command button to confirm.
Result: The IP alias is added to the corresponding IP Alias Port table.

86 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

Result: When an IP alias is added to a port, the IP Address and Subnet Mask
parameter of this port becomes inapplicable.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Removing IP Aliases
Perform the following procedure to remove an IP alias from a management port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card
containing the GbE port for which the IP aliases must be removed.
3 In the IP Alias Port table of the corresponding port, set the check box in the row
of the IP alias that must be removed.

4 Press the Remove Checked Rows button.


Result: The IP alias is removed from the corresponding table.

4011746 Rev P 87
Chapter 2 Configuration

Checking the GbE Statistics


Introduction
The Status - GbE Statistics sub page represents more information concerning the
overall statistics on traffic passing through each GbE port of the DCM. The values
displayed are accumulated since the last start-up or the last reset. These figures can
be refreshed by pressing the Reload command button.
The counters on the Status - GbE Statistics sub page can also be shown in rate
representation mode (number of frames per second). These figures are refreshed
every 10 seconds. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off this automatic
refresh action. Therefore if the representation mode is set to Rate, the Status - GbE
Statistics sub page is provided with a Refresh drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh action.
The following list describes the counters shown on the Status - GbE Statistics sub
page.
Frames Received OK (Counters)

- Total frames received: the total number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port
- Broadcast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which were directed to the broadcast address
- Multicast frames: the number of frames successfully received by the
corresponding port and which are directed to a multicast address
- Control frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with the
special Control Frame ID

88 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

- VLAN tagged frames: then number of error-free VLAN frames received by


the corresponding port
- Pause frames: the number of pause frames received by the corresponding
port
- 64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes
- 65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 65 and 127 bytes
- 128-255 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 128 and 255 bytes
- 256-511 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 256 and 511 bytes
- 512-1023 byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 512 and 1023 bytes
- 1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum length
as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002
- Oversized frames: the number of frames received by the corresponding port,
of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE
802.3-2002
Reception Errors (Counters)

- FCS/CRC error: the total number of packets received by the corresponding


port, which had a length between 64 and 1518 bytes, but had either a bad
Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or
a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error)
- Length/Type out of range: the number of frames received by the
corresponding port, which had a length of at least 64 bytes and where the
length/type field contained a length value that did not match the number of
MAC client data bytes received
- Invalid Opcode: the number of error-free frames received by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field was provided with MAC
Control type identifier 88-08 but with opcode other than the PAUSE opcode

4011746 Rev P 89
Chapter 2 Configuration

- Undersized frames: the number of error-free, well-formed frames received by


the corresponding port, which had a length less then 64 bytes
- Fragments: the number of frames received by the corresponding port, which
had a length less than 64 byte and with a bad Frame Check Sequence field
Frames Transmitted OK (Counters)

- Total frames transmitted: the total number of error-free frames transmitted


by the corresponding port
- Broadcast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port to a broadcast address
- Multicast frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port to a multicast address
- Control frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, of which the Length/Type field were provided with the
MAC Control Frame type identifier 88-08
- 64 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length of 64 bytes
- 65-127 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 65 and 127 bytes
- 128-255 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 128 and 255 bytes
- 256-511 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 256 and 511 bytes
- 512-1023 byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the
corresponding port, which had a length between 512 and 1023 bytes

90 4011746 Rev P
GbE Port Configuration

- 1024-max byte frames: the number of error-free frames transmitted by the


corresponding port, which were between 1024 bytes and the maximum length
as specified by IEEE 802.3-2002
- VLAN tagged frames: then number of error-free VLAN frames transmitted
by the corresponding port
- Pause frames: the number of pause frames transmitted by the corresponding
port
Transmission errors (Counters)

- Oversized frames: the number of frames transmitted by the corresponding


port, of which the length exceeds the maximum length as specified by IEEE
802.3-2002
- Buffer underrun: the number of frames discarded because the transmit buffer
became empty during frame transmission
Global (Counters)

- Total Bytes received: the total number of bytes received by the corresponding
port
- Total Bytes transmitted: the total number of bytes transmitted by the
corresponding port

Checking the GbE Statistics


The following procedure explains how to check the GbE statistics.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to GbE Statistics link after
clicking on the Status link.
Result: GbE statistics are displayed.
Tip: To sort the tables by a particular parameter, point to the table header of the
parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
parameter header.
2 In the Card drop down box, select the card for which GbE statistics should be
checked.
3 In the Mode drop down box, select Rates or Counters.
4 In the Refresh drop down box, select 10 sec or Stop.

4011746 Rev P 91
Chapter 2 Configuration

Changing the Display Mode


Introduction
In the web browser user interface of the DCM, the display mode for the following
parameters can be set to decimal or to hexadecimal:
Original Network Identifier (ON ID)
Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID)
Service Identifier (SID)
Packet Identifier (PID)
Private Data Packet Identifier (PD PID)
Generated Entitlement Management Message Packet Identifier (EMM PID)
The value of a parameter for which the display mode is set to hexadecimal is prefixed
by 0x. The display mode for the Private Data and generated EMM PIDS is
configurable for the complete device and the display mode for the ON IDs, TS IDs,
SIDs, and PIDs per interface card.

To Change the Display Mode of ON IDs, TS IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs


The following procedure explains how to change the display mode for ON IDs, TS
IDs, SIDs, and/or PIDs.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
display mode for ON ID, TS ID, SID, or PID should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the Display link that appears after clicking on the Defaults Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page containing the Display Mode
table is displayed.

4 In the Display Mode box, select Decimal or Hex in the drop down box of the
identifier in question.

92 4011746 Rev P
Changing the Display Mode

5 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

To Change the Display Mode of Private Data and Generated EMM PIDs
The following procedure explains how to change the display mode for Private Data
and generated EMMs 1.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 Point to the Defaults Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.

3 In the Input Gen. EMM and Private Data PIDs drop down box, select Decimal or
Hex.
4 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

1Generated Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) are messages received from an


Entitlement Management Message Generator via the EMMG to MUX interface and passed to
an outgoing Transport Stream.

4011746 Rev P 93
3 Chapter 3
Multiplexing
Introduction
This chapter outlines the re-multiplexing capabilities of the Digital
Content Manager (DCM).

In This Chapter
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services ....................................... 96
Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams . 118
Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams .............. 127
Forward Error Correction.................................................................. 155
Service Re-Multiplexing..................................................................... 176
Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components .......................... 185
Modifying PSI/SI Information.......................................................... 246
Changing Service Parameters ........................................................... 272
Activating or Stopping Streaming.................................................... 282
Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams .................. 285
Viewing Service Grooming ............................................................... 290

4011746 Rev P 95
Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services


Introducing the Services Trees
About the Tree
The incoming services as well as the outgoing services are shown on the Tree View
sub page of the web browser user interface. The left hand pane of the page reflects
the incoming services and the right hand pane the outgoing services. By default both
the incoming and outgoing services are represented using trees for which the
branches can be expanded or collapsed by pressing respectively the or sign. The
representation of the incoming services can be changed, see topic Representation Mode
of the Incoming Services on page 112.
The following illustration depicts the Tree View sub page of the web browser user
interface.

The DCM Inputs tree as well as the DCM Outputs tree can automatically be refreshed
at regular time. When the Tree View sub page is opened, the trees are refreshed with
the rate as defined in the Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh rate
parameter on the Configuration - Default Settings sub page. The procedure to
change these parameters can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.

96 4011746 Rev P
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

The refresh rates can also be changed using the refresh ( ) drop down box on the
Tree View sub page. These settings are only temporary and will be changed to its
defaults as soon as the Tree View sub page is left. A refresh rate of 30 second, 1
minute, and 5 minutes can be chosen.
The trees can also be refreshed manually by clicking the corresponding Reload
command button or by right-clicking in the corresponding tree pane and pointing to
Reload in the short-cut menu.
In a tree, each branch is provided with particular information concerning the branch.
The following topics describe the different branch types.

Card Branch
The illustration below explains a card branch.

The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a card branch.

Indication Description
Icon of a interface card

Icon of a interface card with major or critical alarm

Notes:
When an interface card is equipped with a Co-Processor and/or FEC Card (GbE
Interface Card only) Co-proc and/or FEC appears in the Card branch of the DCM
Inputs, DCM Outputs, and DCM Configuration tree.
When the Statmux Controller function of a GbE Interface Card is enabled,
Statmux appears beside the interface card type.
Right-clicking on a card branch displays a short-cut menu to perform following
actions:
- Reloading the settings for the selected interface card.
- Displaying the Configuration - Interface sub page for the selected interface
card.

4011746 Rev P 97
Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Port Branch
The illustration below explains a port branch.

The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a port branch.

Indication Description
Icon of an enabled input port

Icon of an enabled input port with active major or critical alarm

Icon of a disabled input port

Icon of an enabled output port

Icon of an enabled output port with active major or critical alarm

Icon of a disabled output port

Icon of an enabled bidirectional port

Icon of an enabled bidirectional port with active major or critical alarm

Icon of a disabled bidirectional port

Notes:
A GbE port is labeled with the port names of the port pair. The black colored port
name indicates the active port and the gray colored port name the inactive port.

Active Inactive
port port

For information about active and inactive ports, please refer to topic Configuring the
GbE Port Backup Parameters on page 464.

When an ASI port is mirrored to one of more output ports, these ports are
combined into one branch, see illustration below.

More information concerning port ASI port mirroring can be found in topic ASI Port
Configuration on page 56.

98 4011746 Rev P
Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Right-clicking on a port branch in the DCM Inputs tree displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:
- Reloading the settings for the selected port.
- Displaying the Configuration sub page for the selected port.
- Displaying the Service - Services sub page for the selected port.
Right-clicking on a port branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:

- Displaying the Service - TS Output sub page for the selected port.
- Reloading the settings for the selected port.
- Starting or stopping streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams on the
selected port.
- Displaying the Configuration sub page for the selected port.

Transport Stream Branch


The illustration below explains a Transport Stream branch on an ASI Interface Card.

The illustration below explains a Transport Stream branch on a GbE Interface Card.

The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transport Stream
branch.

Indication Description
Icon of a Multi Program Transport Stream (MPTS)

DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an MPTS for which services are missing at the
input
Icon of an MPTS with alarm indication

4011746 Rev P 99
Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Indication Description
Icon of a non-streaming MPTS

Icon of a transparent loop through Transport Stream

Icon of a Single Program Transport Stream (SPTS)

DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is passed from the
input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS for which the service is missing at the
input
Icon of a Single Program Transport Stream with alarm indication

Icon of a non-streaming SPTS

Icon of a non-streaming SPTS for which the service is missing at the input

DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication for which the
service is missing at the input
Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service

DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service for which
the service is passed from the input but not present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a
scrambled service for which the service is missing at the input
Icon of an SPTS containing a scrambled service with alarm indication

DCM Inputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication containing a


scrambled service for which the service is passed from the input but not
present at the input
DCM Outputs tree: Icon of an SPTS with alarm indication with alarm
indication containing a scrambled service for which the service is missing at
the input
Icon of a non-streaming SPTS containing a scrambled service

Icon of a non-streaming SPTS containing a scrambled service for which the


service is missing at the input

Tips:
A pink colored name of an SPTS indicates an SPTS with merged service(s). More
information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
Components on page 190.

100 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

(RTP) in the branch of an Outgoing Transport Stream indicates that the packets in
which the Transport Stream is encapsulated, are enlarged with an RTP Header.
For more information, please refer to topic Changing Settings of Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 141.

(FEC) in the branch indicates a Transport Stream for which Forward Error
Correction (FEC) is enabled. For more information concerning FEC, please refer
to topic Forward Error Correction on page 155.

A Transport Stream in backup state or the service of an SPTS in backup state is


indicated by an exclamation mark.
Right-clicking on a Transport Stream branch in the DCM Inputs tree displays a
short-cut menu to perform following actions:
- Displaying the Service - TS Input sub page for the selected Transport Stream.
- Opening the TS Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected Transport Stream.
- Opening the TS Status Detail popup for the selected Transport Stream.
- Locating the passed SPTS in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed
Service in the DCM Outputs Tree on page 117.
Right-clicking on a port branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a short-cut menu
to perform following actions:

- Displaying the Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport
Stream.
- Transforming (Undo Loop Through) a transparent loop through Transport
Stream on an ASI Interface card into a standard Transport Stream. On a GbE
Card, this action removes the transparent loop through transport stream.
- Deleting the selected Transport Stream (GbE Interface Card).
- Removing all services from the selected Transport Stream.
- Activating or stopping streaming of the selected Transport Stream.
- Opening the TS Bit Rates Detail popup for the selected Transport Stream.
- For an SPTS, finding the source in the DCM Inputs tree.
- For an SPTS, finding the active source (= not in backup state) in the DCM
Inputs tree.

4011746 Rev P 101


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

When a TS Loss Alarm for an incoming Transport Stream, the corresponding


Transport Stream icon in the DCM Inputs tree is red colored. The alarm
indication for an incoming service will also be propagated to the Transport
Stream branch in the DCM Inputs tree. In the DCM Output tree the Transport
Stream icon is red colored if an alarm occurs for the Transport Stream or for the
Transport Stream content. Transport Stream alarm indications will be
propagated to the corresponding port and card branch.

Statmux Pools Branch


The Statmux Pools branch contains all Statmux Pools of the corresponding GbE
Interface Card. The following picture depicts a Statmux Pools branch.

Statmux Pool Branch


The following illustration explains a Statmux Pool branch.

Note: Right-clicking on a Statmux Pool branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a
short-cut menu to view the Statmux pool settings and the Statmux settings of the
associated encoders.

Service branch
The illustration below explains a service branch.

The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a service branch.

Indication Description
Icon of a service

Icon of a service with alarm indication

Icon of a service at the output for which the service is missing at the input.
Icon of a preconfigured service for which the service is not yet or no longer
available at the input.
Icon of a service at the output for which the service is missing at the input
and with alarm indication. Icon of a preconfigured service for which the
service is not yet or no longer available at the input and with alarm
indication.
Icon of a scrambled service

102 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Indication Description
Icon of a scrambled service with alarm indication

Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which the service is missing at
the input
Icon of a scrambled service at the output for which the service is missing at
the input with alarm indication

Tips:
A pink colored service name indicates a service with merged service(s). More
information concerning merged services can be found in topic Merging
Components on page 190.
A service in backup state is indicated by an exclamation mark.
Right-clicking on a service branch in the DCM Inputs tree displays a short-cut
menu to perform following action:
- Locating a passed service in the DCM Outputs tree, see topic Locating a Passed
Service in the DCM Outputs Tree on page 117.
Right-clicking on a service branch in the DCM Outputs tree displays a short-cut
menu to perform following actions:

- Removing the selected service from the corresponding outgoing Transport


Stream.
- Locating the passed service in the DCM Inputs tree
- Locating the passed active service (= not in backup state) in the DCM Inputs
tree
When a Service Loss alarm occurs, the service icon will be red colored. The alarm
indication will be propagated to the corresponding Transport Stream, Transrating
Group (if present), port, and interface card. More information about service loss
triggers can be found in topic To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input
on page 515.

4011746 Rev P 103


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Transrating Group Branch


The illustration below explains a Transrating Group branch.

The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a Transrating Group
branch.

Indication Description
Icon of a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group

Icon of a Selective Services type Transrating Group

Icon of a Multi-TS type Transrating Group

Icon of a Transrating Group with alarm indication

Tips:
Right-clicking on a Transrating Group branch displays a short-cut menu to
perform following actions:
- Displaying the Service - Transrater sub page of the selected Transrating
Group.
- Deleting the selected Transrating Group.
- Displaying the Service - Comparison sub page of the selected Transrating
Group.
The alarm indication for Transport Stream or Transport Stream content will be
propagated to the Transrating Group branch by using a red colored icon.
More information about Transrating can be found in chapter Transrating on page
295.

104 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Component Branch
The illustration below explains a branch of an incoming component.

The illustration below explains a branch of an outgoing component.

Notes:
Each incoming Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the incoming EMM components and a Unreferenced PIDs main node
containing the unreferenced components.
Each outgoing Transport Stream is populated with an EMM PIDs main node
containing the passed EMM components, an Unreferenced PIDs main node
containing the passed unreferenced components.
An empty main node is indicated by (None available).
Components with PID lower then 32 in an incoming Transport Stream without
PAT are also considered as unreferenced components next to all others and
accommodated into the Unreferenced PIDs main node. When a PAT is present,
unreferenced components will only be shown if equal to or greater than 32.
The following table describes the icons that can be displayed in a component branch.

Indication Description
Icon of an Elementary Stream

Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream


Icon of an Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is missing at
the input
Icon of a scrambled Elementary Stream at the output for which the PID is
missing at the input

4011746 Rev P 105


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Indication Description
Icon of the EMM PIDs main node

Icon of the Unreferenced PIDs main node

Tips: Right-clicking on a Component branch displays a short-cut menu to perform


following actions:
Displaying the Service - Component sub page
Blocking the corresponding component (if possible)

General Remarks
With the exception of the component branches, each branch is provided with bit
rates figures. These figures appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the
branch. More information concerning these bit rates figures can be found in
chapter Checking Bit Rates on page 537.
The order of the services and GbE Transport Streams can be changed. More
information about changing the order in the trees can be found in topic Changing
Tree Settings on page 107.

106 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Changing Tree Settings


Introduction
To enhance the usability of the DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs trees, following
adaptations can be done:
Sort GbE TS in Tree by and Sort Services in Tree by parameter
The order of the Transport Streams and services in the DCM Inputs and DCM
Outputs trees can be modified by changing the Sort GbE TS in Tree by
parameter to order the Transport Streams and the Sort Services in Tree by
parameter to order the services. The parameters that can be used to sort
Transport Streams are:
- IP Address
- ON ID
- TS ID
- UDP Port
The parameters that can be used to sort the services are:

- Service Name
- Service ID
Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh Rate parameter
The DCM Inputs tree and DCM Outputs tree can automatically be refreshed at
regular time. The refresh rates of these actions are by default disabled and can be
set to 30 seconds, 1 minute, or 5 minutes.
Removal Warning in Tree parameter
Using the short-cut menu on the DCM Outputs tree is quite easy. To protect the
application from for instance accidentally removing of Transport Streams, an
additional confirmation can be asked before the action will be executed. For
certain reasons, for instance during reconfiguration actions, it can be useful to
disable this feature. When this feature is enabled, an additional confirmation will
be given for the following actions:
- Stopping Transport Stream streaming
- Removing Transport Streams
- Removing services
- Removing Transrating Groups

4011746 Rev P 107


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter


During a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing Single Program
Transport Stream (SPTS) the following actions can be done:
- Merging the service into the service of the SPTS
- Adding the service to the Transport Stream
When the Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter is set to Ask for Service Merge or TS
Add, a dialog will appear asking the desired action. The following picture shows this
dialog.

Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter


During a drag and drop action of an incoming Transport Stream to a GbE port,
the following actions can be done:
- Creating a Transport Stream and passing all services
- Creating a Transport Stream for which passing rules are activated. More
information about TS auto pass rules can be found in topic Creating Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 127.
- Passing a Transport Stream transparently. For more information about
transparently passed Transport Streams (named Transparent Loop Through
Transport Stream), please refer to topic Transparent Loop Through Transport
Streams on page 129.
When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the Desired
Action, a dialog will be displayed if a incoming Transport Stream is dropped on a GbE
port asking the desired action.

108 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

The following picture shows this dialog.

Menu appearance parameter


Particular links in the header of the web browser user interface of the DCM
display sub links. These sub links can be displayed by pausing the cursor or
clicking on the corresponding main link or only by pointing to this link. The
Menu appearance parameter determines how to handle the main links to display
the sub links.
Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter
Several sub pages provide multiple tab pages (e.g. Service - Service sub page).
When a parameter is changed on a tab page and another tab page is chosen
without applying the setting, the parameter will not be modified. When the
Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change parameter is enabled, a warning will
be given. The following picture shows such warning.

Note: This feature do not apply to tab pages with Apply All command button.

4011746 Rev P 109


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

To Change the Tree Settings


The following steps explain how to change the tree settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Default Settings link
after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.

2 In the Sort GbE TS in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following settings
to sort the Transport Streams in the DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree:
IP Address
ON ID
TS ID
UDP Port
3 In the Sort Services in Tree by drop down box, select one of the following
settings to sort the services in DCM Inputs and DCM Outputs tree:
Service Name
Service ID
4 In the Removal Warning in Tree parameter, select Enabled to switch on the
confirmation feature or Disabled to switch off this feature.
5 In the Drop on SPTS: desired action drop down box, select one of the following
settings:
Always Add to TS: during a drag and drop action of a service to an outgoing
SPTS, the service will be added to the Transport Stream.
Ask for Service Merge or TS Add: during a drag and drop action of a service to
an outgoing SPTS, a message box appears asking for a service merge or a
Transport Stream add.

110 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

6 In the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action drop down box, select one of the
following settings:
Create TS and Pass All Services: during dragging and dropping an incoming
Transport Stream to a GbE port, an outgoing Transport Stream containing all
input services will be created.
Ask for Desired Action: during dragging and dropping an incoming Transport
Stream to a GbE port, a dialog will be displayed asking the desired action.
7 In the Menu appearance drop down box, select one of the following items:
2 stage: two clicks & Go: the sub links appear only after pointing to the main link.
Floating: one click & Go: the sub links appear after pausing the cursor on or after
pointing to the main link.
8 In the Input Tree Refresh Rate and Output Tree Refresh Rate drop down box,
select the desired refresh rate.
9 In the Warning to Apply Settings on Tab Change drop down box, select Enabled
or Disabled.
10 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 111


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Representation Mode of the Incoming Services


Introduction
In the left hand pane of the Service page the incoming services can be represented in
four different modes, viz.:
Card representation mode
Port representation mode
Transport Stream (TS) representation mode
Service representation mode
Note: After opening the web browser user interface the trees on both panes are
collapsed and the incoming services are shown in Card representation mode.

Card Representation Mode


With the incoming services in Card representation mode, the highest level in the tree
view is card level. From this card level, you can browse through the cards, ports,
transport streams, and services to a particular component. The illustration below
shows the DCM Inputs tree in Card representation mode.

112 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Port Representation Mode


With the incoming services in Port representation mode, the highest level is port
level. The name of the interface card to which the port belongs is indicated beside the
port in the tree. The illustration belong depicts the DCM Inputs tree in Port
representation mode.

Transport Stream Representation Mode


With the incoming services in TS representation mode, the highest level is transport
stream. The position of the card and the port number to which the transport stream
belongs is indicated beside the transport stream. The illustration belong depicts the
DCM Inputs tree in TS representation mode.

4011746 Rev P 113


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Service Representation Mode


With the incoming services in Service representation mode, each service at the device
inputs is categorized in a table.
A service is accompanied with the following information:
Card: represents the card receiving the service.
Port: represents the name of the port receiving the service.
IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).
TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).
SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as defined in the
PAT).
Name: represents the name of the incoming service.

Tip: To sort the Input Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.

114 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Changing the Representation Mode


The following steps explain how to change the representation mode of the incoming
services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the view ( ) drop down box, select the desired representation mode.
Card
Port
TS
Service

4011746 Rev P 115


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Finding Services or Transport Streams in a Tree


Introduction
When the Service - Tree View sub page is populated with a large number of services
and Transport Streams, it can take some time to locate a particular item in a tree.
Therefore both the left hand pane containing the incoming services and Transport
Streams, and the right hand pane containing outgoing services and Transport
Streams are provided with a search function.
Services passed to an outgoing Transport Stream can easily be located at the input
and at the output.
Note: Components within a service or Transport stream cannot be localized using the
search function.

To Search a Service or Transport Stream


Perform the following procedure to locate an incoming or outgoing service or
Transport Stream using the search function.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 Select the branch in the tree from where the search function must be started.
3 In the Search box of the corresponding tree, enter a string.
Note: The search function of the web browser user interface is case-insensitive.
4 Point to the corresponding Search command button or press and hold down the
[Alt] key and point to the [S] key.
Result: If the entered string matches the text accompanying a service or Transport
Stream in the tree, the service or Transport Stream is highlighted in the tree.
Notes:
When multiple services or Transport Streams match the entered string, the
first service or Transport Stream in the tree is highlighted. By pressing the
Search command button again or by right-clicking and pointing to the Search
Next in the short cut menu, the following service or Transport stream in the
tree will be highlighted.
When the search function reaches the bottom of the tree without finding a
service or Transport Stream, the following message box is displayed.

116 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Incoming and Outgoing Services

Press the OK command button to restart the search action from the top of the
tree or press the Cancel command button to abort the operation.

Locating a Passed Service in the DCM Inputs Tree


The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service in the DCM Inputs
tree.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be located at the input.
3 Right-click on this service and point to Find Source in the short-cut menu.
Result: The incoming service is highlighted in the DCM Inputs tree.

Note: To locate the active service in a service backup application, right-click on the
service and point to Find Active Source in the short-cut menu.

Locating the Destination to where an Incoming Service is Passed


The following procedure explains how to locate a passed service or SPTS in the DCM
Outputs tree.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the service or SPTS that must be located at the
output.
3 Right-click on this service or SPTS and point to Find Destination in the short-cut
menu.
Result: A popup is displayed with all destinations.

4 Click on the Highlight Destination arrow to highlight the service in the DCM
Outputs tree.

4011746 Rev P 117


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or


Transport Streams
Settings of Incoming Services
Introduction
The user name of a service as well as the alarms used to trigger a service loss alarm
can be configured for each individual incoming service. These settings can be done
on the Service Settings table containing all services of a particular incoming
Transport Stream or on the Service Settings table containing all services of all
incoming Transport Streams on a particular port.
Note: The procedure to configure the Service Loss alarm for an incoming service can
be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 514.

Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Incoming Transport
Stream
The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings
table containing all services of a particular incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service Link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream containing the
services for which settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this incoming Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport
Stream and point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page containing the Service Settings table of the
selected Transport Stream is displayed.

Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by its service identifier
and service name.
5 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.

118 4011746 Rev P


Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams

Tip: When no SDTa is available, the user name will be used by the web browser user
interface to identify the service. For more information, please refer to topic Changing
SDT Settings for a Particular Service on page 263.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Changing Service Settings on the Service Settings Table of a Particular Port


The following procedure describes how to change settings on the Service Settings
table containing the services of all incoming Transport Streams on a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service Link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the services for which
settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the Service Settings table of the
selected port is displayed.

Note: Each service in the Service Settings table is prefixed by the destination IP
Address and UDP port number of the incoming Transport Stream (GbE port only) to
which the service belongs to and the service identifier and service name.
4 Enter a name in the User Name box for the service that must be renamed. A
name with maximum 99 characters can be given, double-quotes in the name are
not allowed.
Tip: When no SDTa is available, the user name will be used by the web browser user
interface to identify the service.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 119


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Settings of Incoming Transport Streams


Introduction
Changing incoming Transport Stream settings can be done on the TS Settings table.
This TS Settings table can be displayed for a single incoming Transport Stream (see
topic Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream on page 122) or for all incoming
Transport Streams on a particular port (see topic Changing Setting of Multiple Transport
Stream of a Particular Port on page 123).
When incoming Transport Streams or services appear at the input, the settings of
these incoming Transport Streams and services will get the default values. The
procedure to change these default values can be found in topic Changing the Default
Incoming Transport Stream parameters on page 125.
The DCM allows preconfiguring of incoming Transport Streams. When an incoming
Transport Stream becomes available at the input matching a preconfigured incoming
Transport Stream, this Transport Stream will get these settings. The procedure to
define preconfigured incoming Transport Streams can be found in topic Adding a
Preconfigured Transport Streams on page 124.
The following list describes the incoming Transport Stream settings that can be
modified.
Input Standard parameter
The type of a component in a service is indicated using the stream_type parameter in
the Program Map Table (PMT). Depending on the standard, the association between
the component type and the stream_type number differs, see table below.
Component Type

Stream type 0x01 (1) 0x02 (2) 0x03 (3) 0x04 (4) 0x06 (6) 0x80 (128) 0x81 (129)
Mode
DVB Video Video Audio Audio Res Res

ATSC Video Video Audio Audio Audio Res (Video) Audio


DC-II Video Video Audio Audio Video AC-3

For particular digital processes, e.g. Transrating or DPI, the DCM requires the
knowledge of this component type - stream_type association, therefore the standard
must be given for each incoming Transport Stream.
The Input Standard mode for incoming Transport Streams is default set to DVB.
When most of the incoming Transport Streams are compliant with another standard,
it is useful to change this default value.

120 4011746 Rev P


Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams

Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode


This mode must be enabled when the CA system uses Mediaguard Compact CA
descriptors in the incoming Transport Stream with additional EMM PID or ECM PID
references in the private data bytes. The mode is by default disabled.
When this mode is enabled, these ECM components are automatically passed to the
output during the service passing process. The EMM components become visible at
the input and can be passed to the outputs like other EMM components. The
procedure to pass EMMs can be found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service
Components on page 226.

Time Base Selection mode (GBE Interface Card only)


The MPEG decoder in for instance of set top boxes may not tolerate the IP jitter
introduced by the origin devices (own introduced jitter) and by the IP infrastructure
between the origin (e.g. server) and the MPEG decoder (network jitter). When
content is passed from an incoming Transport Stream to the output, the DCM
removes this IP jitter by using a PCR based algorithm. Since Transport Streams can
have multiple PCRs, the DCM needs the knowledge of the PCR that must be used for
IP de-jittering. The Time Base Selection parameter determines the PCR PID that will
be used to de-jitter GbE input content. This feature is useful for VBR SPTSs
containing multiple PCR PIDs (video and audio PCR PID) or CBR streams with bad
PCR PIDs.
Auto: any PID containing a PCR can be used.
Auto Referenced PCR: a PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is
present in the Transport Stream, is used.
Forced PCR: the PCR PID referenced in the PMT of a service, which is selected
using its SID, is used.
Notes:
When the Time Base Selection mode is set to Auto Referenced and no service is
found from which a PCR can be used, the device starts working in Auto until a
suitable service appears at the input.
Since changing the Time Base Selection mode from Auto to another value
might change the PCR PID that is used to de-jitter, a glitch at the output might
occur (CC error). Changing the mode to Auto will always be done without
changing the currently used PCR PID for the Transport Stream. No CC Errors
will then be generated but PCR glitches are possible.

Remark:
The DCM cannot handle incoming VBR MPTS GBE streams.

4011746 Rev P 121


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing Setting of a Single Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to change the Transport Stream settings of a single
incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which
Transport Stream setting should be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the TS Settings table for the
selected incoming Transport Stream is displayed.

Tip: The corresponding incoming Transport Stream is identified by its ON_ID and
TS_ID.
4 In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard mode:
DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
5 In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the desired
mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
6 In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select one
of the following values: Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default (xxxxxx).
The default value is shown between brackets.
7 When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID of the
service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box (GbE Interface Card
only).
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

122 4011746 Rev P


Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams

Changing Setting of Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port


The following steps explain how to change the Transport Stream settings of multiple
incoming Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which Transport Stream setting
should be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the TS Settings table for all
incoming Transport Streams of the selected port is displayed.
4 In the TS Settings table, perform the following steps for each Transport Stream
for which settings must be changed.

Tip: The incoming Transport Streams of the selected port are identified by IP Address
and UDP port number.
a In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
b In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
c In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following values:
Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
d When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID of
the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 123


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Adding Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries


The web browser user interface of the DCM allows preconfiguring Transport Streams
with Transport Stream settings for a GbE Interface Card. Such Transport Stream is
preconfigured by adding a Preconfigured Transport Stream entry in the TS Settings
table containing all Transport Streams of a particular port. When the incoming
Transport Stream appears at the corresponding port, the Transport Stream will get
these settings. The following steps explain how to add a preconfigured Transport
Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which settings of preconfigured
Transport Streams should be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS Settings link.
Result: The Service - TS Settings sub page is displayed.
5 In the Add Preconfigured TS table, complete the following settings:

a In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is
a multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP
Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP Port box.
c In the Input Standard drop down box, select the desired input standard
mode: DVB, ATSC, DC-II, or Default (xxxxxx).
d Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
e In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired mode: Enabled, Disabled, or Default (xxxxxx).

124 4011746 Rev P


Modifying Settings of Incoming Services or Transport Streams

Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
f In the Time Base Selection drop down box, select one of the following values:
Auto, Auto Referenced PCR, Forced PCR, or Default (xxxxxx).
Note: The default value will be used when the parameter is set to Default
(xxxxxx). The default value is shown between brackets.
g When the Time Base Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR, enter the SID
of the service with PCR PID reference in its PMT in the SID box.
h Press the Add command button to confirm.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the TS Settings table.
Note: Adding a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream with Input Standard,
Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor, and Time Base Selection parameter set to
Default (xxxxx) is not possible.
Tip: As long as a preconfigured incoming Transport Stream do not match an
incoming Transport Stream, the preconfigured Transport Stream can be removed by
ticking the check box of the corresponding entry and pointing to the Remove
Checked Items command button.

Changing the Default Value for Incoming Transport Stream Parameters


The following procedure describes how to change the default value for the incoming
Transport Stream parameters. These values will be used for each incoming Transport
Stream for which the associated parameters are set to default.

WARNING:
Changing default values involves changing the associated parameter for all
incoming transport streams for which the value is set to default.

1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default standard mode for incoming Transport Streams should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page containing is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 125


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Input TS Default Settings table, modify the following parameters if


required:

a In the Input Standard drop down box in the TS Default Settings table, select
the desired value: DVB, ATSC, or DC-II.
b In the Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor drop down box, select the
desired value: Enabled or Disabled.
c In the Time Base Selection drop down box (GbE Interface Card only), select
the desired value: Auto or Auto Referenced PCR.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

126 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport


Streams
Creating Outgoing Transport Streams
Introduction

General
Before services can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, the output port must
be provided with one or more outgoing Transport Streams. Since an ASI output port
only has one Transport Stream, each ASI port is by default provided with one
Transport Stream with default settings. In contrast with the ASI output ports, the
GbE ports accept multiple Transport Streams.
During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled with
default values. The procedure to change these default values can be found in topic
Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams on page 146.
Once outgoing Transport Streams are created, the corresponding parameters can be
changed as described in topic Changing Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams on page
141.

Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules


Transport Stream (TS) auto pass rules for an incoming Transport Stream can be
assigned to each outgoing Transport Stream. When TS auto pass rules for an
incoming Transport Stream are assigned to an outgoing Transport Stream, the
complete content of the incoming Transport Stream will be passed to this outgoing
Transport Stream, including unreferenced components. The TS auto pass rules also
determine the content of the outgoing Transport Stream if the content of the incoming
Transport Streams varies. Meaning, when new services, Entitlement Management
Messages (EMMs), and/or unreferenced component are added to the incoming
Transport Stream, this new content will automatically be passed to the outgoing
Transport Stream depending on the assigned TS auto pass rule(s). The following TS
auto pass rules can be assigned:
Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule: all unreferenced components will automatically be
passed to the output.
Pass EMMs rule: all EMMs will automatically be passed to the output.
Pass Services rule: all services will automatically be passed to the output.

4011746 Rev P 127


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

WARNING:
We strongly advise against performing processing like forcing PIDs, PID
remapping, passing components or services from other incoming Transport
Streams, DPI, scrambling, etc..., on the content of outgoing Transport Streams
with Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule assignment without the knowledge of the
packet identifiers of the unreferenced components that can be added to the
corresponding incoming Transport Stream. Otherwise conflicts between
unreferenced components passed from the input and components present at the
output can arise resulting in CC errors.

TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned during the creation of an outgoing
Transport stream by passing an incoming Transport Stream to a port. TS auto pass
rules can also be assigned to an existing outgoing Transport Stream. When TS auto
pass rules are automatically created during the Transport Stream creation process,
the rules automatically refer to the passed incoming Transport Stream.
The PSI/SI information of the outgoing Transport Stream to which TS auto pass rules
are assigned, is by default regenerated by the DCM (Output mode set to Generate).
The procedure to change this mode is described in topic Changing the PSI/SI
Generation Mode on page 250.
Notes:
When services or EMMs are removed from the input, their nodes are indicated by
their not-present icon and configuration settings are kept. Removing these nodes
must be done manually.
When unreferenced components are removed, all references at the output will be
removed.
When services are automatically passed to an outgoing Transport Stream with
Pass Service rule assignment and services, which are still present at the input, are
manually removed from the outgoing Transport stream, these services will be
passed again when the service population of the incoming Transport Stream
changes.
When services are automatically added to an incoming Transport Stream that is
passed with Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream
containing a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group, the services will automatically
be added to the Transrating Group. These new services will get default
configuration settings.
When services are added to an incoming Transport Stream that is passed with
Pass Services rule assignment to an outgoing Transport Stream containing one or
more Selective Services Transrating Group, the services will not be added to a
Transrating Group.

128 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

When no TS auto pass rules are assigned to an outgoing Transport Stream, no


unreferenced components are passed from the incoming Transport Stream to the
output and the content of the outgoing Transport Stream remains static. Meaning,
when new services, unreferenced component, or EMMs are added to the incoming
Transport Stream, this new content will not automatically be passed to the output.

Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams


To copy an incoming Transport Stream to the output without manipulating the
content of the Transport Stream, the Transparent Loop Through feature of the DCM
can be used. This feature transparently passes incoming Transport Streams
(including stuffing) to the output and is useful for interface conversion (ASI to GbE or
vice versa) and monitoring purposes.
When an input Transport Stream is transparently passed to the output, all input
components are dynamically passed to the outgoing Transport Stream. Additional
configuration to the outgoing Transport Stream, service, and component settings is
not longer possible and advanced MPEG processing, like Transrating, Scrambling,
etc., can not be done. Only interface related settings, like: destination IP address,
destination UDP port, VLAN, RTP/UDP, and FEC, can be modified.
The procedure to pass an incoming Transport Stream transparently to an output can
be found in topic Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output on page 139.
In the DCM Outputs tree Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams are
indicated by means of a white colored Transport Stream icon, see picture below.

Notes:
A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning
the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the
same as at the input.
Incoming Transport Streams without PAT can transparently be passed.
When an incoming Transport Stream with errors is transparently passed to the
output, these errors will also be present in the outgoing Transport Stream.
The packet format of an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI port is 188 bytes
with output mode set to Packet, independent of the packet format of the incoming
Transport Stream
Tip: To protect the content of Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream,
Transport Stream backup is possible. For more information about Transport Stream
backup, please refer to topic Transport Stream Backup on page 474.

4011746 Rev P 129


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Transport Stream Creation Methods


To facilitate the configuration of the DCM, different Transport Stream creating
methods are foreseen, viz.:
Creating outgoing Transport Streams by adding individual Transport Streams.
TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually if required.
Creating an outgoing Transport Stream by passing an incoming Transport Stream
to a port.
For a GbE port, TS auto pass rules can automatically be assigned.
For an ASI port, the existing outgoing Transport Stream will be replaced by the
incoming Transport Stream and TS auto pass rules are automatically assigned.
Creating multiple Single Program Transport Streams by passing individual
incoming services to a GbE port. TS auto pass rules must be assigned manually if
required.
Creating a Transparently Loop Through Transport Stream

General Notes
During the Transport Stream creation process to a GbE port an IP address must be
assigned. Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has the
following restrictions.
For SSM, use address from the range 232.0.0.0 - 232.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 232.0.0.0 ... 232.0.0.255 are reserved.
For ASM, use address from the range 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255.
Exception: addresses 239.0.0.0 ... 239.191.255.255 are reserved.
Streaming MPEG data packets to addresses in the range 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255 is
strongly discouraged because this may cause trouble on e.g. routers.
For more information please refer to RFC 3171 or to Cisco's Guidelines for Enterprise IP
Multicast Address Allocation.

130 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Creating Outgoing Transport Streams by Adding Individual Transport Streams to a Port


Perform the following procedure to add an individual Transport Stream to a GbE
port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing GbE port,
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on the GbE port and select View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the GbE port in question is displayed.
4 In the Add New TS table, complete the following settings:

a Enter the Original Network Identifier for the new Transport Stream in the ON
ID box and the Transport Stream Identifier in the TS ID box.
Tip: Both the ON ID and the TS ID can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal
value must be prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display
mode, please refer to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
b In the Output Standard drop down box, select the desired output standard
mode.
Transparent
Force Uplink
Force Video
Force Audio3
c In the Streaming drop down box, select Active to enable streaming and
Stopped to disable streaming of the Transport Stream through the output port.

4011746 Rev P 131


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

d Clear the Use Default Settings check box to fill the following parameters
manually or tick this check box to fill these parameters by defaults.
IP Address parameter
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has
some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on
page 127.
UDP Port parameter
Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
Output Protocol parameter
Output Rate parameter
Tip: Filling these parameters by defaults reduces the number of parameter
adaptations during the Transport Stream adding process. The procedure to
change these defaults can be found in Changing Default Values for Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 146.
e Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button the new created Transport Stream is
added to the TS Settings table.

Tips:
The Sum of CBR TS box below the TS Settings table indicates the sum of the bit
rates of the outgoing constant bit rate Transport Streams on the selected port and
the Active Sum box the sum of the bit rates of the outgoing transport streams for
which streaming is active.
For more information concerning the Transport Stream parameters, please refer
to topic Changing Standard Settings of an Outgoing Transport Stream on page 141.

132 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Creating a Transport Stream by Passing an Incoming Transport Stream to a Port

To a GbE port
An outgoing Transport Stream for a GbE port can be created by passing an incoming
Transport Stream to this port. All services of the incoming Transport Stream are
automatically passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. When auto pass rules must
be assigned to the outgoing Transport Stream during the Transport Stream creation
process, the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the
Desired Action. For more information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on
page 107.
Note: Only services within the incoming Transport Stream will be passed to the
output when no TS auto rules are assigned to the new created Transport Stream, no
EMMs or unreferenced components.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream for
a GbE port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the GbE port.

Result: When the Drop TS on GbE Port: desired action parameter is set to Ask for the
Desired Action, the following dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 133


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Select the Create TS and Pass all Services to create an outgoing Transport Stream
containing all services of the passed incoming Transport Stream or select
Activate Automatic Pass Rules to assign auto pass rules to the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once the selection is made, press the OK command button
to confirm or the cancel command button to abort the operation.
Result: An outgoing Transport Stream is created populated with the services of the
passed incoming Transport Stream. When auto pass rules are assigned, the
unreferenced components and EMMs are also passed and the ON ID and the TS ID of
the new created outgoing Transport Stream match the IDs of the passed incoming
Transport Stream. A number of parameters are filled with the defaults as defined on
the Default Settings sub page of the GbE Configuration page. More information
concerning these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing
Transport Streams on page 146.
Note:
The Streaming parameter of the new created outgoing Transport Stream is set to
Stopped, meaning that the Transport Stream is not streamed through the GbE port.
The procedure to enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping
Streaming on page 282.
Individual components (EMMs and unreferenced components) can be passed,
blocked, and if needed remapped manually; more information concerning
passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be found in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.

134 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

To an ASI port
An ASI port can only be populated with one outgoing Transport Stream. When an
incoming Transport Stream is dropped to an ASI port, the existing outgoing
Transport Stream will be replaced by the dropped Transport Stream. The new
created outgoing Transport Stream is automatically labeled with the ON ID and TS
ID of the incoming Transport Stream and assigned with TS auto pass rules. All
components within this incoming Transport Stream are passed to the outgoing
Transport Stream, including the unreferenced component.
The following procedure explains how to create a new outgoing Transport Stream for
an ASI port by dragging and dropping an incoming Transport Stream to this port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the ASI port for which the outgoing
Transport Stream must be created.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the ASI port.

Result: The following dialog is displayed asking the desired action.

4011746 Rev P 135


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 Select the Activate Automatic Pass rules selection button and press the OK
command button to confirm or the cancel command button to abort the
operation.
Result: After pressing the OK command button, the following confirmation box is
displayed asking to replace the existing outgoing Transport Stream.

6 Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.

136 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Creating SPTSs by Passing Incoming Services to a GbE Port

Introduction
Single Program Transport Streams (SPTSs) can be created by passing individual
services of incoming Transport Streams to a GbE port. Two methods can be used, viz.
the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method. The Drag and Drop method is
useful when a discreet number of SPTSs must be created. The Muxing method is
recommended if a large number of SPTSs should be created.
A number of parameters of the new created SPTSs are filled with the defaults. The
procedure to define these defaults can be found in topic Changing Default Values for
Outgoing Transport Streams on page 146.
The Streaming parameter of the new created SPTSs is set to Stopped, meaning that
new created outgoing SPTSs do not stream through the GbE port. The procedure to
enable streaming can be found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 282.

Drag and Drop Method


The following steps explain how to create a SPTS on a GbE port using the Drag and
Drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service for which an outgoing
SPTS must be created.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which the outgoing SPTS
must be created.
4 Select the icon of the incoming service and drag and drop the service to the icon of
the GbE port.

Result: An outgoing SPTS is created containing the passed service.

4011746 Rev P 137


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to create SPTSs on a GbE port using the Muxing
method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box GbE
Port (SPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output GbE Ports tables are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output GbE Ports table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services for which outgoing
SPTSs must be created.
4 In the Output GbE Port table, set the check box(es) of the GbE port(s) on which
the outgoing SPTSs must be created.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
GbE Ports table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the SPTSs are created. All check
boxes in the Input Services table as well as the check boxes in the Output GbE Ports
table will be cleared.

138 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Passing a Transport Stream Transparently to an Output


An incoming Transport Stream at a GbE port as well as an incoming Transport
Stream at an ASI port can transparently be passed to the output. Before incoming
Transport Streams can transparently be passed to a GbE output port, the Drop TS on
GbE Port: desired action parameter must be set to Ask for the Desired Action. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
The following procedure describes how to transparently pass an incoming Transport
Stream to an output.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream that must be
passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port to which the Transport Stream must
be passed.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the port.

Result: A dialog is displayed asking the desired action.

4011746 Rev P 139


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Note: The picture above is the dialog that appears if the incoming Transport Stream is
dropped on a GbE port. The dialog that appears if the Transport Stream is dropped
to an ASI port is similar.
5 Select the Pass the TS Transparently selection button and press the OK
command button.
Note: When the transport stream is dropped to an ASI port, the following
confirmation box is displayed.

Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button


to abort the operation.
Result: The incoming Transport Stream is transparently passed to the selected port.

Tip: A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream can be removed by right-clicking


on the icon of the outgoing Transport Stream and pointing to Undo Loop Through in
the short-cut menu. Performing the Undo Loop Through action on such stream on a
GbE port removes the Transport Stream and doing this action on such stream on an
ASI port automatically creates a standard Transport Stream having default settings.
Notes:
A Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream branch has no children, meaning
the services and components of such branch are not displayed since these are the
same as at the input.
Since the bit rates figures are displayed for the incoming Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree, no bit rate figures are displayed for the corresponding
Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree.
The bit rate of a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream is not included in
the bit rate of the port to which the Transport Streams belongs to.

140 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Changing the Standard Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams


Introduction
For each outgoing Transport Stream the DCM needs the knowledge of the following
standard Transport Stream parameters:
IP Address: IP address of the destination port to which the outgoing Transport
Stream must stream
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has some
restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 127.

UDP Port: UDP port number of the destination port to which the outgoing
Transport Stream must stream
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier (ON ID) labels the outgoing Transport
Stream with the source network of the Transport Stream.
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID) is used to identify the outgoing
Transport Stream from other Transport Streams in the application.
Total Bit Rate (Mbps): The maximum bit rate that can be used by the
corresponding Transport Stream. This parameter is not applicable if the Output
Rate parameter is set to VBR.
Output Standard: the service type coding used by particular set top boxes differs
according to the standard. Therefore the DCM allows remapping of the PMT
elementary stream_type by changing the Output Standard mode. The following
table gives the PMT Elementary Stream_Type remapping possibilities.
Stream Type Remapping

Component Type Video 1st Audio 2nd Audio 3rd Audio 4th Audio
Mode

Transparent pass pass pass pass pass

Force Video force 0x2 pass pass pass pass


Force Uplink force 0x2 force 0x3 force 0x81 pass pass
Force Audio 3 force 0x2 pass pass force 0x6 pass
The Stream Type of an elementary stream recognized as a specific component type
will be remapped to the specific value as indicated in the Stream Type Remapping
table.

4011746 Rev P 141


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Output Protocol: The IP packets in which an outgoing Transport Stream is


encapsulated can be enlarged with an RTP header (RTP streaming). RTP stands
for real time transport protocol and is the protocol standard for streaming media
(video conferencing, audio conferencing, video streaming over the internet etc...).
- RTP: the IP packets are enlarged with RTP Header.
- UDP: the IP packets are not enlarged with RTP header.
Notes:

- The RTP standard requires that an even UDP port number is chosen for an
RTP stream..
- For forward error correction (FEC) the Output Protocol parameter must be set
to RTP. For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward
Error Correction on page 155.
Tip: In the DCM Output tree an outgoing Transport Stream of which the Output
Protocol parameter is set to RTP, is indicated by (RTP).

Streaming: For backup or configuration purposes it can be useful to enable or


disable streaming of the Transport Stream through the output port.
Stopped: streaming of the Transport Stream is disabled.
Active: streaming of the Transport Stream is enabled.
(Output) Rate: The bit rate of an outgoing Transport stream can be fixed or
variable. Set the Output Rate mode to CBR to define a constant bit rate Transport
Stream or VBR to define a variable bit rate Transport Stream.
Notes:
During the Outgoing Transport Stream creation process certain TS settings are
automatically filled by default values. The procedure to change these default
values is described in topic Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams
on page 146.
The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameters are only
applicable when the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP
Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Streaming parameters are applicable.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on an ASI port, only the
Streaming parameters are applicable.

142 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

To Change Transport Stream Settings for a Single Transport Stream


The procedure below describes how to change the Transport Stream settings for a
single Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which settings
must be changed.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
Result: The TS or TS/TR tab page is displayed.
5 In the TS Settings table, adapt the parameters that must be changed for the
corresponding Transport Stream.

Tip: Pressing the arrow beside Configure TOT displays the Service - SI Table - TOT
sub page that can be used to configure the TOT table for the corresponding Transport
Stream. For more information, please refer to topic Adding or Removing Time Offset
Descriptors to or from a TOT on page 267.
Notes:
Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has some
restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on page 127.

4011746 Rev P 143


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

When forward error correction is enabled, the Output Protocol parameter


must be set to RTP. Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to
UDP and forward error correction is enabled displays a message box asking
to disable FEC.

Click on the OK command button to confirm.


For more information concerning FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error
Correction on page 155.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Notes:
The new ON ID and TS ID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal
notation, independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be
prefixed by 0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer
to topic Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
The IP Address, UDP Port, Output Protocol, and Rate parameter are not
displayed in the TS Output sub page for a Transport Stream on an ASI port.
When settings of multiple Transport Streams on a particular GbE port must be
changed, the TS Output sub page for a port can be used. This sub page gives an
overview of the settings of all outgoing Transport Streams for a particular port.
For more information, please refer to sub topic To Change Transport Stream Settings
for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular Port on page 145.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream on a GbE port, only the IP
Address, UDP Port, and Output Protocol parameters are applicable.

144 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Stream, the TS tab page also provides
references of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.

To Change Settings for Multiple Transport Streams of a Particular GbE Port


The following procedure describes how to change the Transport Stream settings for
multiple Transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the output port containing the Transport
Streams for which settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected port is displayed.

4 In the TS Settings table, modify the parameters.


Notes:
Changing the Output Protocol parameter from RTP to UDP while forward
error correction is enabled is not possible. For more information concerning
FEC, please refer to topic Forward Error Correction on page 155.
For a Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams, the Total Bit Rate
(Mbps), Output Standard, and Rate parameter are not applicable in the TS
Settings table.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: When particular parameters for all Transport Streams on a port must be changed
to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser user interface can be
used. The following procedure describes how to use this function.

4011746 Rev P 145


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

1 In the Update all TS table, enter the desired value in the box or select the desired
value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.

2 Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Changing Default Values for Outgoing Transport Streams


During the Transport Stream creation process particular parameters are filled in with
default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing Transport Streams, other
values can be given to these defaults. The parameters for which defaults can be
changed are:
The IP settings of the destination device to which the outgoing Transport Stream
must stream (only for a GbE Interface Card)
- Start IP Address parameter: the IP address that will be used during the
outgoing Transport Stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme
parameter is set to IP Address + 1, each time a new outgoing Transport Stream
is created the IP address will be increased by 1.
Note: Assigning multicast IP addresses to outgoing Transport Streams has
some restrictions. More information can be found in topic Introduction on
page 127.
- Start UDP Port parameter: the UDP Port number that will be used during the
outgoing Transport Stream creation process. When the Increment Scheme
parameter is set to UDP Port + 1 or UDP Port + 2, each time a new outgoing
Transport Stream is created the UDP port number will be increased by 1 or 2.

146 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

- Source UDP Port parameter: the source UDP port for the outgoing Transport
Stream.
- Increment Scheme parameter: When a Transport Stream is added to a GbE
port, the destination IP settings are adapted using one of the following
increment schemes:
IP Address + 1: the default IP address for the new created Transport Stream
is equal to the IP address as defined in the Start IP Address parameter
and each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 1: the UDP port for the new created Transport Stream is equal
to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and
each time increased by one if occupied.
UDP Port + 2: the UDP port for the new created Transport Stream is equal
to the UDP port number as defined in the Start UDP Port parameter and
each time increased by two if occupied.
IP Address + 1 and UDP Port + 1: the IP address and UDP port for the new
created Transport Stream is equal to the IP address and UDP port as
defines in the Start IP Address and Start UDP Port parameter and each
time increased by one if occupied.
- Output Protocol parameter
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter
Output Standard parameter
SI Table Playout parameters: for more information, please refer to topic Changing
the PSI/SI Table Playout Rate on page 255.
PMT Descriptor Rules: for more information, please refer to topic Adding and
Modifying PMT Descriptors on page 235.
The following procedure explains how to change the default outgoing Transport
Stream settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default values for the outgoing Transport Stream parameters should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 147


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Output TS Default Settings table, modify the default settings.

Note: For an ASI Interface Card, only the Standard parameter is applicable.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

148 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Changing the Advanced Settings of Outgoing Transport Streams


Introduction
For each outgoing Transport Stream on a GbE port, the follow advanced setting can
be configured.
VLAN identifier and VLAN priority
When the DCM participates into VLAN application, the Transport Streams can be
VLAN tagged. The IP packets in which an outgoing Transport Stream is
encapsulated are enlarged with a VLAN header including VLAN Identifier (VLAN
ID) and VLAN Priority. The VLAN ID parameter ranges from 0 to 4094 and the
VLAN Priority parameter from 0 to 7.

Type of Service
The Type of Service parameter (ToS) determines the IP packet header field that
indicates the type or quality of the service for this IP packet. A value can be given
between 0 and 255 and is default set to 0.

Time to Live
To prevent indefinite looping of IP packets in a network, the lifetime of IP packets can
be limited by defining a time to live to these packets. This time to live parameter
(TTL) determines a field in IP packet header that specifies how many routers a packet
can pass before being discarded. Each time an IP packet passes a router, the TTL field
of the packet is decreased by one and will be discarded if it reaches 0. A value can be
given between 1 and 255 and is default set to 64.

Note: During the outgoing Transport Stream creation process particular advanced
Transport Stream setting are automatically filled by default values. The procedure to
change these default values is described in topic Changing Default Values for the
Advanced Transport Stream Settings on page 152.

Changing Advanced Parameters for a Single Transport Stream


The following procedure describes how to change the advanced setting for a single
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which advanced
parameters must be changed.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Point to the Advanced tab.

4011746 Rev P 149


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Result: The Advanced tab page containing the Advanced Settings table is displayed.

5 In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps to change VLAN
settings:
a Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN
On check box is ticked.
6 In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.
7 In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
8 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

To Change the Advanced Settings for Multiple Transport Stream of a Particular Port
The procedure below describes how to change the advanced setting of multiple
outgoing transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port for which advanced parameters of
multiple Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on the port or right-click on the port and point to View Port Settings
in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Advanced link.
5 Result: The Service - TS Advanced sub page is displayed.
6 In the Advanced Settings table, perform the following steps:

150 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Tip: In the Advanced Setting table, each outgoing Transport Stream is indicated (TS
identification) by source IP address, UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
a Tick the VLAN On check box to enabling VLAN tagging for the selected
outgoing Transport Stream or clear the check box to disable VLAN tagging.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
Note: The ID and Priority parameters are only applicable when the VLAN
On check box is ticked.
d In the TOS box, enter a correct type of service value.
e In the TTL box, enter a correct time to live value.
7 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Note: When particular parameters of all Transport Streams in the Advanced Settings
table must be changed to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser
user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use this
function.
1 In the Update all TS table, set or clear the VLAN Enabled check box and enter
the desired value in the box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.

Note: The ID and Priority boxes are only applicable when the VLAN Enabled check
box is ticked.
2 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the TS Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 151


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing Default Values for the Advanced Transport Stream Settings


The procedure below describes how to modify the default values for the advanced
Transport Stream settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default values for the advanced Transport Stream parameters should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab page is displayed.
5 In the Default VLAN Settings table, modify the following parameter:

a Tick the VLAN On check box of the port pair for which VLAN tagging must
be switched on.
b In the ID box, enter the VLAN identifier.
c In the Priority box, enter the VLAN priority.
6 In the Advanced TS Settings table, modify the following parameters:

a In the TOS box, enter a type of service value.


b In the TTL box, enter a time to live value.
7 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

152 4011746 Rev P


Creating and Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams

Configuring Automatic Pass Rules


Introduction
During creating an outgoing Transport Stream by passing an incoming Transport
Stream to an output port, TS auto pass rules referred to this incoming Transport
Stream can automatically be assigned to the created Transport Stream. When TS auto
pass rules are assigned during this process, all rules (Pass Unreferenced PIDs, Pass
EMMs, and Pass Services rule) will be activated. Once an outgoing Transport Stream is
created, the TS auto pass rules and the identification setting of the incoming
Transport Stream to which these rules refer to can always be changed.
Outgoing Transport Streams created without TS auto pass rule assignments can
always be provided with rules.
For more information concerning TS auto pass rules, please refer to subtopic
Transport Stream Auto Pass Rules on page 127.

Assigning or Changing TS Auto Pass Rules


The following steps describe how to assign or to change TS auto pass rules for a
particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream to which TS auto pass
rules must be assigned or for which rules must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
4 In the Service - TS Output page click on the Auto Pass link.
Result: The Service - TS Output page containing the TS Auto Pass Rules and
Service Auto Pass Rules table are displayed.

4011746 Rev P 153


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 Perform the following steps in the TS Auto Pass Rules table.


a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream to which the rules refers to.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
f Set or clear the Pass Unreferenced PIDs, Pass EMMs, and/or Pass Services
check box.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

154 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

Forward Error Correction


Introduction
General
Due to its nature (occasionally packet loss, packet reordering, and/or packet jittering)
a traditional IP network is not the perfect channel for transmitting broadcast-quality
compressed video content. The Forward Error Correction (FEC) developed by the
PRO-MPEG forum is a unique technology to enhance the robustness of video traffic
over IP networks. The DCM supports Pro-MPEG Code of Practice (COP) #3 release2,
which is based on the exclusive or (XOR) boolean operator applied to a number of
data packets.
When a packet (called FEC packet) is created by performing the XOR boolean
operation on a number of RTP packets, a missing RTP packet can always be
reconstructed by performing the XOR operation on the FEC packet and the
remaining RTP packets.
FEC = RTP1 XOR RTP2
RTP1 = FEC XOR RTP2
RTP2 = FEC XOR RTP1

FEC Profiles
The PRO-MPEG forum provides two FEC profiles, viz.: 1D FEC and 2D FEC, each
having multiple FEC schemes.
1D FEC Profile
The 1D FEC profile maps the RTP packet stream across columns (matrix of data
packets), see illustration below.

4011746 Rev P 155


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

The XOR boolean operation is performed on the column RTP packets. This approach
provides robustness against single missing RTP packets and multiple consecutive
missing packets as long as only one packet is missing in a column and the numbers of
consecutive missing packets do not exceed the number of columns (L).
Example: When data packets 9, 10, and 11 are missing at the receiver side, these
packets can be reconstructed by means of the remaining column packets and FEC
packet 1, 2, and 3.

In the example, a burst loss of maximum 4 consecutive data packets can be


reconstructed.
2D FEC Profile
The error protection can be enhanced by performing the XOR boolean on both the
column packets and row packets. As depicted in the following illustration a FEC
packet is created for each row and for each column.

156 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

2D FEC scheme is able to reconstruct multiple missing packets in a singe row and in a
single column.
Example: In the illustration below, data packet 1, 7, 9, 10, 11, 12, and 13 are lost.

Data packet 1, 7, and 13 can be reconstructed by means of the remaining row packets
and associated row FEC packets ('1, '2, and '3). Once data packet 1, 7, and 13 are
reconstructed, data packet 9, 10, 11, and 12 can be reconstructed by the associated
column data packets and column FEC packets (1, 2, 3, and 4).

FEC Schemes
The FEC scheme is determined by the number of columns or row Length (L) and the
number of rows or column Depth (D). Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3 specify
following limits:
For 1D FEC profile:
L * D 100
1 L 20
4 D 20
For 2D FEC profile:
L * D 100
4 L 20
4 D 20
Note: For outgoing Transport Streams the DCM allows using L x D 256.

4011746 Rev P 157


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

The following table depicts the L and D limitation:

: For 1D FEC only

: For 1D FEC and 2D FEC

: Allowed by the DCM but not by Pro-MPEG Code of Practice #3

: Not allowed

FEC Packet Transportation


The column FEC and row FEC packets are transmitted using separate streams. The
web browser user interface of the DCM allows configuring the destination multicast
IP address of the FEC streams as well as the UDP port numbers.
Tips:
For unicast streaming the IP address for both FEC streams matches the IP address
of the Transport Stream to which the FEC packets applies to. The UDP port
number for the column FEC stream is by default the UDP port number of the
Transport Stream increased by 2 and for the row FEC stream the UDP port
number of the Transport Stream increased by 4.
For multicast streaming the UDP port number for both FEC streams matches the
UDP port of the Transport stream to which both streams applies to. The IP
address of the column FEC stream is by default the IP address of the Transport
Stream increased by 1 and the IP address of the row FEC stream the IP address
increased by 2.
Important: For Pro-MPEG Code of Practice (COP) #3 release2 compliant streams, the
UDP port for the column FEC stream is two higher than Transport Stream UDP port
and the UDP port for the row FEC stream is four higher.

158 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

Sending Arrangements
The DCM implements both Pro-MPEG COP#3 release 2 Annex A and Annex B FEC
packet sending arrangement.
Annex A (non block aligned FEC arrangement): Each FEC packet is transmitted L
packets after the last data packet it pertains to.
Annex B (block aligned FEC linearisation): Column FEC packets are sent by using
an interleaver.

Overhead and Latencies


The overhead on the transmission and the decoder latency created by adding FEC
packets depends on the FEC profile (1D or 2D) and the FEC scheme. E.g. a 1D profile
with a column depth of 4 rows generates an overhead of 25 %.

Requirements
Forward error correction needs a FEC Card on the corresponding interface card. In
the DCM Configuration, DCM Inputs, and DCM Outputs tree the presence of a FEC
Card is indicated in the Card branch.
The FEC option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each incoming Transport
Stream, preconfigured incoming Transport Stream, and outgoing Transport Stream
for which FEC error protection is enabled and each incoming Transport Stream for
which packet reordering is enabled, needs one FEC License. More information
concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.

4011746 Rev P 159


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Configuring the FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams


To Configure the FEC Settings for a Single Incoming Transport Stream
The procedure below describes how to configure the FEC parameters for a single
incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC settings
must be configured.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the TS FEC table is displayed.

4 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is shown
between brackets.
5 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.

160 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

6 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
multicast IP address.
b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the row
FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box and the right hand Type drop down box and UDP
box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters are configured properly, the L, D and FEC overhead,
and latency appear in the TS FEC table.
The arrow in the Statics column can be used to open the TS_FEC_Statistics
popup. More information concerning FEC statistics can be found in sub topic
Checking the FEC Statistics on page 167.

To Configure the FEC Settings for Multiple Incoming Transport Streams of a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
incoming Transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams for
which FEC settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC sub page containing the FEC Settings table is
displayed.

4011746 Rev P 161


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tips:
In the FEC Settings table, each row represents an incoming Transport Stream
or a preconfigured Transport Stream. More information concerning
preconfigured Transport Streams can be found in topic To Configure the FEC
Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport Stream on page 163.
An incoming or preconfigured Transport Stream is identified by its
destination IP address and UDP port.
Note: The Service - TS FEC sub page is only applicable if the GbE Interface Card is
provided with FEC Card.
5 In the Mode drop down box of the corresponding Transport Stream, select one of
the following error protection profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without FEC will be done.
Default (xxxxxxxx): the default value will be used. The default value is shown
between brackets.
6 Perform the following steps for the column FEC stream:
a In the left hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
b For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Column FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP
address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the left hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the
column FEC stream.
7 In case of FEC 2D profile, perform the following steps for the row FEC stream:
a In the right hand Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is a
multicast IP address.

162 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

b For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address, enter
the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box. The octets of the IP address
must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Type drop
down box.
c In the right hand UDP box, enter the destination UPD port number of the row
FEC stream.
Note: The Row FEC Stream IP box, the right hand Type drop down box and UDP
box are only applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
8 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Tips:
When the FEC parameters of an incoming Transport Stream are properly
configured, the L, D, FEC, and latency overhead appears in the FEC Settings
table.
The arrow in the Statics column of an incoming Transport Stream can be used to
open the TS_FEC_Statistics popup. More information concerning FEC statistics
can be found in sub topic Checking the FEC Statistics on page 167.

To Configure the FEC Settings for a Preconfigured Incoming Transport Stream


Particular settings of Transport Streams which are not yet at the input of the DCM
can be preconfigured. The following steps explain how to configure the FEC settings
for preconfigured Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which Transport Streams must be
preconfigured.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC sub page containing the Add Preconfigured TS table is
displayed.

4011746 Rev P 163


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Add Preconfigured TS table, configure the FEC settings for the
preconfigured Transport Stream as described in the following steps.
a In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream is a
multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the incoming Transport Stream in the IP
box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following values:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet re-ordering without FEC will be done.
d In the FEC Streams drop down box, select on of the following values:
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased by
4.
Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the
Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
Custom Setting: The settings for the Column and Row FEC streams are
configurable.

164 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

e Perform the following steps if the FEC Streams parameter is set to Custom
Setting.
In the Column Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC stream
is a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming column FEC
stream is a multicast IP address.
For an incoming column FEC stream with multicast destination IP
address, enter the IP address in the Column IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Column
Socket Type drop down box.
In the Row Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following
values:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream is
a unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the incoming row FEC stream
is a multicast IP address.
For an incoming row FEC stream with multicast destination IP address,
enter the IP address in the Row FEC Stream IP box and the UDP port in
the UDP box. The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Note: This parameter is not applicable if Unicast is selected in the Row
Socket Type drop down box.
Note: The Row Socket Type drop down box, Row IP and UDP box are only
applicable when the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: The preconfigured Transport Stream is added to the FEC Settings table.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
Preconfigured incoming Transport Streams with FEC settings for which the
Mode is set to FEC 1D, FEC 2D, or Packet Reordering can only be done when free
FEC licenses are available. More information concerning licenses can be found in
topic Licensing on page 17.
In the FEC Settings table, preconfigured Transport Streams with configured FEC
settings can be removed by ticking the check box of the corresponding
preconfigured Transport Stream and pressing the Remove Checked Items
command button.

4011746 Rev P 165


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing the Default FEC Settings for Incoming Transport Streams


The following procedure describes how to change the default FEC parameter values
for incoming Transport Streams. These values will be used for each incoming
Transport Stream for which the associated parameters are set to default.
WARNING:
Changing the default value involves changing the associated parameter for all
incoming transport stream for which the value is set to default.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default FEC parameter values for incoming Transport Streams should be
changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Defaults sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the FEC tab.
Result: The FEC tab page table is displayed.
5 In the Default Input FEC Settings table, change the following parameters if
required:

a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following error protection
profiles:
Disabled: the error protection is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile is used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile is used.
Packet Reordering: only RTP packet reordering without forward error
correction will be done.
b In the FEC Stream drop down box, select one of the following values:
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: The FEC streams have the destination IP
address of the incoming Transport stream. The destination UDP port of
the column FEC stream is the UDP port number of Transport Stream
increased by 2 and the destination UDP port number of the row FEC
stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port increased by
4.

166 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: The FEC streams have the destination UDP
port of the incoming Transport stream. The destination IP address of the
column FEC stream is the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the destination IP address the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the
Transport Stream IP Address increased by 2.
Note: The FEC Stream drop down box is only applicable if the FEC 1D or FEC
2D profile is selected.
6 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

Checking the FEC Statistics


The following steps describe how to check the FEC statistics for a particular incoming
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC statistics
must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 In the TS FEC table, click on the arrow in the Statistics column.
Result: A popup is displayed containing the TS FEC statistics of the corresponding
Transport Stream.

The following TS FEC Statistics are displayed.

- Valid Packets: represents the number of IP packets received by the DCM for
the corresponding Transport Stream.

4011746 Rev P 167


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

- Missing Packets: represents the number of lost IP packets of the


corresponding Transport Stream.
- Fixed Packets: represents the number of reconstructed IP packets by the DCM
for the corresponding Transport Stream.
- Duplicated Packets: represents the number of duplicated IP packets of the
corresponding Transport Stream.
- Reordered Packets: represents the number of reordered IP packets by the
DCM for the corresponding Transport Stream.
- Packets Out of Range: represents the number frames that can't be added to
the matrix (RTP header sequence of the packet doesn't match the matrix).
Tips:
The TS FEC statistics can be restarted by pointing to the Reset command button.
After loading the statistics from the DCM, the statistic figures are refreshed at
regular time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the
figures. For some reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically refresh
actions. Therefore this popup window is provided with a Refresh drop down
box that can be used to switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh
actions.

168 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

Configuring the FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams


To Configure FEC Setting for a Single Outgoing Transport Stream
Perform the following steps to configure FEC settings for a particular Transport
Stream.
Tip: During the Outgoing Transport Stream creation process certain FEC settings are
automatically filled by default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing
Transport Streams, other values can be given to these defaults. The procedure to
change these default values is described in topic Changing the Default FEC Settings for
Outgoing Transport Streams on page 174.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Streams for which FEC
settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab page is displayed.
5 In the FEC Settings table, change the following parameters if required:

a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.

4011746 Rev P 169


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.

Press the OK command button to confirm.


b In the Sending Arrangement drop down box, select Annex A or Annex B.
c Enter the destination IP address for the column FEC stream in the Column
FEC Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the
corresponding UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are not applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to Disabled.
d Enter the destination IP address for the row FEC stream in the Row FEC
Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the corresponding
UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are only applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
e To determine the FEC scheme, enter the number of columns in the L box and
the column depth (number of rows) in the D box.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

170 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

To Configure FEC Settings for Multiple Outgoing Transport Streams of a Particular Port
The following procedure explains how to configure FEC settings for multiple
Transport Streams of a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Streams
for which FEC settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC page containing the FEC Settings table port is
displayed.

Tips:
In the FEC Settings table each outgoing Transport Stream is identified by
destination IP Address and UDP port, ON ID, and TS ID.
To sort the FEC Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
5 Perform the following steps in the row of the Transport Stream for which FEC
settings must be configured:
a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
Note: When the Output Protocol parameter of the Transport Stream is set to
UDP and the Mode parameter is set to FEC 1D or FEC 2D, a message box is
displayed asking to change the protocol to RTP.

Press the OK command button to confirm.


b In the Sending Arrangement drop down box, select Annex A or Annex B.

4011746 Rev P 171


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

c Enter the destination IP address for the column FEC stream in the Column
FEC Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the
corresponding UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are not applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to Disabled.
d Enter the destination IP address for the row FEC stream in the Row FEC
Stream IP box and the destination UDP port number in the corresponding
UDP box.
Notes:
The octets of the IP address must be separated by dots.
Both the Column FEC Stream IP box and UDP box are only applicable if
the Mode parameter is set to FEC 2D.
e To determine the FEC scheme, enter the number of columns in the L box and
the column depth (number of rows) in the D box.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
6 Repeat step a up to d for all Transport Streams for which the FEC settings must be
configured.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the configuration.
When particular FEC parameters for all Transport Streams on a port must be changed
to similar values, the Update all TS function of the web browser user interface can be
used. The following procedure describes how to use this function.
1 In the Update all TS table, enter the desired value in the box or select the desired
value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for all
Transport Streams of the selected ports.

Note: Changing the Mode to FEC 1D or FEC 2D is only possible when the Output
Protocol parameter of the Transport Streams is set to RTP.
2 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the FEC Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

172 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

Generating FEC Errors


For test purposes the DCM is able to generate FEC errors for a particular Transport
Stream by dropping IP packets. FEC errors can be created for a single burst cycle or
can be generated continuously. A single burst cycle consists of a number of dropped
packets (bad packets) after transmitting a number of good packets. The following
procedure describes how to generate FEC errors.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group and point to the Tree View link that appears after clicking on the
Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Stream for
which FEC errors must be generated.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output page of the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS FEC link.
Result: The Service - TS FEC page containing the FEC Error Generation table port is
displayed.

5 In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following items:
Disabled: the FEC error generating process is disabled.
Single burst: the single FEC error burst will be executed.
Continuous: the continuous FEC generation process is enabled.
6 In the Good Packets box, enter the number of good packets that must be
transmitted before packets will be dropped.
7 In the Bad Packets box, enter the number of packets that must be dropped during
one burst cycle.
8 Enter the destination IP address of the Transport Stream in the TS IP box and the
UDP port number in the UDP box.
9 Press the Set command button
Result: The FEC error generating process is started. When applying new error
generation settings the previous error condition will be cleared automatically.

4011746 Rev P 173


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Notes:
The continuous FEC error generating process can be stopped by setting the Mode
to Disabled and pressing the Set command button.
A reboot of the DCM will clear the current error generation settings.

Changing the Default FEC Settings for Outgoing Transport Streams


During the creation process of outgoing Transport Streams, particular FEC
parameters are filled with default values. To facilitate the configuration of outgoing
Transport Streams these default values can be changed. The following steps explain
how to change the default FEC parameter values.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE interface card for which
the default FEC parameter values should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected GbE Interface Card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Defaults sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the FEC tab.
Result: The FEC tab page is displayed.
5 In the Default Output FEC Settings table, change the following parameters if
required.

a In the Mode drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Disabled: forward error correction is disabled.
FEC 1D: the 1D column FEC profile will be used.
FEC 2D: the 2D FEC profile will be used.
b In the Sending Arrangement drop down box, select Annex A or Annex B.

174 4011746 Rev P


Forward Error Correction

c In the FEC Streams drop down box, select one of the following values.
Same IP and UDP+2, UDP+4: When a new Transport Stream is created, the
FEC stream(s) will get the IP address of the Transport stream. The column
FEC stream will get the Transport Stream UDP port increased by 2 and the
row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream UDP port
increased by 4.
Same UDP and IP+1, IP+2: When a new Transport Stream is created, the
FEC stream(s) will get the UDP port of the Transport stream. The column
FEC stream will get the Transport Stream IP address increased by 1 and
the row FEC stream (2D FEC profile only) the Transport Stream IP
Address increased by 2.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
d Enter the number of columns in the L box and the column depth (number of
rows) in the D box for determining the FEC scheme.
Note: The L and D box are not applicable if the Mode parameter is set to
Disabled.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 175


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Service Re-Multiplexing
Passing Individual Services
Introduction
Two passing methods can be used to pass individual incoming services to an
outgoing Transport Stream, viz. the Drag and Drop method and the Muxing method.
When a discreet number of individual services should be passed to a Transport
Stream, the Drag and Drop method is useful. When numbers of services must be
passed to one or more Transport Stream, the Muxing method is recommended.
An incoming service can be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream more than once.
The service ID will then be remapped and the components are shared between the
corresponding output services.

Drag and Drop Method


Perform the following steps to pass a discreet number of individual incoming
services to an outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that must be passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service must be passed.
4 Select the icon of the incoming service and drag and drop this service on the icon
of the outgoing Transport Stream.

Result: The incoming service is added to the outgoing Transport Stream.

176 4011746 Rev P


Service Re-Multiplexing

Muxing Method
The following steps explain how to pass numbers of services to one or more outgoing
Transport Stream(s) using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input Services and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transport Stream table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input Services
table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams table will be
cleared.

4011746 Rev P 177


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Preconfiguring Services
Introduction
The DCM allows configuring outgoing services which are not yet at the input of the
device. Therefore preconfigured services must be added to the outgoing Transport
Stream. Such preconfigured service can then be configured the same way as passed
services. Once the service becomes available at the input of the DCM, the service will
be passed to the output processed by the DCM (Transrating, Scrambling, DPI, etc...)
as preconfigured.

Adding Preconfigured Services


The following steps explain how to add preconfigured services to an outgoing
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service page.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
preconfigured services must be added.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page of the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page is displayed.
6 In the Add Preconfigured Service table, modify the preconfigured service
parameters as described in the following steps:

Tip: Preconfigured services can also be added via the Service and Scrambling tab
page on the Service - Service sub page.
a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream from where this service should be passed.

178 4011746 Rev P


Service Re-Multiplexing

b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives this
Transport Stream.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for a GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the
GbE port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device of this Transport Stream streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving this Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
f In the Input SID box, enter the Service Identifier of the incoming service for
which a preconfigured output service must be created.
7 Press the Add command button.
Result: The preconfigured service is added to the Service Settings table.

Removing Preconfigured Services


The following steps explain how to remove preconfigured services from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service page.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
preconfigured services must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page of the selected Transport Stream is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 179


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box preceding each row that must be
removed.

Tips:
To sort the Service Routing table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Service Routing table, tick
the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Results: The rows are removed from the Service Routing table.

180 4011746 Rev P


Service Re-Multiplexing

Service Auto Passing Rules


Introduction
When services are passed from an incoming Transport Stream to an outgoing
Transport Stream, all components within the service are passed by default. Once a
service is passed and components are added to the incoming service, these
components are automatically passed to the outgoing service.
In an outgoing service particular components can be blocked by switching off service
auto passing rules assigned to the outgoing Transport Stream to which a service
belongs to.
Service passing rules can be switched on or off for the following components:
ES
ECMs
ES ECMs
Note: Component tracking rules prior service passing rules, meaning components
passed or blocked by defining component tracking rules will be passed or blocked
without taking service passing rules into account.
Tip: During the service passing process, the service auto pass rules are automatically
configured by defaults. The procedure to change these default values is described in
topic Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules on page 182.

Switching On or Off Service Passing Rules


The following procedure explains how to switch on or off service passing rules for
services of a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which service
passing rules must be switched on or off.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Auto Pass tab.
Result: The Auto Pass tab page containing the TS Auto Pass Rules and Service Auto
Pass Rules table are displayed.

4011746 Rev P 181


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Service Auto Pass Rules table, set the check box for the component type for
which the service passing rule must be switched on or clear the check box to
switch off the rule.

6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Changing the Default Service Auto Pass Rules


The following procedure describes how to change the default service auto pass rules.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default service auto pass rules must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the TS tab.
5 Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
6 In the Default Service Auto Pass Rules table, set the check box for the component
type for which the default service auto passing rule must be switched on or clear
the check box to switch off the default rule.

7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

182 4011746 Rev P


Service Re-Multiplexing

Passing all Services of an Incoming Transport Stream


Introduction
Both the drag and drop method and the muxing method can be used to pass all
services of an incoming Transport Stream to an Outgoing Transport Stream. When
an incoming Transport Stream is passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, the
components within this incoming Transport Stream which do not belong to a service
(no reference in the PMT or CAT), will not be passed, for instance ghost components.
Individual components can be passed and if needed remapped manually, more
information concerning passing and remapping of unreferenced components can be
found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.

Drag and Drop Method


The following procedure explains how to pass al services of an incoming Transport
Stream to an Outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream of which all
services must be passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream in which the
services must be passed.
4 Select the icon of the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop this
Transport Stream to the icon of the outgoing Transport Stream.

Result: All services of this incoming Transport Stream are added to the outgoing
Transport Stream.

Notes: When an incoming Transport Stream is passed to a GbE port, a new outgoing
Transport Stream is created containing the services of the incoming Transport
Stream. More information can be found in topic Creating a Transport Stream by Passing
an Incoming Transport Stream to a GbE Port on page 133.

4011746 Rev P 183


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Muxing Method
The following procedure explains how to pass al services of an incoming Transport
Stream to an outgoing Transport Stream using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box TS
(MPTS).
Result: The Input TS and Output Transport Streams table are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input TS or Output Transport Streams table by a particular


parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input TS table, set the check box(es) of the Transport Stream for which the
services should be passed.
4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the Transport
Streams to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input TS and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the services of the selected incoming
Transport Stream(s) are passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All
check boxes in the Input TS table and Output Transport Stream table will be cleared.

184 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components


Introduction
Passing, blocking, and remapping components are processes used:
to keep the content of a service in a outgoing Transport Stream static
e.g. by keeping the PID of outgoing components constant, although the PIDs change
in the incoming Transport Stream.

to keep the bitrate of an outgoing Transport Steam under control


e.g. by removing unnecessary components (blocking) from an outgoing Transport
Stream.

During the passing process of services to an outgoing Transport Stream, all service
components (which are components referred in the PMT) will be passed. The PID of
an outgoing service component will get the PID of the corresponding incoming
service component. When two incoming service components with same PID are
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream, one of the outgoing components gets a new
unique PID.
All components of a particular incoming service can be passed to an outgoing service
by using Service Merging. Unreferenced components within an incoming Transport
Stream can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add Custom PID function.
Merging Components into an outgoing service is described in topic Merging
Components on page 190.
Components within a service can be passing, blocking, and/or remapping by
defining Component Tracking Rules. More information can be found in topic Passing,
Blocking, and Remapping Service Components on page 200.
Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) with references in the CAT table are by
default blocked. The procedure to pass (and to remap if required) EMMs to an
outgoing Transport Stream is described in topic Passing and/Or Remapping EMM
Components on page 214.
Private date components offered to the DCM by the Private Data Generator via the
PDG to Mux interface are also blocked by default. These components can be passed
and remapped as described in topic Passing and/or Remapping Private Data Components
on page 220.
Components, which have no references in the PMT or CAT, are by default blocked by
the DCM. The procedures to pass and/or to remap unreferenced components can be
found in topic Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.
Individual incoming components can easily be passed by using the drag and drop
method. The procedure to pass individual component is described in topic Passing
Individual Components on page 187.

4011746 Rev P 185


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Note:
When a component must be removed from the output, which has its PID shared
with another component, both components must be blocked. E.g. when a video
component that is shared with a PCR must be removed both the video as well as
the PCR component must be blocked.
The table below shows the priorities that are used when PIDs are assigned to
outgoing components.
Higher
Components forced by using PID Multiplexing, SI, generated ECMs

Priority Components passed, blocked, or remapped by using component


Level
tracking rules.

Lower
Component passed without Component Tracking Rule
Example: When an unreferenced component is forced to PID 100 using Transport
Stream PID Multiplexing and a Tracking Rule is defined to force a service component
to PID 100, then the unreferenced component will be forced to PID 100 and the service
component remapped to another PID.

186 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Passing Individual Components


Introduction
An incoming referenced or unreferenced component can easily be passed to the
output by using the drag and drop method.
Note: A component can only be dropped to the Unreferenced PIDs node, to the
service node of an MPTS, or to an SPTS node.

Passing individual Components using the Drag and Drop Method


The following steps explain how to pass individual components to the output.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming component that must be passed.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the node to which the component must be
passed.
4 Select the icon of the incoming component and drag and drop this component on
the icon of the node.

Note: When the incoming component is dropped to a service node or SPTS node, the
following message box appears.

4011746 Rev P 187


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

- In the Stream Type box, enter the value of the stream type of the component.
The value can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
- Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button
to abort the operation.
The following table shows the stream type with corresponding value represented in
decimal and hexadecimal notation.

Value Stream Type


Dec Hex
0 0 Reserved
1 1 MPEG-1 Video
2 2 MPEG-2 Video
3 3 MPEG-1 Audio
4 4 MPEG-2 Audio
5 5 Private sections
6 6 PES Packets containing Private Data
7 7 13522 MHEG
8 8 DSM CC
9 9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1
10 0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A
11 0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B
12 0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C
13 0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D
14 0xE Auxiliary
15 0xF ISO/IEC 13818-7 Audio
16 0x10 MPEG-4 part 2 Video
17 0x11 MPEG-4 Audio
18 0x12 MPEG-4 SL-packetized stream
19 0x13 MPEG-4 SL-packetized stream
20 0x14 Synchronized Download Protocol
21 0x15 Metadata in PES packets
22 0x16 Metadata in metadata_sections
23 0x17 Metadata in Data Carousel
24 0x18 Metadata in Object Carousel

188 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Value Stream Type


Dec Hex
25 0x19 Metadata in Synchronized Download Protocol
26 0x1A IPMP stream
27 0x1B AVC Video (H.264 | MPEG-4 part 10)

4011746 Rev P 189


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Merging Components
Introduction
Components within an incoming service as well as unreferenced components within
an incoming Transport Stream can be merged to an outgoing service. Merging
components within an incoming service can be done using Service Merging. All
components within the incoming service will be merged to the outgoing service.
Components within the outgoing service can be remapped or blocked by defining
Component Tracking Rules.
Unreferenced components can be merged into an outgoing service by using the Add
Custom PID function. This function can also be used to merge a particular component
within an incoming service to an outgoing service.
Note: During the service merging process the PMT section can exceed 1 kB.
Particular equipment is not able to handle this correctly. Therefore an alarm will be
generated when the PMT section exceeds 1 kB.

Merging an Incoming Service in a Service of an Outgoing MPTS


Merging service of an incoming Transport Stream in a service of an outgoing MPTS
can be done in two different ways, viz.: the drag and drop method and the muxing
method.
Drag and Drop Method
The following procedure describes how to merge a service of an incoming Transport
Stream in a service of an outgoing MPTS using the drag and drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Tree View - Service sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service that should be merged.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing service in which the incoming
service should be merged.

190 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

4 Select the icon of the incoming service and drag and drop this service to the icon
of the outgoing service.

Result: The service of the incoming Transport Stream is merged in the service of the
outgoing Transport Stream.

Tips:
An incoming service can also be merged into an outgoing service that is member
of a Transrating Group.
In the DCM Output tree, the name of a merged service is pink colored.
Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to merge a service of an incoming Transport
Stream into a service of an outgoing MPTS using the muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In both the Input drop down box and Output drop down box select Service.

4011746 Rev P 191


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Services table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check box(es) of the services that must be
merged into outgoing services.
4 In the Output Services table, set the check box(es) of the services in which the
incoming services must be merged.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Services table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected incoming services are
merged into the selected outgoing services. All check boxes in the Input Services
table and Output Services table will be cleared.

Merging an Incoming Service into the Service of an Outgoing SPTS


The procedure below describes how to merge a service of an incoming Transport
Stream in the service of an outgoing SPTS.
Note: Before a service can be merged into the service of an outgoing SPTS, the Drop
on SPTS: desired action parameter should be set to Ask for Service Merge or TS Add.
More information concerning the Drop on SPTS: desired action parameter can be
found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming service.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing SPTS containing the service in
which the incoming service should be merged.
4 Select the icon of the service in the incoming Transport Stream and drag and drop
this service to the icon of the outgoing SPTS.

192 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Result: The following dialog is displayed.

5 Point to the Merge Service into SPTS selection button.


6 Press the OK command button to merge the incoming service in the service of the
outgoing SPTS or the cancel command button to abort the operation..
Tips:
Merging an incoming service into a service of an outgoing SPTS member of a
Transrating group is allowed.
In the DCM Output tree the name of the SPTS in which a service is merged, is
pink colored.
Merging an incoming service in the service of an outgoing SPTS can also be done
using the muxing method by passing the incoming service to the corresponding
outgoing service as described in previous sub topic.

Merging Individual Components into an Outgoing Service


The following procedure describes how to merge individual incoming components
into an outgoing service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Tree View - Service sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree browse to the Transport Stream containing the service
in which individual components must be merged.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 193


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page containing the Custom
PID Settings and Add Custom PID Row table is displayed.
7 In the Add Custom PID Row table, complete the following settings:

a In the Input Card drop down box, enter the name of the interface card that
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
b In the Input Port drop down box, enter the name of the port that receives the
Transport Stream containing the component.
c In the Input Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the
GbE port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
d In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
e In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the Transport Stream containing the component.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
f In the Input PID box, enter the PID of the component.
Tip: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.

194 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

g In the Output SID drop down box, select the service in which the component
must be merged.
h In the Output ES Type box, enter the Elementary Stream type of the
component.
Tip: A hexadecimal value as well as a decimal value can be entered. A
hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x.
i Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The new row is added to the Custom PID Settings table.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Checking the Merged Services into an Outgoing Service


The following procedure describes how to check the service population of an
outgoing service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which the
merged service of a service should be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Setting tab.
Result: The Settings tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Settings table, point to the arrow in the Merged column of the
corresponding service.
Result: The Merged Services table containing the service population of the
corresponding outgoing service is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 195


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Each service is accompanied with following information:

- Type:
Main: indicates the service in which services are merged.
Added: indicates the service(s) that is (are) merged in the Main service.
- Card: represents the card receiving the service.
- Port: represents the port receiving the service.
- IP Address: represents the IP address of the destination port to which the
Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the destination port to which
the Transport Stream, the incoming service belongs to, streams.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the SDT).
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (as defined in the PAT).
- SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service (as defined in
the PAT).
- Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
- Present: indicates the presence of the service at the input.
- Backup: link to the Service - Service - Backup Services sub page containing
the service backup settings and backup to main service assignments.
Tip: To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.

Checking the Individual Merged Components within an Outgoing Service


The following steps explain how to check the individual merged components within
an outgoing service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Tree View - Service sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream containing the services
for which the individual merged components must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.

196 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page is displayed.

The individual merged components listed in the Custom PID Settings table are
accompanied with following information:
Output - SID: represents the service identifier of the outgoing service in
which the component is merged.
Output - Name: represents the name of the outgoing service in which the
component is merged.
Output - ES Type: represents the stream type of the component.
Input - Card: represents the interface card receiving the component.
Input - Port: represents the port receiving the component.
Input - Type: represents the input type.
Input - IP Address: represents the IP address to which the source device
streams.
Input - UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the input port receiving
the component.
Input - PID: represents the packet identifier of the component.
Tip: The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a particular
parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

4011746 Rev P 197


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Removing Merged Services from an Outgoing Service


Perform the following steps to remove merged services from an outgoing service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
merged services must be removed from a service.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Settings tab.
Result: The Settings tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Settings table, point to the arrow in the Merged column of the
corresponding service.
Result: The Merged Services table containing the service population of the
corresponding outgoing service is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Merged Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
7 Tick the check box, which is located beside the Type parameter of the services
that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Merged Services table, tick the
check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check
box of the last row.
8 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.

198 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Removing Individual Merged Components from an Outgoing Service


Perform the following steps to remove individual merged components from an
outgoing service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Tree View - Service sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree browse to the Transport Stream containing the services
for which individual merged components must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Point to the Custom PIDs link below the Service Component Settings table.
Result: The Service - Component - Custom PIDs sub page is displayed.
7 In the Custom PID Settings table, tick the check box(es) in front of the row(s) of
the merged components that must be removed.

Tips:
The rows in the Custom PID Settings table can be re-ordered using a
particular parameter by pointing to the table header of this parameter. Toggle
between ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter
header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Custom PID Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
8 Point to the Remove Checked Rows command button.

4011746 Rev P 199


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Service Components


Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM is provided with a number of component
tracking rule types that can be used to keep the content of a service in an outgoing
Transport Stream constant and to block unnecessary components.
Tip: With the exception of the PMT, blocking service components can also be done in
the DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page by right-clicking the
service component and clicking on Block PID in the short-cut menu. A PID Level
component tracking rule will be created that can be handled as manually created
tracking rules.
When a component tracking rule is defined, the service component matching this rule
will be processed (passed, blocked, or remapped).

The following list describes the different methods to identify a service component.
Component Tag
The service component identification is based on the component tag from the Stream
Identifier Descriptor in the PMT.

PCR
The identification is based on the PCR of the service.

Stream Type
The service component identification is based on the stream type of the component.
Pre-defined as well as user-defined stream types can be used. The following table
lists the pre-defined stream types.

Stream type Description


Video (0x01) MPEG 1 Video (ISO/IEC 11172 Video)
Video (0x02) MPEG 2 Video (ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC
11172-2 constrained parameter video stream)
Video (0x80) DC-II (DigiCipher-II) MPEG 2 Video
Audio (0x03) MPEG 1 Audio (ISO/IEC 11172 Audio)
Audio (0x04) MPEG 2 Audio (ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio)
Audio (0x81) DC-II or ATSC AC-3 Audio
Data (0x06) Private data (ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets containing
private data)
DVB Teletext Private data (0x06) with descriptor tag 0x56
DVB Subtitles Private data (0x06) with descriptor tag 0x59

200 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

ES PID
The identification is based on the Elementary Stream PID.

ECM PID
The service component identification is based on Entitlement Control Message (ECM)
components passed for Service Level Scrambling. More information concerning
Service Level Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 365.

ES ECM PID
The identification is based on ECM components passed for Elementary Stream Level
Scrambling. The ECM component matching the defined input PID and ES Output
PID will be processed. More information concerning Elementary Stream Level
Scrambling can be found in topic Scrambling Levels on page 365.

Tracking rules can be defined based on these identifications.


Notes:
If a component tracking rule is defined with audio stream type identification and
a language descriptor is available for the service component, a language must be
given. When no language descriptor is available for the service component, this
language parameter must be empty.
If a component tracking rule is defined with user-defined stream type
identification, a stream type value must be specified.
When no component tracking rule with ES ECM PID identification matches the
parent component of the ES ECM, a good matching rule will be created
automatically for this component. More information about good matching and
perfect matching can be found in sub topic Matching Behavior further in this topic.
When a service is removed from an outgoing Transport Stream, the associated
component tracking rule(s) will also be removed.

During the matching process a component can match several rules. To determine
which rule is applied, priorities are assigned. The following table lists these
priorities.
Higher
Component blocking
Component forcing using PCR type Component Tracking Rule
Priority
Level
Component forcing using Component Tag type Component Tracking
Rule
Component forcing using Stream Type type Component Tracking Rule
Lower
Component forcing using ES PID type Component Tracking Rule

Example: When a component tracking rule is defined to block a service component


and a second rule is defined to remap the same service component, the corresponding
service component will be blocked.

4011746 Rev P 201


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Matching Behavior
Blocking of a service component will be done if the identification defined in the
tracking component rule matches the component perfectly (perfect match), viz.:
- The PCR of the service component matches the PCR value of the defined rule.
- The component tag of the service component matches the component tag
value of the defined rule.
- In case of video components, the stream type of the service component
matches the stream type of the defined rule.
- In case of audio components, the stream type and language of the service
component match to the stream type and language defined by the rule. When
no language is specified in the rule, the audio component without language in
the language descriptor will be identified.
- In case of private data components, the stream type of the component matches
the stream type of the defined rule (with additional descriptor tag for teletext
or subtitles if so desired).
- For PID matching (ES PID, ECM PID, and ES ECM PID) the PIDs are equal.
Passing and/or remapping service components have the same perfect matching
behavior as blocking but extended with following good matching exception:
When a service type component tracking rule is defined and no service component
matches this rule exactly, the rule will be applied to a similar component. E.g. when a
component tracking rule is defined with stream type equal to Video (0x01) and the
service only contains a video service component with stream type Video (0x02), then
this service component will be passed/remapped.
Notes:

- When the Stream Type parameter of the incoming Transport Stream is set to
DC-II, a service component with stream type equal to Video (0x80) will also be
identified as video.
- All audio languages match as long as the stream type is the same.
Components with Audio (0x3), Audio (0x4), and Audio (0x81) stream type
can not be mixed.
When multiple service components match a component tracking rule, then a
random component matching this rule will be processed.

202 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Checking Service Component Settings


The settings of service components belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream are
shown in the Service Component Settings table on the Service Components tab
page on the Service - Component sub page of the corresponding Transport Stream.
Note: Components forced using Transport Stream PID Multiplexing are indicated by
means of a ticked check box in the Output PID - Current column.
In the Service Components Settings table, each service component is accompanied
with following information.

Output PID - Current: represents the Packet Identifier (PID) of the outgoing
service component.
Component Description:
- Type: represents the component classification.
- ES PID: represents the PID of the elementary stream to which an ES ECM
belongs to.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier (SID) of the outgoing service the
component belongs to.
- Name: represents the name of the service.
- ES Type: represents the type of the elementary stream.
- Language: represents the language of the service component.
- CA ID: represents the identifier of the Conditional Access (CA) system.
Status - Current: indicates the status of the service component.
- Passed
- Blocked
- Blocked by System

4011746 Rev P 203


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

- Blocked by DPI
- Blocked by TS Rule
Input:
- Card: represents the interface card slot number of the port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the IP stream containing
the incoming Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, on which enters
the Transport Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service component belongs to.
- PID: represents the Packet Identifier of the incoming service components.
- Tag: represents the component tag from the Stream Identifier Descriptor in
the PMT.
- Type: represents the passing method of the component
Auto: the component is passed during service passing process or during
merging a service into an outgoing service.
Custom: the component is passed by merging the component into the
outgoing service individually.
Tracking Rule: contains the command button for the tracking rule action that can
be performed.
- Create Rule: command button used to auto-create a tracking rule for the
corresponding service component. The best tracking with highest priority for
the corresponding service component is chosen by default.
E.g. When a tracking rule is added after clicking on the Create Rule command
button in the row of an audio service component, a Stream Type tracking rule
is created with:
Tracking - Stream Type parameter: Audio (0x03)
Tracking - Language parameter: the language as defined in the language
descriptor
Output - SID parameter: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service to
which the component belongs to

204 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Output - PID parameter: the Packet Identifier of the incoming service


component if the PID is unique or a remapped PID if the PID is not unique
in the outgoing Transport Stream
Status - New: Passed
- Goto Rule: if a rule already exists for a service component, this command
button can be used to jump to and to highlight the row in the Component
Tracking Rules table containing the tracking rule for the corresponding
service component.

The following procedure explains how to check the settings of service components in
a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which service component settings must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page containing the Service Component
Settings table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Service Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing to the header.

4011746 Rev P 205


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tracking Rules

Introduction
Service component tracking rules are accommodated in the Component Tracking
Rules table for an outgoing Transport Stream.

The following ways can be used to create service component tracking rules:
By adding a default service component tracking rule.
By creating a service component tracking rule for a particular service component.
A component tracking rule will be added to the Component Tracking Rules table
containing defaults for best tracking with highest priority for the corresponding
service component.
By creating best match pass service component rules for all service components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for best match pass
tracking with highest priority.
By creating PID type pass rules service component rules for all service
components.
For each service component a service component tracking rule will be added to
the Component Tracking Rules table containing defaults for PID type pass
tracking with highest priority.

206 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Tips:
The status of the component tracking rule is shown in the Rule Status - Active
column.
Service component tracking rules can also be defined by executing the
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro via ROSA's Macro Component. For more
information please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 593.
Notes:
In the Component Tracking Rule table, a TS PID force rule using the same PID as
a PID level components tracking rule will be red colored.
A service component tracking rule adaptation mostly results in a PMT
adaptation, meaning each time a component tracking rule is added, changed, or
deleted and the Apply command button is pressed, the PMT will be updated.
Therefore it is advisable to modify (adding, creating, modifying, and deleting) the
complete set of component tracking rules before pressing the Apply command
button.
When multiple service components match a service component tracking rule, the
rule will only be applied to one service component. To deal with this, multiple
rules must be defined.

Adding a Tracking Rule


The following procedure describes how to add a service component tracking rule.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which service component tracking rules must be added.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 Click on the Add row command button at the bottom of the Component
Tracking Rules table
Result: A new row is created in the Component Tracking Rules table.
7 Modify the service component tracking rule as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking rules on page 209.

4011746 Rev P 207


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Creating a Tracking Rule for a Particular Service Component


The procedure below describes how to create a service component tracking rule for a
particular service component.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which a service component tracking rule for a particular
service component must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service - Component sub page.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Component Settings table, point to the Create Rule command
button in the row of the service component for which a tracking rule must be
created.
Result: A component tracking rule is added to the Component Tracking Rules table
containing defaults for best tracking with highest priority for the corresponding
service component.
7 Modify the service component tracking rule as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking Rules on page 209.

Creating Best Match Pass Rules for all Service Components


The following procedure explains how to create best match pass service component
tracking rules for all service components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which best match pass service component tracking rules for all
service components must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service - Component sub page.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the Service Components tab.

208 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.


6 Click on the For all Applicable Rows command button beside Create Best Match
Pass Rules box.
Result: The Component Tracking Rules table is filled with tracking rules for all
service components.
7 Modify the service component tracking rule as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking Rules on page 209.

Creating PID Type Pass Rules for all Service Components


The following procedure explains how to create PID type pass service component
tracking rules for all service components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which PID type pass service component tracking rules for all
service components must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service - Component sub page.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab is displayed.
6 Click on the For all Applicable Rows command button beside Create Best Match
Pass Rules box.
Result: The Component Tracking Rules table is filled with tracking rules for all
service components.
7 Modify the service component tracking rule as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking Rules on page 209.

Modifying Tracking Rules


The procedure below describes how to change a component tracking rule.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs for which service component tracking rules must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 209


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

4 Point to the Service - Component sub page.


Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the Tracking - Type drop down box of the Component Tracking Rules table,
select the component type that has to be used to define the tracking rule.
For Component Tag, enter the tag in the Tracking - Tag box.
For Stream Type, select the stream type in the Tracking - StreamType drop
down box.
When an audio stream type is chosen, the corresponding language can be
entered in the Tracking - Language box.
When User Defined is chosen, a stream type value can be given in the
Tracking - Stream Type Value box and a language in the Tracking -
Language box.
For ES PID or ECM PID, enter the PID of the incoming component in the
Input PID box.
For ES ECM PID, enter the PID of the incoming component in the Input PID
box and the PID of the outgoing elementary stream in the ES Output PID box.
7 In the Output - SID box, select the Service Identifier of the service to which the
service component must be passed or for which service the service component
must be blocked.
8 In the Output - PID box, enter a PID value for the outgoing service component if
required.
Note: The Output - PID parameter is only applicable if the Status - New parameter is
set to Pass.
9 In the Status - New drop down box select one of the following rule operations
Pass: the service component matching the component tracking rule will be
passed with PID remapping.
AutoPass: the service component matching the component tracking rule will
be passed, PID remapping will only be done to prevent PID collisions.
Block. the service component matching the component tracking rule will be
blocked.
10 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: A component tracking rule adaptation mostly results in a PMT adaptation,
meaning each time a component tracking rule is added, changed, or deleted and the
Apply command button is pressed, the PMT will be updated. Therefore it is
advisable to modify (adding, creating, and deleting) the complete set of component
tracking rules before pressing the Apply command button.

210 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Tip: A rule applied to a service component can be highlighted by pressing the Goto
Rule command button in the row of the corresponding component in the Service
Component Settings table.
Note: By changing rule parameters, the rule can be applied to another component,
e.g. when the Tracking - Type parameter is changed from ES PID to PCR, the rule
will be applied to the PCR of the service to which the component belongs.

Deleting Tracking Rules


The following steps explain how to delete tracking rules for service components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
service component tracking rules must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component sub page.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the Service Components tab.
Result: The Service Components tab page is displayed.
6 On the Service Components tab page, scroll to the Component Tracking Rules
table that can be found below the Service Components Settings table.

7 In the Component Tracking Rules table, tick the check box(es) in front of the
row(s) of the tracking rule(s) that must be removed.
Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Component Tracking Rules
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold
down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be
deleted.

4011746 Rev P 211


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

The rows in the Component Tracking Rules table can be sorted by a specific
parameter by pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle
between ascending and descending order by clicking on the parameter
header.
8 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: After pressing the Remove Checked Items command button, the selected
tracking rule rows are removed from the Component Tracking Rules table.

Tip: Service component tracking rules can also be removed by executing the
DCM.RemoveRules macro via ROSA's Macro Component. For more information
please refer to topic Using DCM Macros on page 593.

Defining Default Tracking Rules


During the passing process of services from the input to the output, the services can
automatically be provided with tracking rules with default values. When a service is
passed matching a default tracking rule, the tracking rule entry will be added to the
Component Tracking Rules table of the corresponding outgoing Transport Stream.
Default tracking rules are helpful:
For easy configuration when passing services or automatically pass services using
service auto pass rules: specify at board level which type of components of an
output service should be passed, all other components are blocked by default.
Disabling the service auto pass rules for the corresponding Transport Stream is
required.
E.g. Pass only video (component types 1 and 2) and audio (component types 3
and 4), block all other component types.
For easy configuration when passing services or automatically pass services using
service auto pass rules: specify at board level to block e.g. certain data
components. By default all other components will be passed. Enabling the service
auto pass rules for the corresponding Transport Stream is required.
When passing SPTSs to a GbE output, all component types can have the same
PID. E.g. video output PID 1000, audio is 1001, and teletext is 1002.
Notes:
When default AutoPass or Pass tracking rules are defined, it is advised to disable
the default service auto pass rules.
Default Transport Stream rules to pass/block all new components have lower
priority than component rules.
Conflicting board level rules are not allowed: e.g. it is not possible to pass and
block a certain component type or component tag, ... (same conflicts are also not
allowed for service component rules on Transport Stream level)

212 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

When a board level rule is created to e.g. autopass component type 0x4 and a
service is passed that has 2 components with component type 0x4, only one of
them will get passed (if Transport Stream rules specify that all components
should be blocked by default). Reason is that a rule can only be applied to one
component only.
The procedure to disable service auto pass rules can be found in topic Switching
On or Off Service Passing Rules on page 181.
The following steps explain how to add default tracking rules.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default tracking rules must be defined.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the TS tab.
Result: The TS tab page is displayed.
5 Click on the Add Row command button that is located below the Default
Tracking Rules table.
Result: An entry is added to the Default Tracking Rules table.

6 Modify the default tracking rule entry as described in sub topic Modifying
Tracking rules on page 209.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: A default tracking rule entry can be removed by ticking the check box of the
entry, pointing to the Remove Checked Rows command button, and clicking on the
Apply command button to confirm the operation.

4011746 Rev P 213


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

EMM Components
Introduction
In a Conditional Access System, the Entitlement Management Message Generator
(EMMG) offers the Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) via the EMMG to
MUX interface or via a Transport Stream. Both the EMMs entered via the EMMG to
MUX interface and the EMMs entered via a Transport Stream must be passed to the
corresponding outgoing Transport Stream. More information concerning Conditional
Access Systems can be found in chapter Scrambling on page 357.

Passing EMM Components


The following procedure explains how to pass EMM components to an outgoing
Transport Stream using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result - The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box, select EMM.
Result: The Input EMM, EMM Generated, Private Data, and Output Transport
Streams tables are displayed.

Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate the
EMM Generated table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream populate the
Input EMM table.
Tip: To sort the Input EMM, EMM Generated, or Output Transport Streams table
by a particular parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input EMM or EMM Generated table, set the check box(es) of the EMM
component(s) that must be passed.

214 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

4 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the EMM component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input EMM, EMM Generated,
and Output Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected EMM components are
passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes in the Input
EMM or EMM Generated table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport
Streams table will be cleared.

Checking the EMM Component Parameters


The following procedure explains how to check the parameters of the EMM
components passed to an outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which EMM
component parameters must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the EMM Components tab.
Result: The EMM Components tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 215


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tips:

- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
Note: The EMMs entering the DCM via the EMMG to MUX interface populate the
Generated EMMs table and the EMMs via an incoming Transport Stream populate
the EMMs table.

- EMMs table:
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM component.
Type: component type
Input - Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - Port: the port number of the incoming Transport Stream the EMM
component belongs to
Input - IP Address: the IP address of the device that streams the Transport
Stream to which the EMM component belongs to

216 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Input - UDP Port: the UDP port of the device that streams the Transport
Stream to which the EMM component belongs to
Input - ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
the EMM component belongs to
Input - TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the EMM component belongs to
Input - PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming EMM component
- Generated EMMs table
Output PID - Current: the current PID of the EMM component
Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the EMM component.
Type: component type
Input - Proxy Name: name of the EMM Generator as defined during the
configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA's SCS Configurator)
Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the EMM Generator
Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the EMM channel
Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the EMM stream
Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the EMM stream allocated
by the CAS.

Remapping EMM Components


The following procedure explains how to remap EMM components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which EMM
component(s) must be remapped.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the EMM Components tab.
Result: The EMM Components tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 217


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tips:

- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
6 In the row of the EMM component that should be remapped, tick the Output PID
- New check box.
7 Enter the new PID in the Output PID - New box. A value within the range 0 (0x0)
- 8190 (0x1FFE) can be entered.
Notes:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Removing EMM Components from an Outgoing Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to remove EMM components from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which EMM
component(s) must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.

218 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

4 Click on the Component link.


Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the EMM Components tab.
Result: The EMM Components tab page is displayed.
Tips:

- The EMM Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the
EMM Main node or EMM component in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing
to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the EMMs and Generated EMMs table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
6 In the EMMs and Generated EMMs table tick the check box, which is located
beside the Current column, of each EMM that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the EMMs and Generated EMMs
table, tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 219


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Private Data Components


Introduction
In a Conditional Access System a Private Data Generator (PDG) offers the Private
Data components via the PDG to MUX interface or via a Transport Stream. Private
Data components entering the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream must be
considered as unreferenced components. More information concerning unreferenced
components can be found in topic Passing and Removing Unreferenced Components on
page 226.

Passing Private Data Components


The following procedure explains how to pass private data components, which enter
the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface, to an outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box, select EMM.
Result: The Input EMM, EMM Generated, Private Data, and Output Transport
Streams tables are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Private Data and Output Transport Streams table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Private Data table, set the check box(es) of the Private Data component(s)
that must be passed.
4 In the Output PID box of the Private Data components that must be passed, enter
a unique PID value.

220 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

5 In the Output Transport Streams table, set the check box(es) of the outgoing
Transport Stream(s) to which the Private Data component(s) must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Private Data and Output
Transport Streams table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
6 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected Private Data
components are passed to the selected outgoing Transport Stream(s). All check boxes
in the Private Data table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transport Streams
table will be cleared.

Checking the Private Data Component Parameters


The following procedure explains how to check the parameters of the Private Data
components, which enter the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface and passed to an
outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which EMM
component(s) must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the TS Components tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 221


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Private Data main node or Private Data components of a Transport Stream in
the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to View Component Settings in the
short-cut menu.
- To sort the Private Data PIDs table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
The following Private Data component parameters can be checked:

- Output PID - Current: the current PID of the Private Data component
- Output PID - New: this parameter is used to remap the Private Data
component.
- Type: component type
- Input - Proxy Name: name of the Private Data Generator as defined during
the configuration process of the scrambling specific parameters of the DCM
(via ROSA's SCS Configurator)
- Input - Client ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data Generator
- Input - Channel ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data channel
- Input - Stream ID: a unique label to identify the Private Data stream
- Input - Data ID: a unique identifier to identify the Private Data stream
allocated by the CAS

222 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Remapping Private Data Components


The following procedure describes how to remap Private Data components, which
are offered to the DCM via the PDG to MUX interface.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which Private Data
component(s) must be remapped.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the TS Components tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.

Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Private Data components of a Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 223


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

- To sort the Private Data PIDs table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
6 In the Private Data PIDs table, enter a new PID in the Output PID - New box of
the Private Data component that must be remapped.
Notes:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Removing Private Data Components


The procedure below describes how to remove Private Date components, which enter
the DCM via the PGD to MUX interface, from an outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which Private Data
component(s) must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the TS Components tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.

224 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Private Data main node or Private Data components of a Transport Stream in
the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to View Component Settings in the
short-cut menu.
- To sort the Private Data PIDs table by a particular parameter, click on the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
6 In the Private Data PIDs table tick the check box, which is located beside the
Current column, of each Private Data component that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Private Data PIDs table, tick
the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT]
key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 225


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components


Passing Unreferenced Components

Introduction
When an incoming Transport Stream is passed by dragging and dropping the
complete Transport Stream to the output, only the services and components referred
to these services are passed. The components without reference in the PMT or CAT
table are not passed.
Passing non-service components to an outgoing Transport Streams can be done using
the PID Multiplexing or using the drag and drop method.
Note: Merging non-service components into an outgoing service can be done using
the Add Custom PID method. For more information please refer to topic Merging
Individual Components into an Outgoing Service on page 193.

To Pass Components Using PID Multiplexing


The following procedure explains how to pass unreferenced components to an
outgoing Transport Stream using PID Multiplexing.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which components
must be passed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 Click on the TS Component tab.
Result: The TS Component tab page is displayed.

226 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

6 Scroll to the PID Multiplexing table.

7 In the Input Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card that
receives the incoming Transport Stream to which the component belongs to.
8 In the Input Port drop down box, select the name of the input port that receives
the incoming Transport Stream to which the component belongs to.
9 In the Input Type drop down box, select the input port type, viz.:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
When a router is used between the streaming device and the DCM, the GbE
port receiving the stream must be joined to the multicast group.
10 In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop down box
is set to GbE Multicast.
11 In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down box is
set to ASI.
12 Multiple incoming components with consecutive PIDs can be passed and
remapped by defining an Insert PID Range. Perform the following additional
steps to pass and remap multiple incoming components.
a Tick the Insert PID Range check box.
Result: The First Input PID, Last Input PID, and First Output PID boxes
become applicable.
b In the First Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with the
lowest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.

4011746 Rev P 227


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

c In the Last Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component with the
highest PID value of the consecutive incoming components.
d In the First Output PID box, enter the PID of the component with the lowest
PID value.
Tip: When these components must be remapped, enter a new PID for the
component with the lowest PID value in the First Output PID box, after
pressing the Insert Range command button, the other components get a new
consecutive PID value.
e Press the Insert Range command button.
Result: The Input PID/Output PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table are cleared
and enlarged with the new passed components.
Notes:
Since the Input PID/Output PID rows are cleared after pressing the Insert
Range command button, these additional steps to pass and remap multiple
consecutive incoming component must be performed before individual
incoming components are passed and remapped.
When no individual incoming component must be passed, step 13 and 14 can
be omitted.
13 In the Input PID box, enter the PID of the incoming component that must be
passed to the output.
14 In the Output PID box, enter a new PID for the outgoing component.
Tip: Pressing the Insert Row command button creates additional Input PID/Output
PID rows in the PID Multiplexing table that can be used to pass multiple incoming
components.
15 Point to the Add command button to confirm the passing process.
Notes:
PIDs can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation, independent of
the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For more
information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Changing the
Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
- manual remapped SI tables
- manual remapped service components
- manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering the
DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX interface
- passed Transport Stream components

228 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

- passed Private Data components


- SI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent

To Pass Components Using the Drag and Drop Method


The following procedure explains how to pass unreferenced components to an
outgoing Transport Stream using the drag and drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the unreferenced component in the
Unreferenced PIDs main node of the incoming Transport Stream.
3 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Unreferenced PIDs main node of the
outgoing Transport Stream in which the component must be dropped.
4 Select the icon of the incoming unreferenced component and drag and drop this
component to the icon of the Unreferenced PIDs main node of the outgoing
Transport Stream.

Note: Components within incoming services can also be dragged and dropped to the
Unreferenced PIDs main node of an outgoing Transport Stream. When the dropped
service component has a reference in the PMT or CAT of the Transport Stream (the
dropped component is already present into a service) the component will be forced to
its original value and added to the TS Component Settings table.

4011746 Rev P 229


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Remapping Unreferenced Components

Introduction
The DCM avoids PID collisions at its output by remapping conflicting PID values
automatically. PID remapping can also be done manually by means of the web
browser user interface.

To Remap Unreferenced Components


The following procedure explains how to remap unreferenced components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
components should be remapped.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 Click on the TS Component tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.

230 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Unreferenced PIDs main node or Unreferenced components of a Transport
Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to View Component Settings
in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the TS Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
6 Enter the new PID in the Output PID box.
Note:
The new PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent of the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by
0x. For more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic
Changing the Display Mode on page 92.
PID value 8191 (0x1FFF) cannot be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) entering
the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the EMMG to MUX
interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PSI tables of which the generation mode is set to Transparent
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

To Check the Settings of Unreferenced Components


Perform the following steps to check the settings of unreferenced components.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
Transport Stream component belong.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 231


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 Click on the TS Component tab.


Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.

Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Unreferenced PIDs main node or Unreferenced components of a Transport
Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and pointing to View Component Settings
in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the TS Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
Note: The TS Components Settings table is also populated with the manually
remapped service components and the manual remapped EMMs.
The following parameters can be found in the TS Component Settings table.
Output PID
Current: the packet identifier of the outgoing component. This packet
identifier (PID) is by default equal to the packet identifier of the incoming
component. When two incoming components with the same PID are
passed to the output, one of the outgoing components gets a new unique
PID.
New: the PID of the outgoing component. This parameter can be used for
component remapping purposes.
Type: represents the kind of component passing.

232 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Input
Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to which the
component belongs
Port: the port number of the incoming Transport Stream the component
belongs to
IP Address: the IP address of the destination port to which the Transport
Stream, to which the incoming components belongs, streams.
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the of the destination port to which
the Transport Stream, to which the incoming components belongs,
streams.
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream the
component belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to which
the component belongs
PID: the Packet Identifier of the incoming component

Removing Components
The following procedure explains how to remove unreferenced components from the
output.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which components
must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 Click on the TS Component tab.
Result: The TS Components tab page is displayed.
Tips:

- The TS Components tab page can also be opened by right-clicking on the


Private Data components of a Transport Stream in the DCM Outputs tree and
pointing to View Component Settings in the short-cut menu.
- To sort the TS Component Settings table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
6 Tick the check box(es) for the unreferenced component(s) that should be
removed.

4011746 Rev P 233


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Components Settings table,
tick the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press to the Remove command button.

234 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Adding and Modifying PMT Descriptors


Introduction
The inner loop descriptors as well as the outer loop descriptors of a PMT are
categorized in the PMT Settings table on the Service - SI Table - PMT sub page of
the corresponding outgoing service. The following picture depicts such Service - SI
Table - PMT sub page.

4011746 Rev P 235


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

In both the inner and outer loop of a PMT descriptors can be added by creating
individual descriptor entries via the web browser user interface or by importing
descriptor files. Descriptor files can be created by for instance ROSA SI Editor Task.
Individually added descriptors and descriptors imported via descriptor files can
easily be removed. Descriptors passed during the service passing process can be
removed by defining PMT rule entries (called descriptor removal rules). Descriptors
matching descriptor removal rules will be removed. Descriptor removal rules can be
created for inner loop descriptors as well as for outer loop descriptors.
The order of the inner loop and outer loop descriptors can be changed by creating
PMT rule entries (called descriptor order rules). Each descriptor order rule has a
criterion consisting of descriptor Tag and optionally descriptor content bytes. The
descriptor matching the first rule will be first in the PMT, descriptors matching the
second rule, second, etc... The order of the descriptors within the PMT depends on
the order of the descriptor order rules.
Note: These settings are only used when the Output - Mode for the PMT is set to
Generated or Transparent Generated. The rules can be applied to PMTs generated by
the DCM as well as PMTs imported by a PSIG.

Adding Descriptors Manually


Descriptors can be added to the list of outer loop descriptors or to a list of inner loop
descriptors. For adding an inner loop descriptor, the PID of the corresponding
component must be given. Perform the following steps to add descriptors manually.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptors must be added.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors must be added.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.

236 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

7 In the Add PMT Descriptor table complete the following settings:

a In the Name box, enter a name for the descriptor.


b In the PID box, enter the PID of the component to which the descriptor must
be added (inner loop descriptor). When no PID is entered, the descriptor will
be added to the outer loop of the PMT.
c In the Tag box, enter the tag for the descriptor.
Notes:
The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
A list of descriptors can be found in ETSI EN 300 468.
d In the Data box, enter the data string for the descriptor.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
e Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The Descriptor is added to the PMT Descriptor table.
8 Continue adding descriptors by performing step 6 or press the Apply command
button to add the descriptor(s) to the PMT.

Importing Descriptors from a File


A descriptor file created by for instance ROSA's SI Editor Task can easily be
imported. After importing such file the descriptors are added to the corresponding
descriptor lists. After importing the file, for each descriptor a row is added to the
PMT descriptors table; the name and PID parameters are configurable. Descriptors
already part of a list are not removed and descriptors exactly matching are not added
twice. The following steps describe how to import descriptors from a file.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptors must be imported.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 237


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors must be imported.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Add PMT Descriptor table, tick the Import Data From File check box.

8 Point to the Browse... command button that appears after ticking the Import Data
From File check box.
Result: The Choose file dialog is displayed.
9 Browse to the descriptor file and select this file.
10 Click on the Open command button.
Result: The Choose file dialog is closed and the path and file name appear in the
Data File box.
11 Press the Add Row command button.
12 Click on the Apply command button.

Removing Descriptors Manually


Perform the following procedure to remove descriptors manually.
Note: Only manually added descriptors and descriptors imported from a file can be
removed using following procedure.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptors must be removed.

238 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and


point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT from which descriptors must be removed.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the PMT Descriptor table, tick the check box of the row of the descriptor(s) that
must be removed.

Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the PMT Descriptor table, tick the check
box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in the PMT Descriptor table can be sorted by a specific parameter by
pointing to the column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending
and descending order by clicking on the parameter header.
8 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button.

4011746 Rev P 239


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Removing Descriptors Using PMT Rules


PMT rules can be created to remove inner loop and outer loop descriptors. These
descriptor removal rules can be used to remove descriptors passed during the service
passing process
Note: Manually created descriptors and descriptors imported via a file cannot be
removed by using descriptor removal rules.
The following steps explain how to create descriptor removal rules.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptor removal rules must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors removal rules must be created.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Add PMT descriptor Rule table, complete the following settings:

a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Removal to create a removal rule
for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Removal to create a removal rule
for outer loop descriptors.
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.

240 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Notes:
The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
These bytes are the first bytes of the descriptor and are optionally in
the rule.
d Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules or
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table depending on the type selection.

8 Continue adding descriptor removal rules by performing step 6 or press the


Apply command button to confirm the operation.

Ordering Descriptors Using PMT Rules


PMT Rules can also be created to order the inner loop and outer loop descriptors
within a PMT. The descriptor order in the PMT depends on the descriptor rule and
the order of the rule in the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules or Inner Loop
Descriptor Order Rules table.
The following steps explain how to order descriptors in the PMT using PMT rules.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
descriptor order rules must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 241


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which descriptors order rules must be created.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Add PMT Descriptor Rule table, complete the following settings:

a In the Type drop down box, select Inner Loop Order to create a descriptor order
rule for inner loop descriptors or select Outer Loop Order to create a rule for
outer loop descriptors.
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
d Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules or Inner
Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.

Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing the
arrow in the Order column of the rule.
8 Continue adding descriptor order rules by performing step 6 or press the Apply
command button to confirm the operation.

242 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Removing PMT Rules


The following procedure explains how to remove PMT rules.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which PMT
rules must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab page.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the PMT for which PMT rules must be removed.
Result: The PSI information of the selected PMT is displayed.
Tip: The Service - SI Table - PMT sub page containing the PSI information of a
particular PMT is also accessible via the arrow in the PMT column of the Service
Settings table on the Settings tab page on the Service - Service sub page.
7 In the Rules table for which PMT rules must be removed, tick the rows of the
rules that must be removed.

Tips:
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in a Rules table, tick the check box of the
first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and tick the
check box of the last row that must be deleted.

4011746 Rev P 243


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

The rows in a Rules table can be sorted by a specific parameter by pointing to the
column header of this parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by clicking on the parameter header.
8 Click on the corresponding Remove Checked Rows command button.

Changing the Default PMT Descriptor Rule Parameters


During the creation process of outgoing Transport Streams, default descriptor rules
can be added. The following procedure describes how to add default descriptor
rules.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the icon of the interface card for
which the default setting must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the PMT tab.
Result: The PMT tab page is displayed.
5 In the Add PMT Setting table complete the following settings:

a In the Type drop down box, select one of the following values:
Inner Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for inner loop descriptors
Outer Loop Removal: to create a removal rule for outer loop descriptors
Inner Loop Order: to create a descriptor order rule for inner loop
descriptors
Outer Loop Order: to create a rule for outer loop descriptors
b In the Tag box, enter the tag that must be used to make a descriptor selection
based on tag.
Note: The value for this parameter can be entered using the decimal or
hexadecimal notation. A hexadecimal notation must be prefixed by 0x.
c In the Bytes box, enter the bytes that must be used to make a descriptor
selection based on bytes.
Note: The value for this parameter can only be entered using its hexadecimal
notation and cannot be prefixed by 0x.
d Press the Add command button.

244 4011746 Rev P


Passing, Blocking, and Remapping Components

Result: The rule is added to the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules,
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules,
or Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table depending on the type selection.

Note: The order of the rules in both the Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules
and Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table can be changed by pressing the
arrow in the Order column of the rule.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.
Note: Entries in the Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules, Inner Loop Descriptor
Removal Rules, Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules, or Inner Loop Descriptor
Order Rules table can be removed by ticking the check box in front of the entry and
pressing the Remove Checked Rows command button.

4011746 Rev P 245


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Modifying PSI/SI Information


Viewing PSI/SI Information
Introduction
The PSI/SI information for both the incoming and the outgoing Transport Streams
can be displayed using the web browser user interface of the DCM.
Note: DCM with software package version 5.1 allows viewing the information of
incoming and outgoing PAT, CAT, PMT, NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, BAT, EITa pf,
EITo pf, EITa sch, EITo sch, TDT, and TOT.

To View the PSI Data of Incoming Transport Streams


The following procedure explains how to view the PSI/SI of incoming Transport
Streams.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which
service information must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the SI View link.
Result: The Service - SI View sub page of the selected incoming Transport Stream is
displayed.
5 Perform the following steps to display the required PSI information.
a In the Add Table drop down box, select the table for which information must
be checked.
b For a PMT, select the service in the Service drop down box.
c For a NITo, enter the Network Identifier (TS ID) in the Network ID box.
d For an SDTo, enter the Original Network Identifier (ON ID) in the ON ID box
and the Transport Stream identifier in the TS ID box.
e For a BAT, enter the Bouquet identifier in the Bouquet ID box.
f For an EITa pf table, select the corresponding service in the Service drop
down box.
g For an EITo pf table, enter the ON ID, TS ID, and Service Identifier (SID) in the
corresponding boxes.

246 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

h For an EITa sch table, select the corresponding service in the Service drop
down box and the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box beside
the Table drop down box.
i For an EITo sch table, enter the ON ID, TS ID, and SID in the corresponding
boxes and select the corresponding table identifier in the drop down box
beside the Table drop down box.
j Press the Add command button.
Result: The selected table is added to the SI Table In Tree table and the data
added to the SI Tree.

Note: Some tables, like PAT, CAT, PMT, and SDTa, are immediately added to
the tree. Other tables will get the status Pending. Pressing the Reload
command button change the status to Loaded (success) or Not Found (failure).
Tips:
You can browse through the SI Tree by expanding and collapsing
branches.
A table can be removed from the user interface by ticking the check box of
the corresponding PSI/SI table in the SI Table In Tree table and clicking
on the Remove Checked Items command button.
A PSI/SI table can be refreshed by clicking on the corresponding Reload
command button in the row of the corresponding table.
All PSI/SI tables can be refreshed by clicking on the Reload All command
button.
6 Repeat step 5 for all PSI that must be displayed.

4011746 Rev P 247


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

To View the PSI Data of Outgoing Transport Streams


The following steps describe how to view PSI of outgoing Transport Streams.
Note: PSI/SI can not be checked when the Output-Mode parameter of the table is set
to Stop.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
PSI/SI must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Components sub page is displayed.
5 In the Components sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the table that must be checked.
Result: The PSI/SI information of the selected table is displayed in the SI Tree.

248 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Tip: You can browse through the PSI/SI information by expanding and collapsing
branches.

4011746 Rev P 249


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing the PSI/SI Generation Mode


Introduction
When the PSI/SI output mode of a table is set to Generate, the table is by default
regenerated by the DCM. When this PSI/SI information is offered by a third-part
device via an ASI or GbE port, the received SI-information can be passed to an
outgoing Transport Stream without PSI/SI information regeneration by changing the
PSI/SI output mode to Transparent. In this case the DCM requires the input
identification settings of this PSI/SI information.
In a Conditional Access System this PSI/SI Information can be offered to the DCM by
a PSI/SI Generator (PSIG) via the PSIG To MUX interface. If a PSIG inserts a table via
the management interface of the DCM, the PSI/SI output mode is automatically set to
Transparent Generated.
When an outgoing Transport Stream doesn't need particular PSI/SI information, the
PSI/SI output mode can be set to Stop.
Note: Other PSI/SI tables can be passed without regeneration by using PID
multiplexing. The procedure to pass components using PID Multiplexing can be
found in topic Passing and Removing Transport Stream Components on page 226.

To Change the PSI/SI Output Mode


The following steps explain how to change the PSI/SI output mode of a table.
Note: To reduce the parameter adaptations during the configuration of the DCM, the
default value of the PSI/SI Output mode for the PAT, CAT, PMT, SDTa, EIT
present/following, EIT schedule first 8 days, EIT schedule after 8 days, TDT, and
TOT can be changed. The procedure to change the default PSI/SI output mode for
these tables is described in topic Changing the Default PSI/SI Output Mode on page 253.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the
regeneration mode of a PSI/SI table must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Components sub page is displayed.
5 In the Components sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings table is
displayed.

250 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Tips:
To sort the SI Table Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
The EIT entry population in the SI Table Settings table can be reduced by
using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
Exclude EIT and others: no EIT tables and no 'other' tables (tables referring
to another Transport Stream) are displayed (used by default).
EIT only for <service>: only the EIT tables for the corresponding service
will be displayed.
Show All Other: all 'other' tables (tables referring to another Transport
Stream) are displayed.
Show All Actual: all tables referring to this Transport Stream are displayed.
6 In the Output - Mode drop down box, select the desired generation mode.
Generate
Transparent
Transparent Generated
Stop
Note: When the generation mode is set to Transparent, the input identification
settings of the stream containing the SI settings must be given.
a In the Input - Card drop down box, select the name of the interface card
receiving the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI information belongs.
b In the Input - Port drop down box, select the name of the input port used to
receive the Transport Stream to which the PSI/SI information belongs.
c In the Input - Type drop down box, select the input port type, viz.:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for an GbE Multicast input port
d In the Input - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input - IP Address box is only applicable if the Input - Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.

4011746 Rev P 251


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

e In the Input - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port
receiving the Transport Stream.
Note: The Input - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input - Type drop
down box is set to ASI.
f In the Input - PID box, enter the PID of the PSI information.
Notes:
For the PMT, a PID between 0 (0x0) and 31 (0x1F) can not be used.
PIDs occupied by the following components can not be used:
manual remapped SI tables
manual remapped service components
manual remapped Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs)
entering the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream and via the
EMMG to MUX interface
passed Transport Stream components
passed Private Data components
PIDs occupied by PSI/SI tables for which the generation mode is set to
Transparent cannot be used except when the PIDs of the incoming PSI/SI
tables are identical.
7 Point to the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip:
The arrow in the View column of the SI Table Settings table can be used to
display the PSI/SI information of the corresponding table.
When Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparently Generated and no
PSIG data is available for the table, the table will be generated. When the PSIG
data becomes available, the table will be generated with this information. In case
of a NITa, an empty section will be added.
Modifying the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables to a particular
value can be done in one step by selecting the operation in the Mode drop down
box in the EIT sch TS settings table and pointing to the Apply to EIT command
button.

These operations are:

- Stop All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Stop.
- Generate All EITa p/f: the Mode parameter for all EITa present/following sub
tables is set to Generate.

252 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

- Stop All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is set to
Stop.
- Generate All EITa sch: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule sub tables is
set to Generate.
- Generate EITa sch first 8 days: the Mode parameter for all EITa schedule first 8
days tables are set to Generate.
Notes:
When the Output - Mode parameter of a table is set to Transparent, all tables on
this PID will be transparently passed, even if not indicated in the user interface.
When tables are offered to a DCM by a PSIG, tables unknown by the DCM can be
imported which are not normally available on the DCM (e.g. SDTo, NITo, BAT,
etc.). Importing a PMT of a service unknown by the DCM is also possible. Such
tables are labeled with Import Only and the Output - Mode parameter can only be
set to Generated or Transparently Generated.

Changing the Default PSI/SI Output Mode


The following procedure describes how to change the default PSI/SI output mode for
the PAT, CAT, PMT, SDTa, EITa/o present/following, EITa/o schedule first 8 days,
EITa/o schedule after 8 days, TDT, and TOT.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default PSI/SI output mode should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the SI Table tab.
Result: The SI Table tab page containing the Default SI Table Playout table is
displayed.

4011746 Rev P 253


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

5 In the Generation column of the Default SI Table playout table, select the
desired mode for the corresponding table.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

254 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Changing the PSI/SI Table Playout Rate


Introduction
During the Transport Stream creating process and service passing process, the
playout interval parameter for the PAT, CAT, PMT, NIT actual, NIT other, SDT
actual, SDT other, BAT, EITa/o present/following, EITa/o schedule first 8 days,
EITa/o schedule after 8 days, TDT, and TOT gets default values. The table below
shows the minimum, maximum, and default values for the PSI/SI playout interval
parameters.

Table PSI/SI Table Playout Rate (ms)


Minimum Default Maximum
PAT 100 500 60000
CAT 100 500 60000
PMT 100 500 60000
NITa 100 10000 60000
NITo 100 10000 60000
SDTa 100 2000 60000
SDTo 100 10000 60000
BAT 100 10000 60000
EITa p/f 100 2000 60000
EITo p/f 100 10000 60000
EITa sch first 8 days 100 10000 60000
EITa sch after 8 days 100 10000 60000
EITo sch first 8 days 100 30000 60000
EITo sch after 8 days 100 30000 60000
TDT 100 30000 60000
TOT 100 30000 60000

These values can be changed for a particular Transport Stream or for all Transport
Streams on a particular port.
Tip: To reduce the number of parameter adaptations, the default playout interval
values can be changed. The procedure to change these default values can be found in
topic Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters on page 258.
Note: When a table is imported (PSIG) and the PSIG has specified a playout rate for
this table, the playout rate specified by the PSIG will be used. This setting will be
used when the PSIG does not specify a playout rate.

4011746 Rev P 255


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing PSI/SI Table Playout Interval for a Particular Transport Stream


The following procedure describes how to change PSI/SI table playout interval
parameters for a particular Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which PSI/SI table
playout interval values must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service -TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings and SI Table
Playout tables is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Playout table, change the Interval (ms) parameter for the table(s)
for which the playout interval must be changed.

256 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Changing PSI/SI Table Playout Interval Values for all Transport Streams on a Particular Port
Perform the following steps to change PSI/SI table playout interval values for all
Transport Stream on a particular port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port for which PSI/SI table playout
interval values for all Transport Streams must be changed.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click this port and point to View Port Settings
in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected port is displayed.
4 Click on the TS SI Playout sub page.
Result: The Service - TS SI Playout sub page containing the SI Table Playout table is
displayed.

5 In the SI Table Playout table, change the Interval (ms) parameter for the table(s)
for which the playout interval must be changed.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 257


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Note: Since an ASI port only accepts one outgoing Transport Stream, this procedure
is not applicable for an ASI port.

Changing the Default Playout Interval Parameters


The following procedure describers how to change the default values for the PSI/SI
table playout interval parameters.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default values for the PSI/SI table playout interval parameters should be
changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page, point to the SI Table tab.
Result: The SI Table tab page containing the Default SI Table Playout table is
displayed.

5 In the Default SI Table Playout table, enter the desired value in the Interval (ms)
box of the corresponding PSI/SI table.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

258 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Determining the Network PID Insertion into the PAT


Introduction
For the Network PID insertion into the PAT, three different modes can be used, viz.:
Enabled: The Network PID will always be inserted, even when the NITa is not
present.
Disabled: No Network PID will be inserted.
Automatic: The Network PID will be inserted when the NITa is not blocked.
When most of the new created Transport Streams must have the same Network PID
insertion mode, the configuration of the DCM can be facilitated by setting a default
value for this parameter. The procedure to set this default value can be found in topic
To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for New Created Transport Streams on page 260.

To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for a Particular Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to set the Network PID insertion mode for a
particular Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the Network
PID insertion mode must be set.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page containing the SI Table Settings and SI Table
Playout table is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, click on the View arrow in the PAT row.
Result: The PAT information sub page for the corresponding outgoing Transport
Stream is displayed.
7 In the Mode drop down box under the NIT in PAT table, select the desired mode,
viz.: Auto, Disabled, or Enabled.

8 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 259


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

To Set the Network PID Insertion Mode for New Created Transport Streams
The following procedure explains how to set the Network PID insertion mode for
new created Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
Network PID insertion mode for new created Transport Stream must be set.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Click on the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page for the selected interface card
is displayed.
4 In the Configuration - Default Settings sub page point to the SI Table tab.
Result: The Default SI Table Playout and Default Nit in Pat table are displayed.
5 Under the Default NIT in PAT table, select the desired mode in the Mode drop
down box.

6 Click on the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

260 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Remapping PSI-Tables
Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows remapping the PAT, CAT, NITa,
NITo, SDTa, SDTo, EITa/o present/following, EITa/o schedule first 8 days, EITa/o
schedule after 8 days, BAT, TDT, and TOT to a value between 0 (0x0) and 8190
(0x1FFE) and the PMT to a value between 32 (0x20) and 8190 (0x1FFE).
Notes:
Remapping of an SI table to a PID occupied by a manual remapped component is
not allowed but remapping to a PID that is occupied by an SI table is allowed.
Remapping of an SI table to a PID occupied by an SI Table, for which the SI
Generation mode is set to Transparent, is not allowed.
Remapping of other SI tables can be done using the procedure describes in topic
Passing and/or Remapping Non-Service Components on page 226.

To Remap an SI Table
The following procedure describes how to remap an SI table.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which an SI table
should be remapped.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed containing the SI Table Settings
table.

4011746 Rev P 261


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Note: The EIT entry population in the SI Table Settings table can be reduced by
using filters ( ). The following list shows these filters:
Exclude EIT and others: no EIT tables and no 'other' tables (tables referring to
another Transport Stream) are displayed (used by default).
EIT only for <service>: only the EIT tables for the corresponding service will be
displayed.
Show All Other: all 'other' tables (tables referring to another Transport Stream)
are displayed.
Show All Actual: all tables referring to this Transport Stream are displayed.
6 Tick the Output - PID check box in the row of the SI table that must be remapped
and enter the new PID in the Output - PID box.
Note: The PID can be entered using the decimal or hexadecimal notation,
independent on the display mode. A hexadecimal value must be prefixed by 0x. For
more information concerning the display mode, please refer to topic Default Values
for Settings of Incoming Transport Streams.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

262 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Changing SDT Settings for a Particular Service


Introduction
The Service Descriptor Table (SDT) is used to list the names and other parameters of
services within a Transport Stream. An SDT (SDT actual) for the services in the actual
Transport Stream is mandatory, an SDT (SDT Other) for services in another
Transport Stream is optional in a compliant DVB Transport Stream.
The web browser user interface allows changing the following service settings in the
SDT Actual:
SDT
- Input: indicates the presence of an incoming SDT for the service.
- Output: determine the outgoing SDT for the service. Possible values are:
Force Output: the SDT of the incoming service will be passed to the
outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are determined by
the values of the following parameters. If the SDT for the incoming
service is absent, a SDT will be created for the outgoing Service. Default
values will then be used for all parameters set to Transparent.
Follow Input: the SDT of the incoming service will be passed to the
outgoing service. The parameters of the outgoing table are determined by
the values of the following parameters. No SDT will be provided for the
outgoing service if the SDT for the incoming service is absent.
Name
- Input: indicates the name of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the name of the outgoing service.
Service Type
- Input: indicates the type of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Service Type parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. Possible values are: Transparent, DigitalTV, FmRadio, Ntsc,
DataBroadcast, RcsMap, RcsFls, DvBMhp, Mpeg2 HD, DigitalRadio, SD DigitalTv,
SD NVOD Time Shifted, SD NVOD Reference, HD DigitalTv, HD NVOD Time
Shifted, HD NVOD Reference, Teletext, NVOD Reference, NVOD Time Shifted,
Mosaic, Pal, Secam, and Dd2Mac.

4011746 Rev P 263


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

EIT Schedule Flag


- Input: indicates the presence of EIT Schedule information for the service in
the incoming Transport Stream.
- Output: determines the EIT Schedule Flag parameter in the SDT actual for
the outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Present,
and Not Present.
EIT Present/Following
- Input: indicates the availability of EIT present/following information for the
service in the incoming Transport Stream.
- Output: determines the EIT Present/Following parameter in the SDT actual
for the outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Present,
and Not Present.
Running Status
- Input: indicates the status of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Running Status parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Start Soon,
Pausing, Running, Future, and Not Running.
Free CA Mode:
- Input: indicated that all components within the incoming service are
scrambled or not.
- Output: determines the Free CA Mode parameter in the SDT actual for the
outgoing service. The following values can be set: Transparent, Not Scrambled,
and Scrambled.
Service Provider Name
- Input: indicates the name of the service provider of the incoming service.
- Output: determines the Service Provider Name parameter in the SDT actual
for the outgoing service.
Notes:
When a parameter is set to Transparent, the parameter in the SDT actual of the
outgoing service will be copied from the SDT actual of the incoming service.
If no SDT Actual section for a service is present in the SDT Actual of the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service belongs, a section for this service can be
inserted in the SDT Actual of the outgoing Transport Stream.
These parameters will only be used when the Output - Mode parameter for the
SDT is set to Generate.

264 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

To Change SDT Settings


The following procedure explains how to change the parameters of the outgoing SDT
Actual for a particular service.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which the SDTa of
a service must be adapted.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.
Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Component sub page, point to the SI Components tab.
Result: The SI Components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, click on the arrow in the View column of the row
of the SDTa table.
Result: The SDTa information is displayed.
7 In the Service drop down box, select the service for which the SDTa must be
adapted.
Result: The SDT Settings table for the selected service is displayed.

8 Set the Name check box to rename the service and enter a new name in the Name
box.
9 In the SDT, Service Type, EIT Schedule Flag, EIT Present/Following, Running
Status, and Free CA Mode drop down box, select the desired values.
10 Set the Service Provider Name check box to rename the service provider and
enter a new name in the Service Provider Name box.

4011746 Rev P 265


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

11 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

266 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Adding or Removing Time Offset Descriptors to or from a TOT


To Add Time Offset Descriptors
The following steps explain how to add a Time Offset Descriptor to a TOT.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link that
appears after pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a Time
Offset Descriptor must be added to the TOT.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
Result: The TS or TS/TR tab page is displayed.
5 Click on the Configure TOT arrow in the TS Settings table.
Result: The Service - SI Table - TOT sub page is displayed.
6 In the Add Time Offset Descriptor table, modify the following parameters:

a In the Country Code drop down box, select the country to which the
descriptor applies.
b In the Region ID box, enter the identifier of the time zone in the country to
which the descriptor applies.
c In the Time Zone box, select the time zone to which the country belongs to.
All other parameters of the Add Time Offset Descriptor are determined on the basis
of these parameters.
7 Press the Add Row command button.
Result: The descriptor is added to the Local Time Offset Descriptor table.

4011746 Rev P 267


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

8 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Note: These settings will only be used when the Output - Mode parameter for the
TOT is set to Generate.

Removing Time Offset Descriptors


The following procedure explains how to remove a Time Offset Descriptor, which is
created using the DCM GUI, from a TOT.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link that
appears after pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a Time
Offset Descriptor must be removed from the TOT.
3 Double-click on the Transport Stream or right-click on the Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS or TS/TR tab.
Result: The TS or TS/TR tab page is displayed.
5 Click on the Configure TOT arrow in the TS Settings table.
Result: The Service - SI Table - TOT sub page is displayed.
6 In the Local Time Offset Descriptor table, set the check box(es) of the
descriptor(s) that must be removed.

7 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.


Result: The selected descriptor(s) is (are) removed from the Local Time Offset
Descriptor table.

268 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Exporting and Importing PSI


Introduction
PSI from an incoming or outgoing Transport Stream can be exported to the hard disk
of your PC. This information can then be opened by using ROSA's SI Editor Task.
Note: DCM with software package version 5.1 allows exporting the information of
the incoming and outgoing PAT, CAT, PMT, NITa, NITo, SDTa, SDTo, EITa/o
present/following, EITa/o schedule, BAT, TDT, and TOT.
PSI can be created or edited by ROSA's SI Editor task, importing this information into
the DCM can be done by ROSA's SI Distributor task.
Note: When a PMT is imported for an outgoing Transport Stream and the associated
service is not present in this Transport Stream, this PMT will be played out. This
PMT will be handled as a TS component and can't be edited. This can be useful to
create an outgoing Transport Stream by passing individual service components to the
outgoing Transport Stream (passed to the unreferenced PID node) and importing the
required PSI. No advanced processing (like transrating, scrambling, etc...) can be
done to such Transport Stream.

To Export PSI from Incoming Transport Streams


Perform the following steps to export PSI from incoming Transport Streams.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which
service information must be exported.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the SI View link.
Result: The Service - SI View sub page of the selected incoming Transport Stream is
displayed.
5 In the Table drop down box, select the table for which information must be
exported.

4011746 Rev P 269


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

6 For a PMT, select the service in the Service drop down box.

7 Point to the Export to File command button.


Result: The File Download dialog is displayed.
8 Point to the Save command button.
Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.
Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.
9 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.
10 Click on the Save command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.
Note: Some tables (for instance PAT, CAT, PMT) are immediately added to the tree.
Other tables will get the status Pending. Pressing the Reload command button change
the status to Loaded (success) or Not Found (failure).

To Export PSI from Outgoing Transport Streams


The following procedure explains how to export PSI from an outgoing Transport
Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which PSI
information must be exported.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Component link.

270 4011746 Rev P


Modifying PSI/SI Information

Result: The Service - Component sub page is displayed.


5 In the Service - Component sub page, click on the SI components tab.
Result: The SI components tab page is displayed.
6 In the SI Table Settings table, point to the arrow in the View column on the row
of the table that must be exported.
7 Point to the Export command button.
Result: The File Download dialog is displayed.
8 Point to the Save command button.
Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.
Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.
9 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.
10 Click on the Save command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 271


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Changing Service Parameters


Introduction
The settings of outgoing services are categorized on the Service - Service sub page by
using tab pages, viz.:
Routing tab page: This tab page shows the service routing of an outgoing
Transport Stream. This page can also be used for deleting services from an
outgoing Transport Stream (see topic Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport
Stream on page 285).
Settings tab page: This tab page can be used to change the service identifier (SID),
service name and/or service definition parameter (SD or HD) of services
belonging to a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
Scrambling tab page: This tab page can be used to configure the scrambling
specific parameters of services belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream. For
more information about scrambling, please refer to chapter Scrambling on page
357.
Transrating tab page: This tab page can be used to configure the transrating
specific parameters of services belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream. More
information about transrating can be found in chapter Transrating on page 295.
DPI tab page: This tab page can be used to configure Splice Channels for services
of an outgoing Transport Stream. For more information about Digital Program
Insertion, please refer to chapter Digital Program Insertion on page 339.
Note: The Routing, Setting, and Scrambling tab page can also be used for adding
preconfigured services to an outgoing Transport Stream. More information
concerning preconfiguring services can be found in topic Preconfiguring Services on
page 178.

To Check the Service Routings for a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream


The following procedure describes how to check service routings for an outgoing
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
service settings must be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.

272 4011746 Rev P


Changing Service Parameters

4 Point to the Service link.


Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Routings tab.
Result: The Routings tab page containing the Service Routings table is displayed.

The Service Routings table provides the following information.


Output - SID: the service identifier (SID) of the outgoing service. The SID of
an outgoing service is by default equal to the SID of the incoming service.
When two incoming services with same SID are passed to the output, one of
the outgoing services gets a new unique SID.
Output - Name: the name of the outgoing service. The name of an outgoing
service is by default equal to the name of the incoming service.
Input -Card: the interface card of the incoming Transport Stream to which the
service belongs to
Input -Port: the port of the incoming Transport Stream to which the service
belongs to
Input -IP Address: the IP address of the destination device
Input -UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device
Input -ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs to
Input -TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream to which the service belongs to
Input -SID: Service Identifier of the incoming service
Input -Name: Name of the incoming service
Input - Backup: Link to the Backup Services sub page

4011746 Rev P 273


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

To Change the Settings of Outgoing Services


The following procedure explains how to change the service identifier (SID), service
name and/or service definition parameter (SD or HD) of a particular outgoing
service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
service settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Settings tab.
Result: The Settings tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Settings table, modify the following settings if required.

a In the Forced SID column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the SID must be modified and enter the new SID in the corresponding
box.
b In the Forced Name column, tick the check box of the row of the service for
which the name must be modified and enter the new name in the
corresponding box.
c In the SD/HD drop down box of the corresponding row, select the definition
of the service.
7 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tips:
Pressing the arrow in the PMT or SDT column opens a sub page containing the
corresponding table information of the service.

274 4011746 Rev P


Changing Service Parameters

The Merged column indicates if a service is merged into the outgoing service.
When a service is merged, Yes with an arrow appears in the Merged column of
the corresponding service row. Pressing this arrow opens the Service - Service -
Merge Detail sub page. For more information about merged services, please
refer to topic Merging Components on page 190.
Note: After clearing the Forced SID check box, the service will not be remapped to its
original value, you have to change the SID manually as described in the procedure
above.

To Change Scrambling Settings of Outgoing Services


This topic describes how to modify the scrambling specific parameters for an
outgoing service. These parameters are:
Scrambling parameter
Before a service or components within a service can be scrambled, the scrambling
parameter of the service must be set to Scrambled Allowed. Each service of which
the Scrambling parameter is set to Scrambling Allowed occupies one Scrambling
license.

Block CA Info parameter


For each service the Conditional Access information can be blocked. Blocking CA
information involves:

- removing all CA descriptors from the PMT


- removing CA_identifier descriptors from the SDT sub table
- removing CA_identifier descriptors from the EIT sub tables
- clearing the free_ca_mode bit in the EIT
- blocking the corresponding ECM components
The steps below explain how to change scrambling parameters of services belonging
to a particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
scrambling specific service settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Scrambling tab.

4011746 Rev P 275


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Result: The Scrambling tab is displayed.


6 In the Scrambling Settings table, modify the following settings if required.

a In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for
components belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card
of the outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided
with a Co-Processor Card.
b In the Block CA Info column, tick the check box if CA info must be blocked.
7 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tip: For more information concerning scrambling, please refer to chapter Scrambling
on page 357.

To Change Transrating Specific Parameters of Outgoing Services


The following steps explain how to configure the transrating parameters of a service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
transrating specific service settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Transrating tab.
Result: The Transrating tab page is displayed.

276 4011746 Rev P


Changing Service Parameters

6 In the Transrating Services Settings table, modify the following parameters if


required.

Tips:
The Transrating Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to, are shown in the TR Group Name column.
The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.

4011746 Rev P 277


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Tips:
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
a In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating Group.

b Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the Transrating Group Settings table can still be
changed if necessary.
c Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
For more information concerning transrating, please refer to chapter Transrating
on page 295.

To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services


The following procedure explains how to configure Splice Channels for services
belonging to an outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service that must be configured for DPI.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the DPI tab.
Result: The DPI tab page is displayed.

278 4011746 Rev P


Changing Service Parameters

6 In the DPI Settings table, complete the following settings to set up a Splice
Channel for a particular service.

7
Note: The services in the DPI Settings table are labeled with their Service Identifier
(Primary Channel - SID) and name (Primary Channel - Name).
a Set the Primary Channel check box to define a splice channel for the
corresponding service.
b In the Output Channel - Name box of the service in question, enter a name to
identify the Splice Channel.
Note: When the splicing events for this channel are triggered by an
AD-Server, the name entered in the Output Channel - Name box must match
the name given by the AD-Server.
c In the Output Channel - Mode drop down box, select one of the following
modes:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.
Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
SCTE-35 Only (Custom): splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion
device and the actions defined under Custom PID Mapping will be
followed.
Manual (Custom): splicing events are triggered via the web browser user
interface of the DCM system and the actions defined under Custom PID
Mapping will be followed.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events
are triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
d In the Output Channel - PMT Mode drop down box, select on of the
following modes:
Follow Insertion: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Primary Channel.
e In the Insertion Channel - Card box, enter the slot position of the board to
which the port of the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
f In the Insertion Channel - Port box, enter the number of the port to which the
incoming Insertion Channel belongs.

4011746 Rev P 279


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

g In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
Note: The Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address parameter is only
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port receiving the Transport Stream the Insertion channel belongs to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel enters the device via an ASI port.
j In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the Insertion
Channel.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
When the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-35 Only (Custom) or
to Manual (Custom) the sub page to define custom PID mapping entries can be
accessed by pressing the arrow that appears in the PIDs column. More
information about custom PID mapping can be found in topic Defining Custom
DPI Mapping Entries on page 350.
As soon as a splice channel is defined for a service (Primary Channel check box is
set) one or two DPI licenses, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed. The availability of DPI licenses for the splice channel is shown in
the License column.
The Status column represents the status of the splice channel, viz.: Primary or
Insertion.
When the Insertion Channel is present at the input, the Service Name of the
Insertion Channel together with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and
Transport Stream Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the
Insertion Channel is displayed in the Info box.
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular output channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
After entering the Apply command button, all Splice Channels with Output
Channel - Mode equal to Manual are added to the DPI Start/Stop table.

280 4011746 Rev P


Changing Service Parameters

Tip: More information about Digital Program Insertion can be found in chapter
Digital Program Insertion on page 339.

4011746 Rev P 281


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Activating or Stopping Streaming


Introduction
Once outgoing Transport Streams are created and configured properly, streaming of
the Transport Stream should be activated. The procedures to activate and to stop
streaming using the web browser user interface of the DCM are described in the
following sub topics. Streaming can also be activated or stopped by executing
macros via ROSA's Macro Component. For more information please refer to topic
Using DCM Macros on page 593.
Note: The ease with which streaming of Transport Streams can be activated and
stopped can lead to accidentally stopping streaming. To protect the application from
accidentally stopping streaming, an additional confirmation can be asked. The
procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 107.

To Activate a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to activate streaming of an outgoing Transport
Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that must be activated.
3 Right-click on the Transport Stream and select Activate Streaming in the
short-cut menu.

Result: Streaming is activated for the selected Transport Stream.

282 4011746 Rev P


Activating or Stopping Streaming

To Activate All Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port


The following steps explain how to activate streaming of all outgoing Transport
Streams on a port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the port for which all outgoing Transport
Streams must be activated and select Start Streaming all TSs in the short-cut
menu.

Result: Streaming is activated for all Transport Stream on the selected port.

To Stop a Particular Outgoing Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to stop streaming of an outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that must be stopped.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Stop Streaming in the short-cut
menu.

Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following confirmation box
is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 283


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

4 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.

To Stop all Outgoing Transport Streams on a Port


The following steps explain how to stop streaming of all outgoing Transport Streams
on a port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Service link.
Result: The Service page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the port for which all outgoing Transport
Streams must be stopped and select Stop Streaming all TSs in the short-cut
menu.

Result: When the confirmation feature is switched on, the following confirmation box
is displayed.

3 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.

284 4011746 Rev P


Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams

Removing Outgoing Services and Transport


Streams
Removing Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream
Introduction
Depending on the number of services that must be removed from an outgoing
Transport Stream, three different methods can be used:
Removing individual services
Removing a number of services
Removing all services

To Remove Individual Services


The following procedure explains how to remove individual services from an
outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the service that must be removed.
3 Right-click on the service in question and select Remove from Output in the
short-cut menu.

Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree can
lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the application
from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation can be asked. The
procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 107.

4011746 Rev P 285


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


cancel the operation.
Result: The service is removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.

Tip: A service can also be removed from an outgoing Transport Stream by dragging
and dropping the service to the wastebasket.

To Remove a Number of Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to remove a number of services from an outgoing
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which services
must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page is displayed.
6 In the Service Routing table, tick the check box, which is located beside the Card
column, of each service that must be removed.

286 4011746 Rev P


Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams

Tips:
To sort the Service Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Services Settings table, tick
the check box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected services are removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.

To Remove all Services from an Outgoing Transport Stream


Perform the following steps to remove all services from an outgoing Transport
Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which all services
must be removed.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Remove all Services in the
short-cut menu.

Note: The ease with which services can be removed from the DCM Outputs tree can
lead to accidentally removing of services from the output. To protect the application
from accidentally removing of services, an additional confirmation can be asked. The
procedure to enable or disable this confirmation feature can be found in topic
Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 287


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


cancel the operation.
Result: All services are removed from the outgoing Transport Stream.

Removing Outgoing Transport Streams


Removing a Particular Transport Stream
Perform the following procedure to remove an outgoing Transport Stream from a
GbE Output.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream that should be
removed.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and select Delete in the short-cut menu.

Note: The ease with which Transport Streams can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally removing of Transport Streams from the output.
To protect the application from accidentally removing of services, an additional
confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this confirmation
feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

288 4011746 Rev P


Removing Outgoing Services and Transport Streams

Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


cancel the operation.
Result: The Transport Stream is removed from the DCM Outputs tree.

Tip: An outgoing Transport Stream can also be removed from a GbE port by
dragging and dropping the icon of the Transport Stream to the wastebasket.
Note: Removing the outgoing Transport Stream from an ASI output is not possible.

Removing a Number of Transport Streams


The following steps explain how to remove a number of Transport Streams from a
GbE port.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE port from which Transport Streams
should be removed.
3 Right-click on this GbE port and point to View Port Settings in the short-cut
menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.

Tip: To sort the TS Settings table by a particular parameter, click on the table header
of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.
4 Tick the check box, which is located beside the IP Address column in the TS
Settings table, of each Transport Stream that must be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the TS Settings table, tick the check
box of the first row that must be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and
tick the check box of the last row that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.
Result: The selected Transport Streams are removed.

4011746 Rev P 289


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Viewing Service Grooming


Introduction
The routing made by passing incoming services to outgoing Transport Streams can
easily by checked in the Service Grooming table on the Service - Table View sub
page. The transparently passed through Transport Streams can be found in the Loop
Through TSs table. To reduce the number of items in both tables, the items can be
filtered. The following filters can be used:
Input/Output filter
Input: shows all services at the input and the routing made to the output.
Output: shows all services passed to the output.
Card filter
All: shows the routing made an all interface cards.
Card x: shows the routing made for the selected interface card.
The following picture shows a Service - Table View sub page.

290 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Service Grooming

In the Service Grooming table, each service is accompanied with following


information.
Input Services
- Card: represents the name of the card that receives the service.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP Address of the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to.
- UDP: represents the destination UDP port of the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs to.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to
which the service belongs to. Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service - TS
Input sub page containing the settings of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs to.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier of the incoming service.
- Name: represents the name of the incoming service.
Output Services
- Card: represents the card to which the service is passed.
- Port: represents the number of the port to which the service is passed. When
the service is passed to a GbE Interface Card, pressing the Port value opens
the Service - TS Output sub page containing the settings of all outgoing
Transport Streams of this port.
- IP Address: represents the IP Address of the destination device to which the
outgoing Transport Stream, the service belongs to, streams.
- UDP: represents the UDP Port of the destination device to which the
Transport Stream, the service belongs to, streams.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs. Pressing the TS ID value opens the
Service - TS Output sub page containing the settings of the outgoing
Transport Stream.
- SID: represents the Service Identifier.
- Name: represents the name of the service.

4011746 Rev P 291


Chapter 3 Multiplexing

Transrating
- Name: represents the name of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
- Type: represents the type of the Transrater Group to which the service
belongs.
In the Loop Through TSs table, each Transport Stream is accompanied with
following information.
Input TS
- Card: represents the name of the card receiving the Transport Stream.
- Port: represents the number of the port receiving the Transport Stream.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the destination UDP port of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- ON ID: represents the Original Network Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream.
- TS ID: represents the Transport Stream Identifier of the incoming Transport
Stream. Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service - TS Input sub page
containing the settings of the incoming Transport Stream.
Output TS
- Card: represents the name of the card to which the Transport Stream is
passed.
- Port: represents the number of the port to which the Transport Stream is
passed. Pressing the Port value opens the Service - TS Output sub page
containing the settings of all outgoing Transport Streams of this port.
- IP Address: represents the destination IP address of the outgoing Transport
Stream.
- UDP Port: represents the UDP port of the outgoing Transport Stream.

292 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Service Grooming

To View Service Grooming


Perform the following steps to check and to filter the Service Grooming table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Table View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Table View sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input/Output drop down box, select the input/output filter.
3 In the Card drop down box, select the card filter.
Note: If an interface card is missing and services are passed from this missing card,
the name of this missing card is replaced in the drop down box by Card X (not present)
with X the slot position of the missing card.

Tip: To sort the Service Grooming table by a particular parameter, click on the table
header of the parameter. You can toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing to the header.

4011746 Rev P 293


4 Chapter 4
Transrating
Introduction
The DCM can be provided with a Transrating option. This chapter
gives a brief description about Transrating and the procedures to set up
the DCM for transrating purposes.

In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 296
Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams.............................. 300
Single Program Transport Stream Transrating .............................. 317
Transrating Examples ........................................................................ 333

4011746 Rev P 295


Chapter 4 Transrating

Introduction
General
The transrating option of the DCM allows rate shaping for bandwidth capacity
optimization purposes, like re-compression to lower bit rates of individual services,
open loop statistical re-multiplexing, etc...
The Co-Processor Card, used for advanced digital processing, optimizes the
bandwidth capacity for the outgoing Transport Stream of the interface card on which
the Co-Processor Card is plugged.
The Transrating option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each transrated service
needs one or more Transrating Licenses depending on the service definition. A
transrated SD service takes one Transrating License and a HD service takes four
licenses.

Applications
The DCM with transrating option is applicable in many applications; some of these
applications are described in the following list:
Re-Compressing of Services and Transport Streams: In order to target the bit
rate of a Transport Stream in which the chosen modulation scheme fits, services
can be re-compressed. Re-compressing of Transport Streams or groups of
services within a Transport Stream can be done using Statistical Re-multiplexing
or using Bit Rate Limiting. Re-compressing can also be used to free-up
bandwidth in the Transport Stream for new services like Internet, etc...
Rate Limiting of Single Program Transport Streams: In applications where
video services are distributed over IP, the maximum bit rates of the Single
Program Transport Streams (SPTS) are specified in most situations, for instance to
3 Mbps in case of DSL applications. To fulfill these specifications, the bit rates of
the individual Transport Streams must be limited.
Transport Stream Bit Rate Overload Protection: The bit rates of incoming
services received from different sources and passed to an outgoing Transport
Stream are not often constantly or not exactly at the agreed specifications. The
DCM with transrating option can be used to ensure the full utilization of the
maximum bandwidth without bit rate overloads.
Note: Only the video part of a service can be transrated. The audio part of a service
containing video or services without video cannot be transrated and are passed
through.

296 4011746 Rev P


Introduction

Bit Rate Limiting


Bit rate limiting is a transrating process on individual services to keep the maximum
bit rate lower than or equal to an adjustable bit rat value. Bit rate limiting can be done
on services with Constant Bite Rate (CBR) or on services with Variable Bit Rate (VBR).
The following diagrams give a graphical representation of bit rate limiting on a CBR
service and on a VBR service.
Bit rate limiting on CBR service
Service with CBR Service with CBR
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

0 0

Bit rate limiting on VBR service


Service with VBR Service with VBR
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)
5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

0 0

Note: If the maximum bit rate for rate limiting is set to a small value, rate limiting a
VBR service may results in a CBR program. In the example above, when the
maximum rate limit is set to for instance 2 Mbps, the service after rate limiting
becomes a CBR service.
Service with VBR Service with CBR
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)

5 5

4 4

3 3

2 2

1 1

0 0

When the bit rate of a service does not exceed the maximum bit rate, the service will
not be processed. In this case the bit rate of the outgoing service matches the bit rate
of the incoming service.

4011746 Rev P 297


Chapter 4 Transrating

Statistical Re-multiplexing
Statistical Re-multiplexing is a transrating process keeping the total bit rate of a
group of services under control by reducing the bit rate of individual services
according to the actual needs of these services compared to the other services in the
group. Statistical Re-multiplexing can be used in applications where the total bit rate
of a group of services must be reduced or where the Transport Stream must be
protected against bit rate overflow.
Bit Rate Reduction
When several services must be passed to an outgoing Transport Stream of which the
maximum bit rate is lower that the sum of the bit rates of these services, statistical
re-multiplexing can be done on all services or on a part of these services. The
following illustration shows a graphical representation of bit rate reduction on a
complete Transport Stream using Statistical Re-multiplexing.
Stuffing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)

25

20

15

10

Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Bitrate (Mbps)

25

20

15

10

Statistical Re-Multiplexing can also be used to free up some bandwidth for new
services.

298 4011746 Rev P


Introduction

Bit Rate Overload Protection


When services from different Transport Streams must be aggregated into a new
multiplex and one or more of these services are available with Variable Bit Rate
(VBR), the total bit rate of the outgoing Transport Stream is out of control. Statistical
Re-Multiplexing can be used to protect a Transport Stream against bit rate overload.
The following illustration depicts a graphical representation of a Statistical
Re-multiplexing process on a Transport Stream to keep the total bit rate under
control.
Incoming Transport Stream 1, Incoming Transport Stream 2,
30
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25

20 20

15 15

10 10

5 5

0 0

MUX

Overflow
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)

25 Transport Stream

20

15

10

Statistical
Re-Multiplexing
30
Maximum bit rate
Bitrate (Mbps)

25 Transport Stream

20

15

10

The services which should participate into a transrating process must be added to a
group (called Transrating Group). The bit rate variation of each service in a
Transrating Group can be limited by adding a minimum and a maximum bit rate
limit. Since high quality services require more bandwidth than low quality services,
each service within a Transrating Group can be provided with a priority. Services
with higher priority are allocated more bandwidth than services with lower priority.

4011746 Rev P 299


Chapter 4 Transrating

Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams


Introduction
Transrating Groups
Services, which should be transrated, must be inserted into a Transrating Group. Two
Transrating Group types can be used for MPTS transrating, viz.: the Selective Services
Transrating Group type and the MPTS - all Services Transrating Group type.
Transrating Groups are represented using icons. The following table shows these
group icons:

Icon Description
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group

Selective Services type Transrating Group

A MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group contains all services within the outgoing
Transport Stream. It is obvious that only one MPTS - all Services type Transrating
Group can be created within a Transport Stream. When an incoming service is
passed to an outgoing Transport Stream containing a MPTS - all Services type
Transrating Group, the service is automatically added to this Transrating Group.
A Selective Services type Transrating Group is used when not all services of an
outgoing Transport Stream participate into the transrating process or when the
outgoing Transport Stream requires multiple Transrating Groups. The total bit rate
of each individual Selective Services type Transrating Group can be set. It is obvious
that the sum of the individual bit rates can't exceed the total bit rate of the outgoing
Transport Stream. Once a Selective Services type Transrating Group is created, the
services for this Transrating Group must be added.
Notes:
Since transrating gives a small delay to services, a service that doesn't participate
in a transrating process but should be synchronized with a transrated service,
must be added to the transrating group and passed through.
In contrast with MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group which includes all
components, a Selective Services type Transrating Group do not include Transport
Stream components like PAT, CAT, SDT, NIT EMMS, etc.... A Selective Services
type Transrating Group with all services of a Transport Stream is not the same as
a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group.

300 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Transrating Mode
Once the Transrating Group(s) are added to a Transport Stream and populated with
services, the transrating mode must be determined for each individual service
belonging to the Transrating Group(s). The DCM device supports three transrating
modes, viz.:
Pass Through mode:
The service will be passed through with a particular delay without transrating. This
delay is used to synchronize the service with the transrated services in the
Transrating Group.

Rate Limited mode:


The service will be transrated with a maximum bit rate limit. This maximum bit rate
limit must be entered in the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter.

Stat Muxed mode:


The service will participate into the statistical multiplexing group of the Transrating
Group. For Statistical Re-multiplexing the following parameters can be defined:

- Min Bit Rate (Mbps): the lower limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps): the upper limit of the bit rate during transrating
- Priority: Depending on the complexity of the services, the total available bit
rate of the Transrating Group is spread over the services depending on the
complexity of the scenes. The bit rate assigned to a service can be influenced
by giving a particular priority to the service. A higher priority gives a bigger
bit rate share than a lower priority. For example a Sport service needs more
bit rate than a Talk Show service. This Priority parameter can be set between
0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5 (normal).
Note: Setting the priority of all services to 10 results in the same distribution
as setting the priority of all services to for instance 9.

4011746 Rev P 301


Chapter 4 Transrating

Transrating Board Settings


Introduction
Video Quality
For transrating the DCM allows using two rate control algorithms, viz.: a rate control
algorithm for performance optimization and an algorithm for quality optimization.
Compared to Transrating using the Performance rate control algorithm, transrating
using the Quality rate control algorithm gives better video quality but decreases the
number of services that can be transrated by a Co-Processor Card.

Transrater delay parameters


The delay that arises during the transrating process is by default 1400 ms (Standard
Coarse Delay mode). Due to this small transrating delay, black frames might occur
during splicing events. These black frames can be eliminated by using a transrating
delay of 1800 ms (Extended Coarse Delay mode).
For Transport Stream re-synchronization purposes the Predefined Coarse Delay mode
can be used. When the coarse delay mode is set to Predefined, a delay will be given to
all outgoing Transport Streams of the corresponding interface card.
Note: This mode can not be combined with rate limiting, Statistical Multiplexing, and
or DPI.
The delay use by this mode is determined by the following parameters:

- Frame Rate Delay parameter: frame rate of the incoming video, 25 Hz or 30


Hz
- Input Board Type Delay parameter: interface card receiving the video, ASI or
GbE
- Fine Delay parameter: Low, Normal, or High
The table below shows the transrating delay values for the given parameter
combinations.

Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Low 755 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Normal 1040 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI High 1231 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Low 748 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Normal 1033 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI High 1224 ms

302 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Low 645 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Normal 930 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE High 1121 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Low 638 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Normal 923 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE High 1114 ms

Note: Changing the Algorithm Optimization and/or Transrating delay parameters


needs a reboot of the corresponding Co-Processor Card. Rebooting the Co-processor
Card interrupts the outgoing services.

Changing Transrating Board Settings


Perform the following procedure to change transrating board settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card containing the
Co-Processor Card for which transrater board settings should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the TR Board Settings
table for the selected interface card is displayed.

Note: The TR Board Settings table is only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality or Performance.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.

4011746 Rev P 303


Chapter 4 Transrating

5 If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following


parameters if required.
a In the Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the incoming
video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
b In the Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI
or GbE.
c In the Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or
High.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: The corresponding Co-Processor Card reboots.

304 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Creating a Transrating Group


The following procedure explains how to create a MPTS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a transrating
group must be created.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
select View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page of the selected outgoing Transport Stream
is displayed.
4 In the Service - TS Output sub page, point to the TS/TS tab.
Result: The TS/TS tab page containing the Add New Transrating Group, the
Transrating Group Settings, and the TS Settings is displayed.
5 Perform the following settings in the Add New Transrating Group table.

a In the Name box of the Add New Transrating Group table, enter a name of
maximum 30 characters. A logical name facilitates the identification of the
Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
the transrating group. The total bit rate of a Transrating Group can vary
between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Note:
The sum of the total bit rates of the Transrating Group(s) and the bit rates
of the services not belonging to a Transrating Group can never exceed the
total bit rate of the outgoing Transport Stream. When the sum is less than
the total bit rate of the Transport Stream, the difference between both bit
rates can then be used further down in the chain.
For a MPTS - all Services Transrating Group this total bit rate includes the
bitrates of all components within the Transport Stream. For a Selective
Services Transrating Group, Transport Stream level components like PAT,
CAT, etc... are not included.

4011746 Rev P 305


Chapter 4 Transrating

c In the Type drop down box, select the desired Transrating Group type.
MPTS - all Services: all services of the outgoing Transport Stream are
added to the Transrating Group.
Selective Services: an empty Transrating Group will be created and the
operator can decide which services must be added to the Transrating
Group. The procedure to add services to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group can be found in topic Adding Services to a Transrating
Group on page 307.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation
Results:
Transrating Group settings are added to the Transrating Group Settings
table.

Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group
Setting table containing the transrating parameters of the service within the
selected Transrating Group. For more information concerning the
Transrating Group Setting table, please refer to topic Adapting the Transrating
Properties of a Service on page 310.
In the DCM Outputs tree, the Transrating Group is added to the outgoing
Transport Stream in question.

306 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Adding Services to a Transrating Group


Introduction
When an incoming service is passed to an outgoing Transport Stream containing a
MPST - all Services type Transrating Group, the service is automatically added to the
Transrating Group. Adding services to a Selective Services type Transrating Group
can be done using the Drag and Drop method or using the Muxing method. When a
discrete number of individual services should be passed to a Transrating Group, the
Drag and Drop method is useful. When numbers of services must be passed to one or
more Transrating Groups, the Muxing method is recommended.
WARNING:
As long as the SD/HD parameter of a HD service is not set to HD, the service can
not participate in the transrating process. The procedure to change the SD/HD
parameter of a service can be found in topic To Select the Service Definition.

Drag and Drop Method


Perform the following procedure to add a service to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group using the Drag and Drop method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which services
must be added to a Transrating Group.
3 Drag and drop the icon of the service to the icon of the Transrating Group.

Note: Passing a service from an incoming Transport Stream to an outgoing Transport


Stream and adding this service to a Selective Services type Transrating Group can be
done in one action by dragging the service from the DCM Inputs tree and dropping
this service into the Transrating Group.

4011746 Rev P 307


Chapter 4 Transrating

Muxing Method
Perform the following procedure to add a service to a Selective Services type
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Transrating
Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input Services and Output
Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input Services table as well
as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table will be cleared.

308 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Changing the Transrating Group Parameters


The Transrating Groups settings, which are given during the Transrating Group
Creating process, can be changed. The following procedure explains how to change
these Transrating Group settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group for which settings
must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transrating Group or right-click on this Transrating Group
and select View TR Group Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page of the selected Transrating Group is
displayed.

4 Adapt the Name and/or Total Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter of the Transrating
Group.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 309


Chapter 4 Transrating

Adapting the Transrating Properties of a Service


The following steps explain how to adapt the transrating properties of a service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
scrambling specific service settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Transrating tab.
Result: The Transrating tab page is displayed.
6 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Services Settings table.

Tips:
The Transrating Services Settings table contains all services of an outgoing
Transport Stream.
When the outgoing Transport stream is provided with multiple
Transrating Groups, the Transrating Group to which the service belongs
to can be found in the TR Group Name column.
The Transrating settings are not applicable if the services do not belong to
a Transrating Group.
The services in the Transrating Services Settings table are indicated by their
SID and name.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the service participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing
group of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the service will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this service, only
delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this service.

310 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this service.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the service. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).
7 Continue adapting more services or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameters take only
the video component within the service into account.
Tips:
The transrating specific settings of outgoing services can also be modified on the
Transrating Group Settings table on the Service - Transrater sub page. This
table contains the outgoing services belonging to a specific Transrating Group.
This sub page can be opened by double-clicking on the Transrater Group Icon in
the DCM Outputs tree.
When particular parameters of all services of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
a In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all services of this Transrating Group.

b Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the Transrating Group Settings table can still be
changed if necessary.
c Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tip: Transrating parameters of services can also be modified on the Transrating tab
page on the Service - Service sub page, see topic To Change Transrating Specific
Parameters of Outgoing Services on page 276.

4011746 Rev P 311


Chapter 4 Transrating

Removing Services from a Transrating Group


Services member of a Selective Services type Transrating Group can be moved within
the Transport Stream using a drag and drop action.
Note: Since a MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group covers all services within the
outgoing Transrating Group, moving services outside the Transrating Group is not
allowed.
The following steps explain how to move a service from a Selective Services type
Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group of which services
must be moved.
3 Drag and drop icon of the service outside the Transrating Group.
Note: Moving a service outside a Transport Stream is not allowed.

312 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

Deleting a MPTS Group


A Transrating Group created for a particular Transport Stream can easily be
removed. Removal of a Transrating Group from a Transport Stream will not remove
the services, which are member of this Transrating Group, from the Transport
Stream. Perform the following steps to remove a Transrating Group from a
Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transrating Group that must be
removed.
3 Double-click on this Transrating Group or right-click on the Transrating Group
and select Delete in the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transrating Groups can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally changing of outgoing Transport Stream content.
To protect the application from accidentally removing of Transrating Groups, an
additional confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this
confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


cancel the operation.
Tip: A Transrating Group can also be removed by dragging and dropping the icon of
the Transrating Group to the wastebasket.

4011746 Rev P 313


Chapter 4 Transrating

Checking the Transrating Comparison


Introduction
Once a Transrating Group is populated with services and the Transrating parameters
are properly configured, a graphical representation of the bit rates of the services
before and after transrating is depicted on the Service - Comparison sub page.
The Service - Comparison sub page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A
manual refresh can be executed by pressing the Reload command button. The
following illustration shows an example of a Service - Comparison sub page.

The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the services before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram at the right hand side the bit
rates after transrating. The red line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram
represents the Transport Stream bit rate and the black line represents the total used
bit rate of the Transrating Group. For VBR Transport Streams the red line is not
displayed.

314 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Multi Program Transport Streams

The Services table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input
(before transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression
ratio (expressed in percent) of the services.
Tip: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of
the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
header.
Notes:
When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the bit
rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing services will have a larger variation than the bit rates of the incoming
services. This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.

To determine the current output bitrate of a service, the bitrate of al components


are taken into account, including shared components. When components are
shared with multiple services of a particular Transrating Group, the sum of the
service bit rates will exceed the black line indicating the total bit rate of the
Transrating Group.

4011746 Rev P 315


Chapter 4 Transrating

To Check a Transrating Comparison


Perform the following steps to check the Service - Comparison sub page of a
Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, press the Tree View link after
pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group for which
the Transrating comparison must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group and point to Transrating
Comparison in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Comparison sub page displays.

316 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Single Program Transport Stream Transrating


Introduction
The DCM allows bit rate limiting on individual Single Program Transport Streams
(SPTSs) and Statistical Re-multiplexing of multiple SPTSs. Re-compression of SPTSs
can be useful in for instance DSL application where the bit rate of the individual
Transport Streams is limited (e.g. 3 Mbps).
Statistical Re-multiplexing on SPTSs is useful in for instance DSL applications where
the backbone capacity is limited, e.g. 40 SPTSs of 3 Mbps via a backbone limited to
100 Mbps.
Before SPTSs can be re-compressed, one or more Multi-TS Transrating Groups must
be created depending on the application. Once the Transrating Groups are created,
the groups must be populated with the SPTSs. The transrating parameters for the
SPTSs must then be adapted.
The procedures to set up a SPTS re-compression application are fully described in the
following sub topics.
Note: Multi-TS Transrating groups can only be used for GbE outputs.

Transrating Board Settings


Introduction
Video Quality
For transrating the DCM allows using two rate control algorithms, viz.: a rate control
algorithm for performance optimization and an algorithm for quality optimization.
Compared to Transrating using the Performance rate control algorithm, transrating
using the Quality rate control algorithm gives better video quality but decreases the
number of services that can be transrated by a Co-Processor Card.

Transrater delay parameters


The delay that arises during the transrating process is by default 1400 ms (Standard
Coarse Delay mode). Due to this small transrating delay, black frames might occur
during splicing events. These black frames can be eliminated by using a transrating
delay of 1800 ms (Extended Coarse Delay mode).
For Transport Stream re-synchronization purposes the Predefined Coarse Delay mode
can be used. When the coarse delay mode is set to Predefined, a delay will be given to
all outgoing Transport Streams of the corresponding interface card.
Note: This mode can not be combined with rate limiting, Statistical Multiplexing, and
or DPI.

4011746 Rev P 317


Chapter 4 Transrating

The delay use by this mode is determined by the following parameters:

- Frame Rate Delay parameter: frame rate of the incoming video, 25 Hz or 30


Hz
- Input Board Type Delay parameter: interface card receiving the video, ASI or
GbE
- Fine Delay parameter: Low, Normal, or High
The table below shows the transrating delay values for the given parameter
combinations.

Coarse Delay Frame Rate Input Board Type Fine Delay Delay
Mode Delay Delay
Standard n.a. n.a. n.a. 1400 ms
Extended n.a. n.a. n.a. 1800 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Low 755 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI Normal 1040 ms
Predefined 25 Hz ASI High 1231 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Low 748 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI Normal 1033 ms
Predefined 30 Hz ASI High 1224 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Low 645 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE Normal 930 ms
Predefined 25 Hz GbE High 1121 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Low 638 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE Normal 923 ms
Predefined 30 Hz GbE High 1114 ms

Note: Changing the Algorithm Optimization and/or Transrating delay parameters


needs a reboot of the corresponding Co-Processor Card. Rebooting the Co-processor
Card interrupts the outgoing services.

318 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Changing Transrating Board Settings


Perform the following procedure to change transrating board settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card containing the
Co-Processor Card for which transrater board settings should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page containing the TR Board Settings
table for the selected interface card is displayed.

Note: The TR Board Settings table is only available for an interface card populated
with Co-Processor Card.
3 In the Algorithm Optimization drop down box, select the desired rate control
algorithm, Quality or Performance.
4 In the Coarse Delay drop down box, select the desired mode:
Standard
Extended
Predefined
Note: Before changing the Coarse Delay parameter to Predefined, all Transrating
Groups of the corresponding interface card must be removed.
5 If the Coarse Delay parameter is set to Predefined, modify the following
parameters if required.
a In the Frame Rate Delay drop down box, select the frame rate of the incoming
video 25 Hz or 30 Hz.
b In the Input Board Type Delay drop down box, select the interface card: ASI
or GbE.
c In the Fine Delay drop down box, select the desired value: Low, Normal, or
High.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: The corresponding Co-Processor Card reboots.

4011746 Rev P 319


Chapter 4 Transrating

Creating a Multi-TS Transrating Group


The following procedure explains how to create a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which a Transrating Group
must be created.
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on this port and select View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Transrating link.
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page containing the Transrating Group
Settings, Add New Transrating Group, and Update All Transrating Groups table is
displayed.
5 Perform the following steps in the Add New Transrating Group table.

a In the Name box of the Add New Transrating Group table, enter a name
(maximum 50 characters). A logical name facilitates the identification of the
Transrating Group in the application.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the total bit rate that can be used by
this Transrating Group. The total bit rate of a Multi-TS Transrating Group can
be set between 1 and 950 Mbps.
Nota: The total bit rate for Multi-TS Transrating Group includes all
components within the SPTS.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: After pressing the Add command button the Transrating Group is added to the
Transrating Group Settings table.

The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting table
containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected Transrating
Group.

320 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Changing Transrating Settings


Perform the following procedure to change the settings of a Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which transrating group
settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on this port and select View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
4 Click on the Transrating link.
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page containing the Transrating Group
Settings, Add New Transrating Group, and Update All Transrating Groups table is
displayed.
5 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Group Settings table.

Tip: The arrow in the Detail column is a link to the Transrating Group Setting table
containing the transrating parameters of the SPTSs within the selected Transrating
Group. For more information concerning the Transrating Group Setting table,
please refer to topic Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS on page 327.
a In the Name box of the Transrating Group Settings table, enter a new name.
b In the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box of the Transrating Group Settings table,
enter the total bit rate that can be used by this Transrating Group.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: When particular parameters of all Transrating Groups on a port must be
changed to similar values, the Update All Transrating Groups function of the web
browser user interface can be used. The following procedure describes how to use
this function.

4011746 Rev P 321


Chapter 4 Transrating

1 In the Update All TS table, enter the desired value in the box of the parameter
that should be changed for all Transrating Groups of the selected ports.

2 Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the Transrating Group Settings table can still be changed if
necessary.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

322 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Adding SPTSs to a Multi-TS Transrating Group


Introduction
A Multi-TS Transrating Group can be populated by moving individual SPTSs which
are already passed to the GbE Port or by passing individual services or Transport
Streams directly from the input to the Transrating Group.
Note: Passing incoming Multi Program Transport Streams (MPTS) or individual
incoming services to a Multi-TS Transrating Group will encapsulate the services into
individual SPTSs.

Moving a SPTS to a Multi -TS Transrating Group


The following procedure explains how to move a SPTS, which is already passed to a
GbE port, to a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group to which
SPTSs must be moved.
3 Drag and drop the icon of the SPTS to the icon of the Multi-TS Transrating Group.

Result: The SPTS is moved to the Multi-TS Transrating Group.

4011746 Rev P 323


Chapter 4 Transrating

Passing Incoming Services or Transport Streams to the Multi-TS Transrating Group

Introduction
Incoming services can be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group using the Drag &
Drop method or using the Muxing method. When a discrete number of services
should be passed to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, the Drag and Drop method is
useful. When numbers of services must be passed to one or more Multi-TS
Transrating Group, the Muxing method is recommended. The Drag and Drop
method allows passing an incoming Transport Stream to a Multi-TS Transrating
Group.
Note: After passing services to a Multi-TS Transrating Group, streaming of the new
created SPTSs must be activated. The procedure to activate Transport Streams can be
found in topic Activating or Stopping Streaming on page 282.

Drag and Drop Method


Perform the following steps to pass incoming services or Transport Streams to a
Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group to which
services of Transport Streams must be moved.
3 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the service or Transport Stream that must be
passed.
4 Drag and drop the icon of the service or Transport Stream to the icon of the
Multi-TS Transrating Group.

Result: The service or Transport Stream is passed to the Multi-TS Transrating Group.

Note: Passing an incoming Transport Stream to a Multi-TS Transrating Group results


in creating of individual SPTSs for each service member of this Transport Stream.

324 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Muxing Method
The following procedure describes how to pass incoming services to a Multi-TS
Transrating Group using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select Service and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input Services and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input Services or Output Transrating Groups table by a particular
parameter, click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
3 In the Input Services table, set the check boxes of the services that must be
passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Multi-TS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Pass command button the selected services are passed to
the selected Multi-TS Transrating Group(s). All check boxes in the Input Services
table as well as the check boxes in the Output Transrating Groups table will be
cleared.

Note: SPTSs can also be created by passing one or more Transport Streams to a GbE
port. The following procedure explains how to pass one or more Transport Streams
to a GbE port using the Muxing method.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Muxing link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Muxing sub page is displayed.
2 In the Input drop down box select TS and in the Output drop down box
Transrating Group.
Result: The Input TS and Output Transrating Groups tables are displayed.

4011746 Rev P 325


Chapter 4 Transrating

3 In the Input TS table, set the check boxes of the services that must be passed.
4 In the Output Transrating Groups table, set the check box(es) of the Multi-TS
Transrating Group(s) to which the services must be passed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Input TS and Output
Transrating Groups table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down
the SHIFT key, and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Pass command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

326 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Changing the Transrating Parameters of a SPTS


The following steps explain how to change the transrating parameters of a SPTS
member of a Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group containing
the SPTS for which transrating setting must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Multi-TS Transrating Group or right-click on this group and
select View TR Group Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Transrater sub page containing the Transrating Group Settings
and Update All table for the selected Multi-TS Transrating Group is displayed.
4 Perform the following steps in the Transrating Group Settings table.

Tip: To identify a SPTS in the Transrating Group Settings table on the Service -
Transrater sub page, each outgoing SPTS is accompanied by its Original Network
Identifier (ON ID), its Transport Stream Identifier (TS ID), its name, and the IP
Address and UDP Port number to which the SPTS has to stream.
a In the Rate Control drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Stat Muxed: the SPTS participates in the Statistical Re-multiplexing group
of the Transrating Group and will be transrated if necessary.
Rate Limited: the SPTS will be transrated with a maximum rate limit.
Pass Through: no transrating will be performed on this SPTS, only delayed.
b In the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the minimum bit rate for this SPTS.
Note: The Min Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter is only applicable when the Rate
Control parameter is set to Stat Muxed.
c In the Max Bit Rate (Mbps) box, enter the maximum bit rate for this SPTS.
Note: The Max Bit Rate (Mbps) is not applicable when the Rate Control
parameter is set to Pass Through.
d In the Priority box, enter the priority setting for the SPTS. The priority
parameter can be set between 0 (low) and 10 (high) and the default value is 5
(normal).

4011746 Rev P 327


Chapter 4 Transrating

5 Continue adapting more SPTSs or press the Apply command button to confirm
or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Both the Min Bit Rate (Mbps) and Max Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter take the
complete SPTS content into account.
Tip: When particular parameters of all SPTSs of a Transrating Group must be
changed to similar values, the Update All function of the web browser user interface
can be used. The following steps describe how to use this function.
1 In the Update All table, enter or select the desired value in the box of the
parameter that should be changed for all SPTSs of this Transrating Group.

2 Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the Transrating Group Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the Transrating Group Settings table can still be changed if
necessary.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Tip: Transrating parameters of an SPTS can also be modified on the Transrating tab
page on the Service - Service sub page, see topic To Change Transrating Specific
Parameters of Outgoing Services on page 276.

Moving an SPTS from or to a Transrating Group


A SPTS can easily be moved from outside a Multi-TS Transrating Group to inside a
Multi-TS Transrating Group or vise versa as long as the SPTS and the Transrating
Groups belong to the same GbE port
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the SPTS that must be moved.
3 Drag and drop the icon of the SPTS to the desired place.
Note: Moving a SPTS outside a GbE Port is not allowed.

328 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Removing Multi-TS Transrating Groups


Introduction
Depending on the number of Multi-TS Transrating Groups that must be removed
from a GbE port, two different methods can be used:
Removing individual Transrating Groups
Removing a number of Transrating Groups
Removing a Multi-TS Transrating Group from a GbE Port will not remove the
outgoing SPTSs, which are included in the Transrating Group, from the GbE port.

Removing Individual Multi-TS Transrating Groups


The following steps explain how to remove individual Multi-TS Transrating Groups.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group that must be
removed.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group in question and select Delete in
the short-cut menu.
Note: The ease with which Transrating Groups can be removed from the DCM
Outputs tree can lead to accidentally changing of outgoing Transport Stream content.
To protect the application from accidentally removing of Transrating Groups, an
additional confirmation can be asked. The procedure to enable or disable this
confirmation feature can be found in topic Changing Tree Settings on page 107.
When this feature is enabled, the following confirmation box will be displayed after
selecting Delete in the short-cut menu.

Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


cancel the operation.
Tip: A Transrating Group can also be removed by dragging and dropping the icon of
the Transrating Group to the wastebasket.

4011746 Rev P 329


Chapter 4 Transrating

Removing a Number of Multi-TS Transrating Groups


Perform the following steps to remove multiple Transrating Groups.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree view sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the GbE Port for which a transrating group
settings must be changed.
3 Double-click on this GbE port or right-click on this port and select View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Transrating sub page containing the Transrating Group
Settings, Add New Transrating Group, and Update All Transrating Groups table is
displayed.
4 In the Transrating Group Settings table tick the check box, which is located
beside the Name column, of each Transrating Group that must be removed.

Tips:
To sort the Transrating Group Settings table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Transrating Group Settings
table, tick the check box of the first row, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key,
and tick the check box of the last row.
5 Press the Remove Checked Items command button.

330 4011746 Rev P


Single Program Transport Stream Transrating

Checking a Transrating Comparison


Introduction
Once a Multi-TS Transrating Group is populated with SPTSs and the Transrating
parameters are properly configured, a graphical representation of the bit rates of the
SPTSs before and after transrating is depicted on the Service - Comparison sub page.
The Service - Comparison sub page is refreshed automatically every 10 seconds. A
manual refresh can be executed by pressing the Reload command button. The
following illustration shows an example of a Service - Comparison sub page.

The Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram depicts the bit rates of the SPTSs before
transrating and the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram the bit rates after transrating.
The black line in the Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram represents the total used bit
rate of the Transrating Group.
The Service table provides the legend of the diagrams together with the input (before
transrating) and output bit rates (after transrating) and average compression ratio
(expressed in percent) of the SPTSs.
Tip: To sort the Services table by a particular parameter, click on the table header of
the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by pointing to the
header.

4011746 Rev P 331


Chapter 4 Transrating

Note: When the total bit rate of the Transrating group is higher than the sum of the
bit rates of the incoming services for this Transrating Group, the bit rates of the
outgoing SPTSs will have a larger variation that the bit rates of the incoming services.
This is a normal behavior of the DCM transrater.

To Check a Transrating Comparison


Perform the following steps to check the Service - Comparison sub page of a
Multi-TS Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, press the Tree View link after
pointing to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Multi-TS Transrating Group for which
the Transrating comparison must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Multi-TS Transrating Group and point to Transrating
Comparison in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Comparison sub page displays.

332 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Examples

Transrating Examples
Transport Stream with Multiple Transrating Groups
Statistical Re-multiplexing keeps the total bit rate of a group of services under
control. Within this group the services have Variable Bit Rates (VBR). When a
Transport Stream with VBR services is offered to for instance Scientific Atlanta's
MQAM Modulator, which builds four QAM channels from one incoming Transport
Stream, the bit rates of these QAM channels are out of control. By creating a
Transport Stream containing four Transrating Groups with the services for each
individual QAM channel, the bit rate of the Transport Stream as well as the bit rates
of the individual Transrating Groups can keep under control.
Note: More information concerning Scientific Atlanta's MQAM Modulator can be
found in the MQAM Modulator - Models D9477-1, D9477-2, D9477-3 - Installation
and Operation Guide, part number 717866.
The following illustration shows a graphical representation of a Transport Stream
containing four Transrating Groups.
Statistical
Re-Multiplexing

190
Transrating

180
Group

170 150

160 140

38.5
150 130

140 120
Transrating

130 110
Group
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)

100

38.5
120
110 90

100 80

90 70
Transrating

80 60 38.5
Group

70 50

60 40

50 30
38.5
Transrating

40 20
Group

30 10

20 0

10
0

4011746 Rev P 333


Chapter 4 Transrating

In the example, four Selective Services type Transrating Groups should be created on
the outgoing Transport Stream each having a total bit rate of 38.5 Mbps. The total bit
rate of the Transport Stream should be set to 154 Mbps. Pass the services to the
Transrating Group belonging to one of the four QAM channels. The following
illustration depicts the tree of an outgoing Transport Stream for a MQAM Modulator
containing four 'Selective Services' type Transrating Groups.

334 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Examples

Statistical Re-multiplexing of a SPTS Transrating Group


In DSL applications, the output of the DCM contains multiple Single Program
Transport Streams (SPTSs). When the bandwidth of the backbone is limited,
Statistical Re-multiplexing can be used to optimize the bandwidth usage efficiency.
SPTS 30
4
4 Mbps
0
SPTS 29
4
4 Mbps 100
0 SPTS 30
SPTS 28
4 Stat Mux 95
SPTS 29
4 Mbps
0 SPTS 28 SPTS
90
Transrating
SPTS 3 Group

SPTS 2 5 SPTS 2
4
4 Mbps SPTS 1
0 0
SPTS 1
4
4 Mbps
0

In the example above, a SPTS Transrating Group must be created containing the
SPTSs. The maximum bit rate of the Transrating Group should be set to 100 Mbps
and the bit rate of the individual SPTSs to 4 Mbps. The following illustration shows a
set up of a Transrating Group populated with SPTSs.

4011746 Rev P 335


Chapter 4 Transrating

Statistical Multiplexing in Combination with Rate Limiting


The DCM device allows combining Bit Rate Limiting with Statistical Multiplexing.
When Bit Rate Limiting is combined with Statistical Multiplexing, Bit Rate limiting
priors Statistical Multiplexing. Meaning that the required bit rate for the services that
should be bit rate limited is allocated prior the bandwidth used for Statistical
Multiplexing. If the bit rate of an incoming service that should be rate limited is less
than its limit, the bit rate surplus of this service is added to the bit rate pool used for
Statistical Multiplexing.
In the example below the shaded services from Transport Stream 1 and Transport
Stream 2 must be re-multiplexed into a Transport Stream of 29 Mbps. The services of
Transport Stream 2 must be bit rate limited to 4 Mbps. The services of Transport
Stream 1 must be statistical multiplexed. A part of the Transport Stream bandwidth
should be reserved for future services (2 Mbps).
Incoming Transport Stream 1, Incoming Transport Stream 2,
30
Bitrate (Mbps)

Bitrate (Mbps)
25 25

20 20

15 15

10 10

5 5

0 0

MUX

Statistical
Re-Multiplexing and
Bitrate Limiting
Stuffing

30

25
Bitrate (Mbps)

20
Total bit rate Bit Rate
15 Transrater Transport
Group: Stream:
10 27 Mbps 29 Mbps

0
Rate limited at 4 Mbps

336 4011746 Rev P


Transrating Examples

Parameters to set
Outgoing Transport Stream, bit rate = 29 Mbps
MPTS - All Services Transrating Group, maximum bit rate = 27 Mbps
Three services Transport Stream 2
- Rate Control = Rate Limited
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = 4 Mbps
Five services Transport Stream 1
- Rate Control = Stat Muxed
- Min Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 2
- Max Bit Rate (Mbps) = for instance 5

4011746 Rev P 337


5 Chapter 5
Digital Program Insertion
Introduction
This chapter provides general information concerning Digital Program
Insertion and the procedures to set up a DCM to participate into a DPI
application.

In This Chapter
Introducing Digital Program Insertion............................................ 340
Configuring Splice Channels ............................................................ 346
Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers ................................... 353
Triggering Splicing Events Manually .............................................. 354
Creating a New IP List ....................................................................... 355

4011746 Rev P 339


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Introducing Digital Program Insertion


General
Digital Program Insertion (DPI) allows content replacement of services for digital
video (for instance local advertising insertion). The DPI option of the DCM is based
on the SCTE 35 and SCTE 30 standards.
A service substitution can be triggered by an Advertising Server (called AD-Server)
(based on SCTE 30), a Cue Insertion device (based on SCTE 35), or manually by using
the web browser user interface of the DCM. In DPI environments the following
nomenclature is used:
Primary Channel: the service that must be replaced
Insertion Channel: the service that must replace the Primary Channel
Output Channel: the outgoing service
In-Point: the moment a Primary to Insertion Channel substitution must be executed
Out-Point: the moment a Insertion to Primary Channel substitution must be
executed
The illustration below depicts the principle of an In-Point splicing event and an
Out-Point splicing event.
In-Point Out-Point
Splicing event Splicing event

Advertising
S ale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale
(Insertion Channel) For For For For For For For For

Service
(Primary Channel)

Outgoing Service
Sale Sale S ale Sale Sale Sale Sale Sale
(Output Channel) For For For For For For For For

Splicing event
duration

When a Primary to Insertion Channel or an Insertion to Primary Channel substitution is


triggered the Co-Processor Card of the DCM processes both streams to achieve a
seamless transition. During a splicing event only the video and audio components of
the Insertion Channel are spliced by default, the device remains passing all other
components from the Primary Channel.

340 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Digital Program Insertion

In contrast with this default behavior, a custom mode can be used to define the
content of the Output Channel during the splicing event by passing components of the
Primary Channel and by assigning components of the Insertion Channel to components
of the Primary Channel. During a splicing event all components not passed from the
Primary Channel to the Output Channel will be blocked and all components from the
Insertion Channel assigned to components of the Primary Channel will be spliced. This
custom mode can only by used for manual splicing or splicing triggered via a Cue
Insertion device (based on SCTE 35).
The DPI option of the DCM is on a per license basis, each service that participates into
a DPI application needs one or more Splicing licenses depending on the service
definition. A SD service takes one splicing license and a HD service takes two
licenses. DPI licenses are occupied as soon as Splicing Channels are created.
Notes:
For Digital Program Insertion the DCM requires one or more Co-Processor cards
and free Splicing licenses.
When a Primary Channel contains a SD service and the Insertion Channel a HD
service, the SD/HD parameter of the Primary Channel service must be set to HD.
Such a Splicing Channel consumes two Splicing licenses. The procedure to change
the SD/HD parameter of a service can be found in topic To Select the Service
Definition.
Splicing two video components within the same channel is not allowed. When
the Primary Channel provides two video components, then the custom mode
must be used to assign one video component and to block the other video
components.
During a splicing event, black frames might occur, this can be solved by
increasing the transrating delay. More information can be found in topic
Transrating Board Settings on page 302.

DISCLAIMER
Splicing programs without transrating can lead to big bit rate variations on the
spliced program. Splicing without transrating does not give bit rate control over
the spliced program.

4011746 Rev P 341


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Splicing Event Triggered by an AD-Server


Introduction
The following illustration depicts DCM integration into a SCTE 30 compliant DPI
application with multiple AD-Servers.

IP Network
AD-Server 1
Time Server
AD-Server 1 (NTP)

Advertising
Advertising
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion Service + Cue Messages DCM
Service + Cue Messages

MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion

Principle
When a DCM is integrated into a SCTE 30 based DPI application, a certain time
before the In-Point of a splicing event the AD-Server informs the DCM about the
service that must be spliced (Primary Channel), the advertising (Insertion Channel),
start time of the splicing event, and duration using a Splice Request message. At start
time of the splicing event, the AD-Server streams the advertising to the DCM via an
ASI port or GbE port. The Co-Processor card of the DCM processes both streams to
achieve a seamless transition between the Primary Channel and the Insertion Channel.
After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a seamless Insertion to
Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
An Insertion to Primary Channel substitution can also be triggered by an additional
Splice Request message.
The information in the Cue Messages inserted by a CUE Insertion device into the
incoming transport stream of the DCM (SCTE 35 based) is redirected to all
connected AD-Servers for the specific channel. This information can be used by
the AD-Servers to determine the parameters of the Splice Request messages.
When the Primary Channel is scrambled by the DCM, the insertion channel will
also be scrambled during the Splicing Event Duration.

342 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Digital Program Insertion

Before messages can be sent between the AD-Server and the DCM a TCP/IP socket
must be set up; this is a client/server connection with the AD-server client and the
DCM device server. Therefore the AD-Server needs the knowledge of the IP-address
of the used Ethernet port of the DCM device. For each service with splicing
opportunities, a splice channel must be created.

Time Synchronization
Due to the time differences between the AD Servers and the DCM and the
unpredictability of the delay on TCP/IP messages, time synchronization between the
AD Servers and DCM is required to achieve a very accurate splicing. To keep the AD
Servers and the DCM synchronized, the Network Time Protocol (NTP) can be used.
The DCM (NTP client) can be synchronized with one of the AD Servers (NTP server)
or the DCM and AD servers can be synchronized with a separate Time-Server. The
procedure to synchronize the DCM with a Time-Server using NTP can be found in
topic Synchronizing with a Time-Server on page 42.

4011746 Rev P 343


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Splicing Event Triggered by a Cue Insertion Device


Introduction
The following illustration depicts a SCTE 35 based DPI application for which the
splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device. In the application below the
Cue Insertion device is integrated into the MPEG encoder (Scientific Atlanta's Encoder
Model D9032).
MPEG Encoder +
CUE Insertion

Service +
Cue Messages
Service or
Advertising Advertising
DCM

Principle
A certain time before starting a splicing event, the Cue Insertion device of the MPEG
encoder inserts a Splice Insert Cue Message into the Transport Stream containing the
splicing event start time and splicing event duration. At the splicing event start time,
the co-processor of the DCM processes both streams to achieve a seamless transition
between the Primary Channel and the associated Insertion Channel.
After a particular time, equal to the duration parameter, a seamless Insertion to
Primary Channel substitution is performed.
Notes:
When the Splice_Immediate flag of the Splice Insert Cue Message is set, the DCM
will start the splice event directly after receiving the Cue Message.
Instead of using the duration parameter, an Insertion to Primary substitution can
be triggered by an additional Splice Insert Cue Message.
Before a splice substitution can be performed, a splice channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the insertion channel.

344 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Digital Program Insertion

Splicing Event Triggered by the DCM


The DCM allows triggering a splicing event via the web browser user interface of the
device. The following illustration depicts a graphical representation of a DPI
application for which the splicing event is triggered by the web user interface of the
DCM.

Service
Service or
Advertising
DCM
Advertising

Before a splice substitution can be performed, a splice channel must be created and
the DCM requires the knowledge of the service for the insertion channel.

4011746 Rev P 345


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Configuring Splice Channels


Introduction
DPI channels can be configured on the DPI Settings table containing all services of a
particular outgoing Transport Stream or on the DPI Settings table containing all
outgoing services on a particular port. The procedures described in the following
topics are done on the DPI Settings table containing all outgoing services on a
particular port. The procedure to configure DPI channels using the DPI Settings
table containing all services of a particular outgoing Transport Stream is similar and
can be found in topic To Change DPI Settings for Outgoing Services on page 278.
As seen in the introduction of this chapter, a custom mode can be used to determine
the components of the Output Channel during a splice event. Passing of components
from the Primary Channel and assigning components from the Insertion Channel to
components of the Primary Channel are done by defining Custom PID Mapping
entries. For more information concerning defining Custom PID Mapping entries,
please refer to topic Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries on page 350.
Note: This custom mode is only useful for manual triggered splice events or splice
events triggered by a cue insertion device (SCTE 35).

To Configure Splice Channels


The following procedure explains how to configure a Splice Channel.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the port containing outgoing Transport
Stream, which includes the service that must be configured for DPI.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The Service - DPI sub page is displayed.

346 4011746 Rev P


Configuring Splice Channels

5 In the DPI Settings table, modify the following parameters to configure a DPI
channel:

a Set the Output Channel check box to define a splice channel for this service.
b In the Output Channel - Name box of the service in question, enter a name to
identify the Splice Channel.
Note: When the splicing events for this channel are triggered by an
AD-Server, the name entered in the Output Channel - Name box must match
the name given by the AD-Server.
c In the Output Channel - Mode drop down box, select one of the following
modes:
Off: DPI is switched off.
SCTE-30 / 35: splicing events are triggered by an AD-Server.
SCTE-35 Only: splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion device.
Manual: splicing events are triggered via the web browser user interface of
the DCM.
SCTE-35 Only (Custom): splicing events are triggered by a Cue Insertion
device and the actions defined under Custom PID Mapping will be
followed.
Manual (Custom): splicing events are triggered via the web browser user
interface of the DCM system and the actions defined under Custom PID
Mapping will be followed.
Note: The Insertion Channel parameters are not applicable if splicing events
are triggered by an AD-Server (Output Channel - Mode = SCTE-30 / 35).
d In the Output Channel - PMT Mode drop down box, select on of the
following modes:
Follow Insertion: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Insertion Channel.
Follow Primary: During a splicing event the PMT fragments for the spliced
components in the PMT of the Output Channel are taken form the PMT of
the Primary Channel.
e In the Insertion Channel - Card box, enter the slot position of the board to
which the port of the incoming Insertion Channel belongs.
f In the Insertion Channel - Port box, enter the number of the port to which the
incoming Insertion Channel belongs.

4011746 Rev P 347


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

g In the Insertion Channel - Type drop down box, select the input port type.
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address box, enter the multicast IP
address to which the source device streams.
Note: The Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address parameter is only
applicable if the Insertion Channel - Type parameter is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Insertion Channel - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the
port that enters the Transport Stream the Insertion channel belongs to.
Note: The Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the
Insertion Channel enters the device via an ASI port.
j In the Insertion Channel - SID box, enter the service identifier of the Insertion
Channel.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Notes:
When the Output Channel - Mode parameter is set to SCTE-35 Only (Custom) or
to Manual (Custom) the sub page to define custom PID mapping entries can be
accessed by pressing the arrow that appears in the PIDs column.
As soon as a splice channel is defined for a service (Output Channel check box is
set) one or two DPI license, depending on the service definition (SD or HD), is
(are) consumed. The availability of DPI licenses for the splice channel is shown in
the License column.
The Status column represents the status of the splice channel, viz.: Primary or
Insertion.
When the Insertion Channel is present at the input, the Service Name of the
Insertion Channel together with the Original Network identifier (ON-ID) and
Transport Stream Identifier (TS-ID) of the Transport Stream containing the
Insertion Channel is displayed in the Info box.
When an Insertion Channel is defined for a particular output channel and the
Transport Stream containing the Insertion Channel is not yet present at the GbE
port, a Transport Stream reservation is created.
After entering the Apply command button, all Splice Channels with Output
Channel - Mode equal to Manual are added to the DPI Start/Stop table.

348 4011746 Rev P


Configuring Splice Channels

Tip:
When particular parameters of all splicing channels on a particular GbE port must be
changed to similar values, the Update All Channels function of the web browser user
interface can be used. The following procedure explains how to use this function.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the corresponding port, right-click on this
port, and point to View Port Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page of the corresponding port is displayed.
3 Click on the DPI link.
Result: The DPI sub page with the DPI settings of the output channels on the
corresponding port is displayed.

4 In the Update all channels table, enter the desired value in the box or select the
desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should be changed for
all channels of the corresponding port.
5 Press the Update command button.
Result: The settings are changed in the DPI Settings table.
Note: Particular values in the DPI Settings table can still be changed if necessary.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 349


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Defining Custom DPI Mapping Entries


Introduction
For manual triggered splicing events or events triggered by a Cue Insertion device,
the components within the Output Channel during the splicing event can be specified.
Components coming from the Primary Channel must be passed and components
spliced from the Insertion Channel must be assigned to the corresponding components
of the Primary Channel.
Note:
The components of the Primary Channel not passed to the Output Channel will be
blocked during the spicing event.
To have a successful splicing event, assigning one video component is
mandatory, assigning multiple video components is not allowed.
Passing or assigning components can be done by creating Custom PID Mapping
entries for each individual component.

Passing Components from the Primary Channel


Perform the following steps to pass components from the Primary Channel to the
Output Channel.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service for which components must be passed from the Primary
Channel.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of the services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, point to the arrow in the PIDs column of the service for
which components must be passed from the Primary Channel.
Result: The Custom PID Mapping table is displayed.

350 4011746 Rev P


Configuring Splice Channels

Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.
7 In the Action drop down box, select Pass From Main.
8 In the Input PID Main box, enter the PID of the component that must be passed.
9 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

Assigning Components from the Insertion Channel to Components of the Primary Channel
Perform the following steps to assign components from the Insertion Channel to
components of the Primary Channel.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View sub page
after pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service for which components must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of the services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, point to the arrow in the PIDs column of the service for
which components must be assigned.
Result: The Custom PID Mapping table is displayed.
Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
6 Click on the Add Row command button.
Result: A new entry is added in the table.

4011746 Rev P 351


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

7 In the Action drop down box, select Splice.


8 In the Input PID Main box, enter the PID of the Primary Channel component to
which an Insertion Channel component must be assigned.
9 In the Input PID Insertion Channel box, enter the PID of the Insertion Channel
component.
10 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

Removing Custom PID Mapping Entries


The following steps explain how to remove entries form the Custom PID Mapping
table.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream, which
includes the service for which Custom PID Mapping entries must be removed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of the services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream
are displayed.
5 In the DPI Settings table, point to the arrow in the PIDs column of the service for
which Custom PID Mapping entries must be removed.
Result: The Custom PID Mapping table is displayed.
Tip: The Custom PID Mapping table is also accessible via the DPI Settings table
containing all outgoing services belonging to a particular GbE port.
6 Tick the check boxes prefixing the entries that should be removed.
Tip: To set the check boxes of consecutive rows in the Custom PID Mapping table,
tick the check box of the first entry that must be removed, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last entry that must be removed.
7 Press the Remove Checked Rows command button.

352 4011746 Rev P


Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers

Checking the IP Address of the AD Servers


The following procedure describes how to check the IP address of the AD Server that
has set up a connection for a particular splice channel.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
pressing the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream containing
the splice channel for which the AD Server information should be checked.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI sub page is displayed.
5 In the Info column, point to the arrow of the splice channel in question.
Note: This arrow appears when the Output Channel - Mode is set to SCTE30.
Result: The IP address of the corresponding AD Server is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 353


Chapter 5 Digital Program Insertion

Triggering Splicing Events Manually


Introduction
Splicing events on Splicing Channels of which the Splicing Channel Mode is set to
Manual can be triggered manually via the web browser user interface. More
information concerning the manual splicing channel mode can be found in sub topic
Splicing Event Triggered by the Digital Content Manager System earlier in this
chapter.

To Trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel Substitution


The following procedure explains how to trigger a Primary / Insertion Channel
substitution
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after pressing
the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream that includes
the service.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream are
displayed.
5 In the DPI Start/Stop table, point to the button (Start) of the Splice Channel in
question.
Result: A Primary / Insertion Channel substitution is triggered.
Tip: After performing the Primary / Insertion Channel substitution, Insertion appears
in the Status column.

To Trigger a Insertion / Primary Channel Substitution


The following procedure explains how to trigger an Insertion / Primary Channel
substitution.
1 On the web user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after pressing
the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream that includes
the service.

354 4011746 Rev P


Triggering Splicing Events Manually

3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and


point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Settings of the outgoing Transport Stream is displayed.
4 Point to the DPI link.
Result: The DPI settings of services belonging to the outgoing Transport Stream are
displayed.
5 In the DPI Start/Stop table, point to the button (Start) of the Splice Channel in
question.
Result: An Insertion / Primary Channel substitution is triggered.
Tip: After performing the Insertion / Primary Channel substitution, Primary appears
in the Status column.

4011746 Rev P 355


6 Chapter 6
Scrambling
Introduction
This chapter describes how to integrate the DCM into scrambling
applications.

In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 358
Introducing Conditional Access System ......................................... 360
Steps To Take....................................................................................... 375
Allowing Scrambling for Services .................................................... 378
Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters .......................... 380
Configuring the Access Criteria........................................................ 409
Scrambling Control............................................................................. 427

4011746 Rev P 357


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Introduction
General
A DCM is provided with a DVB Simulcrypt compliant scrambler, which is designed
to meet the DVB Simulcrypt conditional access specifications ETSI TS 103 197. There
are many Conditional Access Systems in use today and the goal of the DCM devices
is to integrate the devices in as many CA Systems as possible. The operator using the
DCM has a wide choice of Conditional Access Systems. To achieve this
interoperability, a common set of protocols and interfaces between scramblers and
CA System is required.
The scrambler of the DCM works on a per license basis, meaning each service that
must be scrambled or each service that contains components that must be scrambled
needs a Scrambling license. For more information concerning licenses, please refer to
topic Licensing on page 17.
Note: Scrambling is performed by the Co-Processor Card that is plugged on a GbE
Interface Card or ASI Interface Card. When a service or component in an outgoing
Transport Stream must be scrambled, the interface card streaming this outgoing
Transport Stream should be populated by a Co-Processor Card.

ROSA NMS Components


To integrate a DCM into a Conditional Access System, Scientific Atlanta provides the
following ROSA NMS components:
SCS Configurator
The SCS Configurator is used to configure the scrambling-specific parameters of
the DCM devices. More information concerning the SCS Configurator can be
found in topic Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters on page 380.
AC Manager Component
The AC Manager Component can be used to specify Transport Streams and
services, to assign services to Transport Streams, to define access criteria, and to
assign access criteria to services. More information concerning the AC Manager
Component can be found in topic Configuring the Access Criteria on page 409.
Scrambling Control Task
The Scrambling Control Task can be used to start or to stop scrambling of services
or components. For more information about the Scrambling Control Task, please
refer to topic Scrambling Control on page 427.
Notes:
The procedure to integrate a DCM into a ROSA Network Management System
can be found in appendix Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS on page 577.

358 4011746 Rev P


Introduction

When a third party Event Information Scheduler is used in the Conditional


Access System, both the AC Manager Component and Scrambling Control Task
functionality are taken over by this Event Information Scheduler.

4011746 Rev P 359


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Introducing Conditional Access System


Introduction
A Conditional Access System (CAS) is the basis in a Pay TV system to prevent
unauthorized reception of services (picture, sound, or data) and to secure the charge
of the subscribing remuneration. The following illustration depicts DCM integration
into a Conditional Access System.
Event
Information
Scheduler
Access Criteria
Scheduler

(P)SI
ECM Generator
Generator
Access Criteria
Control Word

SCGs

(P)SI Tables
ECMs

Control
Control
Word
Word Simulcrypt (P)SI DCM
Synchronizer Generator
Generator

Control Word

(P)SI
Tables

ECMs
MUX

TS Scrambler TS

Transport Stream

Database

EMM
Generator

Private Data
Generator
Subscriber
Management
System

360 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

A CAS system combines scrambling of picture, sound, or data services with a specific
Scrambling/Descrambling key management system. Scrambling is the process that
uses a cryptographic algorithm to make services unintelligible for non-authorized
subscribers.

Scrambling, Control Word, and Cryptoperiod


At the transmission site of a Condition Access System (CAS), services multiplexed
into a Transport Stream can be scrambled using a particular scrambling algorithm
(also called DVB Common Scrambling Algorithm) with a scrambling/descrambling
key (named Control Word). At the receiver site the scrambled services can then be
descrambled by an appropriate descrambling algorithm using the same Control
Word (CW).
Transport Transport Stream with Transport
Scrambler Descrambler
Stream Scrambled Services Stream
CW

CW

To increase the security of a CA System the Control Word used to scramble and
descramble services changes periodically (typically every 10 seconds). The duration
of scrambling by one Control Word is named Crypto Period. Control Words, which
are typically 64 bits long, are generated by a Control Word Generator (CWG) and
requested by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer (SCS).
Transport Transport Stream with Transport
Scrambler Descrambler
Stream Scrambled Services Stream
CW

?
CWG
SCS
CW

Control Words cannot be delivered from the transmitter to the receiver site in the
clear, they need to be encrypted. The algorithm used to encrypt the Control Word is
unique to each CA System and implemented in a secure device of the descrambler
and uses the smart card of the customers Conditional Access Module (CAM).

Access Criteria and Access Rights


When a subscriber is only interested in particular services like sport and nature, he
only wants to pay for these services. Services, for which the subscriber doesnt pay,
have to remain unintelligible. Therefore two parameters are defined, namely Access
Criteria and Access Rights:

4011746 Rev P 361


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Access Criteria is Conditional Access vendor specified information and specifies


service-related criteria that are applied to a package of services or elementary
streams. These subscriptions (also called theme or product) are encapsulated into
Entitlement Control Messages (ECMs). More information concerning ECMs can
be found in topic Entitlement Control Messages on page 362.
Access Rights are stored on the smart card of the descrambler and determines
which services the subscriber can access. These Access Rights are periodically
reconfirmed using Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs). When the
Access Rights for a particular subscriber should be changed, EMMs are sent to the
descrambler containing the new Access Rights.
Example:
AC criteria 1, subscription = Football ECM1
AC criteria 2, subscription = Tennis ECM2
AC criteria 3, subscription = Snooker ECM3
A subscriber pays to view football and snooker programs. His set top box receives all
ECM packets that contain the appropriate control words. Besides that, the set top box
also receives EMM packets that contain the access rights for this set top box. These
rights are compared with the access criteria and the set top box is only allowed to
decipher the ciphered Control Words of the ECMs for which the subscriber has
Access Rights (ECM1 and ECM3).

Entitlement Control Messages


The Simulcrypt Synchronizer (SCS) triggered from the Event Information Scheduler
(EIS) to start a Conditional Access event, will get every Crypto Period a Control Word
(CW) for this event from the Control Word Generator (CWG).

Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX

Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

Note: For more information concerning the Event Information Scheduler, please refer
to topic Event Information Scheduler on page 365.

362 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

The Simulcrypt Synchronizer extracts the Access Criteria from the information
(named Scrambling Control Group) received from the Event Information Scheduler.
The synchronizer sends this Access Criteria together with the Control Word for the
corresponding Crypto Period to the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG).
The Entitlement Control Message Generator encrypts both the Access Criteria and
the Control Word using a particular cryptographic algorithm with a specific Service
Key. This encrypted data is encapsulated into an Entitlement Control Message
(ECM) and sent to the Simulcrypt Synchronizer.

Incoming
Transport Outgoing

MUX
Stream Scrambler Transport
ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

A certain time before the first Crypto Period for this event begins, the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer starts sending ECMs for this event at regular times to the multiplexer
(typically every 200 msec). This start time is necessary to give the descrambler time
to decrypt the encrypted Control Word and Access Criteria. The multiplexer
multiplexes this stream of ECMs with the outgoing Transport Stream. When the
event begins, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer sends the Control Word to the scrambler,
which starts scrambling the service(s) associated with this event.

Incoming
Transport Outgoing
MUX

Stream Scrambler Transport


ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

4011746 Rev P 363


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Before the end of the Crypto Period, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer requests a new
Control Word from the Control Word Generator, sends this new Control Word
together with the Access Criteria to the ECMG, and receives a new ECM for this
event from the ECM Generator. This new generated ECM is multiplexed in the
outgoing Transport Stream. When the Crypto Period is ended, the new Control
Word is sent to the scrambler, which starts scrambling the service(s) using the new
Control Word. This reiterates for every Crypto Period until the end of the event.

Incoming
Transport Outgoing

MUX
Stream Scrambler Transport
ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

Entitlement Management Messages


The Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is a carrousel that
generates an Entitlement Management Messages (EMM) stream containing the
encrypted Access Rights to services.

EMMG

EMMs
Incoming Outgoing
Transport
MUX

Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

364 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

The EMM Generator also generates EMMs with encrypted keys to renew the service
and management keys used by the scrambler, and EMMs with instructions for the
descrambler (e.g. clear areas of smart card, disable set top boxes, etc.).
The EMM Generator offers the EMMs to the DCM via an incoming Transport Stream
or via the EMMG to MUX interface (TCP or UDP). When the EMMs are offered via
network communication, the multiplexer take cares of the EMM stream generation.
This EMM stream is multiplexed to the outgoing Transport Stream.

Event Information Scheduler


The Event Information Scheduler (EIS) is the functional unit in the Conditional
Access System that holds the schedule information, the configuration, and the
Conditional Access Information required for the complete Conditional Access
System.

Incoming
Transport Outgoing

MUX
Scrambler Transport
Stream ECMs Stream

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

To start a scrambling event the Event Information Scheduler provides the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer with a Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message. A SCG
provisioning message contains a list of services and/or Elementary Streams that
must be scrambled at the same time with the same Control Word and a list with ECM
Groups for which ECMs must be generated. An ECM Group contains the necessary
information, like Super_Cas_ID 2, ECM_ID 3, and Access Criteria, to bind an ECM
stream to a Conditional Access Provider.

2 The Super_Cas_ID is the concatenation of the CA_system_ID and the CA_Subsystem_ID


and is used to identify the ECM Generator within the Contitional Access System.
3 The ECM_ID identifies an ECM stream within the Conditional Access System.

4011746 Rev P 365


Chapter 6 Scrambling

To stop a scrambling event the EIS sends a SCG provisioning message update to the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer. The ECM Group for the event of which scrambling must
be stopped is removed from the SCG provisioning message. The following
illustration shows a SCG provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message

Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
1 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
2 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
3 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
4 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM
5 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
Groups
6 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx

ECM ID

366 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

PSI/SI Generator
When EMM and ECM streams are added to a Transport Stream, the Program Specific
Information (PSI) and the Service Information (SI) must be updated.
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Program Map Table (PMT). The CA
descriptors in the PMT point to the Packet Identifier (PID) of the ECM(s).
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors in the Conditional Access Table (CAT). The
CA descriptors in the CAT point to the Packet Identifiers (PIDs) of the EMMs.
The PSI/SI Generator (named PSIG) provides the multiplexer with the appropriate
PSI and SI tables for the outgoing Transport Stream.

PSIG EMMG

EMMs
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing

MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

The PSI/SI Generator inside the DCM responsible for the PSI and the SI table
generation and adaptation for the re-multiplexer functionality is also responsible for
the PMT and CAT adaptation for the scrambling functionality.
When a third party PSI/SI Generator is connected to the DCM, particular tables like
PAT, PMT, and CAT generated by the external connected PSIG overrule the tables
generated by the PSIG of the DCM.
Note: The DCM cannot update CA descriptors in a PMT if the PSI/SI information is
generated by an external PSIG. Therefore the Type parameter of the descriptor rule
must be set to Do Not Insert. For more information, please refer to topic Adding,
Changing, or Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules on page 392.

4011746 Rev P 367


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Private Data Generator


The Private Data Generator (PDG) is a carrousel that generates a private data stream
containing data streams likes software upgrades for set top boxes, etc The Private
Data Generator offers this stream to the DCM via an ASI input or over IP.

PSIG PDG EMMG

EMMs
Private Data
(P)SI Tables
Incoming Outgoing

MUX
Transport Scrambler Transport
Stream Stream
P(SI) Tables
PSIG ECMs

CWG CW
SCS
CW

DCM
CW/AC
(...,AC,...)

ECMs

EIS ECMG

The multiplexer of the DCM inserts this stream into the outgoing Transport Stream.
Note: The Private Data Generator uses the same interface as the Entitlement
Management Message Generator.

368 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

Scrambling levels
Scrambling can be done on two different levels, namely: Elementary Stream Level
scrambling and Service Level scrambling. The following list describes these
scrambling levels:
Elementary Stream Level Scrambling: Each component of a service may be
scrambled by a separate Control Word. For example, video and audio may be
scrambled with a separated Control Word. This is useful in multilingual systems
where a premium is charged for a second audio in a different language. In this
case, each component or elementary stream is associated with its own stream of
ECM messages.
EMMG

Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT
Transport Stream

MUX
Video PID Video PID
(P)SI Tables Scrambler
Audio PID CA Descriptor
PSIG ECMs
ECM PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)
(...,AC,...)

DCM ES Audio
CW/AC

ECMs

ECM PID

EIS EMM PID

ECMG

When scrambling at the elementary stream level, all Elementary Streams within the
service are scrambled using different Control Words. One ECM is required for each
Elementary Stream. The CA descriptors are inserted after each elementary stream
within the PMT.

4011746 Rev P 369


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Service Level Scrambling: The alternative to elementary stream level scrambling


is to scramble all components that make up a service with the same Control
Word. In this case, there is only one stream of ECM messages associated with the
service as a whole.
EMMG

Input TS Output TS
EMMs
PMT PMT

MUX
Video PID CA Descriptor
Transport Stream Scrambler
Audio PID ECM PID
ECMs
Video PID
ES Video
CW Audio PID
ES Audio CWG CW
SCS
ES Video (scrambled)

(...,AC,...) DCM ES Audio (scrambled)

CW/AC

ECMs
ECM PID

EIS EMM PID

ECMG

When scrambling at the service level, all Elementary Streams within the service are
scrambled using the same Control Word. Only one ECM is required for each service.
The CA descriptor is inserted near the top of the PMT.
Note: Elementary Stream Level Scrambling and Service Level Scrambling can be
mixed within the scrambler but not within the same service.

370 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

Simulcrypt Scrambling
Simulcrypt scrambling is a scrambling method whereby a single Transport Stream
contains ECMs and EMMs from different Conditional Access systems. This enables
different CA decoder populations to receive and correctly decode the same video and
audio streams.
Input TS Output TS
EMMG1 EMMG2 EMMGn
PMT PMT

Video PID EMMs CA Descriptor

MUX
Audio PID
Transport Stream Scrambler ECM 1 PID

ES Video ECM 2 PID


ECMs
ES Audio ECM n PID
CW
CWG CW Video PID
SCS
Audio PID
,...,ECMgrpn(...,ACn),...)

CW/ACn
CW/AC1

CW/AC2
(..., ECMgrp1(...,AC1),
ECMgrp2(...,AC2)

CSA(ES Video, CW)


ECM1s

ECMn
ECMs CSA(ES Audio, CW)

ECM 1 PID

ECMG1 ECMG2 ECMGn ECM 2 PID

ECM n PID

EMM 1 PID
EIS
EMM 2 PID

EMM n PID

4011746 Rev P 371


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Timing Parameters
When the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
the start of a new Conditional Access (CA) event using a Scrambling Control Group
(SCG ID 1) provisioning message, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer request a Control
Word (CW 1) from the Control Word Generator. Once the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
has received the Control Word from the CW Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
sends the Control Word together with the Access Criteria and ECM ID extracted from
the Scrambling Control Group provisioning message to the ECM Generator.
The ECM Generator encrypts the Control Word and Access Criteria and encapsulates
this data into an ECM. The ECM Generator sends this ECM to the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer. A certain time before (t1-t2) starting the CA event (Activation Time)
the Simulcrypt Synchronizer start sending ECMs for the first Crypto Period at regular
times to the Multiplexer.
Transition Start Delay 4 (t1-t2): represents the amount of time between the start of
the first Crypto Period following a clear to scrambled transition, and the start of
the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
The multiplexer multiplexes these ECMs directly into the outgoing Transport Stream.
At the same time a CA descriptor containing the ECM PID is inserted into the
Program Map Table (PMT) of the Transport stream.
SCG SCG
ID 1 ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1) (CW 2) (CW 3) (CW L)
ECM
Transmission t1 t3 t4 tL+1

Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP L
t2 t5 tL

Service Clear Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled Clear


Status using CW 1 using CW 2 using CW L

Activation Time from the Activation Time from the


SCG provisioning SCG de-provisioning
message message

The Transition Start Delay must match the time the descrambler needs to decapsulate
the ECM PID from the PMT and to decrypt the Control Word and Access Criteria. At
the begin (t2) of the first Crypto Period (CP 1) the set top box starts descrambling the
scrambled service using CW 1.

4A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the
start of theCrypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time. Only a negative Transition Start Delay can be used.

372 4011746 Rev P


Introducing Conditional Access System

A certain time (t3-t5) before the end of the running Crypto Period (CP 1) the SCS
stops transmitting ECMs attached to this CP and a certain time (t4-t5) before the next
Crypto Period (CP 2) the SCS starts transmitting ECMs for CP 2.
Stop Delay 5 (t3-t5): represents the amount of time between the end of a Crypto
Period, and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
Start Delay 6 (t4-t5): represents the amount of time between the start of a Crypto
Period, and the start of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message update
from the Event Information Scheduler indicating the end of the running CA event,
the synchronizer extend the last Crypto Period until the end of the period match the
end of the activation time extract from the SCG provisioning message update.
Once the activation time (tl) is reached the set top box stops descrambling the service.
The Simulcrypt Synchronizer stops transmitting ECMs attached to this last Crypto
Period at time (tl+1).
Transition Stop Delay (tl-tl+1): this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a SCG provisioning message containing
another Access Criteria for the service(s), the synchronizer stops sending ECMs
containing the previous Access Criteria at time t6 in the last Crypto Period and starts
sending ECMs with the new Access Criteria at time (t7).
SCG
ID 2
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM ECM
(CW L) (CW L+1) (CW L+2) (CW L+3)
ECM
Transmission t6 t7

Crypto
Period CP L-1 CP L CP L+1 CP L+2
t8

Service Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled


Status using CW L-1 using CW L using CW L+1 using CW L+2

Activation Time
SCG ID 2

5 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be delayed
with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter means that the
ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.
6 A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the

start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time.

4011746 Rev P 373


Chapter 6 Scrambling

AC Start Delay 7 (t7-t8): represents the amount of time between the start of the
first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
AC Stop Delay 8 (t6-t8): represents the amount of time between the end of the
lastCrypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the end of the
broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.
During the connection setup between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer and the
Entitlement Control Message Generator, the Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a
Channel Status Message containing particular timing parameters. When timing
parameters are missing or inaccurate, ROSAs SCS Configurator allows overruling
these parameters.
When a subscriber tunes into a scrambled service in a particular Crypto Period, the
scrambler is not able to scramble the service during the rest of this Crypto period
because he has only the Control Word for the next period. To solve this problem, an
Entitlement Control Message (ECM) can be provided with more than one Control
Word. The most Conditional Access Systems allow 1 or 2 Control Words in an ECM,
viz. the Control Word of the current Crypto Period and the Control Word of the next
period.
SCG
ID 1
SCG
Transmission ECM ECM ECM
(CW 1-2) (CW 2-3) (CW 3-4)
ECM
Transmission

Crypto
Period CP 1 CP 2 CP 3

Service Clear Scrambled Scrambled Scrambled


Status using CW 1 using CW 2 using CW 3

Activation Time

7 A positive start delay parameter means that the ECM shall be delayed with respect to the
start of the Crypto Period. A negative delay parameter it means that the ECM shall be
broadcast ahead of this time.
8 A positive stop delay parameter means that the end of the ECM broadcast shall be delayed

with respect to the end of the Crypto Period. A negative stop delay parameter means that the
ECM broadcast shall be ended ahead of time.

374 4011746 Rev P


Steps To Take

Steps To Take
Before the scrambling functionality of a DCM can be used, a number of actions must
be completed.
Installing the ROSA NMS Software on a Computer
The ROSA NMS software must be installed on a computer. Fore more information
concerning the ROSA NMS software, please refer to the ROSA Network Management
System Users Guide. Once the ROSA Software is installed the following drivers
must be installed within ROSA NMS. This allows the computer running the ROSA
NMS software to participate in the Conditional Access System:

- IIOP Protocol Driver


- DCM Device Driver
- SCS Configurator
- AC Manager Component
- Scrambling Control Task Driver
The procedures to install these drivers are described in appendix Integrating a DCM
into ROSA NMS on page 577.

Mapping the DCM into ROSA NMS


The procedure to map a DCM into ROSA NMS can be found in appendix Integrating a
DCM into ROSA NMS on page 577.

Creating the Transport Stream Multiplex


The following actions must be performed to create a Transport Stream multiplex:

- Create an outgoing Transport Stream. The procedures to create an outgoing


Transport Stream can be found in topic Creating an Outgoing Transport Stream
on page 127.
- Pass the services to this outgoing Transport Stream. More information about
passing services to an outgoing Transport Stream can be found in topic
Passing Incoming Services to an Outgoing Transport Stream.
- Set the Scrambling parameter for the services that must be scrambled and the
services containing components that must be scrambled to Scrambling Allowed.
The procedure to set the Scrambling parameter of a service to Scrambling
Allowed is described in topic Allowing Scrambling for Services on page 378.
- When EMM components are offered to the DCM via a Transport Stream, the
corresponding EMM components must be passed to the outgoing Transport
Stream. The procedure to pass EMM components can be found in topic
Passing EMM Components on page 214.

4011746 Rev P 375


Chapter 6 Scrambling

- When Private Data components are offered via a Transport Stream, these
components must be passed to this outgoing Transport Stream. The
procedure to pass such components can be found in topic Passing and
Removing Unreferenced Components on page 226.
Configuring the Simulcrypt Controller of the DCM
The following actions must be performed using the SCS Configurator.

- Configure the scrambling specific parameters.


- Assign one or multiple ECM Generator(s) to the DCM and configure the
ECMG-specific parameters.
- Assign one or multiple Event Information Schedulers to the DCM and
configure the EIS-specific parameters.
Detailed information concerning these actions can be found in topic Configuring the
Scrambling-Specific Parameters on page 380.
WARNING:
As long as no Event Information Scheduler is defined, the DCM is not able to
scramble.

Selecting the ECM ID Mode


Before access criteria can be assigned to services, the ECM ID mode must be set, viz.
automatic ECM ID mode or fixed ECM ID mode. More information concerning the
ECM ID mode can be found in topic Changing the ECM ID Mode on page 434.

Configuring the Access Criteria


The following steps should be executed using the AC Manager Component:

- Specifying the transport streams and services


- Assignment of services to transport streams
- Defining the CA System and the necessary Access Criterias
- Assignment of access criteria to the services
Detailed information concerning these steps can be found in topic Configuring the
Access Criteria on page 409.

Finalizing the Transport Stream Multiplex


- When EMM components are offered to the DCM via the EMM to MUX
interface, the corresponding EMM components must be passed to the
outgoing Transport Stream. The procedure to pass EMM components can be
found in topic Passing EMM Components on page 214.
- When Private Data components are offered to the DCM via the PDG to MUX
interface, the corresponding Private Data components must be passed to the
outgoing Transport Stream. The procedure to pass Private Data components
can be found in topic Passing Private Data Components on page 220.

376 4011746 Rev P


Steps To Take

- The Streaming parameter of the Transport Stream must be set to Active. The
procedure to change the Streaming parameter is described in topic Activating
or Stopping Streaming on page 282.
Starting and Stopping Scrambling
Clear to scrambling or scrambling to clear transitions of services can be performed
using the Scrambling Control Task. Fore more information please refer to topic
Scrambling on page 427.

4011746 Rev P 377


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Allowing Scrambling for Services


Introduction
Before a service or components within a service can be scrambled, the scrambling
parameter of the service must be set to Scrambled Allowed. Each service of which
the Scrambling parameter is set to Scrambling Allowed occupies one Scrambling
license.

Changing the Scrambling Parameter of a Service


The following steps explain how to change the Scrambling parameter of a service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream for which
scrambling parameter must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, click on the Scrambling tab.
Result: The Scrambling tab is displayed.

6 In the Scrambling drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Scrambling allowed: scrambling is allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
No Scrambling: scrambling is not allowed for the service or for components
belonging to the service.
Note: The Scrambling drop down box is only applicable if the interface card of the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service is passed is provided with a
Co-Processor Card.

378 4011746 Rev P


Allowing Scrambling for Services

7 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.
Tip: Information concerning the other parameters on the Service - Service sub page
can be found in topic Changing Service Parameters on page 272.
Note: If no or no more Scrambling Licenses are available, a warning appears after
pressing the Apply command button. More information concerning Scrambling
Licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.

4011746 Rev P 379


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters


Introduction
General
The scrambling-specific configuration parameters of the DCM, which are connected
to the computer running the ROSA software, can be adapted using ROSAs SCS
Configurator.

About the SCS Configuration GUI


After opening the SCS Configurator user interface, all DCM devices that are mapped
into the Server Explorer of ROSA NMS, provided with scrambling licenses, and
containing services for which scrambling is allowed, can be found on the
Configuration tab of the GUI.

The SCS Configurator allows configuring the scrambling specific parameters and
assigning the following CA interfaces:
Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) interfaces
Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) interfaces
Event Information Scheduler (EIS) interfaces

380 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

PSI SI generator (PSIG) interfaces


Note: The number of CA interfaces that can be assigned to a DCM using the SCS
Configurator is restricted to 20.
Icons indicate the status of the connection between the interfaces and the DCM. The
following table describes the connection status icons.

Status Description
Icon
The connection between the DCM and the ECM Generator is closed.

The ECM Generator tries to connect to the DCM.

The connection between the ECM Generator and the DCM is in channel
establishing state.
The channel between the ECM Generator and the DCM is open.

The DCM waits for a connection from the Event Information Scheduler, the EMM
Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The DCM waits for a channel setup from the Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator.
The channel between the DCM and the Channel Event Information Scheduler, the
EMM Generator, or the PSI Generator is open

4011746 Rev P 381


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Changing the Scrambler Properties


Introduction
The SCS Configurator allows changing the following scrambler properties:
Check Scrambling Control Group at Provisioning Time Option
When the Check SCG at Provisioning Time function is switched on and the
Simulcrypt Synchronizer receives a Scrambling Control Group provisioning message
from the Event Information Scheduler, the DCM will check the presence of the
Elementary Streams/service(s) in the incoming Transport Stream with the service(s)
listed in the Scrambling Control Group provisioning message. If the incoming
Transport Stream contains the service(s) the Simulcrypt Synchronizer will accept the
Scrambling Control Group. Otherwise the Simulcrypt Synchronizer will refuse the
Scrambling Control Group and returns a Scrambling Control Group error message to
the Event Information Scheduler.
When the Check SCG at Provisioning Time function is switched off, the DCM checks
the Transport Stream on service(s) presence at the moment (activation time) the
scrambler starts the scrambling process for this (these) service(s).

Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay


After powering up the DCM the multiplexer starts analyzing the incoming Transport
Stream if the Check Elements at Provisioning Time function is switched on. During
this Transport Stream analyzing process the Simulcrypt Synchronizer answers on
received Scrambling Control Group provisioning messages with Scrambling Control
Group error messages and the Scrambling Control Groups are refused. Defining a
Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay can solve this problem.

Scramble only Audio/Video


The DCM can scramble all components of a service or only the video and audio
component of a service (in case of service level scrambling).

To Change the Scrambler Properties


Perform the following steps to change scrambler properties.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the DCM in question and select
Properties in the short cut menu.
Note: The Scrambler Properties dialog is displayed.

382 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

3 Set or clear the Check SCG at Provision Time check box.


4 In the SCG Accept Delay box, enter the amount of time that is used after
powering the device before accepting Scrambling Control Groups. A delay time
between 0 and 120 seconds can be entered.
Note: The SCG Accept Delay box is only applicable if the Check SCG at Provision
Time check box is set.
5 Set or clear the Scramble only Audio/Video check box.
6 Press the OK command button to confirm.

4011746 Rev P 383


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Entitlement Control Message Generators


Introduction
To establish communication between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer of the DCM and
an ECM Generator a TCP connection has to be made followed with a channel set up.
During the connection making process the Simulcrypt Synchronizer requires the IP
address and port number of the ECM Generator to establish the TCP connection and
needs a channel identifier to set up a channel. The operator can determine this
channel identifier or the Simulcrypt Synchronizer can pick a channel identifier from
the free channel identification pool.

TS
DCM TS + ECMs
EMMs
CW/AC

ECM
Generator

The Simulcrypt Synchronizer also requires the knowledge of the mapping between
the Super CAS ID, which is a concatenation of the CA System identifier and the CA
Subsystem identifier, and the communication parameters. Once the channel is
established and the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) triggers the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer to request ECMs from the ECM Generator, an ECM stream is set up.
The number of ECM streams that can be set up between the Simulcrypt Synchronizer
and the ECM Generator within one channel is limited and depends on the CA
System.

Load Balancing
For backup and/or load sharing purposes several ECM Generators can
be connected to a DCM. The priority assigned to the communication
channel determines if the ECM Generators are used in load balancing or in backup
mode. When the channel priorities of the ECM Generators are equal, the ECM
Generators will work in load sharing mode. When the priority differs, the ECM
Generator with highest priority (= lowest number) acts as Main ECM Generator and
the one with the lowest priority as backup

384 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Whenever DCM needs to set up a new ECM stream, the DCM will select a connected
ECM Generator. Then it will select the ECMG connection with the highest priority
that has available ECM capacity. If the generators have an equal priority, the one
with available ECM capacity and the least open streams will be selected. When the
load on an ECMG decreases, ECM streams will not be automatically spread over
equal priority ECMG.
As soon as channel connection with an ECMG is broken, or the ECMG runs out of
ECMG capacity, a new ECMG is selected according to the criteria above.
The ECMG working modes can be combined, for instance two generators with the
same priority (load sharing mode) and one with a lower priority (backup mode).
Note: If no capacity is available, no ECM stream will be se up and the service(s) can
not be scrambled.
Examples
Load Sharing
Suppose an application with two ECM Generators (IP A and B) with same priority
(prio 1) and with a capacity of 10 streams. During stream setup, the streams are
spread over the ECM Generators as follows:

IP A: streams 1, 3, 5, 7, 9
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
When the DCM stops scrambling a number of services (corresponding streams 5, 7,
and 9), no stream balancing is done.

IP A: streams 1, 3
IP B: streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
ECMG backup
In our application, ECMG IP A has priority 1 and IP B priority 2. The streams are
shared as follows:

IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams
If IP A fails, IP B takes over the load

IP A: streams
IP B: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
If IP A restores:

IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams

4011746 Rev P 385


Chapter 6 Scrambling

When an additional stream is required, capacity will be taken from IP B.

IP A: streams 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10
IP B: streams 11
Load Sharing and ECMG Backup
Suppose an application with three ECM Generators (IP A, B, and C) with a capacity of
10 streams. IP A and B have priority 1 and IP C priority 2. During stream setup, the
streams are spread over the ECM Generators as follows:

IP A (prio 1): streams 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11


IP B (prio 1): streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10
IP C (prio 2): streams
If IP A fails, the full capacity of IP B will be used and the rest from IP C.

IP A (prio 1): streams


IP B (prio 1): streams 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 1 ,3, 5, 7, 9
IP C (prio 1): streams 11

To Assign an ECMG Interface


The following procedure explains how to add an Entitlement Control Message
Generator interface to a DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
ECMG in the short-cut menu.
Note: The Add ECMG dialog is displayed.

386 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

3 In ECMG Name box, enter the name of the ECM Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the ECM Generator in the CA system. A
name of max 20 characters can be given to an ECM Generator.
4 In the ECMG Type drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Standard: DVB Simulcrypt
- Irdeto M_Crypt: (DVB Simulcrypt) creates streams even if no ECMs are
requested and overrules the Access Criteria with a fixed format containing the
Original Network Identifier (ON_ID), the Transport Stream Identifier
(TS_ID), and the Service Identifier (SID).
- Nagra NagraVision: (DVB Simulcrypt) overrules the Access Criteria with the
ECM identifier.
5 In the ECM PID Source drop down box, select the desired ECM PID source, viz.:
- ECM ID: the ECM Identifier from the ECM Group in the SCG Provisioning
message is used to determine the ECM Packet Identifier.
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the ECM packet identifier (PID)
from the list of free PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the ECM PID determines, can
be limited by defining limits (ECM PID Lower Limit and ECM PID Upper Limit).

4011746 Rev P 387


Chapter 6 Scrambling

6 In the CA SystemID box, enter the Conditional Access System identifier. This
identifier is defined in table 3 CA_system_ID of ETR 162 and used to indicate the
type of CA system applicable for the associated ECM stream. Contact your CA
vendor for more information.
7 In the CA SubsystemID box, enter the identifier of the Conditional Access sub
system. This parameter is used to differentiate multiple ECM Generators from
the same CA vender in the CA application. Contact your CA vendor for more
information.
8 Click the Add command button to add a connection entry in the Connections
table.
Result: A table entry is added.

9 In the Priority box of this entry, enter a channel priority number to determine the
ECMG working mode. More information concerning the ECMG working mode
can be found in topic Introduction on page 384.
10 In the IP Address box, enter the IP address of the ECM Generator. The octets of
the IP address must be separated by dots.
11 In the Port box, enter the port number of the ECM Generator used for this
channel.
12 When the Simulcrypt Synchronizer should determine the channel identifier for
this channel, the Automatic Channel ID Selection check box must be set.
Otherwise clear this check box and enter the channel identifier in the Channel ID
box. A number between 0 and 65535 is allowed.
Notes:

- When several ECMG connections should be established, repeat step 8 up to 12


until all these connections are made.
- Not all CA vendors support Automatic ChannelID Selection.
13 Point to the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.
Note: A connection entry can always be deleted by pressing the Remove command
button after selecting the entry.

388 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Changing the ECMG Specific Parameters


Perform the following steps to change the properties of an ECM Generator.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the ECM Generator of which parameters
must be changed and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Properties dialog for the selected ECMG is displayed.
3 Adapt the parameters and press the OK command button to confirm or the
Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: More information concerning the ECMG parameters can be found in topic To
Assign an ECMG Interface on page 384.

Removing an ECMG Interface


Perform the following steps to remove an ECM Generator.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab, right-click on the ECM Generator in question and
select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box dialog is displayed.
3 Press the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort the
operation.

Overruling the ECMG Channel Status Message Parameter Values


In normal circumstances the values in the Channel Status Message generated by the
ECM Generator are used by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer to determine the ECM
transmit timings. When particular values are missing or inaccurate and cannot be
changed on the ECMG, these values can be overruled using the SCS Configuration
GUI. The list below describes the parameters that can be overruled.
Overrule Max. Comp. Time: this parameter represents the worst-case time
needed by an ECM Generator to compute an ECM when all the streams in a
channel are in use. This parameter determines the ECM Request Interval
parameter used by the Simulcrypt Synchronizer. This parameter should be
changed if the ECM Generator complains about ECMG out of computational
resources.
Overrule Min. CP Duration: this parameter indicates the minimum amount of
time a control word shall be active before it can be changed.
Overrule Transition Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time
between the start of the first Crypto Period following a clear to scrambled
transition, and the start of the broadcasting of the ECM attached to this period.

4011746 Rev P 389


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Overrule Transition Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time
between the end of last Crypto Period preceding a scrambled to clear transition,
and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
start of a Crypto Period, and the start of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
Overrule Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the
end of a Crypto Period, and the end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this
period.
AC Start Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between the start
of the first Crypto Period following a change in the Access Criteria and the start of
broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule AC Stop Delay: this parameter represents the amount of time between
the end of the last Crypto Period preceding a change in Access Criteria, and the
end of broadcasting the ECM attached to this period.
Overrule Repetition Period: this parameter represents the amount of time
between two ECM packets at the output of the scrambler.
Overrule Max. Number of Streams: this parameter represents the maximum
number of simultaneous opened streams supported by an ECMG on a channel. If
the ECMG returns 0 no maximum is known, meaning the scrambler will not limit
the amount of streams on a channel and no ECMs will be requested from the
ECMG backup when maximum capacity is reached on the ECMG. To make sure
an ECMG is not overloaded, the maximum number of streams can be overruled.
The following table shows the minimum, maximum, and default values of these
parameters:

Parameter Minimum Maximum Default


Value Value Value
Maximum Compute Time (msec) 0 60,000 5,000
Minimum Crypto Period Duration (msec) 1,000 120,000 10,000
Transition Start Delay (msec) -30,000 0 -2,000
Transition Stop Delay (msec) 0 30,000 2,000
Start Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,000
Stop Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,100
AC Start Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,000
AC Stop Delay (msec) -30,000 30,000 -2,100
Overrule Repetition Period (msec) 0 30,000 100
Overrule Max. Number of Streams 0 30,000 512

390 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Independent of the active/inactive state of a DCM participating in a CA application,


the DCM will be connected to the ECMG by default. To eliminate additional ECMGs
(main and backup source) to feed a backup DCM or to avoid the need of additional
licenses, this Enable Hot Backup feature can be switched off. When a service backup
trigger is given and this feature is switched off, the connection between the main
DCM and the ECMG will be lost and the connection between the backup DCM and
the ECMG established.
The following steps explain how to change the Advanced parameters.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which values
must be overruled.
Result: The ECMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Advanced tab.
Result: The Advanced tab is displayed.

4 Set the check box of the parameter that must be overruled.


Result: The parameter box becomes editable.
5 Modify the corresponding value.
6 Set the Enable Hot Backup check box to enable this feature or clear the check box
to disable this feature.

4011746 Rev P 391


Chapter 6 Scrambling

7 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.

Adding, Changing, or Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules

Introduction
Conditional Access (CA) descriptors are data structures used to carry CA specific
information for services or Elementary Streams. The DCM devices are able to update
PMTs with CA descriptors according to the user configurable CA descriptor rules.
The SCS Configurator allows configuring CA descriptor rules and applying these
rules to descriptors.
Note: When the DCM scrambles a service or components within a service, CA
descriptors in the PMT are sorted using the values of the ECM PIDs to which the CA
descriptors apply, CA descriptors with lowest value come first. When a scrambled
service is passed from input to output of the DCM, the CA descriptor order is not
changed.

Adding a Descriptor Rule


The following procedure explains how to add an ECMG descriptor rule.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be created.
Result: The ECMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.

4 Press the Add command button.

392 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Result: The Add Descriptor Rule dialog is displayed.

5 In the Name box, enter a name to facilitate the identification of the descriptor rule
in the application.
6 In the Type drop down box, select the rule type:
- Add Private Data rule type: add private data to the standard descriptor.
- Do Not Insert rule type: no standard descriptor insertion. This setting prevents
updating the CA descriptors in the PMT by the DCM if the PSI/SI
information is generated by an external connected PSIG.
Notes:

- Both the Insert drop down box and Private Data [Hex] box are grayed, if the
rule type is set to Do Not Insert.
- Private data is CA Vendor proprietary.
7 In the Insert drop down box, select the insertion level mode for the private data
part.
- According to EIS: the Event Information Scheduler determines the insertion
level.
- At ES Level: the insertion is performed at Elementary Stream level (even if
Service Level Scrambling is defined by the Event Information Scheduler).
8 In the Private data box, enter the private date.
Note: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [hex] box must be even.
9 In the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, point to the Add command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog displays.

4011746 Rev P 393


Chapter 6 Scrambling

10 In the Enter ID box enter the ECM ID to which the CA descriptor rule must be
applied.
11 Press the OK command button to confirm.
12 Repeat step 9 up to 11 until all ECM IDs are added.
13 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to abort
the operation.
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.

Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the PMTs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams.
When no IDs are added into the Applies to ECM ID(s) box, the descriptor rule is
applied to all ECMs. Since only one rule with empty Applies to ECM ID(s) box is
allowed, this rule will overrule the standard CA descriptor.
When IDs are added, the rule is only applied to the ECM IDs appearing in the
Applies to ECM ID(s) box. Only one rule can be effective for a certain ECM ID.
ECM IDs added to the Applies to ECM ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain ECM Generator.

Changing Descriptor Rules Properties


The following steps explain how to change descriptor rule properties.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator of which descriptor
rules must be changed.
Result: The ECMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.
4 Select the CA description rule that should be changed and click the Properties
command button.
Note: Double-clicking on the CA description rule also opens the Properties dialog of
the rule.

394 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

5 The Descriptor Rule Properties dialog is displayed.


6 Adapt the descriptor rule parameters and press the OK command button to
confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note:

- ECM IDs can be removed by selecting the IDs and pointing to the Remove
command button. To select consecutive rules, click on the first rule that must
be removed, press and hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule
that must be removed. To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold
down [CTRL] key, and then click each rule that must be removed.
- Deselecting an ID can be done by holding down the [CTRL] key and pointing
to the ID.

Removing Descriptor Rules


The following procedure explains how to remove a descriptor rule.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the ECM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be removed.
Result: The ECMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.
4 Select the CA Description rule(s) that should be removed.
- To select consecutive rules, click the first rule that must be removed, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule that must be removed.
- To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and
then click each rule that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove command button.

4011746 Rev P 395


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Entitlement Management Message Generators


Introduction
The Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is a carrousel that
generates an Entitlement Management Messages (EMM) stream containing the
Access Rights to services. The EMM Generator also generates EMMs provided with
encrypted keys to renew the service and management key used by the descrambler
and EMMs with instructions for the descrambler. The EMM stream is multiplexed
into the outgoing Transport Stream.

TS

DCM TS + EMMs
EMMs

EMM
Generator

The EMM Generator presents the EMM stream to the Multiplexer using an ASI
Transport Stream or via a TCP connection. To establish communication over
Ethernet between the EMM Generator and the DCM a TCP connection has to be
made followed by a channel set up. Therefore the EMM Generator requires the IP
address and the listening port used by the DCM for this connection. When the
channel set up is complete a stream is established to transfer the EMMs from the
EMM Generator to the DCM.
The connection between the EMM Generator and the DCM supports both the TCP
and UDP protocol for streaming. In particular applications the UDP protocol is more
useful (less overhead) and in other applications the TCP Protocol (more robust).
Note: If the EMMs are offered using an ASI stream, the ASI stream must be connected
to an ASI input of the DCM and passed to the output.

To Assign an EMMG Interface


Perform the following steps to assign an EMM Generator to the DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
EMMG in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add EMMG dialog is displayed.

396 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

3 In the EMMG Name box, enter a name for the EMM Generator. This name acts
as a label to facilitate the identification of the EMM Generator in the CA system.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM to
establish the TCP connection with the EMM Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by another
EMM Generator, an Event Information Scheduler or a PSI Generator.
5 When the UDP protocol is used for data streaming, set the Use UDP Port check
box and enter the UDP port number, which is used by the DCM to receive UDP
packets, in the Use UDP Port box.
6 In the EMM PID Source drop down box, select one of the following items:
- Stream ID: the stream identifier
- Channel ID: the channel identifier of the connection
- Data ID: the private data stream identifier
- Packet ID: the packet identifier. This selection is only useful when the EMMs
are in transport stream packet format (EMM Section Grouping check box is
cleared).
- Auto: the multiplexer of the DCM chooses the EMM PID from the list of free
PIDs.
Note: The list of free PIDs, from which the multiplexer the EMM PID determines, can
be limited by defining limits (EMM PID Lower Limit and EMM PID Upper Limit).
7 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth within the outgoing
Transport Stream allocated to the packets containing EMMs.

4011746 Rev P 397


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Note: This parameter is used for bandwidth negotiation purposes with the EMMG.
When the bandwidth of the EMM stream exceeds this parameter, an error message is
sent to the EMM Generator and an alarm is triggered in ROSA NMS. No packets
will be dropped.
8 Set or clear the EMM Section Grouping check box.
- EMM Section Grouping check box is set: packets are filled with multiple
sections within one EMM provision (only if the section is smaller than the
packet).
Sections Packets

Sections

Packets

Stuffing

Header payload

- EMM Section Grouping check box is clear: the packet is filled with one
section per packet.
Sections Packets

Sections

Packets

Stuffing

Header payload

Sections Packets

Sections

Packets

Stuffing

Header payload
9 Press the OK command button to confirm.

398 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Changing the EMMG Specific Parameters


The following steps explain how to change the EMMG specific parameters.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator interface of which
parameters must be changed and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The EMMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Adapt the parameters and press the OK command button to confirm or the
Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: More information concerning the EMMG parameters can be found in topic To
Assign an EMMG Interface on page 396.

Removing an EMMG Interface


Perform the following steps to remove an EMMG interface from the DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA software,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on EMMG interface that should be removed
and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed.
3 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 399


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Adding, Changing, or Removing EMMG Descriptor Rules

Introduction
The DCM devices are able to update CATs with CA descriptors according to the user
configurable CA descriptor rules. The SCS Configurator allows configuring
descriptor rules and applying these rules to descriptors.
Note: In a CAT, CA descriptors are sorted using the values of the EMM data PIDs to
which the CA descriptors applies, CA descriptors with lowest value come first.

Adding Descriptor Rules


Perform the following steps to add an EMMG descriptor rule.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be created.
Result: The EMMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.

4 Press the Add ... command button.


Result: The Add Descriptor Rule dialog is displayed.

400 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

5 In the Name box, enter a name to identify the descriptor in the application.
6 In the Private Data [Hex] box, enter the private data.
Result: The number of characters entered in the Private Data [Hex] box must be even.
7 In the Applies to Data ID(s) box, point to the Add command button.
Result: The Add ID dialog is displayed.

8 In the Enter ID box, enter the EMM data ID to which the CA descriptor rule must
be applied.
9 Press the OK command button to confirm.
10 Repeat step 8 up to 10 until all EMM data IDs are added.
11 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Close command button to abort
the operation.
Result: The descriptor rule is displayed on the Descriptor Rules tab of the GUI.

4011746 Rev P 401


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Notes:
A DCM adds a standard CA descriptor to the CATs of scrambled services or
Elementary Streams if:
- no CA descriptor rule is configured
or
- a CA descriptor rule is configured with empty Applies to Data ID(s) box
The EMM IDs added to the Applies to Data ID(s) box must be unique over all
descriptor rules for a certain EMM Generator.

Changing Descriptor Rules Properties


The following steps explain how to change descriptor rule properties.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator of which descriptor
rules must be changed.
Result: The EMMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.
Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.
4 Select the CA description rule that should be changed and click on the
Properties command button.
5 The Descriptor Rule Properties dialog is displayed.
6 Adapt the descriptor rule parameters and press the OK command button to
confirm or the Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: EMM data IDs can be removed by selecting the IDs and pointing to the Remove
command button. To select consecutive rules, click the first rule, press and hold
down the SHIFT key, and then click the last rule. To select rules that are not
consecutive, press and hold down CTRL key, and then click each rule. Deselecting an
ID can be done by holding down the CTRL key and pointing to the ID.

Removing Descriptor Rules


The following procedure explains how to remove a descriptor rule.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EMM Generator for which descriptor
rules must be removed.
Result: The EMMG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Descriptor Rules tab.

402 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

Result: The Descriptor Rules tab is displayed.


4 Select the CA Description rule(s) that should be removed.
- To select consecutive rules, click the first rule that must be removed, press and
hold down the [SHIFT] key, and then click the last rule that must be removed.
- To select rules that are not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and
then click on each rule that must be removed.
5 Press the Remove command button.

4011746 Rev P 403


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Event Information Schedulers


Introduction
The Event Information Scheduler (EIS) provides the Simulcrypt Synchronizer with
Scrambling Control Groups (SCGs) containing the relevant information to scramble
services. To establish communication between the EIS and the Simulcrypt
Synchronizer a TCP connection should be made followed by a channel set up. Once
the connection is made the Simulcrypt Synchronizer of the DCM receives Scrambling
Control Groups from the Event Information Scheduler.

TS

DCM TS
SCGs

Event
Information
Scheduler

To set up a TCP connection between the Event Information Scheduler and the DCM,
the EIS requires the knowledge of the IP address and TCP port of the DCM used to
establish the connection.
Note: ROSA NMS, Scientific Atlantas Network Management System, can serve as
Event Information Scheduler if both the AC Management Component and
Scrambling Control Task are installed. The computer running the ROSA software
obtains the required knowledge during the device mapping process.

To Assign an EIS Interface


The following procedure explains how to assign an Event Information Scheduler
interface to a DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
Standard EIS in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Standard EIS dialog is displayed.

404 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

3 In the EIS Name box, enter a name for the Event Information Scheduler. This
name acts as a label to identify the Event Information Scheduler in the CA
System.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the listening port used by the DCM to
establish the TCP connection with the Event Information Scheduler.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an EMM
Generator or a PSI Generator.
5 In the EIS Type drop down box, select on of the following items:
- SA Specific: the Event Information Scheduler of ROSA NMS
- General: a third party Event Information Scheduler
Note: Only one Scientific Atlanta EIS can be assigned to a DCM.
6 When the Crypto Period parameter encapsulated into Scrambling Control
Groups are missing or inaccurate, this parameter can be overruled by setting the
Overrule Recommended CP Duration check box. In the box that becomes
editable after setting the check box, enter the desired Crypto Period.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.

Changing the EIS Interface Connection Parameters


The following steps explain how to change the parameters of the EIS interface
connection.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EIS interface that must be adapted
and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Standard EIS Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Adapt the parameters and press the OK command button to confirm or the
Cancel command button to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 405


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Note: More information concerning the ECMG parameters can be found in subtopic
To Assign an EIS Interface earlier in this topic.

Removing an EIS Interface


Perform the following steps to remove an EIS interface from the DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the EIS interface that should be removed
and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
3 Click the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to abort
the operation.

406 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Scrambling-Specific Parameters

PSI/SI Generators
Introduction
The main function of the PSI/SI Generator (so called PSIG) is to provide the
multiplexer with the necessary Program Specific Information (PSI) / Service
Information (SI) tables for the outgoing Transport Stream. The PSI/SI Generator
receives its primary data from the Event Information Scheduler and supplementary
data from the C(P)SI Generator.

TS

DCM TS
PSI tables

PSI
Generator

The connection between the PSI/SI Generator and the multiplexer of the DCM is a
client/server connection with the PSI/SI Generator the client and the DCM the
server. To establish communication between the PSI/SI Generator and the DCM a
TCP connection have to be made followed with a channel set up and a stream set up.

To Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface


Perform the following steps to assign a PSI/SI Generator to a DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the DCM in question and select Add
Standard PSIG in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Standard PSIG dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 407


Chapter 6 Scrambling

3 In the PSIG Name box, enter a name for the PSI/SI Generator. This name acts as a
label to facilitate the identification of the PSI/SI Generator in the CA System.
4 In the TCP Port box, enter the number of the TCP port used by the DCM to
establish connection with the PSI/SI Generator.
Note: The TCP listening port number must be unique and cannot be used by an EMM
Generator or an Event Information Scheduler.
5 In the Max. Bandwidth box, enter the maximum bandwidth for the PSI/SI stream
that can be used between the DCM and the PSI/SI Generator.
6 In the PSIG Type drop down box, select on of the following items:
SA Specific: the PSIG of ROSA NMS
General: a third party PSIG
Note: Only one Scientific Atlanta PSIG can be assigned to a DCM.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.

Changing the PSIG Interface Connection Parameters


Perform the following steps to adapt the parameters of the connection between a
PSI/SI generator interface and the DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the PSIG interface that should be adapted
and select Add Standard PSIG in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Standard PSIG Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Adapt the parameters and press the OK command button to confirm or the
Cancel command button to abort the operation.
Note: More information concerning the PSIG parameters can be found in sub topic To
Assign a PSI/SI Generator Interface earlier in this topic.

Removing an PSIG Interface


Perform the following steps to remove a PSIG interface from the DCM.
1 Under Additional Components in the Server Explorer of the ROSA system,
right-click on the SCS Configurator and select Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The SCS Configurator dialog is displayed.
2 On the Configuration tab right-click on the PSIG interface that should be
removed and select Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.
3 Click the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to abort
the operation.

408 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

Configuring the Access Criteria


Introduction
General
The ROSA AC Manager Component allows the following actions:
Specification of transport streams, services, and components
Assignment of services to transport streams
Defining the CA System and the necessary access criteria
Assignment of access criteria to services and components

About the AC Manager Component GUI


After opening the AC Manager Component user interface, the main window gives an
overview of the services, the corresponding transport stream and the assigned access
criteria. A pop-up dialog allows you to configure the access criteria and assign them
to services or components.

4011746 Rev P 409


Chapter 6 Scrambling

General Settings
To Change the Number Format
This allows you to change the number format. You can change the number format
from decimal to hexadecimal or vice versa.
1 In the Settings menu, move to NumberFormat.
2 Select the Hex or Dec NumberFormat.
- Hex: to view the values as hexadecimal values.
- Dec: to view the values as decimal values.

Setting up the Transport Stream Model


Introduction
Before Access Criteria can be assigned to services or components, the Transport
Stream model must be setup in the AC Manager Component. This setup can be
performed by loading the Transport Stream model from the DCM device(s) or by
defining the Transport Stream, services, and components manually. The AC
Manager Component supports two different upload scenarios, viz.:
The Clear & Reload TS Model upload: this upload scenario replaces the
Transport Stream model of the AC Manager Component by the Transport Stream
model uploaded from the DCM device(s). This action can be executed for a single
Transport Stream or for multiple Transport Streams.
The Check for New Service ID upload: this upload scenario performs a
synchronization action between the AC Manager Component and the DCM
device(s). New services in the Transport Stream of the device(s), of which the
service IDs are not present in the Transport Streams of the AC Manager
Component, will be added to the Transport Stream tree.
Services removed from the Transport Stream of the device(s) remain in the
Transport Stream tree of the AC Manager Component.

WARNING:
After executing a Clear & Reload TS Model upload, services or components with
Access Criteria assignments loose these assignments, meaning scrambled services
or components become clear.

Note: During an upload action only the Transport Stream model is uploaded with:
- the Transport Streams containing services for which scrambling is allowed
- the services for which scrambling is allowed
The corresponding Access Criteria, Access Criteria assignments, and Scrambling
Control Groups (scrambling configuration) are not uploaded.

410 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

To Set up the TS Model by Uploading the TS Model from the DCM Device(s)
The following steps explain how to upload the Transport Stream model from the
DCM device(s).
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Select TransportStreams to upload the model for multiple Transport Streams or a
particular Transport Stream to upload the model for this single Transport Stream.
3 Right-Click and point to Load Model From Device(s).
Result: The Load Model from Devices dialog is displayed.

4 Set the Overwrite the Database Model check box to perform a Clear & Reload TS
Model upload or clear the check box to perform a Check for New Service ID
upload.
5 Set the Load Components check box to load services with components (for
Elementary Stream Level scrambling) or clear the check box to load the services
without components (for Service Level scrambling).
6 In the list box, select the Transport Stream(s) for which the TS model must be
uploaded.
Notes:

- You can select a range of devices by holding down the [Shift] key or a number
of devices by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
- On the Load Model from Devices dialog, a Transport stream is indicated
using the following parameters:
Device Name: the device name to which the Transport Stream belongs

4011746 Rev P 411


Chapter 6 Scrambling

ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream


TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream
Additional TS Info: additional information of the Transport Stream like:
board number, port number, IP Address, and UDP Port number.
7 Point to the Select command button.
Note: A selected Transport Stream (indicated by a ) can be deselected by pointing
to the corresponding Transport Stream and clicking the Deselect command button.
8 Click on the Start command button to start uploading the selected Transport
Stream model(s).
Note: The Transport Stream Upload process can be checked on the Log tab of GUI.
9 Point to the Close command button to close the Load Model from Device dialog.
Notes:
Using unique labels (ON ID / TS ID combination) is recommended. Uploading a
Transport Stream model with multiple Transport Streams with same ON ID and
TS ID can not be in one upload action. When such model is uploaded in multiple
actions, only one Transport Stream is visible containing the services of all these
Transport Streams.
Once the Transport Stream model is uploaded, the model can always be modified
using the procedures described in topic To Set Up the TS Model Manually on page
413.

412 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

To Set Up the TS Model Manually

To Add a Transport Stream


First you have to configure the Transport Streams by adding them to the Transport
Streams tree. The following procedure explains how to add a Transport Stream.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.

2 Under TransportStreams, click on the Add command button to add a new


Transport Stream.
Result: The Add TransportStream dialog is displayed.

3 Type the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box and the Original Network ID in
the ON ID box.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page 410.
4 Click on the Add command button.

4011746 Rev P 413


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Result: The Transport Stream is added to the TransportStreams tree.


5 Close the dialog box or continue adding more Transport Streams.

To Add a Service to the Services List


Secondly you have to define services to which you want to assign access criteria. The
following steps explain how to add services to a Services list.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under Services, click on the Add command button.
Result: The Add Service dialog is displayed.

3 Type the service name in the Service Name box.


4 Type the service provider in the Service Provider box.
5 Click on the Add command button.
Result: The service is added to the Services list.
6 Close the dialog box or continue adding more services.

To Assign a Service to a Transport Stream


Once the services are defined, you can assign them to one or more Transport Streams.
The following procedure explains how to assign services to a Transport Stream.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream to which you want to add a
service.
3 Under Services, select the service(s) that you want to add to the Transport
Stream.
Note: You can select a range of services by holding down the [Shift] key or a number
of services by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
4 Click on the >> command button.
Result: The ID for <servicename> dialog appears where <servicename > is replaced
by the name of the service you want to add.

414 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

Note: If you already assigned the service to another Transport Stream before, then the
service ID that was chosen at that time appears in the dialog box.
5 Type the service ID in the Service ID box.
Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For info, see topic General Settings on page 410.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.

To Add Components to a Service


Finally you have to add components (Elementary Streams) to services. The following
procedure explains how to add components to a service.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component GUI.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStream box, select the service (prg) to which you want to add a
component and right-click on Add Component in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Add Component dialog is displayed.

3 Enter the Packet Identifier of the component in the PID box.


4 In the Type drop down box, select the component type.
Notes:

- If Reserved or User Private is selected, a value can be selected in the drop down
box beside the Type drop down box.
- If MPEG-1 Audio or MPEG-2 Audio is selected, the language of the audio can
be selected in the Language drop down box.
5 Press the Add command button.
Result: The component is added to the service.
6 Repeat step 2 up to 5 until all components are added to the service.
7 Point to the Close command button to close the dialog.

4011746 Rev P 415


Chapter 6 Scrambling

To Change Transport Stream Properties


The following procedure explains how to change Transport Stream properties.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream of which you want to
change the properties.
3 Click on the Properties command button.
Result: The Transport Stream Properties dialog is displayed.

Note: You can change the number format of ID values from hexadecimal to decimal
and vice versa. For more information, see topic General Settings on page 410.
4 Change the Transport Stream ID in the TS ID box.
5 Change the Original Network ID in the ON ID box.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm.

To Change Service Properties


The following steps explain how to change service properties.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under Services, select the service of which you want to change the properties.
3 Click on the Properties command button.
Result: The Service Properties dialog is displayed.

4 Type the service name in the Service Name box.


5 Type the service provider in the Service Provider box.
6 Click on the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort.

416 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

To Remove a Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to remove a Transport Stream.
Important: If you remove a Transport Stream, only the Transport Stream is removed
and not the associated services.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab is displayed.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the Transport Stream you want to remove.
3 Click on the Remove command button.
Result: A confirmation box appears.

4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort.

To Remove a Service from the Services List


The following steps explain how to remove a service from the Services list.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under Services, select the service you want to remove.
Note: You can select a range of services by holding down the [Shift] key or a number
of services by holding down the [Ctrl] key.
3 Click on the Remove button.
Result: A confirmation box appears.

4 Click on the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort.

4011746 Rev P 417


Chapter 6 Scrambling

To Remove a Service from a Transport Stream


The following steps explain how to remove a service from a Transport Stream.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component user
interface.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab page is displayed.
2 Under TransportStreams, select the service that you want to remove.
3 Click on the << command button.
Result: The service is removed from the TS.

To Remove a Component from a Service


The following procedure explains how to remove a component from a service.
1 Select the TransportStreams - Services tab of the AC Manager Component GUI.
Result: The TransportStreams - Services tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStream box, right-click on the component that should be
removed and point to Remove in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation dialog is displayed.
3 Point to the Yes command button to remove the component or the Cancel
command button to abort the operation.

418 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

Defining Access Criteria


Configuration Dialog
When you open the AC Manager Component user interface or when you select the
Access Criteria tab on the AC Manager Component user interface, the Access
Criteria Configuration dialog is automatically displayed.

If the Access Criteria Configuration dialog does not appear or is previously closed,
you can also right-click on the Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager
Component user interface and click on the Access Criteria Configuration
command button.

Conditional Access System Information

Adding Conditional Access System


The following procedure explains how to add a Conditional Access (CA) system to
the Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog right-click on Access Criteria.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Add CA System.
Result: The Add CA System dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 419


Chapter 6 Scrambling

3 Type the CA system name in the Name box.


4 Type the CA system ID in the CA SystemID box.
5 Type the CA sub system ID in the CA SubSystemID box.
6 Click on the Add command button.
Result: The CA system is added to the Access Criteria list.
7 Close the Add CA System dialog box or continue adding more CA systems.

To Remove a Conditional Access System from the Access Criteria List


The following steps show how to remove a CA system from the Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the CA system you
want to remove.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Remove.
Result: The selected CA system is removed from the Access Criteria list.
Important: A CA system cannot always be removed.

- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system and the Access
Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the Remove option for the CA system will be disabled.
- When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system but the Access
Criteria is not assigned to any service, the Remove option for the CA system
is enabled. In case of a remove operation the CA system will be removed
together with the corresponding Access Criteria information.
Note: More information about Access Criteria information and assigning Access
Criteria to services or components can be found in topic Access Criteria Information on
page 422 and Assigning Access Criteria on page 422.

420 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

To Change Conditional Access System Properties


The following steps explain how to change the CA system properties.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the CA system of
which you want to change the properties.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Properties.
Result: The CA System Properties dialog is displayed.

Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the CA System Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel command
button to abort.

4011746 Rev P 421


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Access Criteria Information

Adding Access Criteria Information


The following procedure explains how to add Access Criteria information.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog right-click on the CA System where
you want to add Access Criteria.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Add Access Criteria.
Result: The Add Access Criteria dialog is displayed.

3 Type the name in the Name box.


4 Type the data in the Data box.
Note: Data has to be entered in hexadecimal format.
5 Click on the Add command button.
Result: The Access Criteria is added to the CA system in the Access Criteria list.
6 Close the Add Access Criteria dialog box or continue adding more Access
Criteria information.

To Remove Access Criteria Information


The following steps show how to remove Access Criteria from a CA system in the
Access Criteria list.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the Access Criteria
you want to remove.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Remove.
Result: The selected Access Criteria is removed from the Access Criteria list.
Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for a CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the Remove option for the Access Criteria will be disabled.

422 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

Note: More information about assigning Access Criteria to services or components


can be found in topic Adding Access Criteria on page 422.

To Change Access Criteria Properties


The following steps explain how to change the Access Criteria properties.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog, right-click on the Access Criteria of
which you want to change the properties.
Result: A menu appears.
2 Select Properties.
Result: The Access Criteria Properties dialog is displayed.

Important: When Access Criteria information is specified for the CA system and the
Access Criteria information is also assigned to one or more services or components,
the CA system properties are in read-only mode and cannot be changed.
3 Make the necessary changes on the Access Criteria Properties dialog.
4 Click on the OK command button to confirm the changes or the Cancel command
button to abort.

4011746 Rev P 423


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Assigning Access Criteria

Introduction
The Entitlement Control Message identifier (ECM ID) labeling a ECM group in a
Scrambling Control Group (SCG) provisioning message coming from the Event
Information Scheduler (IES) can automatically be generated by the EIS or can be
defined by the user. The following illustration shows a representation of a SCG
provisioning message.
SCG Provisioning
Message

Service ID xxx
.
.
.
SCG ID Components ID xxx
.
.
.
.
Activation Time
1 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
2 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
3 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
4 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
ECM
5 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
Groups
6 Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx
.
.
y Supercas ID x Access Criteria xx

ECM ID

When the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, what means that the ECM IDs must be
defined by the user, an unique ECM identifier must be given during the Access
Criteria assignment. More information concerning the ECM ID Mode can be found in
topic Changing the ECM ID Mode on page 434.

424 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Access Criteria

Note: The ECM ID Mode is shown in the lower left corner of the Access Criteria
Configuration dialog.

The Access Criteria assignment has a number of restrictions. The following list
describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for automatic ECM ID Mode:
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The following list describes the Access Criteria assignment restrictions for fixed ECM
ID Mode:
The ECM ID must be unique. An ECM ID that is already in use or still pending for
removal can not be used.
It is not allowed to assign access criteria to a service if access criteria are already
assigned to one or more components belonging to the service.
The assignment of multiple Access Criteria to a service or component must be
done in one assignment operation.
Changing the access criteria for a service or component can only be done after
removal of all Access Criteria assignments for that service or component.
The assignment of Access Criteria using the same ECM ID for several services or
components must be done in one assigning operation.

4011746 Rev P 425


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Assigning Access Criteria to Services or Components


The following procedure explains how to assign Access Criteria to services or
components.
1 On the Access Criteria Configuration dialog select one or more Access Criteria
from the Access Criteria list.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple Access Criteria in the
Access Criteria list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can make a selection of
multiple consecutive Access Criteria.
2 Select one or more service(s) or component(s) from the TransportStreams list.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple services or
components in the TransportStream list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can
make a selection of multiple consecutive services or components.
Result: The >> command button becomes enabled.
3 Click on the >> command button to assign the selected access criteria to the
selected service or component.
Result: The new assignment appears in the Services to Access Criteria list on the
Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager Component user interface.
Note: When the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, the Set ECM ID for < > dialog is
displayed asking a valid ECM ID. Enter a valid ECM identifier in the ECM ID box
and point to the OK command button to confirm.
4 Click on the Apply command button of the AC Manager Component user
interface to confirm the new assignment or click on the Reload command button
to return to the previous status.

Removing Assignments
The following steps explain how to remove assignments.
1 Select one or more assignments in the Services to Access Criteria list on the
Access Criteria tab page of the AC Manager Component user interface.
Note: When you hold the [Control] key you can select multiple assignments in the
Services to Access Criteria list or when you hold the [Shift] key you can make a selection
of multiple consecutive assignments.
2 Click on the Remove command button of the Access Criteria tab.
Result: A confirmation message is displayed.
3 Click on the Yes command button to remove the selected assignment(s) or click
on the No command button to leave without changes.
Result: In case of Yes the selected assignment(s) is (are) removed.
4 Click on the Apply command button to confirm the changes.
Note: When Access Criteria is removed from a service or component that contains
multiple Access Criteria assignments and the ECM ID Mode is set to fixed, all Access
Criteria assignments will be removed from this service or component. The service or
component will no longer be scrambled.

426 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Scrambling Control
Introduction
About the Scrambling Control Task
The Scrambling Control Task is a part of Scientific Atlantas Event Information
Scheduler integrated into ROSA NMS and allows configuring the scrambling of
service(s) and/or components (Elementary Streams). Next to this scrambling
configuration the Scrambling Control Task also logs the events during the connection
making process with the DCM device(s) and the events during the scrambling status
alteration of service(s) and/or components. The following picture depicts the
Scrambling Control Task graphical user interface.

The Configuration tab of the Scrambling Control Task represents the Transports
Streams, services, and components (Elementary Streams) as configured in the AC
Manager Component. A Transport Stream is identified by its Original Network
identifier (ON_ID) and Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID). The program (or service)
within a Transport Stream is identified using its Service Identifier (Service_ID) and
Service Name.
In the TransportStream Services column on the Configuration tab, a Transport
Stream represents all DCM devices of which the ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the indicated IDs.

4011746 Rev P 427


Chapter 6 Scrambling

When a clear to scrambled transition or visa versa is requested for service(s) or


component(s), all DCM devices of which the ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing
Transport Stream match the IDs of the Transport Stream containing the service(s) or
components will receive this transition request.
Notes:
The Scrambling Configuration column on the Configuration tab represents the
scrambling made by the task and not the scrambling status of the service(s) and or
Elementary Streams in the outgoing Transport Stream on the DCM.
Since the connection between the computer running the Scrambling Control Task
and a DCM is not synchronized, only one computer running this task can be used
to maintain the scrambling control configuration of the DCM devices.

Communication Setup
During the device-mapping process into ROSA NMS, the communication between
the DCM devices and the computer running the ROSA NMS software is established
using the IIOP protocol. The DCM devices of which the Original Network Identifier
(ON_ID) and the Transport Stream Identifier (TS_ID) of the outgoing Transport
Stream match the identifiers of the Transport Streams configured using the AC
Manager Component, are connected using the TCP protocol followed by a channel
setup.
When errors arisen in the communication between the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task and the DCM device(s) or during rebooting a DCM or the
computer, different communication status messages can be displayed in the
Communication Status column on the Configuration tab of the GUI. The following
table describes these communication status messages.

Communication Description
Message
TransportStream An error is arisen during the device-getting process of a DCM of
Initialization Error which the ON_ID and the TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the IDs of
the TS configured using the AC Manager Component.
The IP settings could not be retrieved for one of the DCM devices.
This error may occur when no EIS interface is configured or the DCM
device is not yet responding on IIOP level.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task cant find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS match the configured TS IDs.
Possible causes:

The DCM device(s) is (are) not responding.

The DCM device(s) of which the outgoing TS IDs match the


configured TS IDs is (are) not yet mapped into ROSA NMS
Note: When the task is running and the DCM becomes responding
the device will automatically be included in the communication.

428 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Communication Description
Message
Communication When the TCP connection is made between the computer running
started the Scrambling Control Task and the DCM the channel setup is
started. This message is displayed during the channel setup process.
Communication The TCP connection between the computer running the Scrambling
stopped Control Task and a DCM device is closed. Possible causes:

A DCM no longer reachable

An error in the communication

An error in the DCM


Note: When the device is reachable again the connection will be
re-established (as long as the device is reachable but not yet
responding an initialization error may be visible). When the device
becomes responding on IIOP level, the driver will try to re-establish
the connection again if it did not succeeded the first time.

Note: The communication states are combined for all DCM devices of which the
outgoing TS IDs match the configured TS IDs. When one DCM fails and the other
DCM devices work fine, a communication status message is given for the device that
fails. More information concerning the failed device can be found in the Log tab of
the GUI.
When the communication between the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task and a DCM fails the computer will check the communication periodically via
ping actions.
When the DCM replies within a certain time the computer supposes that the
communication is restored and starts establishing the TCP connection followed with
a channel set up. If the computer doesnt receives a reply within this time the
computer supposes a failed communication and continues the communication check.
Particular parameters concerning this restoration action can be configured. More
information concerning this configuration can be found in topic Restoring
Communication on page 438.

4011746 Rev P 429


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Starting and Stopping Scrambling


When service(s) or component(s) should be scrambled the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task sends Scrambling Control Group provisioning messages
with ECM Group(s) to the DCM devices the service(s) or component(s) belongs to.
The DCM devices, which receive such a provisioning message, reply with a
Scrambling Control Group status message or with a Scrambling Control Group error
message.
When all DCM devices response with a Scrambling Group Control status message
the Scrambling Control Task supposes scrambling is started and the message
Provisioning OK appears in the Communication Status column on the Configuration
tab of the GUI. At the activation time extracted from the SCG provisioning message
the DCM devices start scrambling the service(s) or component(s).
In case a DCM replies with a Scrambling Control Group error message the message
Provisioning Failed appears in the Communication Status column.

430 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

If a scrambling event must be stopped the computer running the Scrambling Control
Task sends a Scrambling Control Group provisioning message without ECM groups
to the DCM devices scrambling the service(s) or component(s) belongs to. When the
DCM devices reply with a Scrambling Control Group status message the Scrambling
Control Task supposes the service(s) or component(s) are clear and the message
Deprovisioning OK appears in the Communication Status column. When a DCM
replies with a Scrambling Control Group error message, the Deprovisioning Failed
message appears.
Note: The messages logged by the Scrambling Control Task can be found on the Log
page of the task. This Log tab is very useful for troubleshooting purposes when
errors arise during scrambling/clear transitions. For more information concerning
the Log tab, please refer to topic Event logging further in this chapter.
The following table gives an overview of the messages that can be displayed during
starting and stopping scrambling.

Message Description
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received Scrambling Control Group
Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Provisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed (clear/scrambling transition request) the computer running the
Scrambling Control Task has received a Scrambling Control Group
Error Message from a DCM.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
succeeded without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received
Scrambling Control Group Status Messages from all DCM devices.
Deprovisioning After sending a Scrambling Control Group Provisioning Message
failed without ECM Groups (scrambling/clear transition request) the
computer running the Scrambling Control Task has received a
Scrambling Control Group Error Message from a DCM.
No scramblers The Scrambling Control Task cant find DCM devices, of which the
ON_ID and TS_ID of the outgoing TS the service or components belong
to, match the configured TS IDs. Possible causes:

The DCM device(s) is (are) not responding.

The DCM device(s) of which the outgoing TS IDs match the


configured TS IDs is (are) not yet mapped into ROSA NMS
Note: When the task is running and the DCM becomes responding the
device will automatically be included in the communication.

Note: The states are combined for all DCM devices of which the outgoing TS_IDs
match the configured TS_IDs. When one DCM fails and the other DCM devices work
fine, a status message is given for the device that fails. More information concerning
the failed transition can be found in the Log tab of the GUI.

4011746 Rev P 431


Chapter 6 Scrambling

General Settings
Starting the Task
The following steps describe how to start the Scrambling Control Task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.

2 Press the Start command button

Automatic Start
When the Automatic Start feature of the Scrambling Control Task is enabled, the task
will restart automatically after starting up the computer running the task. The
following procedure explains how to enable or disable the Automatic Start feature of
the task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 In the Task Configuration box, set the Automatic Start check box to enable the
feature or clear the check box to disable the feature.

432 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Stopping the Task


The following steps explain how to stop the task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 Press the Stop command button.

Synchronizing the Task with the AC Manager Component


The synchronization between the AC Manager Component and the Scrambling
Control Task is automatically performed when the task is running. The following
procedure explains how to synchronize the Scrambling Control Task with the AC
Manager Component when the task is stopped.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 Press the Init command button.

To Change the Number Format


The read out of some parameters on the Scrambling Control Task can be changed
from decimal to hexadecimal or visa versa. Perform the following procedure to
change the parameter read out.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select NumberFormat in the Settings menu
and point to Hex or Dec.
- Hex: to view the values as hexadecimal values.
- Dec: to view the values as decimal values.

4011746 Rev P 433


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Changing the ECM ID Mode


Introduction
The Entitlement Control Message Identifiers (ECM IDs) labeling ECM groups in SCG
provisioning messages can automatically be generated by the EIS (ECM ID mode =
automatic) or can be defined by the user (ECM ID mode = Fixed (Unique within
System) or Fixed (Unique within TS)). These user-defined ECM IDs can then be used to
determine the ECM Packet Identifiers (ECM PIDs). With Fixed (Unique within System),
the identifiers will be unique within the complete system and with Fixed (Unique
within TS), the identifiers will be unique within the Transport Streams. When private
date should be added to a particular ECM, the ID of that ECM must be used to
identify the correct ECM.
Note: The ECM ID Mode can only be changed when scrambling of all scrambled
services or components is stopped.
When Scientific Atlantas Event Information Scheduler (AC Manager Component
and Scrambling Control Task) is used in combination with a fixed ECM ID mode, the
ECM identifiers must be defined during the Access Criteria assignment process.
More information concerning the ECM identifier definition can be found in Assigning
Access Criteria on page 422.

To Change the ECM ID Mode


The following procedure explains how to change the ECM ID mode.
1 Open the Scrambling Control Task GUI.
2 Click on to the Settings menu, point to ECM ID Mode and select automatic, Fixed
(Unique within System), or Fixed (Unique within TS).

434 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Checking the DCM Devices to which a Transport Stream Belongs


The following procedure explains how to check the DCM devices that correspond
with a particular Transport Stream.
1 On the Configuration tab of the Scrambling Control Task user interface,
right-click on the Transport Stream for which the DCM devices must be checked
and point to Show Corresponding Scramblers... in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X : TS ID=Y dialog is displayed
with the DCM devices that correspond with the selected Transport Stream.

Note: Press the Close command button to close the dialog.

4011746 Rev P 435


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Starting and Stopping Scrambling


Starting Scrambling
The following procedure explains how to start a scrambling event.
1 On the Configuration tab of the user interface, right-click on the service(s) or the
service(s) containing components that must be scrambled.
Notes:

- To select consecutive services, click the first service, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are not
consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Start Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: The DCM devices with outgoing Transport Stream containing the
service/components in question start scrambling.
Note: Scrambling can be done on two different levels, namely Component Level
scrambling and Service Level Scrambling.

Stopping Scrambling
Perform the following steps to stop descrambling a service or the components within
a service.
1 On the Configuration tab of the user interface, right-click on the service(s) of
which scrambling should be ended.
Notes:

- To select consecutive services, click on the first service, press and hold down
the [SHIFT] key, and then click on the last service. To select services that are
not consecutive, press and hold down [CTRL] key, and then click on each
service.
- When in a multiple select a collapsed transport stream is selected, all services
of this transport stream are also selected.
2 Select Stop Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: The DCM devices with outgoing Transport Stream containing the
service/components in question stops scrambling.

436 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Event logging
The Scrambling Control Task is provided with a powerful event logging system
useful for troubleshooting purposes. The list with logging messages is represented
on the Log tab of the task user interface. The following picture depicts a list with
logging messages.

Each message is accompanied by its generation time and date and the messages are
arranged in chronological order.

4011746 Rev P 437


Chapter 6 Scrambling

Advanced Settings
Restoring Communication

Setting the Communication Timeout Parameters


The time between two consecutive ping actions (TS Check TimeOut) can be adapted
just like the time that the DCM has to reply after a ping action (TS ping TimeOut).
The following procedure explains how the change these timeout parameters.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select Advanced Settings in the Settings
menu.
Result: The Advanced Settings dialog is displayed.

2 Change the timeout parameters.


Note: The TS Check TimeOut parameter is default set to 5 seconds and the TS Ping
TimeOut to 2 seconds.
3 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.

Performing a Manual Communication Restoration


For particular reasons it can be necessary to start a communication restore attempt
manually. The following steps explain how to perform a manual communication
restoration.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Configuration tab.
Result: The Configuration tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStreams Services box, select the Transport Stream with bad
communication(s) and point to Retry Communication for Bad Scramblers in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The computer running the Scrambling Control Task attempts a
communication restoration with the DCM device(s). After restoration the current
scrambling configuration made by the Scrambling Control Task is sent to the DCM
devices of which the outgoing Transport Stream matches the selected Transport
Stream.

438 4011746 Rev P


Scrambling Control

Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration

Introduction
For certain purposes it can be necessary to overrule the scrambling control
configuration of the DCM devices with the configuration made by the Scrambling
Control Task. This overruling can be done for a particular Transport Stream, for a
DCM, or for all devices controlled by the Scrambling Control Task.
WARNING:
During an overruling action all scrambled services and elementary stream
become clear for a while.

Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of a Transport Stream


The procedure below describes how to overrule the scrambling control configuration
of a particular Transport Stream.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task user interface, select the Configuration tab.
Result: The Configuration tab is displayed.
2 In the TransportStreams Services box, right-click on the Transport Stream for
which the scrambling control configuration must be overruled and select Reset
Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
WARNING:
During the overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams
of the Transport Stream of all devices corresponding with this Transport
Stream become clear for a while.

Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of a Device


Perform the following procedure to overrule the scrambling control configuration of
a particular DCM.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task user interface, click on the Tools menu and point
to Device Reset Scrambling....
Result: The Device Reset Scrambling dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 439


Chapter 6 Scrambling

2 Right-click on the DCM device for which the scrambling control configuration
should be overruled and point to Reset Scrambling in the short-cut menu.
Result: A confirmation box is displayed.

3 Press the Yes command button to confirm or the No command button to abort the
operation.
WARNING:
During the overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams of
the Transport Streams of the selected DCM device become clear for a while.

Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration of all Devices


The following procedure explains how to overrule the scrambling control
configuration of all devices with the configuration made by the Scrambling Control
Task.
1 On the Scrambling Control Task GUI, select the Control tab.
Result: The Control tab is displayed.
2 In the Task Configuration box, set the Re-apply the Database Model at Startup
check box.
3 Press successively the Stop and Start command button.
4 Clear the Re-apply the Database Model at Startup check box.
WARNING:
During an overruling action all scrambled services and elementary streams
become clear for a while.

440 4011746 Rev P


7 Chapter 7
Additional Features
Introduction
This chapter outlines the additional features of the DCM.

In This Chapter
Digital Transport Formatter .............................................................. 442
IP Statmux Controller......................................................................... 446

4011746 Rev P 441


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Digital Transport Formatter


Introduction
General
The purpose of DCM's Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) feature is to encapsulate
multiple MPTS or SPTS source streams as embedded private data inside an outgoing
Transport Stream. At the receiver site a Multi Transport Receiver (MTR), for instance
Scientific Atlanta's D9804 Multi Transport Receiver, decapsulates and outputs the
original Transport Streams with a fixed latency.

Source Stream Combining


Combining multiple incoming Transport Streams into one outgoing Transport
Stream is accomplished by mapping the original Transport Stream packets into
Digital Transport Formatter (DTF) data packets. DTF data packets containing
packets belonging to the same incoming Transport Stream are labeled with the same
PID. At the MTR site, these PIDs will then be used to route the Transport Stream to
the correct output.
An outgoing DTF Transport Stream can also be populated with data packets to
provide the MTR with additional data. Such data packets should not be encapsulated
and stuffing can be removed.

Scrambling
Each encapsulated Transport Stream can be encrypted by using Basic Interoperable
Scrambling System Fixed Key scrambling (BISS mode 1).
Scrambling encapsulated Transport Stream by using BISS mode 1 is license based,
meaning for each ASI Interface Card for which the encapsulated services must be
scrambled needs one DTF_SCRAMBLING license.
Note: More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page
17.

ASI Interface Card Mode


Before a DCM can participate into a DTF/MTR application, DTF_CONCENTRATOR
licenses are required and the card mode for one or more ASI Interface Cards must be
set ASI DTF. This action configures an ASI Interface Card into a Digital Transport
Formatter and port 1 up to 7 becomes input ports and port 8 up to 10 output ports.
The outgoing DTF Transport Stream is mirrored to the output ports.
Note: More information concerning licenses can be found in topic Licensing on page
17.

442 4011746 Rev P


Digital Transport Formatter

Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode


The following procedure describes how to change the ASI Interface Card mode.
WARNING:
Changing the ASI Interface Card mode involves removal of all output
configurations for the ASI Interface Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the ASI Interface Card for which
the card mode must be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the interface card is displayed.
3 In the Card Settings table, select the desired card mode in the Type drop down
box.

ASI DTF: the DTF feature for the ASI Interface Card is enabled.
ASI (default): the standard re-multiplexing mode is enabled.
Note: The Type parameter is only applicable when the DCM is provided with
DTF_CONCENTRATOR Licenses.
Result: After changing the Type parameter the following confirmation box is
displayed.

4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 443


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Configuring a DTF Transport Stream


The following steps describes how to set the total bit rate for a DTF Transport Stream.
Note: A session key used to scramble an encapsulated Transport Stream can only be
entered when you are logged on to the web browser user interface using a security
account belonging to the Administrator security group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the DTF Transport Stream (DTF TS) that
must be configured.
3 Right-click on this Transport Stream and point to View TS Settings in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The TS Output sub page is displayed.
4 In the TS Settings table, enter the total bit rate for the DTF Transport Stream in
the Total Bit Rate (Mbps) box. The value of the total bit rate depends on the
packet mode of the outgoing Transport Stream. For Byte mode a value can be
given between 0.1 and 155 Mbps and for Packet mode a value between 0.1 and 213
Mbps. The default value is 40 Mbps.

5 Perform the following steps in the Input Multiplexing table.

Tip: In the Input Multiplexing table each row represents an input port, which is
indicated by card name (Input Card parameter) and port name (Input Port
parameter).
a In the Status drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Added: The Transport Stream is passed to the outgoing DTF Transport
Stream.
Blocked: The Transport will be blocked.
b Set the Encapsulate check box to pass the Transport Stream packets with DTF
encapsulation or clear this check box to pass the packets without
encapsulation.

444 4011746 Rev P


Digital Transport Formatter

c When the Encapsulate check box is set, enter the insertion rate for the
adaptation fields in the AF Insertion Rate (ms) box. A value in the range
from 10 to 500 ms can be entered and is default set to 40 ms.
d When the Encapsulate check box is cleared, tick the Remove Stuffing check
box to remove the stuffing.
e In the Output PID box, enter the PID value for the DTF packets containing the
packets of the corresponding incoming Transport Stream.
Note: In DTF mode, the device does not perform PID remapping in case PID
collisions occur between non encapsulated and capsulated streams. Be sure
that no PID collisions can happen.
f Tick the Scramble check box if the content of the corresponding Transport
Stream must be scrambled.
g In the Key box, enter the 12 digit hexadecimal session key used to scramble
the Transport Stream content.
h Perform step 1 up to 9 for all input ports.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 445


Chapter 7 Additional Features

IP Statmux Controller
DCM IP Statmux Concept
Introduction
Overview
The DCM IP Statmux feature allows transforming a GbE Interface Card into an IP
statistical multiplex controller. A GbE interface of such interface card must be
connected to a number of MPEG encoders via Ethernet in order to control their video
rate in one or multiple Statmux pools.
WARNING:
A GbE Interface Card transformed into an IP Statmux controller can no longer
participates into re-multiplex applications.

The following illustration depicts a typical statistical multiplex application with


Continuum DVP Encoder Model D9032 devices and DCM.
Encoder #1 IP or ASI
SDI SDI

Encoder #2 IP or ASI
SDI SDI

Encoder #3 IP or ASI
SDI SDI
Modulators
Encoder #4 IP or ASI
Power T
Vu M

SDI SDI
DCM Power T
Vu M

Encoder #5 IP or ASI ASI Router IP-GbE or Multiple ASI


Al
ar
Model 990
Digital
D
D
0Content( C )
Multiple ASI
SDI
P

SDI Scie
m1
S
P
S
2
Manager
M

SDI Router Or
Atla
ntific
nta

Power T
Vu M

IP Switch
Power T
Vu M

Power T
Vu M

Encoder #59 IP or ASI


Power T
Vu M

SDI SDI

Encoder #60 IP or ASI


SDI SDI

IP Switch

I
P

ROSA NMS
ROSA CLIENT

446 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

Features
The DCM IP Statmux controller has the following features:
Supports a maximum number of 60 encoders / GbE Interface Card
Connects via Ethernet to the Scientific Atlanta encoder
IP based communication between DCM IP statmux card and MPEG encoders
Support of up to 20 Statmux pools / GbE Interface Card and up to 60 encoders
per pool
Allows a mix of fixed rate and statistically multiplexed channels on the same
multiplex
Supports default target bitrate, minimum and maximum bitrate allocation,
priority and quality limit for each channel
Flexible management of services and pools using the Statmux Pool Manager tool
integrated in ROSA NMS
Interaction with ROSA DHB task and/or ROSA EM for advanced redundancy
support (IP Statmux controller as well as encoder backup)
Statmux pool and service information available on the DCM embedded user
interface

Software Requirements
A DCM participation into an IP Statmux application needs a number of products.
The following table shows the software requirements for these products.

Product Software Version


Continuum DVP Encoder Model D9032 02.12.08 or higher
ROSA Network Management System 3.0 Build 15 or higher
Statmux Pool Manager (SPM) driver for ROSA NMS 3.0.0 or higher
Digital Content Manager (DCM) device driver for ROSA 3.0.18 or higher
NMS
Continuum DVP Encoder Model D9032 device driver for 3.0.6/3.0.6.0 or higher
ROSA NMS

4011746 Rev P 447


Chapter 7 Additional Features

DCM IP Statistical Multiplexing


Statistical Multiplexing
The statistical multiplexing concept is based on the idea that statistically, at any
particular point in time, not all of the services within a multiplex of compressed video
services require the maximum allocated bitrate to provide an artifact free image. It
works on the basis that complex video scenes require more bandwidth than simple
scenes and that there is a statistical probability that some services will be encoding
highly complex material while others will not. This allows dynamically re-allocation
of bandwidth resulting in a more efficient use of the total available bandwidth for the
multiplex without any appreciable artifacts.

Statmux Pool
A Statmux pool is a group of services that share a limited amount of bandwidth for
statistical multiplexing. The Statmux pool bitrate is the total amount of available
bandwidth. During the statmuxing process each service is continuously allocated a
controlled amount of bandwidth.
At startup, the encoder starts at a default bit rate. As soon as the encoder established
communication with the DCM IP Statmux controller, statmuxing may start. Only
active services contribute to the Statmux pool and participate in the statmuxing
process. When a service is disabled, or for example the IP link with the controller is
down, statmuxing continues for the remaining services of the Statmux pool only.

IP-Based Statistical Multiplexing


The new generation IP-based statistical multiplexing technology offers a flexible
platform that can support a large number of encoders within multiple pools all
managed by a single Statmux controller. The signaling between encoders and
controller can be sent over IP networks which makes it easy to reconfigure local and
remote encoders.

DCM IP Statmux Controller


The DCM IP Statmux controller intelligently controls the MPEG encoding process to
ensure that the specified bandwidth constraint is met, while optimizing the overall
picture quality. This is based on a proprietary rate control algorithm with bitrate
adjustment on a frame-by-frame basis ensuring that no more bits are used than
necessary.
The MPEG encoders make predictions about the required bandwidth and send it to
the Statmux controller via their Ethernet interface. The controller then transmits
bandwidth allocation messages to all the encoders part of the Statmux pool.
Bandwidth is assigned based on the encoders demand, users setup, total available
bandwidth, and requirements of other services in the Statmux pool. Each encoder is
directly controlled to provide the optimal bitrate.

448 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

For each encoder it is possible to specify a minimum, maximum, and default bit rate,
as well as priorities for each service to balance higher priority services with others.
The sum of the default bit rates equals the Statmux pool bit rate.
The following illustration shows how the rate of each service in a Statmux pool may
vary and end up in 100 percent Statmux pool usage.

When the total bit rate of all statmuxed services approaches the Statmux pool bit rate,
the DCM IP Statmux controller prioritizes the services to stay below the Statmux pool
bit rate limit. You may define the priority setting for each encoder.

Quality Controlled Statistical Multiplexing


As a variation of the normal statistical multiplexing concept, the DCM Statmux
controller offers an extra option for quality controlled encoding. The operator may
predefine a target video quality parameter on the encoder to indicate an acceptable
level of video quality. In this way a satisfying video quality is provided without
using more bits than needed and leaving more bandwidth to other encoders without
a quality limitation. If all encoders of the Statmux pool are quality controlled, then
there may often remain unused bandwidth, which may subsequently be used for
time-insensitive data services.

Synchronous Versus Asynchronous Operation


To further improve the overall performance, the DCM Statmux controller offers
further efficiency improvements in synchronous operation. Synchronous operation
can be used if all the video sources are locked phase and frequency wise. When
synchronous operation is enabled, output stuffing is minimized and the dynamic
behavior is further improved. Around 5% bandwidth can be saved by using the
synchronous mode compared to asynchronous.

4011746 Rev P 449


Chapter 7 Additional Features

IP Statmux Configuration
Introduction
Before a DCM can act as IP Statmux Controller, the Statmux Controller function of
one or more GbE Interface Cards must be enabled. Enabling this function involves
removing of all configuration settings of the interface card and the Boundary
parameter is set to 6000. The procedure to enable the Statmux Controller function of
a GbE Interface Card is described in topic Enabling or Disabling the Statmux Controller
Function on page 450. For more information concerning Boundary parameter, please
refer to sub topic Settings the GbE UDP Boundary on page 68.
For each individual encoder participating into the Statmux application, the Statmux
parameters as well as the bit rate budget must be configured. To facilitate these
configurations, Scientific Atlanta has developed the Statmux Pool Manager (SPM)
tool, which is integrated into ROSA NMS.
For redundancy purposes the DCM IP Statmux Controller has been developed to
support device backup as well as encoder backup. Both device scenarios can be
controlled by means of ROSA Element Manager or by means of ROSA DHB Task.
More information concerning DCM IP Statmux redundancy can be found in the
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application Note.
Note: DCM with software package version 5.1 do not support Statmux Controller
redundancy controlled via standalone device backup.

Setting the DCM IP Statmux Controller Setting

Enabling or Disabling the Statmux Feature


The following steps explain how to enable or disable the Statmux Controller function
of a GbE Interface Card.
Note: A GbE Interface Card for which the Statmux Controller is enabled can no
longer participate into re-multiplexing applications (multiplexing, transrating, digital
program insertion, etc...).
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
the Statmux Controller function must be enabled or disabled.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 In the Statmux drop down box in the Card Settings table, select Enabled or
Disabled.

450 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

4 Press the OK command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to


abort the operation.
5 Click on the Apply command button.

Configuring the Statmux Settings


When the DCM IP Statmux Controller participates into a device backup application,
the initial Main/Backup state for both devices must be defined. In a backup
application both the main and backup IP Statmux Controller process the messages
coming from the encoders participating into the backup application. Only the active
IP Statmux Controller replies to the encoders. When the main device fails, the main
device stops replying and the backup device start replying to the encoders. Therefore
multicast communication must be used between the encoders and the IP Statmux
Controllers. The following procedure explains how to set the Statmux settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
the Statmux Controller function must be enabled or disabled.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Statmux link.
Result: The Configuration - Statmux sub page containing the Statmux Settings and
Excluded Encoders table is displayed.
4 In the Backup Type drop down box, select the initial state for the IP Statmux
Controller, Active or Inactive.
5 In the Communication box, enter the Multicast IP address as defined by the SPM
for the encoders members of this pool. The octets of the IP address must be
separated by dots.
Notes:
Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
For Unicast communication enter 0.0.0.0.
6 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 451


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Setting Up

Introduction
Before the SPM tool can be used to manage encoders in a statmux application, an
SPM resource must be created and the encoders must be mapped into ROSA NMS.
Once the SPM resource is created and the encoders are mapped, logical relations
must be created between the encoders and the SPM resource.
Note: For each Statmux pool in the statistical multiplex application an SPM resource
must be created.
This topic describes how to create a Statmux Pool Manager resource in ROSA, and
how to setup a map with relations between the encoders and the Statmux Pool
Manager resource. The procedure to install the SPM tool is described in topic
Installing the ROSA 3.0 Drivers on page 579. The procedure to install the encoder
driver, to detect the encoders, and to map the encoders into ROSA can be found in the
ROSA Network Manager System User's Guide or in the documentation shipped with
your encoders.

Creating an SPM Resource in ROSA


The following procedure explains how to create an SPM resource in the Server
Explorer tree.
1 In the Server Explorer tree, right-click on the Units node and point to Units... in
the short-cut menu.
Results: The Units dialog is displayed.

2 Click on the Add... command button.

452 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

Result: The Add Unit dialog is displayed.

3 In the Name box, enter a name for this SPM resource.


4 Click on the Add command button.
Result: The Statmux Pool Manager resource is added to the tree.
5 Press the Close command button to close the Add Unit dialog.
6 Press the Close command button to close the Units dialog.

Setting Up the Map


The following procedure explains how to set up a map.
1 Set the Map Mode of the ROSA user interface to Editing mode by clicking on the
Maps menu and ticking Allow Editing.
2 In the Maps Explorer, browse to the map for which a Statmux setup must be
created or create a new map by performing the following steps:
a In the Maps Explorer, right-click on Maps and point to New/link in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The New/Link Map dialog is displayed.
b In the Map Name box, enter a name for the new map and press the OK
command button.
Result: The new map appears.
3 Drag the SPM and encoder resources, which participate into the Statmux
application, from the Units node in the Server Explorer tree and drop them into
the map.
4 Create a logical relation between each encoder and the SPM resource as described
in the following steps:
a Activate the relation tool by pointing to Relation in the Draw menu.
b Click on the first encoder and then on the SPM resource.

4011746 Rev P 453


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Result: The Add relation dialog is displayed.

Note: Creating a relation from the encoder to the SPM or from the SPM to the
encoder makes no difference.
c Click on the Add command button.
Result: The logical relation between the first encoder and the SPM resource is
created.
d Repeat step b and c for all encoders.

454 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

To Set Up the Bit Rate Budget


Perform the following steps to change the default video bit rate of services and to
control the bit rate budget.
1 On the SPM user interface, click on the Bit Rate Budget tab.
Result: The Bit Rate Budget tab is displayed showing the various encoder bit rates.

Tips:
Inactive encoders (e.g. backup encoders not in use or main encoders in
backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
2 In the Pool Bit Rate box, enter the total available bandwidth for the Statmux pool.
Tip: By setting the pool bit rate as a first step, you will be informed if at any stage the
total of the individual service settings exceeds this bit rate.
3 In the Reserved Bit Rate box, type the bit rate amount that should not be used by
the services and is reserved for e.g. data communication.
Tip: Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button to view the optimal default
video bit rates according to the stuffing bit rate.

4011746 Rev P 455


Chapter 7 Additional Features

4 In the Bit Rates - Video Default column, change the default video bit rate for
each encoder.
The default rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after
power-up. Also, it determines the rate the encoder settles to in the event of
communication errors between the IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or when
the IP Statmux Controller is disconnected.
The default rate is also used to set up the Pool Bit Rate budget. The sum of the default
rates for the active Statmux programs equals the size of the Statmux Bit Rate pool.
The total rate of the Statmux programs will not go beyond the Statmux Bit Rate size,
but may go lower depending on the maximum quality limit.
Notes:
When a D9032 encoder doesn't participate into a Statmux application and the
encoder is set to Standalone VBR mode, the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR
parameter shows the maximum Standalone VBR rate. When the encoder is
change from Stand-alone Variable Bit Rate mode to Statistical Multiplexing mode
the value in the Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter will show the fixed
bit rate.
When the Video Rate Mode parameter of a D9032 encoder is set to Fixed, the
Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter can be used to set the Fixed Video
Rate parameter.
5 Click on the Leverage Bit Rate command button if the video default rates must be
adjusted so that the Pool Bit Rate is met.
This means that all the Statmux programs will have the same default rate. The default
rate determines the encoding rate at which the encoder starts after power-up. Also, it
determines the rate the encoder settles to during communication errors between the
IP Statmux Controller and the encoder, or when the IP Statmux Controller is
disconnected.
6 Click on the Apply command button.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.

456 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

To Set Up the Statistical Multiplexing Parameters


Perform the following steps to set up the statistical multiplexing parameters.
1 On the SPM user interface, click on the Statmux tab.
Result: The Statmux tab is displayed.

Tips:
Inactive encoders (e.g. backup encoders not in use or main encoders in
backup state) are represented in italic and all fields are read-only. These
inactive encoders are ignored for bit rate budget allocation or setting the Pool
ID and Target IP Address.
The ROSA name of a not-responding encoder is colored red and all other
fields are empty.
Note: The video rates shown on the SPM are Elementary Stream (ES) rates, no
Transport Stream (TS) rates.
2 In the Pool ID box, type the Statmux pool identification number.
3 In the Target IP Address box, type the IP address of the IP Statmux Controller
port.
Both a unicast IP address and a multicast IP address can be used. If the IP Statmux
application involves IP Statmux one to one device backup, a multicast IP address
must be used.

4011746 Rev P 457


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Notes:
Multicast IP addresses (class) must, for practice use, be in the range from
224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255.
When the Pool ID and/or Target IP Address of an encoder are not matching
the Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager, the
field of the mismatched Pool ID and/or Target IP Address is colored red.
The Pool ID and Target IP Address defined in the Statmux Pool Manager can
be applied to the corresponding encoder(s) by clicking the Apply command
button that becomes applicable when such mismatch occurs.
4 Click on the Statmux parameter of the service that has to participate into the
Statmux application and select ON in the drop-down box.
Note: If you activate more Statmux services than supported by the IP Statmux
Controller, only the programs that are activated first will take part in the statmuxing.
5 In the Min - Video Rate parameter, enter the minimum rate for the service.
The instantaneous rate during Statmux operation will not go below the stated
minimum rate. The instantaneous rate may be higher than the stated minimum rate if
so determined by the rate algorithm. The minimum Statmux rate depends on the
complexity of the picture and the picture resolution. Setting the minimum rate to half
the default rate as a start point is recommended.
6 In the Max. - Video Rate parameter, enter the maximum rate for the service.
This setting is used to prevent the rate for an individual program from exceeding a
specified value. The range is from 1.5 Mbit/s to 15 Mbit/s
If you do not need limitation to a specific rate, we recommend that you use a setting
about 2 to 3 times the default rate, or just leave the setting at its maximum (15
Mbit/s).
Example: You may need to use a lower maximum rate setting if you want to
demultiplex the transport stream at a later stage and you have limited bandwidth
available for that program. In this case you cannot permit the bit rate to exceed the
specified level and therefore you need to cap it by using the maximum rate setting.
Note: Stating a maximum rate limit may reduce the probability of reaching the
maximum quality limit.
You should use the maximum quality limit setting and not the maximum rate limit
setting to choose your maximum picture quality limit.
The maximum rate setting does not imply that the IP Statmux Controller will always
try to reach that level, but simply that it will not supersede that rate.
7 If relevant change the Delay.
It may be useful to use the Normal delay setting for a return channel that is for game
shows with viewer interaction.
Notes:
SPM automatically sets the delay of all Statmux services to the same setting as
this is required for Statmux services.
SPM does not support the Low delay mode. If the encoder is in this mode SPM
will change it to the Normal delay mode.

458 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

8 Set the Priority parameter.


Enter the priority for the program in the Priority column. The priority setting can be
set to prioritize which programs get access to bandwidth if there is not enough
bandwidth available.
In normal circumstances all programs will have the same priority setting but if a
program has consistently low action content (e.g., a talk back show) you may decide
to allocate a lower priority to that program, knowing that the program can perhaps
afford a reduction in picture quality from time to time. A total of 16 different priority
settings from 0 to 15 allow you to allocate a different priority to each of 16 possible
programs. The standard setting is 8.
9 Set the max. Quality Limit parameter.
Enter the maximum quality limit for the program in the Quality Limit column. This
parameter sets the maximum quality for the video channel. It is used to free capacity
for opportunistic IP data when your video quality requirements are met. The joint
rate control algorithm ensures that the encoders do not spend more bits on the video
than required.
The standard setting for all channels is 15. If you leave the maximum quality limit for
all channels at 15, the IP Statmux Controller will attempt to use all of the Statmux
pool.
Tip: Keep the target quality setting at 15 if you do not want to insert IP data. If you
want to make room for IP data, you may experiment to reduce the quality limit to
find the level that is appropriate for your service.
The following settings for the various applications are recommended:

Application Max. Quality Limit


Best possible quality 15
High quality 14, 13, 12
Medium quality 11, 10, 9
Reduced quality 8, 7, 6, 5
Low quality 4, 3, 2, 1, 0
Note: The smaller the Statmux pool, the less frequently the target quality limit will be
reached. How often depends on the video material. As a rule of thumb, the more
important IP data is, compared to the video, the lower the target quality limit should
be.
10 Click on the Apply command button.

4011746 Rev P 459


Chapter 7 Additional Features

Checking Statmux Pool Settings on the DCM GUI


Checking the Statmux Pool Settings
The procedure below describes how to check the Statmux pool settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the Statmux pool for which Statmux pool
setting must be checked and point to View Pool Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The sub page containing the Statmux Pool Setting table is displayed.

The following information is available in the Statmux Pool Setting table:


Name parameter: shows the name of the Statmux pool.
ID parameter: shows the Statmux pool number.
Bit Rate (Mbps) parameter: shows the bit rate of the Statmux pool.
Statmux Mode parameter: shows the Synchronous/Asynchronous mode.
Synchronous pools require that all encoders are locked to the same video
source. For this reason, a synchronous pool cannot contain a mix of 525 and
625 video signal types. The first encoder joining the statmux pool defines the
video signal type required for all other encoders. Encoders with another
video type are not allowed to join the pool.
Note: Both the Name parameter and Statmux Mode parameter are configurable
when at least one active encoder populates the pool. When the pool is empty, these
parameters show the previous defined name / Statmux mode. The other Statmux
pool settings are read only.

Checking the Statmux Settings of the Encoders


The following procedure explains how to check the Statmux settings of the encoders.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, right-click on the Statmux pool for which encoder
settings must be checked and point to View Pool Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The sub page containing the Encoders table is displayed.

460 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Controller

The following information is available in the Encoders table:


Management - Port parameter: shows the port pair on the GbE Interface card
used as IP Statmux controller.
Source - IP Address parameter: shows the source IP address of the IP Statmux
controller port.
Destination - IP Address parameter: represents the IP address of the encoder
Ethernet port that has to receive Statmux IP messages from the IP Statmux
controller.
Destination - UDP Port parameter: represents the UDP port number of the
destination port to which the IP Statmux controller sends IP statmux control
messages.
Name parameter: shows the name of the encoder as set on the encoders front
panel user interface or embedded user interface.
SID parameter: shows the service identifier of the corresponding service.
Format parameter: represents the video format.
Frames parameter: represents the video definition (SD or HD).
Priority parameter: represents the priority of the service in the Statmux pool
as set on the encoder. This setting determines the priority of the video quality
of this service with respect to other services in the Statmux pool. The priority
value ranges between 0 and 15.
State parameter: shows the Statmux messaging status.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Min parameter: represents the minimum video bit rate as
set on the encoder. The video bit rate during Statmux operation does not go
below the minimum video bit rate value.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Max parameter: represents the maximum video bit rate as
set on the encoder. The video bit rate during Statmux operation does not
exceed the maximum video bit rate value.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Default parameter: shows the bit rate capacity from the
total Statmux pool capacity granted as default to the service. The sum of the
default video bit rates for the services part of a Statmux pool equals the size of
the Statmux pool bit rate.
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Target parameter: represents the target bit rate as
determined by the Statmux controller.
Note: Only active encoders are shown in the Encoders table. Encoders without valid
input signal are not shown, even if they are setup to produce black or colour bar
when having input loss. Pools without active encoders are also not shown, until at
least one active encoder joins the pool.

4011746 Rev P 461


Chapter 7 Additional Features

462 4011746 Rev P


8 Chapter 8
Backup Scenarios
Introduction
This chapter describes the port backup feature and the service backup
feature of the DCM.

In This Chapter
GbE Port Backup................................................................................. 464
Service Backup .................................................................................... 467
Transport Stream Backup .................................................................. 474
Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager ............................. 485
Standalone Device Backup ................................................................ 492
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager......... 498

4011746 Rev P 463


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

GbE Port Backup


Introduction
For port backup purposes the GbE ports of a GbE Interface Card can be configured in
such a way that an inactive port (backup port) takes over an active port (main port)
when the GbE link on this active port disappears.

GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1

Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux

GbE
port
Copy 1 IP(TSs) Service 1

Service 2 TS
Port
Pair
GbE Service 3
port
Copy 2 IP(TSs) Port
Backup
Demux Remux

Since the GbE Interface Card is provided with four GbE ports, GbE port 2 can be used
to backup GbE port 1 or vise versa (port pair 1 - 2) and GbE port 4 to backup GbE port
3 or vice versa (port pair 3 - 4).
Tip: In the DCM Configuration tree on the Configuration page as well as in the
DCM Outputs tree on the Service - Tree View sub page, an active port is indicated
by a black colored port name and an inactive port by a gray colored port name, see
illustration below.

Active Inactive
port port

The active/inactive state of a GbE port can also be checked in the GbE Name and
Network Settings table on the Interface sub page of a GbE Interface Card.

464 4011746 Rev P


GbE Port Backup

The DCM supports the following GbE port backup scenarios:


The main GbE port switches to its backup GbE port when a
backup-transition-trigger-alarm occurs on the main GbE port and the backup
GbE port is backup-transition-trigger-alarm free. The backup GbE port remains
active until a backup-transition-trigger-alarm arises on backup GbE port and the
main GbE port is backup-transition-trigger alarm free again (revertive mode:
inactive).
The main GbE port switches to its backup GbE port when a
backup-transition-trigger-alarm occurs on the main GbE port and the backup
GbE port is backup-transition-trigger-alarm free. The backup GbE port remains
active until the main GbE port becomes backup-transition-trigger-alarm free
(revertive mode: active).
Note: A backup transition can be triggered when a Link Loss alarm or UDP Loss alarm
occurs.
To configure these backup scenarios, the following parameters can be adapted:
Backup Mode parameter: this parameter determines the backup trigger and the
Main and Backup port. The following values can be selected:
- Manual x (with x the GbE port number): the GbE port in question is main port
and remains active until the Backup Mode parameter is changed.
- Auto x (with x the GbE port number): the GbE port in question is main port
and remains active as long as the links on this port is up.
Revertive parameter: this parameter determines the revertive mode. This
parameter is only applicable if the Backup Mode parameter is set to Auto x.
- Active: the backup port remains active until the link on the main port is up
again.
- Inactive: the backup port remains active until the link on backup port
disappears and the link on the main port is up again.
Revert Delay (s) parameter: the time the GbE link on the backup port must be
down before the main port becomes active again. This parameter is only
applicable if the Backup Mode parameter is set to Auto x.
Trigger Alarm parameter: this parameter determines when a backup transition
has to be executed:
- Link Loss: a backup transition will be triggered when a Link Loss alarm occurs.
- Link Loss and UDP Loss: a backup transition will be triggered when a Link Loss
or UDP Loss alarm occurs.

4011746 Rev P 465


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Changing the GbE Port Backup Parameters


Perform the following steps to change the GbE port backup parameters of a GbE
Interface Card.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the GbE Interface Card for which
GbE port backup parameters must be changed.
Result: The Interface sub page is displayed.
3 Select the Configuration - Backup link.
Result: The Configuration - Backup sub page is displayed.

4 In the Backup Mode drop down box of the port set in question, select the desired
backup mode.
5 In the Revertive drop down box, select the desired revertive mode.
6 In the Revert Delay (s) box, enter the time the GbE link on the backup port must
be down before the main port becomes active again. A delay can be entered
between 0 and 60 seconds.
7 In the Trigger Alarm drop down box, select the desired
backup-transition-trigger-alarm.
8 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

466 4011746 Rev P


Service Backup

Service Backup
Introducing Service Backup
General
Service backup is a feature that protects the content of an outgoing Transport Stream
by replacing failing services by backup services. In the example below, the outgoing
Transport Stream is build up with service 1, 2, and 3 from incoming Transport Stream
A. Service 1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream B are backup services for service
1, 2, and 3 of incoming Transport Stream A.

Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
rv Stream
ic
e
3

Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3

Service
Backup

When service 1 of Transport Stream A fails the service backup feature of the DCM
automatically replaces the missing service in the outgoing Transport Stream with
service 1 of Transport Stream B.

Demux Remux
1
e
ic
rv
Se
Transport
Stream A
Service 2
Source 1 Transport
Se
Service 1 rv Stream
Removed ic
e
3

Transport Service 1
Stream B
Service 2
Source 2 Service 3

Service
Backup

4011746 Rev P 467


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Backup Trigger
A service backup transition will be triggered by an input service loss alarm. The
alarms used to active a service loss alarm are configurable. For more information,
please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm on page 524.

Backup to Main Service Assignment


Before an outgoing service (main service) can be backed up by a particular incoming
service (backup service), the backup service must be assigned to this main service.
When services are merged into this main service, backup services can be assigned to
each of these merged services. A particular incoming service can acts as backup
service for multiple main services.

Service 1
Transport
Stream A
M
Source 1 Service 2 ai
n

Service 3
Transport
Stream B Merged service

in
Source 2 Transport

d
ge
Stream

er
M
Transport Service 1 BU
Stream C Service 2 BU
Backup Source

Demux Service Remux


Backup

Backup Scenarios
The service backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a service loss is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup service and switches back to
main service when a manual transition is requested (Revertive mode: disabled).
When a service loss is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup service. When the main
service is back for a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s) parameter) the
device switches back to the main service (Revertive mode: active).

General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a service in backup state (outgoing service or one of the
merged services) is indicated by an exclamation mark.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in Service Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't Switch
to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter can be found in topic Changing the
Backup Switching Parameters on page 473.

468 4011746 Rev P


Service Backup

The name of the outgoing service is by default the name of the active service.
After a main to backup transition, the outgoing service will get the name of the
backup service. The name of the outgoing service can be locked by changing the
name of the outgoing service in the SDTa. The procedure to change the service
name can be found in topic To Change the Service Name of an Outgoing Service.
When a main to backup transition is executed during a splice event, the splice
event can be interrupted. To deal with this, the components of the main service
participating in the splice event must be forced. For more information, please
refer to chapter Digital Program Insertion on page 339.

4011746 Rev P 469


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Assigning Backup Services to Main and Merged Services


The following steps explain how to configure the backup setting for a service.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing Transport Stream containing
the service for which backup settings must be configured.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page with Service Routing table is displayed.
6 In the row of the service for which backup settings must be configured, point to
the Backup arrow.
Result: The Service - Service - Backup Services sub page for the selected service is
displayed.
Note: For each merged service into the selected service, an additional Merged Service
Source table is added. These tables can be used to assign backup services to merged
services.
7 In the Service Backup Settings table, configure the backup parameters for the
outgoing service as described in the following steps:

a In the Revertive drop down box, select Active to enable the revertive mode or
Disabled to disable this mode.
b In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) that
the service loss alarm must be active on the main service before a
main-to-backup transition will be executed.
c In the Backup - Main Delays (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds)
that the service loss alarm must be inactive on the main service after a
main-to-backup transition before a backup-to-main transition will be
executed.

470 4011746 Rev P


Service Backup

8 In the Main Service Source and each Merged Service Source table, assign
backup services as described in the following steps:

a Add a table entry by pointing to the Add Row command button below the
table.
Result: A new table entry is displayed.
b In the Card drop down box, select the card receiving the backup service.
c In the Port drop down box, select the port receiving the backup service.
d In the Type drop down box, select the input port type:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for a GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
e In the IP Address box, enter the multicast IP Address to which the source
device streams.
Note: The IP Address parameter is only applicable if the Type parameter is
set to GbE Multicast.
f In the UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the port that enters the
Transport Stream the backup service belongs to.
Note: The UDP Port parameter is not applicable if the backup service enters
the device via an ASI port.
g In the SID box, enter the service identifier of the backup service.
9 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 471


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Performing a Backup Transition


For test purposes or for a backup-to-main service transition for services for which the
Revertive parameter is set to Disabled, a service backup transition can be triggered via
the web browser user interface of the DCM. The following steps explain how to
trigger a service backup transition.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Outputs tree, browse to the outgoing transport stream containing the
service for which a service backup transition trigger must be given.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Output sub page for the selected Transport Stream is
displayed.
4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
5 In the Service - Service sub page, point to the Routing tab.
Result: The Routing tab page with Service Settings table is displayed.
6 In the row of the service for which a service backup transition trigger must be
given, point to the Backup arrow.
Result: The Service - Service - Backup Services sub page for the selected service is
displayed.

Tip: The Status column shows the actual status of the service backup.
7 Click on the Activate command button in the row of the service that has to
become active.
Note: The Activate command button is only applicable for a service in Not Active
state.

472 4011746 Rev P


Service Backup

Changing the Backup Switching Parameters


When a main-to-backup transition is triggered and the backup source is in Service
Loss state, the transition will be performed or interrupted depending on the settings
of the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter. The following
steps describe how to change the Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss
parameter.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss parameter should be changed.
3 Point to the TS-Service Backup link that appears after clicking on the Default
Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 In the Default Service Backup Settings table set or clear the Don't Switch to
Backup Source in Service Loss check box.

5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 473


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Transport Stream Backup


Introducing Transport Stream Backup
General
In contrast with DCM's Service Backup feature, Transport Stream backup protects the
content of an outgoing Transport Stream by replacing the complete incoming
Transport Stream by a backup incoming Transport Stream. In the following example,
incoming Transport Stream B is the backup Transport Stream assigned to incoming
Transport Stream A.

Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1

Transport
Stream B
Source 2 Transport
Stream
Backup

If services are passed from Transport Stream A to the output and Transport Stream A
fails, the services from Transport Stream A will be replaced by identical services from
Transport Stream B. The matching criteria for services are Service Identifier (SID).
Note: The services in Transport Stream A and Transport Stream B should be the
same.

Demux
Transport
Stream A
Source 1
TS Loss

Source 2 Transport
Transport
Stream B Stream
Backup

474 4011746 Rev P


Transport Stream Backup

Backup Trigger
A Transport Stream backup transition will be triggered by a Transport Stream loss
(TS Loss) alarm. The alarms used to activate a TS Loss alarm are configurable. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm
Triggers on page 520.

Backup to Main Transport Stream Assignment


Before an incoming Transport Stream can be backed up by another incoming
Transport Stream, this backup Transport Stream must be assigned to the main
Transport Stream.

Scenarios
The Transport Stream backup feature of the DCM supports following scenarios:
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switch from main to backup Transport Stream and switches
back to main Transport Stream when a manual transition is requested (Revertive
mode disabled).
When a TS Loss alarm is active for a particular time (Main - Backup Delay (s)
parameter) the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream. When the
TS Loss alarm is cleared the device switches back to the main Transport Stream
(Revertive mode active) after a particular time (Backup - Main Delay (s)
parameter).

General Notes
In the DCM Outputs tree a Transport Stream in backup state is indicated by an
exclamation mark.
Cascading Transport Stream backups is not possible.
When the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter is disabled
(default value), a main to backup transition will always be done, even when the
backup source is in TS Loss state. The procedure to change the Don't Switch to
Backup Source in TS Loss parameter can be found in topic Changing the Backup
Switching parameters on page 484.
When the DCM switches from main to backup Transport Stream, the outgoing
service components can be kept static by defining component tracking rules. For
more information concerning tracking rules, please refer to topic Passing, Blocking,
and Remapping Service Components on page 200.
If Transport Stream backup is combined with DPI, component tracking rules
should be created to avoid unnecessary aborts of the advertising.

4011746 Rev P 475


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Assigning Backup Transport Streams


A backup Transport Stream can be assigned to another incoming (main) Transport
Stream using the TS Backup table of the incoming Transport Stream or using the TS
Backup table of the port containing the incoming Transport Stream.

Assigning a Backup Transport Stream using the Backup TS table of the Main Transport Stream
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of this main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream to which a backup
Transport Stream must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.
4 In the Backup TS table, perform the following settings.

a Tick the Enabled check box to switch on Transport Stream backup for the
selected Transport Stream.
b In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.

476 4011746 Rev P


Transport Stream Backup

c In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
e In the Board drop down box, select the Interface Card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
f In the Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the backup
Transport Steam.
g In the Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
h In the Input IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which the
source device streams.
Note: The Input IP Address box is only applicable if the Input Type drop
down box is set to GbE Multicast.
i In the Input UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that
receives the backup Transport Stream.
Note: The Input UDP Port box is not applicable if the Input Type drop down
box is set to ASI.
5 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Assigning Backup Transport Streams using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following procedure describes how to assign a backup Transport Stream to a
main Transport Stream using the TS Backup table of the port containing this
Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the Transport Stream to
which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 477


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

5 In the Backup TS table, complete the following settings in the row of the
Transport Stream to which a backup Transport Stream must be assigned.

a Tick the Backup TS ID - Enabled check box to switch on Transport Stream


backup for the selected Transport Stream.
b In the Backup TS ID - Card drop down box, select the interface card that
receives the backup Transport Stream.
c In the Backup TS ID - Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives
the backup Transport Steam.
d In the Backup TS ID - Type drop down box, select one of the following
settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
e In the Backup TS ID - IP Address box, enter the multicast IP address to which
the source device streams.
Note: The Backup TS ID - IP Address box is only applicable if the Backup TS
ID - Type drop down box is set to GbE Multicast.
f In the Backup TS ID - UDP Port box, enter the UDP port number of the input
port that receives the backup Transport Stream.
Note: The Backup TS ID - UDP Port box is not applicable if the Backup TS
ID - Type drop down box is set to ASI.
g In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.
h In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.

478 4011746 Rev P


Transport Stream Backup

i In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: When particular backup Transport Stream settings for all main Transport
Streams with multicast IP address must be changed to similar values, the Update all
TS function of the web browser user interface can be used. The following procedure
describes how to use this function.
1 In the Update All GbE Multicast Backup TS table, enter the desired value in the
box or select the desired value in the drop down box of the parameter that should
be changed for all Transport Streams of the selected ports.

2 Press the Update command button.


Result: The settings are changed in the FEC Settings table.
3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

Adding and Removing Preconfigured Transport Stream Entries


The web browser user interface of the DCM allows preconfiguring Transport Streams
with backup Transport Stream settings for a GbE Interface Card. Such Transport
Stream is preconfigured by adding a Preconfigured Transport Stream entry in the
Backup TS table containing all Transport Streams of a particular port. When the
incoming Transport Stream appears at the corresponding port, the Transport Stream
will get these backup Transport Stream settings.
The following steps explain how to add a preconfigured Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 479


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured Transport
Stream entries should be added.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Point to the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Settings sub page containing the Add Peconfigured TS and
Backup TS tables are displayed.
5 In the Add Preconfigured TS table, complete the following settings:

a In the Main Socket Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Unicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
unicast IP address.
Multicast: the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream is a
multicast IP address.
b Enter the destination IP address of the main Transport Stream in the IP
Address box and the UDP port number in the UDP box.
c In the Backup Card drop down box, select the interface card that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
d In the Backup Port drop down box, select the port pair that receives the
backup Transport Steam.
e In the Backup Type drop down box, select one of the following settings:
ASI: for an ASI input port
GbE Unicast: for an GbE Unicast input port
GbE Multicast: for a GbE Multicast input port
f In the Backup IP box, enter the multicast IP address to which the source
device streams.

480 4011746 Rev P


Transport Stream Backup

Note: The Backup IP box is only applicable if the Backup Type drop down
box is set to GbE Multicast.
g In the UDP box, enter the UDP port number of the input port that receives the
backup Transport Stream.
Note: The UDP box is not applicable if the Backup Type drop down box is set
to ASI.
h In the Revertive drop down box, select one of the following settings.
Enabled: when the TS Loss alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared
and this Transport Stream is in backup state, a backup-to-main transition
will be triggered after a particular time to go to the main Transport
Stream.
Disabled: The Transport Stream remains in backup state when the TS Loss
alarm for the main Transport Stream is cleared.
i In the Main - Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream should be active before a
main-to-backup transition will be triggered.
j In the Backup - Main Delay (s) box, enter the time (expressed in seconds) the
TS loss alarm of the main Transport Stream must be inactive before a
backup-to-main transition will be triggered.
6 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Result: After pressing the Add command button the preconfigured Transport Stream
is added in the Backup TS table.

Tip: In the Backup TS table, preconfigured Transport Streams with configured


Transport Stream backup settings can be removed by ticking the check box at the left
hand side of the corresponding preconfigured Transport Stream entry and pressing
the Remove Checked Items command button.

4011746 Rev P 481


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Performing a Manual Backup Transition


For test purposes or to perform a backup-to-main transition if the revertive mode is
disabled, the DCM allows triggering a backup transition manually. A manual
backup transition can be done in the TS Backup table of the incoming Transport
Stream or in the TS Backup table of the port containing the incoming Transport
Stream.

Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Main Transport Stream
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for which a manual
backup transition must be triggered.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page containing the Backup TS table is displayed.

Tip: The active state of the Transport Stream backup is shown in the State box.
4 Click on the Activate - Backup command button (main device active) or the
Activate - Main command button (main device inactive).

482 4011746 Rev P


Transport Stream Backup

Performing a Manual backup Transition using the Backup TS Table of the Port
The following steps explain how to perform a manual backup transition using the
Backup TS table of the port containing main Transport Stream.
1 In the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree view link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port containing the main Transport Stream
for which a manual backup transition must be triggered.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Service sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Backup link.
Result: The Service - TS Backup sub page is displayed.

5 In the Backup TS table, press the Backup command button in the corresponding
backup Transport Stream entry to trigger a main-to-backup transition or the
Main command button to trigger a backup-to-main transition.

4011746 Rev P 483


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Changing the Backup Switching Parameters


When a main-to-backup transition is triggered and the backup source is in TS Loss
state, the transition will be performed or interrupted depending on the settings of the
Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter. The following steps describe
how to change the Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss parameter should be changed.
3 Point to the TS-Service Backup tab that appears after clicking on the Default
Settings link.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed.
4 In the Default TS Backup Settings table set or clear the Don't Switch to Backup
Source in TS Loss check box.

5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

484 4011746 Rev P


Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager


Introduction
About Device Backup using ROSA Element Manager
Device backup using a ROSA Element Manager (EM) is a 1 to 1 backup scenario in
which the functionality of a failing device is taken over by a backup device and for
which monitoring is done by a ROSA EM.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT

RS232 DTE RS232 DTE


TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX

RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422


POWER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX

Main DCM (active)

Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

Backup DCM (inactive)

Alarm Model D9900


STOP
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content, the ROSA EM monitors both
devices. Streaming on the GbE port of the main device is activated and on the GbE
port of the backup DCM is stopped.
When the ROSA EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM or
detects that the active DCM becomes not responding, it will start a backup transition.
During this transition the active device will be set to inactive and the inactive device
to active. Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port and can activate IP
aliasing on the device depending on the configuration of these features.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT

RS232 DTE RS232 DTE


TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX

RUN RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485 /RS422


POW ER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX

Main DCM (inactive)

Alarm Model D9900


Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

STOP
Scientific
Atlanta

Backup DCM (active)

Alarm Model D9900


Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

4011746 Rev P 485


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

The ROSA EM is also able to start a device backup transition when the
communication between the element manager and the main DCM fails due to for
instance a failing main DCM.
CAUTION:
When the communication between the main DCM and the ROSA EM fails and
the main DCM is OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM stream.

After a main-to-backup transition (Backup: main device becomes inactive and


backup device active) and the alarm triggering the transition is cleared, a
backup-to-main transition (Restore: main device becomes active and backup device
inactive) can be started manually. Starting a restore transition will be done by using
ROSA EM.
After rebooting a DCM, the device becomes active by default. In device backup
applications it is advisable to inactivate one or both devices after rebooting. Once the
connection is made with the ROSA EM the active/inactive state of the main and
backup device is determined by the element manager.

About ROSA Element Manager


The scenario used by the ROSA EM to backup and to restore devices is script driven,
meaning scripts are required to perform a backup or restore transition. The scripts
used by the ROSA Element Manager to backup or restore a DCM are:
for backup: budcm.py
for restore: redcm.py
Note: A ROSA EM participating in a DCM backup application requires software
version V03.02.00.
More information concerning ROSA EM, scripts, etc..., please refer to the ROSA
Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide or User's Guide.

486 4011746 Rev P


Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup router,
the working mode of the corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring,
meaning the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM 3 COM5 COM 6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT

RS232 DTE RS232 DTE


TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX

RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422


POWER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX

Main Router
Main DCM (active)

Alarm
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

Backup DCM (inactive) Backup Router

Model D9900

STOP
Alarm
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

Applications with additional clients (AD Servers or EMMGs)


To eliminate additional clients (main and backup source) to feed the backup DCM in
a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM
supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM 3 COM5 COM6 COM7 COM8 CRAFT

RS232 DTE RS232 DTE


TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX

RUN RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422


POWER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX

Main DCM (active)

Alarm Model D9900


Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

Backup DCM (inactive)

Alarm Model D9900


STOP
Digital Content Manager (DCM)
PS 1

PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta
AD + EMMs
AD + EMMs
SCTE 30
SCTE 30

EMMG
AD Server
Advertising (AD)
EMMs
SCTE 30 messages
LAN

4011746 Rev P 487


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

DCM's IP Aliasing feature works as follows:


When the client has to send IP packages to a port of the main DCM and the
client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this
port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address
of these packages. When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the
main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP
address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP
reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the mapping between IP address and
MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port.
When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP
messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now
the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for
the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.

488 4011746 Rev P


Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Steps to Take
Before the device backup application which is monitored by ROSA Element
Manager can be used, a number of actions must be completed.
Note: The outgoing Transport Stream configuration for both the main and backup
DCM must be identical.

On the Main DCM


Actions to be done on the main DCM by using the DCM GUI.
Configure the triggers that have to generate a Device Operational Failure alarm. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure
Alarm on page 524.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the main DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.
When a single client (AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the backup
DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to
the port used to feed the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or
Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for the Gbe Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page
85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set to
Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing GbE
Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.

On the Backup DCM


Actions to be done on the backup DCM by using the DCM GUI.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the backup DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.

4011746 Rev P 489


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

When a single client (AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the backup
DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to
the port used to feed the main DCM. The IP alias must be equal to the IP alias of
the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.

On the ROSA Element Manager


Actions to be done using the ROSA EM GUI
Add both DCM devices to the device tree of the ROSA EM.
Enter the following parameters on the Backup tab of the main DCM:
- Backup Mode parameter: Automatic
- Restore Mode parameter: Manual
- Backup Script parameter: budcm.py
- Restore Script parameter: redcm.py
- Backup Device parameter: the name of the backup device as used in the
device tree of the ROSA EM GUI
For all other parameters on this tab page, use default values.

Enter the following parameter on the Properties tab of the main and backup
DCM:
- Script parameter: devdcm.py
For all other parameters on this tab page, use default values.

Note: The backup application can be tested by changing the Backup State parameter
on the Backup tab page of the main DCM from Inactive to Backup and vice versa.

490 4011746 Rev P


Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

Performing a Manual Restore Action after a Main-to-Backup Transition


After a main-to-backup transition the application can be restore manually using the
ROSA EM GUI. A restore action is performed by changing the Backup State
parameter on the Backup tab of the main DCM from Backup to Inactive.

4011746 Rev P 491


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

Standalone Device Backup


Introduction
The Stand Alone device backup is a 1 to 1 backup scenario in which the functionality
of a failing device is taken over by a backup device and for which the trigger for the
transition between the main and backup device is communicated using Scientific
Atlanta's Heartbeat protocol.

In a normal situation the main DCM (the active device) as well as the backup DCM
(the inactive device) process the program content and both the main and backup DCM
send heartbeat packets to each other. The active DCM sends active-state heartbeat
packets and the inactive DCM inactive-state heartbeat packets.
When a Device Operational Failure alarm occurs on the active DCM, the active DCM
stops sending active-state heartbeat packets and starts sending inactive-state heartbeat
packets after a particular delay; the device becomes inactive. The backup DCM
receives such inactive-state heartbeat packets from the main DCM and becomes active
immediately. When the active device becomes down, the inactive device no longer
receives active-state heartbeat packets from the active device and becomes active
after a while. Activating a device can enable streaming on a GbE port and can
activate IP aliasing on the device depending on the configuration of these features.

492 4011746 Rev P


Standalone Device Backup

CAUTION:
When the communication between the main and backup DCM fails and the main
DCM is still OK, a backup transition will be triggered to activate the backup
DCM without making the main DCM inactive, meaning both the main DCM as
well as the backup DCM are active.

After a main-to-backup transition (Backup: main device becomes inactive and


backup device active) and the alarm triggering the transition is cleared, a
backup-to-main transition (Restore: main device becomes active and backup device
inactive) can be started manually. Starting a restore transition will be done via the
GUI of the main DCM. For maintenance or reconfiguration purposes, a
main-to-backup transition can also be triggered manually.

Steps to Take
On the Main DCM
Actions to be done on the main DCM.
Configure the triggers that have to generate a Device Operational Failure alarm. For
more information, please refer to topic Configuring Device Operational Failure
Alarm on page 524.
Configure the Device Backup Settings for the main DCM. Please refer to topic
Configuring the Device Backup Settings on page 497.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the main DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.
When a single client (e.g. AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the
backup DCM via a GbE port or via the management port, IP aliasing feature must
be set to Auto and IP aliases must be assigned to the port used to feed the main
DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring the IP Aliasing
Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or Configuring the IP Aliasing Feature for
the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the main DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set to
Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing GbE
Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.

4011746 Rev P 493


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

On the Backup DCM


Actions to be done on the backup DCM.
Determine the Active/Inactive state of the backup DCM after powering up. More
information can be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.
Configure the Device Backup Settings for the backup DCM. More information can
be found in topic Activating or Deactivating the DCM on page 39.
When a single client (e.g. AD server) has to feed both the main DCM and the
backup DCM, IP aliasing feature must be set to Auto and IP aliases must be
assigned to the port used to feed the main DCM. The IP alias must be equal to the
IP alias of the main DCM. For more information please refer to topic Configuring
the IP Aliasing Feature for the Management Ports on page 45 or Configuring the IP
Aliasing Feature for the GbE Ports on a GbE Interface Card on page 85.
The MPEG data packet filtering must be done using MAC filtering (Filtering
parameter = MAC Only). More information concerning the Filtering parameter can
be found in topic Configuring the GbE Port Settings on page 64.

When the outgoing MPEG data packet streaming must be switched off during the
inactive state of the backup DCM, the Output Streaming parameter must be set
to Auto. The procedure to change this parameter can be found in topic Changing
GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.
When the DCM has to stream to a main router and backup router, the working
mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring. For more
information, please refer to topic Changing GbE Port Pair Settings on page 67.

494 4011746 Rev P


Standalone Device Backup

Special Cases
Application with main and backup routers
When a DCM has to stream to both the main router as well as to the backup router,
the working mode of corresponding GbE port pair has to be set to Mirroring, meaning
the backup port of the port pair streams out an exact copy of the main port.

Applications with additional clients (AD Servers)


To eliminate additional clients (main and backup source) to feed the backup DCM in
a backup application or to avoid the need for additional client licenses, the DCM
supports IP address takeover by using IP aliasing.

4011746 Rev P 495


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

DCM's IP Aliasing feature works as follows:


When the client has to send IP packages to a port of the main DCM and the
client's ARP table is not yet or no longer populated with ARP entries for this
port, the client broadcasts an ARP request message containing the IP address
of these packages. When IP aliasing is active on a network interface of the
main DCM, the DCM responds with an ARP reply message containing IP
address and MAC address of the port. When the client receives the ARP
reply, it ads an ARP entry containing the mapping between IP address and
MAC address for this port and starts sending IP packets to this port.
When the backup DCM is activated, it broadcasts several gratuitous ARP
messages containing the alias IP address and the MAC address of the
corresponding backup DCM port. When the client receives such message it
refreshes the ARP entry of the IP address matching the Alias IP address. Now
the IP packets with destination IP address matching the alias IP address for
the main DCM port will be sent to the corresponding backup DCM port.

496 4011746 Rev P


Standalone Device Backup

Configuring the Device Backup Settings


The following procedure describes how to configure the device backup settings for
the main and backup DCM participating into a standalone device backup
application.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Backup link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Backup sub page is displayed.
2 In the Device Backup Settings table, perform the following settings:

a In the Device Role drop down box, select one of the following settings:
Standalone (default): for devices that do not participate into a standalone
device backup application
Main: for a device that acts as a Main device in a standalone device backup
application
Backup: for a device that acts as a backup device in a standalone device
backup application
b In the Peer IP Address box, enter the IP address of the peer device. The octets
must be separated by dots.
For a main device: the IP address of the backup device
For a backup device: the IP Address of the main device
c In the Main to Backup Delay (s) box, enter the time the main device is down
or the time the Device Operational Failure alarm is active on the main before a
main to backup transition will be triggered.
d In the Heartbeat UDP Port box, enter the UDP Port number of the peer
device.
Note: This parameter must be equal for both the main device and backup
device.
e In the Heartbeat Network Interface drop down box, select the network
interface used by the Heartbeat protocol.
3 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 497


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element


Manager
Introduction
About IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager
IP Statmux device backup using a ROSA Element Manager is a 1 to 1 backup
scenario in which the IP Statmux functionality of a failing device is taken over by a
backup device and for which monitoring is done by ROSA EM.
ROSA Element Manager
ROSA Element Manager
COM1 COM3 COM5 COM6 C OM7 COM8 CRAFT

RS232 DTE RS232 DTE


TX TX RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE RS232 DTE TX
RX RX RS485 RCDS RS485 R CDS RS485 RCDS RS485 RCDS RX

RUN RS485 /RS422 RS485/R S422 RS485/RS422 RS485/RS422


POWER ALARM COM2 COM4
FAIL
RS232 DTE RS232 DTE
TX TX TX TX TX TX
RX RX RX RX RX RX

Main DCM IP statmux (active)


Alarm

PS 1
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) ROSA NMS
PS 2

Scientific
Atlanta

Backup DCM IP statmux (active)


Alarm

PS 1

PS 2
Model D9900
Digital Content Manager (DCM) Management
Scientific
Atlanta

SDI Router
Encoder #1
SDI SDI IP

Encoder #2
SDI SDI IP

Encoder #3
Model D9900

IP GbE
Alarm

SDI SDI IP PS 1
Digital Content Manager (DCM)

LAN Scientific
Atlanta
PS 2

Encoder #4
SDI SDI IP

Encoder #Backup
SDI SDI IP

During IP Statmux controlling both the main DCM and backup DCM process the
messages coming from the MPEG encoders participating into the IP Statmux pool;
only the active device replies to the encoders. For MPEG encoder redundancy, both
devices keep updated their blacklist with inactive MPEG encoders. When the ROSA
EM detects a Device Operational Failure alarm on the active DCM, it will start a
backup transition. During this transition the blacklist of the backup (active) device
will be checked and updated if required by the ROSA EM. The main (inactive)
device stops replying to the encoders and the backup (active) device starts replying.
For more information concerning the IP Statmux feature, please refer to topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 446.
Note: The IP switch beside the DCM Statmux devices can also trigger a backup
transition, for more information, please refer to the ROSA Element Manager User's
Guide.

498 4011746 Rev P


IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager

About ROSA Element Manager


The scenario used by the ROSA EM to backup and to restore IP Statmux devices is
script driven, meaning scripts are required to perform a backup or restore transition.
The scripts used by the ROSA Element Manager to backup or restore a DCM IP
Statmux are:
for backup: budcm_smx.py
for restore: redcm_smx.py
Note: A ROSA EM participating in a DCM IP Statmux backup application requires
software version V03.02.00.
More information concerning ROSA EM, scripts, etc..., please refer to the ROSA
Element Manager Installation and Operation Guide or User's Guide.

Steps to Take
The following list describes the steps to take for configuring DCM IP Statmux backup
using ROSA EM.
Note: The procedure to setup a DCM IP Statmux application can be found in topic IP
Statmux Controller on page 446. The procedure to setup MPEG encoder backup is
described in the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 IP Statmux Application
Note.
Actions to be done using the ROSA EM GUI.
1 Add the main, backup DCM IP statmux, and encoders to the ROSA EM device list
and restart the ROSA EM device.
2 Select the alarm(s) that should trigger a backup transition.
3 Configure the backup parameters for the main DCM.
On the Backup tab
Backup Device: name of backup device
Backup Script: budcm_smx.py
Restore Script: redcm_smx.py
4 Configure the backup parameters for the main MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>
DCM Blacklist: Select Remove and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will be controlled by the DCM IP Statmux.
5 Configure the backup parameters for the backup MPEG encoders.
On the DCM tab
DCM device: <name of MAIN DCM>

4011746 Rev P 499


Chapter 8 Backup Scenarios

DCM Blacklist: Select Add and click on the Execute command button.
The MPEG encoder will not be controlled by DCM IP Statmux.

500 4011746 Rev P


9 Chapter 9
Alarm Monitoring
Introduction
This chapter provides the procedures to configure the alarms and to
check the alarms generated by the DCM. Next to these procedures this
chapter also contains a description of each alarm that can be generated
by the DCM.

In This Chapter
Alarm Overview ................................................................................. 502
Configuring the Alarms ..................................................................... 509
Checking the Alarms .......................................................................... 525

4011746 Rev P 501


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Alarm Overview
Interface Card Related Alarms
ETR 290, 1st Priority Alarms
The following list gives an explanation of the priority 1 errors.
TS Sync Loss: The first byte of a Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In a MPEG-2 decoder, the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized Transport Stream. A TS Sync Loss
error arises when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two Transport
Stream packets are not detected.
Sync Byte Error: The first byte of the Transport Stream packet header is the
synchronization byte (0x47). In the MPEG-2 decoder the synchronization byte
serves for synchronization with the packetized transport stream. When the
synchronization byte is missing or contains errors too often, a MPEG-2 decoder
will not be able to synchronize to the transport stream. A Sync Byte Error is
generated when the synchronization byte in a TS packet is not detected.
PAT Error: The Program Association Table (PAT) contains a list of all programs
and Packet Identifiers (PIDs) contained in the transport stream and of associated
Program Map Tables (PMTs), which contain detailed program descriptions. If the
PAT is not available within a particular time interval 9 or contains an error, a
MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the TS.
Note: An incoming VBR Transport Stream with low bit rate can trigger a PAT error.

CC Error: Packets with a particular PID value were lost, appeared in an incorrect
order, or appeared more than twice. The PID value appears in the Detail column
of the status overview table.
PMT Error: The PMT (Program Map Table) is a table for detailed program
descriptions referenced in the PAT. As essential information for the MPEG-2
decoder, it contains the PIDs of all packets of the elementary streams as well as
the PIDs of packets serving for the transmission of PCR values associated with the
program. The PMT is of key importance for decoding TV and audio programs. If
the PMT is not available within a particular time interval or contains an error, a
MPEG-2 decoder will not be able to select and decode a program from the
transport stream.

9The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a
alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be
found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.

502 4011746 Rev P


Alarm Overview

PID error: The packet with a particular PID and referred to in the PMT is not
found within the specified time interval 10.

Other Alarms
The following list explains the other Transport Stream related alarms.
Active ECMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) is removed
while ECMs are still requested via this connection.
Active EIS Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the Event Information Scheduler (EIS) is removed.
Active EMMG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP
connection with the Entitlement Management Message Generator (EMMG) is
removed while EMMs are still requested via this connection.
Active PSIG Removed: This alarm is generated when the active TCP connection
with the PSI Generator (PSIG) is removed while PSI/SI information is still
requested via this connection.
Async sources: This Statmux related alarm will only be generated in synchronous
mode. It indicates that the Statmux pool encoder messages were received outside
the time window of 16 ms or that 525 and 625 video sources were detected within
the same Statmux pool.
Bandwidth Exceeded: The sum of the services and components within a
Transport Stream has exceeded the bit rate that is assigned to the Transport
Stream.
Channel closed by CA System: The channel between the DCM and the
Conditional Access System (CAS) is closed by the CAS.
Connection with CA System lost: The TCP connection with the Conditional
Access System is interrupted.
Destination IP Unresolved: This alarm is generated when the MAC address for a
unicast IP address of an outgoing Transport Stream can not be resolved.
Encoder dropout: This Statmux related alarm is generated when encoder
messages from an encoder part of a Statmux pool were not received during 1
frame period.
FEC L/D Error: This alarm is generated when a Transport Stream enters the
device with forward error correction (FEC) scheme L x D > 100. For more
information concerning forward error correction, please refer to Forward Error
Correction on page 155.

10The time that a PAT, PMT, or component is not available in the Transport Stream before a
alarm will be generated is adjustable. The procedure to change these time intervals can be
found in topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms.

4011746 Rev P 503


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Insertion Channel Active: This DPI related alarm is generated when a splicing
event is started.
Link Loss: The GbE link is down between the source device and the DCM or
between the DCM and the destination device.
Missing FEC Stream(s): This alarm is generated if one or both FEC streams are
missing for the incoming Transport Stream.
No Components to Scramble: CP Extension: There are no components available
for scrambling.
No DTF Concentrator License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating
into a DTF/MTR application consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm
is generated when the card mode of an Interface Card is set to ASI DTF and there
are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses available. More information concerning
Licences can be found in topic Licensing on page 17.
No DTF Scrambling License Available: Each ASI Interface Card participating
into a DTF/MTR application for which the Transport Stream must be scrambled
consumes one DTF Scrambling License. This alarm is generated when the
scrambling feature is switched on and their are no more DTF Scrambling Licenses
available. More information concerning Licences can be found in topic Licensing
on page 17.
No ECMG Connection Available: This alarm is generated when there is no link
with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) or when there is no
channel capacity available.
No ECM's available: CP Extension: this alarm arises when the DCM no longer
receives ECMs for a scrambled service.
No EMM resources available: The maximum number of generated EMM 11
streams that can be passed is 64. This alarm occurs if the number of generated
EMM streams passed to the output exceeds 64.
No FEC License Available (Decoding): This alarm is generated if no license is
available at the arrival of an incoming Transport Stream when the Default Input
FEC Settings Mode is set to 1D FEC or 2D FEC. In this case FEC for the
corresponding Transport Stream will be disabled.
No FEC License Available (Encoding): This alarm is generated when not enough
licenses are available after a reboot if the Default Input FEC Settings Mode is set
to 1D FEC or 2D FEC.
PMT section exceeds 1K: the PMT section is limited to 1 K Byte, this alarm occurs
if the PMT section exceeds this limit.

11Generated Entitlement Management Messages (EMMs) are messages received from an


Entitlement Management Message Generator via the EMMG to MUX interface and passed to
an outgoing Transport Stream.

504 4011746 Rev P


Alarm Overview

Port Bandwidth Exceeded: the sum of the bandwidth of all outgoing Transport
Streams on a particular GbE port has exceeded the maximum bandwidth for the
corresponding port.
Received Channel Error Message: The DCM received a channel error message
from the Conditional Access System.
Requested PID could not be allocated: A particular component for scrambling
purposes could no be allocated, e.g. the PID is already in use, another free PID is
automatically allocated.
Scrambling not started: Scrambling is not started because there are no
components or no Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) settings.
SD/HD Mismatch: This alarm is generated when a High Definition (HD) service
of which the SD/HD parameter is set to SD is added to a Transrating Group. The
corresponding HD service will be blocked.
Service in Backup (Service Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in
backup state triggered by a Service Loss alarm.
Service in Backup (TS Loss): This alarm is generated when a service is in backup
state triggered by a TS Loss alarm.
Service Loss: The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are configurable. More
information concerning the configuration of Service Loss triggers can be found in
topic Service Backup on page 467.
Service Loss at Output: This alarm is generated for an outgoing service for which
the corresponding incoming service and incoming backup services are in Service
Loss state.
TS Loss: A Transport Stream Loss alarm can be generated when one of the
following alarms is triggered: Service Loss alarm, Sync Loss alarm, Sync Byte Error
alarm, or Stream Loss alarm. For more information concerning the TS Loss alarm,
please refer to sub topic Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers on page
520.
Too many encoders in pool: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
Statmux pool has reached the maximum number of encoders allowed in a pool.
Too many encoders total: This Statmux related alarm is generated when the
maximum number of statmuxing encoders has been exceeded.
Transrating problem: This alarm is generated when the DCM is not able to
transrate the service due to poor quality of the incoming service or because of the
incoming service is scrambled.
Trigger backup:
UDP Loss: This alarm is generated if a particular port no longer receives UDP
packets.

4011746 Rev P 505


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

UDP Stream Loss: The Transport Stream of which services are passed to the
output is not longer detected at the corresponding UDP Port.
Possible causes:
The corresponding Transport Stream is played out to another UDP port.
The corresponding Transport Stream is not longer present at the input.
The UDP Port to which the Transport Stream is played out is lower than the
GbE UDP Boundary setting.
Unreferenced Pid Error: The Transport Stream is permitted to contain only
packets with program-specific information (PSI and SI tables), packets with
certain PIDs that are reserved in the MPEG-2 standard, and packets that are
identified in a Program Map Table (PMT).
Notes:

- The alarm message reporting for this alarm is default disabled, meaning
ROSA NMS and/or SNMP TRAP receivers will not be informed when such
alarm arises. The procedure to enabling alarm message reporting can be
found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms on
page 510.
- With the exception of Transport Streams with missing PAT, this alarm will
only be generated for components with PID higher than 32.
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached: The DCM is able to handle 500
incoming unreferenced components per second and per interface card. The alarm
is generated when the number of incoming unreferenced components exceeds
500.
User Selected PCR PID Error: This alarm is generated when the Time Base
Selection parameter is set to Forced PCR and the defined service is missing, has no
PCR PID, or has a PCR PID that doesn't arrive regulary (within 100 ms).

506 4011746 Rev P


Alarm Overview

Device Related Alarms


Card Not Operational: The communication between the main board of the DCM
and the interface card is down.
Device is in Service Mode: This alarm is generated when the Ethernet capturing
process is started or
when the trace level for card trace logs are set to All, Minor, or Major. More
information concerning Ethernet capturing can be found in topic Capturing Live
Network Data on page 615 and for trace logs in topic Viewing Trace Logs on page
610.
Co-Processor Not Operational: The communication between the Interface Card
and the Co-Processor Card is down.
Device Operational Failure: This alarm can be triggered when a Card Not
Operational alarm is generated. More information concerning the Device
Operational Failure alarm can be found in topic Configuring Device Operational
Failure Alarm on page 524.
Fan Failure: A fan failure alarm is arisen when a fan is malfunctioning. The alarm
detail indicates the fan number of the failing fan. The procedure to replace a fan
can be found in the Digital Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 System Guide
shipped with the device. Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service
personnel are allowed to maintain and service the DCM after reading the
Important Safety Instructions in the system guide.
FEC Temperature: This alarm is generated when the temperature of the FEC
engine on the FEC Card exceeds 90 C (185 F) and cleared at 80C.
Heartbeat Protocol Error: This alarm is generated when the UDP port used by the
Heartbeat Protocol for standalone device backup is occupied.
Hardware Key Inserted: This alarm is generated when the DCM hardware key is
plugged in into the I/O connector at the rear panel of the device.
Low Memory: This alarm is generated if less the 50 MB of the available memory
is free. This can be the case in very high load conditions if many services are
passed containing large EITa schedule tables.
Power Up: A power up alarm is generated after powering up or rebooting the
DCM.
PS 1 Failure: This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS1 is
failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the Digital
Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 System Guide shipped with the device.
Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to
maintain and to service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions
in the system guide.

4011746 Rev P 507


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

PS 2 Failure: This alarm is generated when the power supply unit in slot PS2 is
failing. The procedures to remove and to install a PSU can be found in the Digital
Content Manager (DCM) Model D9900 System Guide shipped with the device.
Keep in mind that only authorized and trained service personnel are allowed to
maintain and to service the DCM after reading the Important Safety Instructions
in the system guide.
NTP Clock Offset: This alarm is generated when the time difference between
DCM and the NTP server exceeds 15 ms after a time synchronization action. This
alarm will only be generated if splicing licenses are in use.
Operational Temperature: This alarm is generated when the device temperature
exceeds 65 C (149 F).
Test Message: A test message is generated. More information concerning test
messages can be found in sub topic Generating Test Messages on page 510.

508 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

Configuring the Alarms


Introduction
When an alarm becomes active on the DCM, the alarm is added to the Status page of
the web browser user interface and an alarm message is generated for reporting
ROSA messages or SNMP traps. The alarm messages coming from the DCM are
logged on the ROSA Message Viewer or SNMP TRAP receiver.
Note: The communication between the DCM and ROSA NMS or SNMP TRAP
receivers can be checked by generating test messages. More information concerning
generating test messages can be found in topic Generating Test Messages on page 510.
The alarm message reporting by DCM can be enabled or disabled for all alarms or for
individual alarms. The procedure to enable or disable the alarms message reporting
for all alarms can be found in topic Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all
Alarms on page 510 and for individual alarms in topic Configuring the Settings of the
Device Alarms on page 511 or Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page
512.
Each alarm is accompanied with a colored bullet indicating the severity level of the
alarms. The severity of an alarm can be changed using the web browser user
interface. The following list shows the severity levels used by the DCM:

Colored Bullet Severity Level Description


(magenta) Indeterminate The severity level cannot be determined.
Critical The service is affected and a urgent corrective action is
required.
(red) Major The service is affected and a corrective action is
required.
(yellow) Minor A non-service affecting error occurred and action is
required to prevent more errors.
(blue) Warning A potential service affecting error is detected.
(white) Information Information message

For more information about changing the severity level of an alarm, please refer to
sub topic Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms on page 511 or sub topic
Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms on page 512 further in this topic.

4011746 Rev P 509


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Enabling or Disabling Alarm Message Reporting for all Alarms


The following procedure explains how to enable or disable alarm message reporting
for all alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link that
appears after clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Enabled drop down box in the All Alarms table, select Yes to enable or No
to disable alarm message reporting for all alarms (device and interface alarms).

3 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.
Note: The presence and status of both power supply units are represented using
LEDs on the front panel of the DCM. When a PSU slot is empty, the corresponding
LED illuminates red. By disabling the corresponding alarm, this LED can be
extinguished.

Generating Test Messages


The communication between the DCM and ROSA NMS or SNMP TRAP receivers
can be checked by generating a test message.
Note: Before ROSA NMS is able to receive test messages, the DCM must be mapped
into ROSA NMS. The procedure to map a DCM into ROSA NMS can be found in
appendix Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS on page 577.
The following procedure explains how to generate a test message.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after
clicking on the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 Press the Generate Test Message command button at the bottom of the Global
Alarm Settings table.
Result: A test message is sent to ROSA NMS and/or SNMP TRAP receivers.

Note: For some reasons it can be useful to change the severity level of a test message.
The procedure to change the severity level can be found in topic Configuring the
Settings of the Device Alarms on page 511 or topic Configuring the Settings of the Interface
Alarms on page 512.

510 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

Configuring the Settings of the Device Alarms


Perform the following steps to configure the device alarms settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Alarms link after
pointing to the Configuration link.
Result: The device Configuration - Alarms sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Global Alarm Settings table, enable or disable the alarm message
reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box of the alarm in
question.

3 In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the severity.
4 In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before
an alarm message is generated.
5 In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before
the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
6 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 511


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Configuring the Settings of the Interface Alarms


The following procedure explains how to configure the interface alarm settings.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the Interface Card for which
alarm setting must be configured.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page for the interface card in question is
displayed.
3 Select the Alarms link.
Result: The Configuration - Alarms sub page is displayed.

512 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

4 In the Generate Alarms drop down box, select For All Services to generate a
service alarm / TS Loss alarm for all services / Transport Streams missing at the
input or select Only for Groomed Services for services / Transport Streams only
passed to the output.
5 In the Global Alarm Settings table, enable or disable the alarm message
reporting by selecting Yes or No in the Enabled drop down box of the alarm in
question.
6 In the (Major) Severity drop down box of the alarm, select the desired severity.
7 In the Begin Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be present before
an alarm message is generated.
8 In the End Debouncing (s) box, enter the time the error must be cleared before
the corresponding alarm message is cleared.
9 In the Error Intervals (ms) table, change the following error intervals if required:
PAT Error parameter: the time that the PAT is allowed to be not present in the
Transport Stream before a PAT error will be generated
PMT Error parameter: the time that the PMT is allowed to be not present in
the Transport Stream before a PMT error will be generated
PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter: the time that a particular audio or video
component is allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID
error will be generated.
PID Error (Data) parameter: the time that a particular data component is
allowed to be not present in the Transport Stream before a PID error will be
generated.
10 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 513


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers


Introduction
To activate an Input Service loss alarm following triggers can be set:
TS Sync Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the synchronization
byte of the Transport Stream to which the service belongs, is not detected in a
sequence of at least two Transport Stream packets.
UDP Stream Loss: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the port of the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs no longer detects
packets at the corresponding UDP port.
Missing in PAT: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT reference in
the PAT for the service is missing. A trigger will also be given when the PAT of
the incoming Transport Stream to which the service belongs is missing after a
device reboot action.
PMT Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the PMT for the service is
not available within a particular time interval or contains errors.
PID Error: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when components with PMT
reference are not found within a particular time interval.
When PID Error is selected, a trigger can be given for each missing component in the
service (PID Type parameter: Any) or a list can be entered (PID List parameter)
containing the PIDs of the components (PID type parameter: List) for which a trigger
must be given. The PID Error / PID List combination act as a filter for the generated
PID Errors. PIDs for components which have no reference in the PMT of the service
will be ignored (also PMT PIDs or other SI PIDs).
When the PID Type parameter is set to Smart, the DCM will examine the service type.

- For video services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the video
component or an audio component is missing, not for missing data
components.
- For audio services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when an audio
component is missing, not for missing data components.
- For data services, a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when a data
component is missing.
Scrambled Service: a Service Loss alarm will be triggered when the incoming
service is scrambled.

514 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. E.g. if a UDP Stream Loss is detected,
Missing in PAT, PMT Error, an PID Error will not be triggered. This means that a
Service Loss alarm will not be triggered when a TS Sync Loss is detected and TS Sync
Loss is not defined as Service Loss alarm trigger even if other alarms are defined to
trigger a service loss alarm. The following table shows this alarm hierarchy.

Hierarchy Alarm
1 TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card)
UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card)
2 Missing in PAT
3 PMT Error
4 Scrambled Service
5 PID Error

Tip: When most of the incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss
trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each
new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss - Mode
is set to Default will be configured with these settings. The default parameters are
dynamic, meaning when these default parameters are changed, all incoming services
for which the Service Loss mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The
procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in sub topic Changing
the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms on page 519.
Notes:
Depending on the setting of the Generate Alarms parameter, alarms can be
generated for all incoming services and components or only for services and
components which are passed to the output. For more information concerning
the Generate Alarms parameter, please refer to topic Configuring the Settings of
the Interface Alarms on page 512.
For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding service loss alarm triggers
(called preconfigured triggers) for services not (yet) present at the input of the
device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in sub topic
Adding Preconfigured Triggers on page 517.

To Configure Triggers for Services Present at the Input


The following procedure explains how to change the Service Loss alarm triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream containing the
service for which the Service Loss alarm triggers must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 515


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed.


4 Click on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Settings sub page containing the Service Settings table is
displayed.
5 In the Service Settings table, configure the following parameters in the rows of
the services for which Service Loss alarm setting must be changed.

In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the
corresponding Interface Card will be used to trigger a Service Loss alarm.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card
only), UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only) Missing in PAT, PMT Error,
Scrambled Service, and/or PID Error.
When PID Error is set as trigger, select one of the following settings in the
PID Type drop down box:
Any: a trigger will be given when one of the components within the
incoming service is missing.
List: a trigger will be given when one of the components as specified in the
PID list box is missing.
Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the type of missing
component.
When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the
components(s) for which a trigger must be given when missing. Multiple
PIDs must be separated by commas.
6 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

516 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

Adding Preconfigured Triggers


The following procedure describes how to create preconfigured triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers
must be created.
3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page containing the Service Settings and Add
Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.
4 In the Add Preconfigured Trigger table, complete the following parameters:

a In the SID box enter the Service Identifier of the service.


b In the Mode drop down box, select the desired Service Loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Service Loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
c When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card
only), UDP Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only) Missing in PAT, PMT Error,
Scrambling Service, and/or PID Error.
d When PID Error is set as trigger, select one of the following settings in the
PID Type drop down box:
Any: a trigger will be given when one of the components within the
incoming service is missing.
List: a trigger will be given when one of the components as specified in the
PID list box is missing.
Smart: a trigger will be given depending on the type of missing
component.
e When List is selected in the PID Type drop down box, enter the PID of the
components(s) for which a trigger must be given when missing. Multiple PIDs
must be separated by commas.
5 Click on the Add command button.
Result: The preconfigured trigger is added to the Service Settings table.

4011746 Rev P 517


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Tips:
Each preconfigured trigger entry in the Service Settings table for which the
service is not yet present at the input is suffixed by a check box, this check box can
be used to delete the entry.
The service loss parameters for both the services present at the input and the
services not yet present can be changed in the Service Settings table. The
procedure is similar to the procedure described in sub topic To Configure Triggers
for Services Present at the Input on page 515.

Deleting Preconfigured Triggers


The following procedure explains how to delete preconfigured triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link after
clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers
must be deleted.
3 Double-clicking on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Services sub page containing the Service Settings and Add
Preconfigured Trigger table is displayed.
4 In the Service Settings table, tick the check boxes in front of the row(s) of the
preconfigured triggers that must be removed.

Tips:
To set check boxes of consecutive rows on the Service Settings table, tick the
check box of the first row that must be deleted, press and hold down the
[SHIFT] key, and tick the check box of the last row that must be deleted.
The rows in the Service Settings table can be sorted by a specific parameter
by pointing to the column header of this parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by clicking the header.
5 Click on the Remove Checked Items command button to remove the selected
rows or the Reload command button to abort the operation.
Note: Triggers for which the service is present at the input can not be removed or set
to default.

518 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

Changing the Default Service Loss Trigger Alarms


For each incoming service, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a Service
Loss alarm. When incoming services must be defined with the same Service Loss
trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using default settings. Each
new incoming service and each incoming service for which the Service Loss - Mode
is set to Default will be configured with these settings.
WARNING:
The Default Service Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these
default parameters are changed, all incoming services for which the Service Loss
mode is set to Default will get these new settings.

The following procedure explains how to change the default service loss trigger
alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which
default service loss trigger alarms should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.
3 Point to the Default Settings link.
Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS-Service Backup tab.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed containing the Default Service
Backup Settings table.
5 In the Default Service Backup Settings table, perform the following steps to
configure the default service loss trigger alarms:

a In the Service Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Service
Loss trigger mode:
Disabled: service loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Service Loss alarm are selectable.
b When the Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the
Service Loss Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a
Service Loss alarm: TS Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), UDP Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Missing in PAT, PMT Error, Scrambled Service,
and/or PID Error.
c When the PID Error check box is ticked, select one of the following settings in
the corresponding drop down box: Any or Smart.
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 519


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Configuring Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers


Introduction
To activate a Transport Stream Loss alarm following triggers can be set:
Service Loss alarm: a Transport Stream Loss alarm will be triggered when a Service
Loss alarms occurs. The alarms to trigger a Service Loss alarm are also
configurable. More information about the configuration of Service Loss alarms
can be found in topic Configuring Service Loss Alarm Triggers on page 514.
Sync Loss alarm (ASI Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm will be
triggered when the synchronization byte in a sequence of at least two Transport
Stream packets are not detected.
Sync Byte Error alarm (ASI Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm
will be triggered when the synchronization byte in a Transport Stream packet is
not detected.
Stream Loss alarm (GbE Interface Card only): a Transport Stream Loss alarm will
be triggered when the Transport Stream, for which services are passed to the
output, is not longer detected at the corresponding UDP port.
The DCM handles a particular alarm hierarchy. E.g. if a Service Loss alarm is
detected, Sync Loss alarm will not be triggered. This means that the DCM will not
start a Transport Stream backup transition when a Service Loss alarm is detected and
Service Loss is not defined as Transport Stream Loss trigger even if other alarms are
defined to trigger a Transport Stream backup. The following table shows this alarm
hierarchy.

Hierarchy Alarm
1 Service Loss
2 Stream Loss
3 Sync Loss
4 Sync Byte Error

Tips:
When most of the incoming Transport Streams must be defined with the same
Transport Stream loss alarms, the configuration can be simplified by using
default settings. Each new incoming Transport Stream and each incoming
Transport Stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be
configured with these settings. The default parameters are dynamic, meaning
when these default parameters are changed, all incoming Transport Stream for
which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings. The
procedure to configure these default parameters can be found in sub topic
Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms on page 522.

520 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

For preconfiguration purposes the DCM allows adding TS loss alarm triggers
(called preconfigured triggers) for Transport Streams not (yet) present at the
input of the device. To procedure to add preconfigured trigger can be found in
sub topic Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers on page 520.

To Configure Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers


The following procedure explains how to change the Transport Stream loss alarm
triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the incoming Transport Stream for which the
Transport Stream loss alarm triggers must be changed.
3 Double-click on this Transport Stream or right-click on this Transport Stream and
point to View TS Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - TS Input sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss table.

4 In the TS Loss table, configure the following parameters.


a In the Mode drop down box, select the desired service loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Transport Stream loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the
corresponding Interface Card will be used to trigger a Transport Stream
loss alarm.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream Loss alarm are
selectable.
b When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Transport Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync
Byte Error (ASI Interface Card only).
5 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

Preconfiguring the TS Loss Triggers


The following steps explain how to preconfigure the TS Loss triggers.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View link that
appears after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs tree, browse to the port for which preconfigured triggers
must be created.

4011746 Rev P 521


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

3 Double-click on this port or right-click on this port and point to View Port
Settings in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Service - Services sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS Loss link.
Result: The Service - TS Loss sub page is displayed containing the TS Loss table.

5 In the TS Loss table, configure the following parameters.


a In the Mode drop down box, select the desired service loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Transport Stream loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Default: the default alarms as defined on the configuration page of the
corresponding Interface Card will be used to trigger a Transport Stream loss
alarm.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream Loss alarm are selectable.
b When the Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the check boxes for the alarms
that have to trigger a Transport Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss
(GbE Interface Card only), Sync Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync
Byte Error (ASI Interface Card only).
6 Click on the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button
to abort the operation.

Changing the Default Transport Stream Loss Trigger Alarms


For each incoming Transport Stream, one or more alarms can be defined to trigger a
Transport Stream loss alarm. When incoming Transport Streams must be defined
with the same Transport Stream trigger alarms, the configuration can be simplified
by using default settings. Each new incoming Transport Stream and each incoming
Transport Stream for which the TS Loss - Mode is set to Default will be configured
with these settings.
WARNING:
The Default TS Loss Trigger parameters are dynamic, meaning when these
default parameters are changed, all incoming Transport Streams for which the TS
Loss - Mode is set to Default will get these new settings.

The following procedure explains how to change the default Transport Stream loss
trigger alarms.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Configuration tree, double-click on the interface card for which the
default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms should be changed.
Result: The Configuration - Interface sub page of the selected interface card is
displayed.

522 4011746 Rev P


Configuring the Alarms

3 Point to the Default Settings link.


Result: The Configuration - Default Settings sub page is displayed.
4 Click on the TS-Service Backup tab.
Result: The TS-Service Backup tab page is displayed containing the Default TS
Backup Settings table.
5 In the Default TS Backup Settings table, perform the following steps to
configure the default Transport Stream loss trigger alarms:

a In the TS Loss Trigger Mode drop down box, select the desired Transport
Stream loss trigger mode:
Disabled: Transport Stream loss alarm trigger is disabled.
Specific: the alarms triggering a Transport Stream loss alarm are selectable.
b When the TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter is set to Specific, set the TS Loss
Trigger Options check boxes for the alarms that have to trigger a Transport
Stream loss alarm: Service Loss, Stream Loss (GbE Interface Card only), Sync
Loss (ASI Interface Card only), and/or Sync Byte Error (ASI Interface Card
only).
6 Press the Apply All command button to confirm or the Reload All command
button to abort the operation.

4011746 Rev P 523


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Configuring Device Operational Failure Alarm


Introduction
The Device Operation Failure alarm, that can be used to trigger for instance a device
backup transition, can be generated when a Card Not Operational alarm occurs. A
Card Not Operational alarm arises when the interface card becomes unreachable for
the main board of the DCM or when the interface card is missing. The triggers for a
Device Operation Failure alarm can be set or cleared for each individual interface card
slot.

To Configure the Device Operational Failure Alarm


The following steps explain how to configure the Device Operational Failure alarm.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Backup link that
appears after pointing to the Configuration link.
Result: The Configuration - Backup sub page for the device is displayed.
2 In the Mode drop down box in the Device Operational Failure Trigger table,
select Enable to switch on the Device Operational Failure alarm configuration.

3 Set the check box of the card to trigger a Device Operational Failure alarm when a
Card Not Operational alarm on the corresponding card arises or clear the check box
to disable the trigger.
Result: Disabling all triggers for all cards can be done by selecting Disable in the
Mode drop down box.
4 Press the Apply command button to confirm or the Reload command button to
abort the operation.

524 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Checking the Alarms


Introduction
The details of the generated alarms of the DCM can be found on the Status page of
the web browser user interface of the DCM. These alarms are categorized in a
number of tables, viz.:
Input TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the
incoming Transport Streams.
Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms
related to the incoming Transport Streams.
Input Service Status Overview table: this table contains the incoming service
related alarms.
Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the
alarms related to the incoming services.
Output TS Status Overview table: this table represents the alarms related to the
outgoing Transport Streams.
Detailed TS Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the alarms
related to the outgoing Transport Streams.
Output Service Status Overview table: this table contains the outgoing service
related alarms.
Detailed Service Status Overview table: this table contains the details of the
alarms related to the outgoing services.
Device Status Overview table: this table shows the alarms related to the device,
cards and ports.
Notes:
After loading a status overview table from the DCM, the table is refreshed at
regular time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the table.
For some reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatic refresh actions.
Therefore the Status sub pages are provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box
that can be used to switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh
actions.

4011746 Rev P 525


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

When a Service Loss or TS Loss alarm arises, the icon of the branch responsible
for the alarm is adapted in the tree on the Service page. The status indication of a
critical or major alarm is propagated to the interface card branch. The following
picture shows the status propagation of a service loss alarm.

526 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Alarms Related to Incoming Transport Streams


The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
Result: The Status - Input sub page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is
displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the header.

The following information can be found on the Input TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card that enters the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port that enters the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream in question.
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port, which enters the
incoming Transport Stream in question.
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview

4011746 Rev P 527


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Alarms Details Related to Incoming Transport Streams


Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of
incoming Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
Result: The Status - Input sub page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is
displayed.
2 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is
displayed.

Tips:

- The Detailed TS Status Overview table can also be opened in a popup


window by right-clicking on the corresponding Transport Stream in the DCM
Inputs tree on the Service sub page and pointing to View Status in the
short-cut menu.
- To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.
The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
SID: the Service Identifier of the failing service (if applicable)
Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)
PID: the Packet Identifier of the failing component (if applicable)
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active

528 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Alarms Related to Incoming Services


The following procedure explains how to check the Input Service Status Overview
table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
Result: The Status - Input sub page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is
displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box select Service.
Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Input Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click
on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the header.

In the Input Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: represents the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the
incoming Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to
which the service in question belongs

4011746 Rev P 529


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the incoming Transport Stream to which
the service in question belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding incoming service
Name: the name of corresponding incoming service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding incoming
service
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm
details of the corresponding incoming service

530 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Alarms Details Related to Incoming Services


Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
Result: The Status - Input sub page containing the Input TS Status Overview table is
displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box select Service.
3 Result: The Input Service Status Overview table is displayed.
4 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the service alarm in question
is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.

The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
Detail: alarm details
Note: IP address 0.0.0.0 in the detail of an alarm generated on a GBE port indicates
that the alarm is generated on a Transport Stream with the same IP address as the IP
address of the port.

4011746 Rev P 531


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Alarms Related to Outgoing Transport Streams


The following procedure explains how to check the Input TS Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link that
appears after clicking on the Status link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output TS Status Overview
table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Output TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click on
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the header.

The following information can be found on the Output TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream in question
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream in question
IP Address: the destination multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream in
question
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the Transport Stream in question
Detail: link to the detailed transport stream status overview

532 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Transport Streams


Perform the following steps to check the Detailed TS Status Overview table of
outgoing Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Status link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output TS Status Overview
table is displayed.
3 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Status Overview table of the TS alarm in question is
displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Status Overview table by a particular parameter, click
on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing to the header.

The following information can be found on the Detailed TS Status Overview table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
SID: the Service Identifier of the failing service (if applicable)
Name: the name of the failing service (if applicable)
PID: the Packet Identifier of the failing component (if applicable)
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active

4011746 Rev P 533


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

Alarms Related to Outgoing Services


The following procedure explains how to check the Output Service Status Overview
table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after
clicking on the Status link.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output Service Status
Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Output Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing repeatedly to the header.

In the Output Service Status Overview table each alarm is accompanied with the
following information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm with highest
severity. For more information concerning the severity, please refer to topic
Introduction on page 509.
Card: the name of the interface card streaming the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
Port: the name of the input port streaming the Transport Stream to which the
service in question belongs
IP Address: the destination multicast IP Address of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
UDP Port: the destination UDP port number of the IP stream containing the
outgoing Transport Stream to which the service in question belongs
ON ID: the Original Network identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
which the service in question belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to which
the service in question belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the corresponding outgoing service
Name: the name of corresponding outgoing service
Alarmed States: the number of active alarms on the corresponding outgoing
service

534 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Alarms

Detail: link to the Detailed Service Status Overview table containing the alarm
details of the corresponding outgoing service

Alarms Details Related to Outgoing Services


Perform the following steps to check the Detailed Service Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Output link after
clicking on the Status link.
Result: The Status - Output sub page containing the Output Service Status
Overview table is displayed.
2 In the row of the alarm for which details must be checked, click on the arrow in
the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Status Overview table of the outgoing service alarm in
question is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Status Overview table by a particular parameter,
click on the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the header.

The following information can be found on the Detailed Service Status Overview
table:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page 509.
Measurement: the alarm name
Value(s): the details of an alarm
- Active
- Not active
Detail: alarm details

4011746 Rev P 535


Chapter 9 Alarm Monitoring

To Check the Device Status Overview Table


Perform the following procedure to check the Device Status Overview table.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Device link that
appears after clicking on the Status link.
Result: The Device Status Overview table is displayed.

Each row in the Device Status Overview table is provided with the following
information:
Status: graphical representation of the severity level of the alarm. For more
information concerning the severity, please refer to topic Introduction on page
509.
Card: the card name of the interface card on which an alarm arises
Port: the name of the port on which an alarm arises
Measurement: the alarm name
Detail: the alarm details (if applicable)

536 4011746 Rev P


10 Chapter 10
Checking Bit Rates
Introduction
This chapter describes the procedures to check the bit rates of the
incoming and outgoing Transport Streams. Next to these procedures,
this chapter also contains a description of the parameters accompanied
with the bit rate figures.

In This Chapter
Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree......... 538
Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables......................................... 541

4011746 Rev P 537


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and


Output Tree
To Check the Bit Rates in the Service Overview Trees
With the exception of the component leaves, all branches in both the DCM Inputs tree
and the DCM output tree are provided with bit rates figures. The bit rate figures of a
particular branch appear by pausing the cursor on the arrow beside the branch.
The following list describes the bit rates figures in the DCM input and DCM output
tree.
The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of the device

The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of a Interface Card

The total incoming or outgoing bit rate of a port

The bit rate figures of a Transrating Group

The bit rate figures of an incoming or outgoing Transport Stream

The bit rate figures of an incoming or outgoing service

Notes:
In contrast with the input bit rate figures, which include the stuffing rate, the
output bit rate figures do not include stuffing bit rates.
The bit rate figures shown in the trees are not automatically updated. These
figures will be updated by pressing the Reload command button.

538 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates in the DCM Input and Output Tree

Opening a Popup Window with Transport Stream Bit Rates


The bit rates of services and components within an incoming or outgoing Transport
Stream can be checked by using a popup window. The following procedure explains
how to open such popup window.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Tree View sub page
after clicking on the Service link.
Result: The Service - Tree View sub page is displayed.
2 In the DCM Inputs or DCM Outputs tree, browse to the Transport Stream for
which the bit rates of Transport Stream details must be checked.
3 Right-click on the Transport Stream and point to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.
Result: A popup window containing the bit rates of the Transport Stream details is
displayed.

After loading the tables from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at regular
time, meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some
reasons it can be useful to switch off these automatically refresh actions. Therefore
this popup window is provided with a refresh ( ) drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh actions.

4011746 Rev P 539


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Tips:
The identification parameters of the Transport Stream are shown above the table.
For more information concerning the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and
PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table, please refer to topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview
Tables on page 541.

540 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables


Introduction
The bit rates of the incoming Transport Streams as well as the bit rates of the outgoing
Transport Streams are categorized in a number of tables. The following overview
lists the bit rates overview tables that can be checked using the web browser user
interface of the DCM.
Input bit rates tables
- Service Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of all incoming services.
- Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the
components within an incoming service.
- TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the incoming
Transport Streams.
- Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the services
within an incoming Transport Stream.
- Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of
the components within an incoming Transport Stream.
Output bit rates table
- Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of all outgoing
services.
- Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the
components within an outgoing Service.
- TS Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of all outgoing Transport
Streams.
- Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of the services
within an outgoing Transport Stream.
- Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit rates of
the components within an outgoing Transport Stream.
- Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table: shows the bit rates of the
services that participate in a Transrating Group.
- Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table: represents the bit
rates of the services within a Transrating Group.

4011746 Rev P 541


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

After loading a table from the DCM, the bit rate figures are refreshed at regular time,
meaning no command button should be pressed to reload the figures. For some
reasons it can be useful to switch of these automatically refresh actions. Therefore
each bit rate sub page is provided with a Refresh drop down box that can be used to
switch on (10 sec) or off (stop) the automatically refresh actions.

Checking the Input Bit Rates


Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Incoming Services
The bit rates overview of all incoming services are categorized in the Service Bit
Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an example of a Service Bit
Rates Overview table.

Each row in the table represents an incoming service containing the following
information:
Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream to which
the service belongs
Port: the name of the input port receiving the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
IP Address: the multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the Transport
Stream to which the service belongs (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port receiving the Transport Stream
to which the service belongs (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream the service
belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the service
Name: the name of the service

542 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service


Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table

Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Incoming Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an incoming service can be found in
the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong are
shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the component
Name: the name of the component
ES Type: the component type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the component
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the component since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the component since reset

4011746 Rev P 543


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the component since reset

Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the components of the
incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the service for which component bit rates must be checked, point to
the arrow in the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is
displayed

Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending
order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Incoming Transport Streams


The bit rates of the incoming Transport Streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates
Overview table. The following picture depicts a TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row represents an incoming Transport Stream containing the following


information.
Card: the slot name of the interface card receiving the Transport Stream
Port: the name of the port receiving the Transport Stream
IP Address: the Multicast IP address of the IP stream containing the incoming
Transport Stream (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the GbE port that enters the Transport Stream
(if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream
Total (Mbps): the bit rates of the incoming Transport Stream (with null packets)
Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset

544 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Min: the minimum bit rate since reset


Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Stuffing (Mbps): the bit rates of the null packets in the incoming Transport
Stream
Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset
Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component
Bit Rates Overview table
Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the Service sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.

The following steps explain how to check the bit rates overview of the incoming
Transport Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

4011746 Rev P 545


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Incoming Transport Stream
A bit rates overview of all services within a particular incoming Transport Stream can
be found in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture shows
an example of a Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong are shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
SID: the service identifier (SID) of the incoming service
Name: the name of the incoming service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Components within an Incoming Services on page 543.

546 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

The following procedure explains how check the bit rates overview of the services
within a particular incoming Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the incoming Transport Stream for which the service bit rates must
be checked, point to the arrow.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table of the Transport Stream in
question is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the services within a particular incoming Transport Stream can
be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the DCM
Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within a Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within a Transport Stream are categorized in the
Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts
such table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the components
belong are shown above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table

4011746 Rev P 547


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset

The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the components
within a Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Input link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the Transport Stream for which component bit rates must be
checked, point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table of the selected
Transport Stream is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the components within a particular incoming Transport Stream
can be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the
DCM Inputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.

548 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Checking the Output Bit Rates


Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Outgoing Transport Streams
The bit rates of the outgoing Transport Streams are categorized in the TS Bit Rates
Overview table. The following picture shows a TS Bit Rates Overview table.

Each row represents an outgoing Transport Stream containing the following


information.
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream
Port: the number of the port used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream
Payload (Mbps): bit rates of the payload in the outgoing Transport Stream
Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset
Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Stuffing (Mbps): bit rates of the stuffing in the outgoing Transport Stream
Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset
Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview and Detailed TS Component
Bit Rates Overview table

4011746 Rev P 549


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Outputs sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.

Perform the following steps to check the bit rate overview of outgoing Transport
Streams.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to the
table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order by
pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Outgoing Transport Stream
The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream are
categorized in the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts such table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the services
belong are displayed above the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
SID: the service identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the outgoing service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.

550 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the services within a particular
outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
service bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.
Note: The bit rates of the services within a particular outgoing Transport Stream can
be opened in a popup window by right-clicking on the Transport Stream in the DCM
Outputs tree on the Service page and pointing to View Bit Rates in the short-cut
menu.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Service
The bit rates overview of the components within an outgoing service can be found in
the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture depicts an
example of a Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the service to which the components belong are
shown above the table.
Each row in the table represents a component containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the component
Name: the name of the component
ES Type: the component type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the component
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the component since reset

4011746 Rev P 551


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the component since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the component since reset

Perform the following steps to check the bit rates overview of the incoming services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Service.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the service for which component bit rates must be checked, point to
the arrow in the Detail column.
Result: The Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table of the selected service is
displayed

Tip: To sort the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter,
point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Components within an Outgoing Transport Stream
The bit rates of the components within an outgoing Transport Stream are categorized
in the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table. The following picture
depicts such table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transport Stream to which the tables belong
are displayed above the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table.
Each row in the table represents a table containing the following information:
PID: the packet identifier of the table
Type: the table type
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the table
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the table since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the table since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the table since reset

552 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Perform the following steps to check the bit rates of the components within a
particular outgoing Transport Stream.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select TS.
Result: The TS Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the detail column, point to the arrow of the Transport Stream for which the
component bit rates must be checked.
Result: The Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Outgoing Services


The Service Bit Rates Overview table on the Bit Rates - Output sub page provides a
bit rates overview of all outgoing services. The following picture shows a Service Bit
Rates Overview table.

Each row in this table represents an outgoing service containing the following
information:
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream the service
belongs to
Port: the port name used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream the service belongs to (if applicable)
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream to
which the service belongs
TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the outgoing Transport Stream the
service belongs to
SID: the Service Identifier of the outgoing service
Name: the name of the outgoing service

4011746 Rev P 553


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the outgoing service


Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the outgoing service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table
Tip: Pressing the TS ID value opens the TS Output sub page of the corresponding
Transport Stream.

The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates overview of the outgoing
services.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after clicking on the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Service Bit Rates Overview table by a particular parameter, point to
the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and descending order
by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Transrating Groups


The bit rates of the Transrating Groups are categorized in the Transrating Group Bit
Rates Overview table. The picture below shows such a table.

Each row represents a service containing the following information:


Group Name: the name of the transrating group
Card: the interface card used to stream the outgoing Transport Stream(s) of the
Transrating Group
Port: the port name used to stream the Transport Stream(s) of the Transrating
Group
Payload (Mbps): bit rates of the payload in the Transrating Group
Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset
Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset

554 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Stuffing (Mbps): bit rates of the stuffing in the Transrating Group


Current: the actual bit rate
Avg: the average bit rate since reset
Min: the minimum bit rate since reset
Peak: the maximum bit rate since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table.
Tip: Pressing the Group Name parameter opens the Transrater sub page of the
corresponding Transrating Group.

Perform the following steps to check the services that belong to Transrating Groups.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
Result: The Service Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.

Tip: To sort the Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a particular
parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between ascending and
descending order by pointing repeatedly to the parameter header.

Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the Services within an Transrating Group
The bit rates of the services within a Transrating Group are categorized in the
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table. The following table shows a
Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table.

Tip: The identification parameters of the Transrating Group, to which the services in
the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table belong, are shown above
the table.
Each row in the table represents a service containing the following information:
IP Address: the IP address of the destination device for the outgoing Transport
Stream to which the service belongs
UDP Port: the UDP port number of the destination device for the outgoing
Transport Stream to which the service belongs
ON ID: the Original Network Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs

4011746 Rev P 555


Chapter 10 Checking Bit Rates

TS ID: the Transport Stream Identifier of the Transport Stream to which the
service belongs
SID: the Service Identifier of the service
Name: the name of the service
Current (Mbps): the actual bit rate of the service
Avg (Mbps): the average bit rate of the service since reset
Min (Mbps): the minimum bit rate of the service since reset
Peak (Mbps): the maximum bit rate of the service since reset
Detail: link to the Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table, more information
concerning this table can be found in topic Checking the Bit Rates Overview of the
Outgoing Services on page 553.

The following procedure explains how to check the bit rates of the services within a
Transrating Group.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, click on the Output link that
appears after pointing to the Bit Rates link.
2 In the filter ( ) drop down box, select Transrating Group.
Result: The Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table is displayed.
3 In the row of the Transrating Group for which service bit rates must be checked,
point to the arrow in the Detail column.
4 Result: The Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table of the selected
Transrating Group is displayed.
Tip: To sort the Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table by a
particular parameter, point to the table header of the parameter. Toggle between
ascending and descending order by pointing to the parameter header.

556 4011746 Rev P


Checking the Bit Rates Overview Tables

Restarting the Bit Rate Measurement


Introduction
The bit rates measurements can be restarted for each individual Interface Card.
Restarting can be done on both the Input sub page and Output sup page of the Bit
Rates page.

To Restart the Bit Rate Measurement


The following procedure explains how to restart the bit rate measurements.
1 On the Input or Output sub page of the Bit Rates page, tick the check box(es) in
the Reset Board Bit Rates table for the Interface Card(s) for which the bit rate
measurement must be restarted.

2 Point to the Reset command button.


Result: The bit rate measurement of the selected Interface Card(s) is restarted.

4011746 Rev P 557


11 Chapter 11
Software Upgrade
Introduction
This chapter outlines the guidelines to upgrade the software of the
DCM.

In This Chapter
Introduction ......................................................................................... 560
Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package ................................... 561
Upgrading the DCM Software.......................................................... 565

4011746 Rev P 559


Chapter 11 Software Upgrade

Introduction
About the Upgrade Software
To facilitate the software upgrade of a DCM, Scientific Atlanta has developed the
Upgrade-It software package. The Upgrade-It software package runs as a
stand-alone application on a remote PC, which is connected to the same LAN as the
10/100Base-T or GbE port of the DCM.

System Requirements
To install the Upgrade-It software package and to run the application, the PC should
meet the following minimum requirements.
Pentium processor, minimum 166 MHz.
128Mb of RAM
SVGA Graphics Adapter with minimum 800x600 resolution
Windows compatible mouse
Operating system
Windows 98 or Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP

560 4011746 Rev P


Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package

Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package


The following procedure explains how to install the Upgrade-It software package.
1 Double-click on the Setup.exe file of the Upgrade-It installation software or
right-click on the file and select Open. The necessary installation information will
be collected.
Result: The InstallShield Wizard dialog is opened.

2 Click on the Next command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the installation.
Result: The Choose Destination Location page of the InstallShield Wizard is
displayed.

4011746 Rev P 561


Chapter 11 Software Upgrade

3 Click on the Browse command button to choose another destination folder to


install Upgrade-IT.
Note: By default, Upgrade-It is installed in the Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
Upgrade-It folder on your system hard disk.
4 Point to the Next command button.
Result: The dialog shows the program folders available on your system.

5 Choose a program folder or enter a new one and click on the Next command
button.

562 4011746 Rev P


Installing the Upgrade-It Software Package

Result: The installation is started and the setup progress is displayed.

Result: After a while the dialog shows that the installation is completed.

6 Click on the Finish command button to end the installation procedure.


Result: Now you can run the Upgrade-It software.

4011746 Rev P 563


Chapter 11 Software Upgrade

Note: When the Upgrade-It software is already installed, restarting the installation
procedure will result in a dialog with other options. The options allow you to
modify, repair or remove the installation. If you want to upgrade with a new
software version, choose the Repair option.

564 4011746 Rev P


Upgrading the DCM Software

Upgrading the DCM Software


Introduction
After upgrading the DCM, the device will be rebooted. When the device participates
into a device backup application and the device is active, a manual main-to-backup
or backup-to-main transition must be performed before upgrading the device. The
following steps explain how to perform a manual transition:
1 Check if the inactive device is up and running.
2 Check if the configuration of the inactive device matches the configuration of the
active device and modify if required.
3 Perform a manual transition:
Device backup controlled by ROSA's Digital Headend Backup Task
On the GUI of the DHB task, click on the Backup Status tab, select the DCM
section, and point to the Backup command button to inactivate a main device
or to the Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the Digital Headend Backup task, please refer to the
Digital Headend Backup - User's Guide.
Device backup controlled by ROSA Element Manager
On the GUI of the ROSA EM device, change the Backup State parameter on
the Backup tab of the main device to:
Backup to inactivate a main device
Inactive to inactivate a backup device
More information concerning device backup controlled by ROSA EM can be
found in topic Device Backup Using ROSA Element Manager or in the ROSA
Element Manager - User's Guide.
Standalone device backup
On the web browser user interface of the main DCM, click on the
Configuration link and point to the Backup link. Click on the Manual
Backup command button to inactivate a main device or to the Manual
Restore command button to inactivate a backup device. For more
information concerning the standalone backup, please refer to Standalone
Device Backup on page 492.

4011746 Rev P 565


Chapter 11 Software Upgrade

Opening the Upgrade-It Tool


Perform the following steps to open the Upgrade-It tool.
1 In the start menu, click on the Start button and browse to the Upgrade-It
application.
Result: The Upgrade-It dialog is displayed.

Notes:
The Upgrade-It tool is provided with a Reboot after Upgrade function that gives
an additional and unnecessary reboot command to the DCM after the
upgrading-process when enabled.
WARNING:
For DCM devices with software package lower than version 2.5, this additional
reboot action will clear all configuration settings stored on the device. Make
sure this Reboot after Upgrade function is disabled.
Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu and unchecking
the Reboot after Upgrade menu item.

566 4011746 Rev P


Upgrading the DCM Software

The Upgrade-It tool is provided with an option that removes installation files
after flashing. When this option is enabled during a DCM upgrade a number of
error messages will be displayed. These errors have no effect on the upgrading
process. Disabling this function can be done by pointing to the Settings menu
and unchecking the Delete Files after Flashing menu item.

Selecting the Software Module


Perform the following steps to select a software module to upgrade the DCM
software.
1 In the Available Modules box, click on the Open... command button.
Result: The Open dialog is displayed.
2 Browse to the folder containing the software module (*.txt).
3 Select the file and point to the Open command button.
Result: The software module is displayed in the Available Modules box.

4 In the Available Modules box, check the software module that must be used to
upgrade the DCM.

4011746 Rev P 567


Chapter 11 Software Upgrade

Selecting the Device


The following procedure explains how to select the DCM that should be upgraded.
1 In the Target box, click on the Add... command button.
Result: The Add Target IP dialog is displayed.

2 Select IP Address or IP Address Range in the drop down box.


3 Enter the IP address of the DCM or the beginning address of the IP address range
in the From box.
4 If IP Address Range is selected in the drop down box, enter the ending address of
the IP address range in the To box.
5 Press the Add command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.
Result: The devices corresponding the entered IP address or IP address range are
reflected in the Targets box.

Note: The Type parameter in the Targets box originates from the target.
6 In the Targets box, check the device that should be upgraded.

568 4011746 Rev P


Upgrading the DCM Software

7 Click the Refresh command button to refresh the Slot Details of the selected
targets.

8 Select the file to be upgraded by selecting the check box manually in the Slot
Details list or by pressing the Select command button.

Flashing the Software


The following procedure explains how to flash the software.
1 When Available Modules, Targets, and Slot Details are configured correctly,
press the Flash command button to start the upgrading process.
Result: The Flash Status dialog box with the status of the software upgrade process is
displayed.

Notes:
After upgrading the software the device will automatically reboot, which takes
several minutes.
Clicking on the Refresh command button will refresh the Slot Details box.

4011746 Rev P 569


A
Appendix A
Appx auto letter

Customer Information
Introduction
This chapter contains information on obtaining product support.

In This Appendix
Product Support.................................................................................. 572
Return Products for Repair................................................................ 574

4011746 Rev P 571


Appendix A
Customer Information

Product Support
Obtaining Support
IF... Then...
you have general questions about this contact your distributor or sales agent for
product product information or refer to product data
sheets on www.scientificatlanta.com.
you have technical questions about this call the nearest Technical Support center or
product Scientific Atlanta office.
you have customer service questions or call the nearest Customer Service center or
need a return material authorization Scientific Atlanta office.
(RMA) number

Support Telephone Numbers


This table lists the Technical Support and Customer Service numbers for your area.
Region Centers Telephone and Fax Numbers
North America SciCare For Technical Support, call:
Broadband Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009
Services Local: 770-236-6900 (Press 2 at the prompt)
Atlanta, Georgia For Customer Service or to request an RMA number, call:
United States Toll-free: 1-800-722-2009
Local: 770-236-6900 (Press 3 at the prompt)
Fax: 770-236-5477
E-mail: customer.service@sciatl.com
Europe, Belgium For Technical Support, call:
Middle East, Telephone: 32-56-445-197 or 32-56-445-155
Africa Fax: 32-56-445-053
For Customer Service or to request an RMA number, call:
Telephone: 32-56-445-133 or 32-56-445-118
Fax: 32-56-445-051
E-mail: elc.service@sciatl.com
Japan Japan Telephone: 81-3-5908-2153 or +81-3-5908-2154
Fax: 81-3-5908-2155
E-mail: yuri.oguchi@sciatl.com
Korea Korea Telephone: 82-2-3429-8800
Fax: 82-2-3452-9748
E-mail: kelly.song@sciatl.com
China China Telephone: 86-21-6485-3205
(mainland) Fax: 86-21-6485-3205
E-mail: xiangyang.shan@sciatl.com

572 4011746 Rev P


Product Support

Region Centers Telephone and Fax Numbers


All other Hong Kong Telephone: 852-2588-4746
Asia-Pacific Fax: 852-2588-3139
countries & E-mail: support.apr@sciatl.com
Australia
Brazil Brazil For Technical Support, call:
Telephone: 55-11-3845-9154 ext 230
Fax: 55-11-3845-2514
For Customer Service or to request an RMA number, call:
Telephone: 55-11-3845-9154, ext 109
Fax: 55-11-3845-2514
E-mail: luiz.fattinger@sciatl.com
Mexico, Mexico For Technical Support, call:
Central Telephone: 52-3515152599
America, Fax: 52-3515152599
Caribbean
For Customer Service or to request an RMA number, call:
Telephone: 52-55-50-81-8425
Fax: 52-55-52-61-0893
E-mail: karla.lugo@sciatl.com
All other Argentina For Technical Support, call:
Latin America Telephone: 54-23-20-403340 ext 109
countries Fax: 54-23-20-403340 ext 103
For Customer Service or to request an RMA number, call:
Telephone: 770-236-5662
Fax: 770-236-5888
E-mail: veda.keillor@sciatl.com

4011746 Rev P 573


Appendix A
Customer Information

Return Products for Repair


Introduction
You must have a return material authorization (RMA) number to return a product.
Contact the nearest customer service center and follow their instructions.
Returning a product to Scientific Atlanta for repair includes the following steps:
Obtaining a RMA number
Obtaining a customer service center shipping address
Packing and shipping the product

Obtaining an RMA Number and Shipping Address


You must have an RMA number to return products.
RMA numbers are valid for 60 days. If you already have a number, but it is older than
60 days, you must contact a customer service representative to revalidate the number.
You can return the product after the RMA number is revalidated.
Follow these steps to obtain an RMA number and shipping address.
1 Contact a customer service representative to request a new RMA number or
revalidate an existing one.
Refer to the earlier section titled Support Telephone Numbers to find a customer
service telephone number in your area.
2 Provide the following information to the customer service representative:
Product name, model number, part number, serial number (if applicable)
Quantity of products to return
A reason for returning the product
Your company name, contact, telephone number, email address, and fax
number
Any service contract details
Purchase order number of repair disposition authority, if available
Result: The customer service representative issues the RMA number and provides
the shipping address.
Notes: If you cannot provide a purchase order number:
A proforma invoice listing all costs incurred will be sent to you at the
completion of product repair.

574 4011746 Rev P


Return Products for Repair

Customer service must receive a purchase order number within 15 days after
you receive the proforma invoice.
Products can accrue costs through damage or misuse, or if no problem is
found. Products incurring costs will not be returned to you without a valid
purchase order number.
Proceed to Packing and Shipping the Product.

Packing and Shipping the Product


Follow these instructions to pack the product and ship it to Scientific Atlanta.
1 Are the products original container and packing material available?
If yes, pack the product in the container using the packing material.
If no, pack the product in a sturdy, corrugated box, and cushion it with
packing material.
Important:
You are responsible for delivering the returned product to Scientific Atlanta
safely and undamaged. Shipments damaged due to improper packaging may
be refused and returned to you at your expense.
Do not return any power cords or accessories.
2 Write the following information on the outside of the container:
Your name
Your complete address
Your telephone number
RMA number
Problem description
Note: Absence of the RMA number may delay processing of product repair and/or
result in the equipment being returned unrepaired. Include the RMA number in all
correspondence.
3 Ship the product to the address provided by the customer service representative.
Note: Scientific Atlanta does not accept freight collect. Be sure to prepay and insure
all shipments.

4011746 Rev P 575


B
Appendix B
Appx auto letter

Integrating a DCM into ROSA


NMS
Introduction
This appendix describes how to integrate a DCM into the ROSA
Network Management System (NMS).

In This Appendix
Introduction ......................................................................................... 578
Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers.................................................... 579
Making Task Instances....................................................................... 584
Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS ................................................... 586
Working with the Graphical User Interfaces .................................. 589
Using DCM Scripts ............................................................................. 593

4011746 Rev P 577


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Introduction
About ROSA NMS
ROSA, Scientific Atlanta's Network Management System (NMS), is a complete
solution to manage the Scientific Atlanta equipment in the most efficient,
cost-effective manner possible. The ROSA platform supports a wide range of
broadcast and broadband networks with a complete set of protocol and device
drivers, automation tasks, and service description models. This network
management system also contains a complete toolbox to integrate third-party
equipment.
The ROSA NMS allows creating customized views like geographical views, rack
layout views, equipment interconnection views to make the diagnostic process
easier.
The ROSA NMS automation tasks help the user to build self-healing systems by
using a wide palette of tasks for backup equipment, transmission links or services.
The ROSA NMS Notification task can send pager, SMS and E-mail messages to
service technicians when certain alarm conditions occur. This task is highly
configurable, different rules and schedules can be defined for each scenario and
service technician.

578 4011746 Rev P


Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers

Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers


Introduction
Before the DCM can be integrated into ROSA NMS, a number of ROSA NMS drivers
should be installed. The following list shows these drivers:
IIOP Protocol Driver
The IIOP Protocol driver is a protocol driver that is used to establish
communication with IIOP devices. The driver scans for IIOP devices and allows
mapping of IIOP devices to ROSA resources.
DCM Device Driver
The DCM Device Driver allows integrating the embedded GUI of the DCM into
ROSA NMS.
SCS Configurator
The SCS Configurator is used to configure the scrambling-specific parameters of
the DCM.
AC Manager Component
The AC Management Component can be used to create, edit, and delete access
criteria and services.
SI Distributor
A part of the SI Distributor functionality is used by the AC Manager component.
Scrambling Control Task Driver
The Scrambling Control Task Driver acts as a scrambling/descrambling switch.
Statmux Pool Manager (SPM)
The Statmux Pool Manager tool allows easy and quick configuration of multiple
encoders participating into a Statmux application controlled by DCM's IP Statmux
Controller.

Macro Component
The Macro Component can be used to execute the DCM macros. More
information can be found in topic Using DCM Scripts on page 593 .
Notes:
When the ROSA system is used for management or configuration purposes, both
the IIOP Protocol Driver and DCM Device driver are required.
When the ROSA NMS system and DCM(s) participate into CA systems, with the
exception of the Macro Component driver all drivers mentioned above must be
installed. The AC Manager Component driver and the Scrambling Control Task
Driver should not be installed when the Event Information Scheduler (EIS)
functionality is performed by a third party device.

4011746 Rev P 579


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Pay attention to the following remarks before installing the drivers into the ROSA
software:
You cannot install drivers with a lower product version.
To upgrade a driver, simply install the newer driver. The old driver will be
replaced automatically. Do NOT uninstall the old driver first!
Downgrading drivers within the same product version is not possible unless you
uninstall the drivers first. Uninstalling a driver results in the loss of all
configurations because all resources using the driver are removed from the
Server Explorer tree.
If you install drivers that require a server software version higher than the current
installed version, the server software will be upgraded automatically.
For detailed information concerning the installation of drivers, please refer to the
Users Guide of the ROSA software.

To Install the ROSA Drivers


The following procedure explains how to install the drivers into the ROSA Software.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of the ROSA system, select the server in which the
DCM must be integrated.
2 In the Config menu, point to Drivers.
Result: The Installed Drivers dialog is displayed.

3 Press the Install command button.


Result: The Open dialog is displayed.

580 4011746 Rev P


Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers

4 Browse to the folder containing the driver files. These driver files can be found on
the ROSA Installation CD-Rom or on the following location:
ROSA Device Configuration Shell: in the folder \ Program Files \
Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSADevConfShell \ Copernicus \ Drivers\ on the hard
disk of the PC running the ROSA software.
ROSA Single User: in the folder \ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \ Drivers \ on the hard disk of the PC running
the ROSA software.
ROSA Client: on the servers hard disk in the shared folder \ Copernicus \
Drivers
Notes:
If the \ Drivers folder on the servers hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click on the Get Drivers from Server command
button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
When the drivers are downloaded from Scientific Atlanta's FTP server,
browse to the location where you stored these files.
5 Select the driver files required for your application. The following table lists the
driver files.

ROSA NMS Driver File Name


IIOP Protocol Driver IIOP Protocol.rsd
DCM Device Driver DCM.rsd
AC Manager Component AC Manager Component.rsd
Scrambling Control Task Driver Scrambling Control Task.rsd
DVB SI Distributor SI Distributor.rsd
SCS Configurator SCS Configurator.rsd
Statmux Pool Manager SPM.rsd
To select multiple drivers, press and hold down the CTRL key, and point to each file.
6 Press the Open command button.
Result: After successful installation, the names of the drivers are added to the
Installed Drivers dialog.

4011746 Rev P 581


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

7 Press the Close command button to close the dialog.


Note: After selecting the driver files and pressing the Open command button, it may
be possible that the server must be rebooted, in this case the following message box is
displayed.

The following procedure describes how to reboot the server.


Close the Please, reboot server (via ROSA)! message box by pointing to the OK
command button.
On the Installed Drivers dialog, click on the Close command button to close the
dialog.
In the Server menu, select Manage and point to Reboot Server...

582 4011746 Rev P


Installing the ROSA NMS Drivers

Result: The following confirmation box is displayed.

Click on the Yes command button to reboot the server.


Result: The server starts rebooting.

4011746 Rev P 583


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Making Task Instances


Introduction
After the installation of the Scrambling Control Task driver and SI Distributor Task
driver, task instances for these tasks must be created.
Note: As long as no task instance is created for a task, the task will not appear in the
Explorer Tree.

To Make a Task Instance


The following procedure explains how to create a task instance for the Scrambling
Control Task. The procedure to make a task instance for the SI Distributor Task is
similar.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of ROSA, select the server that participates into the
CAS system.
2 In the Config menu, point to Drivers.
Result: The Installed Drivers dialog is displayed.

3 Select Scrambling Control Task and click on the Make Task command button.
Result: The Make Task dialog is displayed.

584 4011746 Rev P


Making Task Instances

4 Press the OK command button to confirm.


Result: The Scrambling Control Task is added to the Explorer Tree.

5 Click on the Close command button to close the Installed Drivers dialog.

4011746 Rev P 585


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS


Introduction
Before a DCM can be mapped into the ROSA software, a scan operation must be
executed to detect the device. If the scan operation is successfully performed and the
device is mapped, the unit will be displayed into the Server Explorer tree of the
ROSA system. The procedure to scan and to map a DCM using the IIOP Protocol
Driver can be found in following subtopic.

To Map a DCM into ROSA NMS


The following procedure is designed to be used as step-by-step instructions for
mapping a DCM using the IIOP Protocol driver.
Note: More detailed information concerning the IIOP Protocol drive can be found in
the IIOP Protocol Driver Users Guide.
1 In the Server Explorer tree of the ROSA system, right-click on the IIOP Protocol
node and point to Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The user interface of the IIOP Protocol driver is displayed.

586 4011746 Rev P


Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS

2 Click on the Add... command button.


Result: The Add devices to scan dialog is displayed.

3 In Identify device by drop down box, select how to identify the device.
4 If IP address is selected, then type the IP address in the From box. If IP address
range is selected, then type the IP address range values in the From and To box.
5 In the Time Out box, type a timeout value between 10 and 60000 ms.
6 In the Retry Count box, type a retry value between 1 and 5.
7 Click on the OK command button to confirm and to close the dialog.
8 Point to the Apply command button.
9 Select the Map Resources tab on the user interface of the IIOP Protocol driver.
Result: The Map Resources tab is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 587


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

10 Select the DCM that must be mapped and click on the New Resource... command
button.
Result: The New Resource dialog is displayed.

11 Enter a resource name in the Name box and press the OK command button to
confirm.
Result: The new DCM will be added to the Server Explorer tree.

588 4011746 Rev P


Working with the Graphical User Interfaces

Working with the Graphical User Interfaces


Opening the Web Browser User Interface
Perform the following steps to open the web browser user interface of the DCM via
ROSA NMS.
1 In the Server Explorer or Group Explorer tree of the ROSA system, right-click on
the DCM resources for which the web browser user interface must be opened and
point to Properties in the short-cut menu.

Result: The web browser user interface of the selected DCM resource will be opened.

Note: The User Interface can also be opened by on the unit in a map. The following
picture depicts a DCM.

4011746 Rev P 589


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Opening the Graphical User Interface of a Task or Component


The following steps explain how to open the AC Manager Component. The
procedures to open the SCS Configurator, the Scrambling Control Task, and Statmux
Pool Manager are similar.
Note: Since only a part of the SI Distributor Task functionality is used for DVB
Scrambling, an empty GUI will be displayed with the message SI Distributor Control
Panel not available due to missing License after opening the task.
1 In the Explorer Tree of the server that participates in the Conditional Access
System, right-click on AC Manager Component and point to Properties in the
short-cut menu.
Result: The AC Manager Component with the Access Criteria dialog is displayed.

To Resize the Graphical User Interface


The size of the user interface of a task or component can be increased or decreased by
dragging the lower right corner of the dialog.
Note: The user interface of a task or component cannot be made smaller than the size
it was opened.

590 4011746 Rev P


Working with the Graphical User Interfaces

To Maximize the Graphical User Interface


The user interface of a task or component can be maximized by clicking the maximize
button in the upper right corner of the window.

To Close the Graphical User Interface


The user interface of a task or component can be closed in one of the following ways:

- On the File menu, click on Exit.


- Press [Alt] + [F4]
- Click on the close button in the upper right corner of the window.
The Apply command button
When changes are made to settings on the user interface, the new settings must be
sent to the device by clicking on the Apply command button. When settings are
made on different tabs of the user interface, these settings can be activated all at once
by clicking on the Apply command button.

The Reload command button


When settings are accidentally changed, the previous settings can be restored by
clicking on the Reload command button.
Note: This reload function works only before the Apply command button has been
pressed.

Checking the Driver Version


There are three different ways to check the user interface of a task or component.

- In the Installed Drivers dialog, check the Driver Version column.

4011746 Rev P 591


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

- In the Installed Drivers dialog, select the line of the driver and click on the
Details command button.

- On the user interface of a task or component, click on About in the Help


menu.

592 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

Using DCM Scripts


Introduction
Particular configuration settings of the DCM can be adapted by executing macros
using ROSAs Macro Component. The Macro Component allows manipulating and
executing predefined set(s) of macros on one or multiple resources. A macro can
range from a single action on a device to a full script that interacts with several
devices. Macros can have a wide set of parameters such as numbers, strings, devices
or other resources. With the Scheduler tool, the time the macro must be executed can
be determined. The Scheduler supports single shot and recurring macro schedules: a
single shot macro is executed only once at a specified date and time, a recurring
macro schedule follows a schedule that is defined with help of the ROSA Schedule
Database Component.
Execute predefined set of macros
Support of single shot and recurring macro schedules
For more detailed information about the Macro Component please refer to the Macro
Component Users Guide.
To configure the DCM using the Macro Component, Scientific Atlanta provides the
following macros:
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro: allows adding service component tracking
rules.
DCM.RemoveRules macro: allows removing service component tracking rules.
DCM.ImportSIData macro: allows importing or removing PAT, PMT and/or
CAT tables.
DCM.SwitchStreaming macro: allows switching on or off streaming of outgoing
Transport Streams
Before DCM macros can be executed, the Macro Component and these macros must
be installed into ROSA NMS. The procedure to install the Macro Component is
described in topic Installing the ROSA 3.0 Drivers on page 579 and in the Macro
Component User's Guide. The procedure to install the DCM Macros is described in
the following topic.

4011746 Rev P 593


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Installing the DCM Macros


The DCM Macros are not installed by default; perform the following steps to install
these macros.
1 Browse to the folder containing the driver files. These drivers can be found on the
ROSA Installation CD-Rom or on the following location:
- ROSA Single User: in the folder \ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \
ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \ Drivers\ on the hard disk of the PC running
the ROSA software.
- ROSA Client: on the servers hard disk in the shared folder \ Copernicus \
Drivers
Notes:

- If the \Drivers folder on the servers hard disk is no longer shared, you can
download all driver files to the hard disk of your client computer. On the
Installed Drivers dialog, click the Get Drivers from Server command button.
The files are then copied into the folder \ ROSA3 \ Copernicus \ drivers on
your local hard disk.
- When the macros are downloaded from Scientific Atlanta's FTP server,
browse to the location where you stored these files.
2 Copy the files with .bnm extension (DCM.ApplyComponentRules.Bnm,
DCM.ImportSIData.Bnm, DCM.RemoveRules.Bnm, and DCM.SwitchStreaming.Bnm)
to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting
3 Copy the DCM.py file to the following location:
\ Program Files \ Scientific-Atlanta \ ROSASingleUser \ Copernicus \
MacrosAndScripting \ Scripts
4 Stop and reconnect to the server as described in the ROSA Network Management
System User's Guide.
Result: The DCM Macros are added to the list of the Macro Component.

594 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

Adding Service Component Tracking Rules


Introduction
The DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro allows adding service component tracking
rules which are used to keep the content of a service in an outgoing Transport Stream
constant and to block unnecessary components. By using this macro service
component tracking rules are defined by uploading a configuration file.
Before the DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro can be executed, the component needs
the knowledge of the following information:
The DCM device affected by the macro
The full path of the configuration file containing the component tracking rule
definitions
Note: Defining service component tracking rules using the
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro and using the web browser user interface of the
DCM can not be combined for the same services.

Creating a Configuration File


As described in the previous topic, service component tracking rules can be added by
uploading a configuration file. Such file can be created using a standard text editor
like Notepad or using Microsoft Excel. A DCM_Config file is build up in two parts,
viz.: a Header part and a Tracking Rule part (see illustration below).

Header

Tracking
Rules

The header of the DCM_Config file is mandatory and has the following syntax:
Version,1

Note: Version and 1 has to be separated by a comma.

4011746 Rev P 595


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

A row in the Tracking Rule part consist of a number of parameters each separated by a
comma. These parameters are:

4,1, 225.0.0.1 ,49410 ,stream type , ,Audio ,0 x81 , en4 , , ,2 ,86 , pass

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 13 14
11
1 Input - Card parameter
2 Input - Port parameter
3 Input - IP Address parameter
4 Input - UDP parameter
5 Tracking type parameter
Valid values: ES PID, PCR, ECM PID, ES ECM PID, Stream Type, and Component Tag
6 Tag parameter
7 Streamtype parameter
Valid values: Video, Audio, DVB Subtitles, DVB Teletext, Data, and User Defined
8 Streamtype Value parameter
9 Language parameter
10 Input PID parameter
11 ES Output parameter
12 Output SID parameter
13 Output PID parameter
14 Status New parameter
Valid values: pass, and block

Note: The Tracking type, Streamtype, and Status New parameter are case
insensitive.
With the exception of the Transport Stream specification parameters (first 4 columns),
the layout of the DCM_Config file is similar to the Component Tracking Rules table
on the Components sub page of the web browser user interface of the DCM. For
more information about these parameters, please refer to topic Tracking Rules on page
206.
Note: For an outgoing Transport Stream on an ASI Interface Card, both the Input - IP
Address parameter and the Input - UDP parameter should be left empty.

596 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

The parameters that must be entered to define a tracking rule depend on the tracking
rule type. The table below shows the parameters that must be entered for the
different rule types.

pe
V eam e

D ut
p

D
pu e
ue y
ty

In uag

ES PI

p
al t

ut
am

us
t
ng

O
pe

re

at
g

La
Ty

Ta

SI

PI
St
St

St
ES PID
ES ECM PID
ECM PID
PCR
Streamtype (*)

Comp. Tag
(*) only if streamtype is Audio (may also be left empty)

To enhance the readability of the configuration file or to provide additional


information, comment lines can be added. A comment line should be prefixed by a
hash mark (#). The following picture depicts a service routing file with comments.

4011746 Rev P 597


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Since Microsoft Excel is able to import and to create comma-delimited text files, a
service routing file can be created and/or adapted using this spreadsheet application.
Once the service routing file is ready, this file should be saved as a comma-delimited
file (CSV extension). The following illustrations show a DCM_Config opened with
Microsoft Excel.

Executing the DCM.ApplyComponentRules Macro


The following steps explain how to execute the DCM.ApplyComponentRules Macro.
1 In the list box on the Macros tab of the Macro Component user interface, select
the DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro and point to the Execute... command
button.
Result: The Macro Detail dialog is displayed.
2 In the Parameters list box, select the IDCM_ResId parameter and point to the
Edit... command button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the IDCM_ResId parameter is displayed.

3 In the Value drop down box, select the DCM to which this macro must be
applied.
4 Press the OK command button to confirm.

598 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

5 In the Parameters list box, select the strConfigFile parameter and point to the
Edit... command button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the strConfigFile parameter is displayed.
6 In the Value box, enter the path and file name of the configuration file.
7 Press the OK command button to confirm.
8 Point to the Finish command button.
Note: This procedure describes how to execute the DCM.ApplyComponentRules Macro
manually. Macros can also be executed automatically by using Macro Presets and
Macro Schedules. For more information please refer the Macro Component User's
Guide.

4011746 Rev P 599


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Removing Service Component Tracking Rules


Introduction
The DCM.RemoveRules macro allows removing service component tracking rules
using ROSA's Macro Component. Therefore the component needs the knowledge of
the following information:
The DCM device for which service component tracking rules must be removed
The Interface Card and port containing the outgoing Transport Stream to which
the service component tracking rules apply
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address and UDP port
The Service Identifier (SID) of the service to which the tracking rules apply.
When this parameter is set to -1, the tracking rules applied to all services of the
specified outgoing Transport Stream will be removed.

Executing the DCM.RemoveRules Macro


The following steps explain how to execute the DCM.RemoveRules Macro.
1 In the list box on the Macros tab of the Macro Component user interface, select
the DCM.RemoveRules macro and point to the Execute... command button.
Result: The Macro Detail dialog is displayed.
2 Repeat step 3 up to 5 for all parameters:
lDCM_ResId parameter
lCard parameter
lPort parameter
strIPAddress parameter: the octets of the IP Address must be separated by
dots.
lUDPPort parameter
lSID parameter
3 In the Parameters list box, select the parameter and point to the Edit... command
button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the selected parameter is displayed.

600 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

4 In the Value box, select or enter the desired value.


5 Press the OK command button to confirm.
6 Point to the Finish command button.
Note: This procedure describes how to execute the DCM.RemoveRules Macro
manually. Macros can also be executed automatically by using Macro Presets and
Macro Schedules. For more information please refer the Macro Component User's
Guide.

4011746 Rev P 601


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Importing SI Data
Introduction
Program Specific Information (PSI) and Service Information (SI) exported from the
device or created by means of ROSA's SI Editor can be uploaded to the DCM using
the Macro Component.
Note: The PSI/SI is uploaded via the PSIG To MUX interface, therefore a Scientific
Atlanta specific PSIG proxy (: SA Specific) must be configured for the DCM using the
SCS Configurator. More information can be found in topic PSI/SI Generators on page
407.
To execute the DCM.ImportSIData macro, the Macro Component needs the following
knowledge:
The DCM to which SI data must be loaded
The Interface Card and port containing the outgoing Transport Stream for which
SI data must be loaded
The ON ID and TS ID of the Transport Stream
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address and UDP port
The path and the name of the file containing the SI data

Executing the DCM.ImportSIData Macro


The following steps explain how to execute the DCM.ImportSIData Macro.
1 In the list box on the Macros tab of the Macro Component user interface, select
the DCM.ImportSIData macro and point to the Execute... command button.
Result: The Macro Detail dialog is displayed.
2 Repeat step 3 up to 5 for all parameters:
lDCM_ResId parameter
lTSID parameter
lONID parameter
lPID parameter
strSiDataFileName parameter. If this parameter is empty, the corresponding
table will be removed.
3 In the Parameters list box, select the parameter and point to the Edit... command
button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the selected parameter is displayed.

602 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

4 In the Value box, select or enter the desired value.


5 Press the OK command button to confirm.
6 Point to the Finish command button.
Note: This procedure describes how to execute the DCM.ImportSIData Macro
manually. Macros can also be executed automatically by using Macro Presets and
Macro Schedules. For more information please refer the Macro Component User's
Guide.

4011746 Rev P 603


Appendix B
Integrating a DCM into ROSA NMS

Starting or Stopping Streaming


Introduction
The DCM.SwitchStreaming macro allows activating or Stopping streaming of
outgoing Transport Streams. Therefore the Macro Components needs the following
information:
The DCM for which outgoing Transport Streams must be activated or stopped.
The Interface Card and Port containing the outgoing Transport Stream
The ON ID and TS ID of the Transport Stream
When the outgoing Transport Stream belongs to a GbE port, the destination IP
address and UDP port
The streaming status
- 1 : activating
- 0 : stopping

Executing the DCM.SwitchStreaming Macro


The following steps explain how to execute the DCM.SwitchStreaming Macro.
1 In the list box on the Macros tab of the Macro Component user interface, select
the DCM.SwitchStreaming macro and point to the Execute... command button.
Result: The Macro Detail dialog is displayed.
2 Repeat step 3 up to 5 for all parameters:
lDCM_ResId parameter
lCard parameter
lPort parameter
lONID parameter
lTSID parameter
strIPAddress parameter: the octets of the IP Address must be separated by
dots.
lUDPPort parameter
lStreaming parameter
3 In the Parameters list box, select the parameter and point to the Edit... command
button.
Result: The Parameter Detail dialog for the selected parameter is displayed.

604 4011746 Rev P


Using DCM Scripts

4 In the Value box, select or enter the desired value.


5 Press the OK command button to confirm.
6 Point to the Finish command button.
Note: This procedure describes how to execute the DCM.SwitchStreaming macro
manually. Macros can also be executed automatically by using Macro Presets and
Macro Schedules. For more information please refer the Macro Component User's
Guide.

4011746 Rev P 605


C
Appendix C
Appx auto letter

Extended Operations
Introduction
This appendix describes how to download MIBs and traces from the
DCM.

In This Appendix
Downloading MIBs from the DCM.................................................. 608
Viewing Trace Logs ............................................................................ 610
Capturing Live Network Data .......................................................... 615

4011746 Rev P 607


Appendix C
Extended Operations

Downloading MIBs from the DCM


Introduction
In order to build your own GUI, the MIB files used by the DCM can be downloaded
from the DCM to the hard disk of your PC using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP).

To Download MIB files


The procedure below describes how a MIB file can be copied from a DCM to the hard
disk of a PC using FTP.
1 Launch the Internet Explorer browser and in the Address line of the browser
enter the following instruction:
ftp://X.X.X.X/mibs/
Where X.X.X.X is the IP address of your DCM.
Result: The Log On As dialog is displayed.

2 Enter Guest in both the User name drop down box and Password box and press
the Log On command button.
Result: The directory containing the MIB files is shown.

608 4011746 Rev P


Downloading MIBs from the DCM

3 Copy the MIB file to your local hard disk.

4011746 Rev P 609


Appendix C
Extended Operations

Viewing Trace Logs


Introduction
The DCM keeps a number of trace logs containing data of particular events. These
trace logs are useful for trouble shooting purposes and can directly be opened using
the web browser user interface of the DCM or can be downloaded to the hard disk of
your PC.
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows consulting the following trace
logs:
Security Log
GUI Trace
Action Log
ORB Trace
ORB Timings
Mainboard Trace
Board 1 - 4 Trace
Transrater Trace
DPI Trace
SNMP Trace

610 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Trace Logs

The following illustration shows an example of a GUI trace log:

Note: For certain reasons it can be useful to filter the trace logs. The trace logs of the
Main Board (Mainboard Trace) and the trace logs of the interface cards (Board 1 - 4
Trace) can be filtered by assigning particular filter values. The ORB Trace logs can be
filtered by changing the ORB Trace Level. The ORB Trace Level value as well as the
filter values will be passed by your Scientific Atlanta representative.

Filtering the Card Trace Logs


The following procedure explains how to change the trace logs filtering parameters.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Traces sub page containing the Device Trace Settings table is displayed.

2 In the Device Trace Settings table, configure the following settings:


a In the Trace Level drop down box of the Main Card, select one of the
following values: None, All, Minor, or Major.

4011746 Rev P 611


Appendix C
Extended Operations

Note: When the Trace Level parameter is set to All, Minor, or Major, a warning
icon is added in the header of the web browser user interface indicating the
DCM is in service mode.
b In the Modules box of the Main Card, tick or clear the desired module check
box(es).
Note: All module check boxes can be set or cleared by pointing to the
corresponding Enabled All or Disabled All command button.
c Repeat step a and b for all interface cards.
3 Point to the Apply command button.

Changing the ORB Trace Level


The following steps explain how to change the ORB Trace level.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Traces sub page is displayed.
2 In the ORB Trace Level drop down box, select the ORB Trace level received from
your Scientific Atlanta representative.

Checking the Trace Logs


The following procedure explains how to view a trace log.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Traces sub page is displayed.
2 In the Trace Logs table, press the desired trace link.
Result: The selected trace log opens.

Downloading Trace Logs


Introduction
The web browser user interface of the DCM allows downloading individual trace log
files or exporting of all trace log files compressed into one file.

Downloading a Single Trace Log File


The procedure below explains how to download a single trace log file.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Traces sub page is displayed.

612 4011746 Rev P


Viewing Trace Logs

2 In the Trace Logs table, right-click on the desired trace link and point to Save
Target As... in the short-cut menu.

Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.


3 In the Save in: drop down box, browse to the folder in which the file should be
saved.
4 In the File name drop down box, enter the file name.
5 Press the Save command button to save the file.

Exporting the Trace Log Files


The export function of the web browser user interface of the DCM compresses all
trace log files into a single file and exports this file to the hard disk of your PC. This
file can also include the Core files of the DCM.
Note: A file containing the core files is very large.
The following procedure explains how to download the trace log files using the
export function.
1 On the web browser user interface of the DCM, point to the Traces link that
appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Traces sub page is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 613


Appendix C
Extended Operations

2 In the Trace Export table, tick the Include Core Files check box if the Core files of
the DCM must be included.

Result: After ticking the Include Core Files check box, the following message box
appears.

3 Press the Export command button.


Result: The File Download dialog appears after a while.
4 Point to the Save command button.
Result: The Save As dialog is displayed.
Note: If the file should be saved in a different folder, locate and open the folder.
5 In the File Name box, enter a name for the file.
6 Click on the Save command button to confirm or the Cancel command button to
abort the operation.
7 When the core files are exported, press the Delete command button beside Delete
Core Files to remove the core files from the device.

614 4011746 Rev P


Capturing Live Network Data

Capturing Live Network Data


Introduction
For troubleshooting purposes the DCM allows capturing Ethernet network data on
its management ports, local host, or on the ports of its GbE Interface Card(s). The
captured information (max. 150 MB) is stored into multiple files and compressed into
a single file. This file can then be offered to Scientific Atlanta's Customer Service
department for further investigation.
CAUTION:
Capturing network data introduces additional CPU load and can influence the
correct operation of the DCM.

To Capture Network Data


The following steps explain how to capture network data and to download this
information to your PC.
1 Log on to the DCM using a Security Account belonging to the Administrators
Security Group.
2 Click on the Maintenance link that appears after clicking on the Help link.
Result: The Help - Maintenance sub page is displayed.
3 In the Board drop down box in the Capture Settings table, select the board.

4 For a GbE Interface Card, complete the following settings to specify the network
details:
a Enter the name of the port in the TS GbE Port box.
b Enter the destination IP address in the TS IP Address box.
c Enter the UDP port number in the TS UDP Port box.
5 Click on the Start command button.
Result: The capturing process is started.
Note: The network data capturing process is a circular process, meaning when the
last file is filled up with data, the process starts overwriting the first file with new
recorded data.

4011746 Rev P 615


Appendix C
Extended Operations

6 Once the event for which network data information should be recorded arose the
Stop command button must be pressed.
Result: The following message box is displayed.

7 Click on the OK command button to close the message box.


8 Click on the Export command button and save the file to the hard disk of your
PC.
Note: The captured information is removed after exporting the file.

616 4011746 Rev P


D
Appendix D
Appx auto letter

Additional Configuration
Introduction
This appendix outlines the following additional configurations:
Configuring IP Security on a computer running Windows XP,
Windows 2003 server, or Windows Vista.

In This Appendix
Configuring IPsec on Windows........................................................ 618

4011746 Rev P 617


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

Configuring IPsec on Windows


Introduction
To ensure secure communication between the DCM and the computer running the
web browser user interface of the DCM, IP Security (IPsec) can be used. The
procedures in this topic describe the IP Security configuration for a computer
running Windows XP Professional or Windows 2003 Server and for a computer
running Windows Vista. The procedure to configure IPsec for DCM is described in
topic Configuring IP Security on page 50.
Note: The DCM uses Internet Key Exchange (IKE) for IP security. IKE is configured
to use preshared keys that can be set by the user. The DCM supports 3DES
encryption, MD5/SHA1 hashing, and Diffie-Hellman group 2.
The procedures to configure a computer running Windows XP, 2003 Server, or
Windows are set up as an example with correct settings for the DCM and with MD5
hashing. Note that the DCM also supports SHA1 hashing.

To Configure IPsec on a PC Running Windows XP or Windows 2000 Server


Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server can be configured to use IPsec using the
Microsoft Management Console (MMC). The MMC is a generic management console
that can manage many different Windows components.
IPsec configuration in Windows consists of four main tasks:
Access the IPsec management console.
Create IP address lists to identify computers.
Create Filter actions to define encryption parameters.
Create Policies that put IP address lists and filter actions together.
Each of these tasks is described below.
Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks.

618 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

Accessing the IPsec Management Console


The following steps explain how to open the IPsec management console.

Launching MMC
The following steps explain how to open the MMC main screen.
1 From the Windows desktop, click on the Start button in the System Tray, and
then choose Run from the Start menu.
Result: The Run dialog box appears.

2 Enter mmc in the Open drop down box, and then click on the OK command
button.
Result: The MMC main screen appears as shown below.

4011746 Rev P 619


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

Adding the Appropriate Snap-In


In order for MMC to manage the IPsec component, you must add the appropriate
IPsec snap-in as follows:
1 From the File menu, choose Add/Remove Snap-in.
Result: The Add/Remove Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.

2 Click on the Add command button.


Result: The Add Standalone Snap-in dialog appears as shown below.

620 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

3 In the Available Standalone Snap-ins box, choose IP Security Policy Management


and then click on the Add command button.
Result: The Select Computer or Domain dialog appears as shown below.

4011746 Rev P 621


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

4 Confirm that the Local computer selection button is selected, and then click on
the Finish command button.
5 Click on the Close command button to close the Add Standalone Snap-in dialog
and to return to the Add/Remove Snap-in dialog.
6 Confirm that IP Security Policies on Local Computer now appears in the Standalone
tab of this dialog.
7 Click on the OK command button to return to the management console.
Result: The screen should now appear as shown below.

Note: If Console Root is highlighted in the left pane, click on IP Security Policies on
Local Computer to display the options shown in the right pane above.

Tip: The IP Security Policies on Local Computer settings can also be accessed via
Control Panel / Administrative Tools / Local Security Policy.

622 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

Creating a New IP List


Complete the following steps to create a new IP list.
1 In the left pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IP Security Policies
on Local Computer item and choose Manage IP filter lists and filter actions from
the short-cut menu.
Result: The Manage IP filter lists and filter Actions dialog appears as shown below.

2 Click on the Add command button to open the IP Filter List dialog.
Result: The IP Filter List dialog is displayed. Note that the default name New IP
Filter List appears in the Name box.

4011746 Rev P 623


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

3 In the Name box, replace the default name with a new list name that is
meaningful to you (Headend IPs in the example below).

4 Confirm that the Use Add Wizard check box is checked, and then click on the
Add command button to start the IP Filter List wizard.
5 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a IP Filter Description and Mirrored property (Windows 2003 Server only):
This specifies a filter in each direction. Tick the Mirrored. Match packets with
the exact opposite source and destination addresses check box.
b IP Traffic Source. This identifies the source of IP traffic for this list. Choose
My IP Address from the drop down box, and then click on the Next
command box.
c IP Traffic Destination. This identifies the destination of the IP traffic for this
list. Choose A specific IP Address from the drop down box, then enter the IP
address of the destination device, and then click on the Next command
button.
d IP Protocol Type. This identifies what protocols are valid for this list. Choose
Any from the drop down box, and then click on the Next command button.
e Click on the Finish command button.

624 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

For a computer running Windows 2003 Server, the IP Filter Properties dialog
is displayed.

Click on the OK command button to close the IP Filter Properties dialog.


Result: The IP Filter List dialog should now appear as shown below.

4011746 Rev P 625


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

6 Click on the OK command button to return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter
actions dialog.
7 Confirm that the new IP list now appears in the IP Filter Lists box.

626 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

Creating a New Filter Action


Complete the following steps to create a new filter action.
1 Click on the Manage Filter Actions tab to show current filter actions and to add a
new entry for the DCM.
Result: The tab opens as shown below.

2 Click on the Add command button to start the Filter Action wizard.
3 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button.
4 Complete the steps of the wizard as follows:
a Filter Action Name. Replace the default name New Filter Action with a
meaningful name for the new action (e.g., Headend IPsec Filter), and then click
on the Next > command button.
b Filter Action General Options. Select the Negotiate Security selection
button, and then click on the Next > command button.
c Communicating with computers that do not support IPsec. Choose Do not
communicate with computers that do not support IPsec, and then click on
the Next > command button.
d IP Traffic Security. Select the Custom selection button, and then click on the
Settings command button.

4011746 Rev P 627


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

Result: The Custom Security Method Settings dialog appears as shown


below.

e Tick the Data integrity and encryption (ESP) check box and then select MD5
and 3DES from the Integrity algorithm and Encryption algorithm drop
down boxes, respectively.
f Click on the OK command button to save your selections and return to the
Filter Action wizard IP Traffic Security wizard page.
g Click on the Next command button to proceed to the final page of the Filter
Action wizard.
h Click on the Finish command button.

628 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

Result: The new filter action should now appear in the Filter Actions box as
shown below.

5 Double-click on the filter action you just created to open the Headend IPsec Filter
Properties dialog.

4011746 Rev P 629


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

6 On the Security Methods tab, confirm that the Session key perfect forward
secrecy check box is checked and the other boxes are cleared, as shown in the
picture below.

630 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

7 When finished, click on the OK command button to close the Headend IPsec
filter Properties dialog and return to the Manage IP filter lists and filter actions
dialog.

8 Click on the Close command button to close this dialog and return to the MMC
dialog.

4011746 Rev P 631


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

To Create a New IPsec Policy


Complete the following steps to create a new IPsec policy.
1 Right-click on the right pane of the MMC, and then point to Create IP Security
Policy... in the short-cut menu to open the IP Security Policy wizard.

2 At the wizard welcome screen, click on the Next > command button to continue,
and then complete the steps of the wizard as follows:

632 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

a IP Security Policy Name. In the Name box, replace the default policy name
with a name that is more meaningful to you (e.g., Headend Policy), and then
click on the Next > command button.

b Requests for Secure Communication. Confirm that the Activate the default
response rule check box is not checked, and then click on the Next >
command button.
c On the final page of the wizard, confirm that the Edit Properties check box is
checked, and then click on the Finish command button.

4011746 Rev P 633


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

Result: The Headend Policy Properties dialog appears as shown below.

3 Select the General tab and click on the Advanced command button.
Result: The Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.

4 Point to the Methods... command button.


Result: The Key Exchange Security Methods dialog is displayed.

634 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

5 In the Security method preference order list box, select a security method with
3DES encryption and move it to the top of the list by clicking on the Move up
button.
Note: When the desired method is not available, an existing method can be modified
by clicking on the Edit... button or a new method can be created by clicking on the
Add... button.

Select the desired Integrity algorithm, Encryption Algorithm (3DES), and


Diffie-Hellman group (Medium (2)) in the corresponding drop down boxes
and press the OK command button to close the dialog.
6 Click on the OK command button to close the Key Exchange Security Methods
dialog and to return to the Key Exchange Settings dialog.
7 Click on the OK command button to close the Key Exchange Settings dialog and
to return to the Headend Policy Properties dialog.
8 Clear the Use Add Wizard check box and then click on the Add command
button.

4011746 Rev P 635


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

Result: The New Rule Properties dialog appears as shown below.

9 On the IP Filter List tab, select the Headend IPs selection button.
10 On the Filter Action tab, select the Headend IPSec Filter selection button.
11 On the Authentication Methods tab, click on the Add command button.
Result: The New Authentication Method Properties dialog appears as shown below.

636 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

12 Select the Use this string (preshared key) selection button, and then enter
alphanumeric string (between 1 and 200 characters).
Note: Be sure to make a note of this string, as it must exactly match the preshared key
entered in the destination device.
13 Click on the OK command button to save the preshared key entry and return to
the New Rule Properties dialog.
Result: The preshared key is added to the Authentication method preference order
box.

4011746 Rev P 637


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

14 Select the existing Kerberos entry, and then click on the Remove command button
to delete this entry from the list.
15 In the confirmation dialog, click on the Yes command button to accept the
changes.
16 Click on the OK command button to close the New Rule Properties dialog.
Result: The DCM Policy Properties dialog should now display only the newly
entered rule.

638 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

17 Close the dialog to return to the MMC. Confirm that the new policy now appears
on the right pane.
18 Right-click on the new policy, and then choose Assign in the short-cut menu to
activate the policy.
If all of the above steps were performed correctly and the destination device is also
configured properly, the computer will now require IPsec to talk to the destination
device.
Note: If you have difficulty communicating with the destination device after
completing this procedure, ask your system administrator for assistance.

To Unassign IPSec
To disable IPsec on a computer running Windows XP or Windows 2003 Server, you
must unassign the IPsec policy as follows:
1 Open the Management Console as described in topic Accessing the IPsec
Management Console on page 619.
2 In the right hand pane of the Management Console, right-click on the IPsec
policy and point to Un-assign in the short-cut menu.

4011746 Rev P 639


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

For Further Information


Additional information on configuring IPsec for Windows XP Professional and
Windows 2003 Server is available on the following web page:
http://www.microsoft.com/downloads/details.aspx?familyid=a774012a-ac25-4a1d-
8851-b7a09e3f1dc9&displaylang=en

640 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

To Configure IPsec on a PC Running Windows Vista


IPsec configuration in Windows Vista consists of two main tasks:
Setting up the IPsec connection
Changing the IPsec connection defaults
Note: You must be an Administrator user to perform these tasks.

Setting Up the IPsec Connection


The following procedure explains how to set up an IPsec connection for Windows
Vista.
1 From the Windows desktop, click on the Start button in the System Tray, and
then choose Control Panel.
Result: The Control Panel dialog is displayed.
2 In the left hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, point to Classic View.
3 In the right hand pane of the Control Panel dialog, double-click on
Administrative Tools.
Result: The Control Panel - Administrative Tools dialog is displayed.
4 Double-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security.
Result: The User Account Control might appear.

5 Click on the Continue command button.


Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 641


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

6 Select Connection Security Rules in the left hand pane of the dialog.
7 Right-click in the Connection Security Rules pane and point to New Rule... in
the short-cut menu.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule Type dialog is displayed.

642 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

8 Select the Server-to-server selection button and click on the Next > command
button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 643


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

9 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 1?, select the These IP addresses
selection button and click on the Add... command button.
Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 1 appears.

644 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

10 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button.


11 Enter the IP address of this computer in the corresponding box and press the OK
button to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New Connection
Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog.
12 Under Which computers are in Endpoint 2?, select the These IP addresses
selection button and click on the Add... command button.
Result: The IP Address dialog for Endpoint 2 appears.
13 Select the This IP address or subnet selection button.
14 Enter the IP address of the destination device in the corresponding box and press
the OK command button to close the IP Address dialog and to return to the New
Connection Security Rule Wizard - Endpoints dialog.
15 Click on the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Requirements dialog is
displayed.

16 Select the Required authentication for inbound and outbound connections


selection button and click on the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Authentication Method dialog
is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 645


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

17 Select the Preshared Key selection button.


18 In the Key box, enter the preshared key and press the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile dialog is displayed.

646 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

19 Leave all check boxes ticked and press the Next > command button.
Result: The New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Name dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 647


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

20 In the Name box, enter a name for the IPsec connection (Headend IPs in the
example).
21 Click on the Finish button to close the wizard and to return to the Windows
Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.

648 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

Changing IPsec Connection Defaults


Perform the following steps to change the IPsec connection defaults.
1 In the left hand pane of the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog,
right-click on Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
and point to Properties in the short-cut menu.
Result: The Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer dialog
is displayed.
2 Click on the IPsec Settings tab
Result: The IPsec Settings tab page is displayed.

3 Press the Customize... command button.


Result: The Customize IPsec Settings dialog appears.

4011746 Rev P 649


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

4 In the Key exchange (Main Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection
button and point to the corresponding Customize... command button.
Result: The Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog is displayed.

650 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

5 In the Key exchange algorithm selection box, select the desired algorithm for key
exchange (Diffie-Hellman Group 2).
6 In the Security methods box, press the Add command button.
Result: The Security Method dialog appears.

4011746 Rev P 651


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

a In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption


algorithm for key exchange (3DES).
b In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm
(MD5).
c Press the OK command button to close the Security Method dialog and to
return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.
Result: The selected key exchange method is added to the Security methods list box.
Note: In the Security methods box, at least one method must match a key exchange
method of the destination device.
7 Click on the OK command button to close the Customize Advanced Key
Exchange Settings dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog.
8 In the Data protection (Quick Mode) selection box, select the Advanced selection
button and press the corresponding Customize... command button.
Result: The Customize Data Protection Settings dialog is displayed.

652 4011746 Rev P


Configuring IPsec on Windows

9 In the Data integrity and encryption box, point to the Add... command button.
Result: The Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog is displayed.

4011746 Rev P 653


Appendix D
Additional Configuration

a In the Protocol selection box, select the desired protocol for data protection
(ESP).
b In the Encryption algorithm selection box, select the desired encryption
algorithm for data protection (3DES).
c In the Integrity algorithm selection box, select the desired integrity algorithm
(MD5)
d In the Key lifetime (in minutes) box, enter or choose the time a key will be
used for data integrity before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 5 minutes up to 2,879 minutes.
e In the Key lifetime (in KB) box, enter or choose the amount of data that will
be sent with a key before a new key will be generated. A lifetime can be
chosen in the range from 20,480 KB up to 2,147,483,647 KB.
f Press the OK button to close the Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog
and to return to the Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings dialog.
Result: The selected data protection method is added to the Data integrity and
encryption algorithms box.
Note: In the Data integrity and encryption algorithms box, at least one method must
match a data protection method of the destination device.
10 Press the OK command button to close Customize Data Protection Settings
dialog and to return to the Customize IPsec Settings dialog.
11 Press the OK command button to close the Customize IPsec Settings dialog and
to return to the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer
dialog.
12 Close the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog.

Enabling or Disabling IPsec


Enabling or disabling IPsec on a computer running Windows Vista can be done as
follows:
1 Open the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security dialog as described in
topic Settings Up the IPsec Connection on page 641.
2 In the left hand pane of the dialog, point to Windows Firewall with Advanced
Security on Local Computer.
3 In the Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on Local Computer pane,
right-click on the IPsec entry and select Enable Rule or Disable Rule in the short-cut
menu.

654 4011746 Rev P


Glossary
3DES
triple data encryption standard (168 bit).

AC
access criteria.

ac, AC
alternating current. An electric current that reverses its direction at regularly
recurring intervals.

AC-3
audio compression - 3.

AD
advertising.

AES
advanced encryption standard.

AH
authentication header.

ARP
address resolution protocol. Internet protocol used to map an IP addresses to
physical (hardware) addresses on local area networks.

ASI
asynchronous serial interface. Allows the intermittent transfer of data one bit at a
time rather than in a steady stream.

ASM
any source multicast

4011746 Rev P 655


Glossary

ATSC
Advanced Television Systems Committee of the USA.

AVC
advanced video coding

Avg
average.

BAT
bouquet association table.

BNC
A coaxial connector that uses two bayonet lugs on the side of the female
connector. BNC stands for Bayonet Neill Concelman and is named after
Amphenol engineer Carl Concelman.

CA
conditional access. The system, software, and components necessary to provide
or deny subscribers selective access to specific services.

CAM
conditional access module.

CAS
conditional access system.

CAT
conditional access table.

CBR
constant bit rate.

COP
code of practice.

656 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture. A communication pathway
between disparate Network Management Systems. CORBA is an architecture and
specification for creating, distributing, and managing distributed program objects
in a network. It allows programs at different locations and developed by different
vendors to communicate in a network through an interface broker.

CP
crypto period.

CRC
cyclic redundancy code.

CW
control word.

CWG
control word generator.

dc, DC
direct current. An electric current flowing in one direction only and substantially
constant in value.

DC-II
DigiGipher-II

DCM
digital content manager.

DHB
digital headend backup.

DPI
digital program insertion.

DSL
digital subscriber line. A technology for bringing up to 8.0 Mb/s of bandwidth to
homes and small businesses over ordinary twisted-pair copper telephone lines.

4011746 Rev P 657


Glossary

DSM-CC
digital storage media - command and control

DTF
digital transport formatter

DVB
A standard developed by the Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB) Group, which is a
European organization that has authored many specifications for satellite and
cable broadcasting of digital signals. Part of the DVB work has been focused
specifically on conditional access.

DVP
digital video platform.

ECM
entitlement control message.

ECMG
entitlement control message generator.

EIS
event information scheduler.

EIT
event information table.

EITa p/f
event information table actual present/following.

EITa sch
event information table actual schedule.

EITo p/f
event information table other present/following.

EITo sch
event information table other schedule.

658 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

EM
element manager.

EMM
entitlement management message.

EMMG
entitlement management message generator.

EN
European norm.

ES
elementary stream.

ESD
Electrostatic Discharge

ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute.

FCS
frame check sequence

FEC
forward error correction. System of data transmission in which redundant bits
generated at the transmitted end are used by the receiver to detect, locate, and
correct transmission errors before delivering the data to the local data
communications link. This avoids requiring the transmitter to resend
information.

FM
frequency modulation. A transmission technique in which the frequency of the
carrier varies in accordance with the modulating signal.

FTP
file transfer protocol. Allows users to transfer text and binary files to and from a
personal computer, list directories on the foreign host, delete and rename files on
the foreign host, and perform wildcard transfers between hosts.

4011746 Rev P 659


Glossary

GbE or GigE
gigabit Ethernet. A LAN transmission standard that provides a data rate of 1
billion bits per second. Gigabit Ethernet is defined in the IEEE 802.3z standard.
Gigabit Ethernet is carried primarily on optical fiber.

GMT
Greenwich mean time.

GUI
graphical user interface. A program interface that takes advantage of a computer
graphics capabilities to make the program visually easier to use.

HD or HDTV
high definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar to 35
mm movies with sound quality similar to compact disk (CD).

HTML
hypertext mark-up language. A language used to create documents on the World
Wide Web.

HTTP
hypertext transport protocol. A communication protocol used to request and
transmit files over the Internet and other networks.

I/O
input/output.

IANA
Internet assigned number authority.

ID
identifier.

IEC
International Electro-technical Commission.

IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. IEEE was founded in 1963. It is
an organization composed of engineers, scientists, and students and is best
known for developing standards for the computer and electronics industries.

660 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

IGMP
Internet group management protocol. A protocol used to established host
memberships in particular multicast groups on a single network.

IIOP
Internet inter-ORB protocol. A protocol developed to implement CORBA
solutions over the web. It enables browsers and servers to exchange integers,
arrays, and more complex objects. It is a protocol for communication between an
application programming interface (API) and an external client.

IKE
internet key exchange.

IP
Internet protocol. A standard that was originally developed by the United States
Department of Defense to support the internetworking of dissimilar computers
across a network. IP is perhaps the most important of the protocols on which the
Internet is based. It is the standard that describes software that keeps track of the
internetwork addresses for different nodes, routes, and outgoing/incoming
messages on a network. Some examples of IP applications include email, chat,
and Web browsers.

IPMP
intellectual property management and protection

IPsec
internet protocol security.

ISO
International Organization for Standardization. An international body that
defines global standards for electronic and other industries.

ITU
International Telecommunications Union.

LAN
local area network. A communications link between two or more points within a
small geographical area, such as between buildings. Typically permits data rates
up to 100 Mbps. Smaller than a metropolitan area network (MAN) or a wide area
network (WAN).

4011746 Rev P 661


Glossary

LED
light-emitting diode. An electronic device that lights up when electricity passes
through it.

MAC address
media access control address. A unique 48-bit number that identifies the
input/output card of a particular device. The MAC address is programmed into
the card by the manufacturer. The MAC sub-layer handles access to shared
media.

MD5
message digest 5 algorithm.

MHEG
multimedia/hypermedia expert group

MIB
management information base. SNMP collects management information from
devices on the network and records the information in a management
information base. The MIB information includes device features, data throughput
statistics, traffic overloads, and errors.

MMC
Microsoft management console.

MPEG
Motion Picture Experts Group. A joint committee of the International Standards
Organization (ISO) and the International Electrotechnical Commission (EG). This
committee develops and maintains the MPEG specification for a series of
hardware and software standards designed to reduce the storage requirements of
digital video and audio. The common goal of MPEG compression is to convert the
equivalent of about 7.7 MB down to under 150 K, which represents a compression
ratio of approximately 52 to 1. Current standards are MPEG-1, MPEG-2, and
MPEG-4.

MPTS
multi-program transport stream.

662 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

MQAM modulator
multiple quadrature amplitude modulation modulator. A device with two input
ports that allow it to receive MPEG transport streams simultaneously from two
different sources. The MQAM separates the content in these transport streams,
encrypts it, modulates it, and then sends it to DHCTs on the cable network. The
four, independent radio frequency (RF) outputs on the back panel of an MQAM
allow the cable operator to use only one unit of rack space for the hardware and
one unit of rack space for ventilation, while providing the same number of RF
output channels as four QAMs.

MTR
multi transport receiver

mux
multiplexer. A device that combines two or more signals into one output.

ESP
encapsulation security payload.

NIT
network information table.

NITa
network information table actual.

NITo
network information table other.

NMS
network management system. A software system designed specifically to monitor
a network and to facilitate troubleshooting.

NTP
network time protocol.

NTSC
National Television Standards Committee. A committee that determines video
signal standards for television displays in the United States, Canada, Mexico, and
Japan, as well as other Latin American and Asian countries. The NTSC standard
calls for fixed-resolution, interlaced displays that are updated 30 times per second
with a resolution of 525 lines.

4011746 Rev P 663


Glossary

NVOD
near video on demand.

ON ID
original network identifier.

ORB
object request broker.

PAL
phase alternate line.

PAT
program association table.

PC
personal computer.

PCR
program clock reference.

PD
private data.

PDG
private date generator.

PES
packetized elementary stream

PES
packetized elementary stream

PID
packet identifier or program identifier.

664 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

PMT
program map table. Identifies and indicates the locations of the streams that make
up each service, and the location of the Program Clock Reference fields for a
service.

PS
power supply

PSI
program specific information.

PSIG
program specific information/service information generator.

PSIP
program and system information protoco.l (A digital TV data transport
standard.)

PSU
power supply unit.

QAM
quadrature amplitude modulation. A phase modulation technique for
representing digital information and transmitting that data with minimal
bandwidth. Both phase and amplitude of carrier waves are altered to represent
the binary code. By manipulating two factors, more discrete digital states are
possible and therefore larger binary schemes can be represented.

RAM
random access memory. A type of computer memory that can be read from or
written to in a nonlinear fashion.

RCDS
remote control and diagnostics system.

RFC
request for comments.

RMA
return material authorization. A form used to return products.

4011746 Rev P 665


Glossary

ROSA
RCDS open system architecture.

RTP
real-time transport protocol.

RU
rack unit. RU is the measuring unit of vertical space in a standard equipment
rack. One RU equals 1.75" (44.5 mm).

SCG
scrambling control group.

SCS
simulcrypt synchronizer.

SCTE
Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers, Inc. A not-for-profit professional
organization formed in 1969 to promote the sharing of operational and technical
knowledge in the field of cable television and broadband communications.

SD or SDTV
standard definition. A digital television format providing picture quality similar
to digital versatile disk (DVD).

SDT
service description table.

SDTa
service description table actual.

SDTo
service description table other.

SECAM
squentiel couleur avec mmoire. (French color TV standard.)

SFP
small form-factor pluggable.

666 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

SHA1
secure hash algorithm version 1.0.

SI
system or service information. Tuning information sent from the DNCS to
DHCTs which provides the information that DHCTs need to be able to tune to a
particular service.

SID
service identifier.

SMS
short message service. (Cellular phone text messaging.)

SNMP
simple network management protocol. A protocol that governs network
management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.

SPM
statmux pool manager

SPTS
single program transport stream.

SSM
source specific multicast

SVGA
super video graphics adapter. (800 by 600 pixels, 1.33:1 aspect ratio.)

TCP
transmission control protocol. One of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks.
TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data.
TCP guarantees delivery of data and packets, and will be delivered in the same
order in which they were sent. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery
of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called
packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.

4011746 Rev P 667


Glossary

TCP/IP
transmission control protocol/Internet protocol. Two interrelated protocols that
are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI transport layer
and breaks data into packets. IP operates on the OSI network layer and routes the
packets. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes
care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a
message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.

TDT
time and date table.

ToS
type of service

TOT
time offset table

TR
transrating.

TS
transport stream.

TS ID
transport stream identifier.

TTL
time to live. A field in many packet protocols that is used to ensure that packets
that do not find their destinations are eventually eliminated from the network.

UDP
user datagram protocol. A connectionless protocol, like TCP, that runs on top of
IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services,
offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network
without acknowledgements for guaranteed delivery.

668 4011746 Rev P


Glossary

URL
uniform resource locator. A standardized way of representing different
documents, media, and network services on the World Wide Web. The URL is
most commonly referred to as the Web address for a particular item. For example,
the URL, or Web address, for Scientific Atlanta is
http://www.scientificatlanta.com.

VBR
variable bit rate.

VLAN
virtual local area network. A local area network with a definition that maps
workstations on some other basis than geographic location (for example, by
department, type of user, or primary application). The virtual LAN controller can
change or add workstations and manage load balancing and bandwidth
allocation more easily than with a physical picture of the LAN. Network
Management System software keeps track of relating the virtual picture of the
local area network with the actual physical picture. VLANs are based on logical
instead of physical connections.

XOR
exclusive or.

4011746 Rev P 669


Index
Activate Streaming command 282
( Activate the default response rule 632
(Major) Severity parameter 511, 512 Activating streaming 282
Activating the DCM 39
1 Active ECMG Removed alarm 502
1024-max byte frames counter 88 Active EIS Removed alarm 502
128-255 byte frames counter 88 Active EMMG Removed alarm 502
1D FEC profile 155 Active PSIG Removed alarm 502
AD server 342
2 Add CA System dialog 419
256-511 byte frames counter 88 Add Component dialog 414
2D FEC profile 155 Add Custom PID Row table 193, 196
Add Descriptor Rule dialog 392, 400
3 Add devices to scan dialog 586
3DES 627 Add ECMG dialog 386
Add EMMG dialog 396
5 Add ID dialog 392, 400
512-1023 byte frames counter 88 Add New Alias table 46, 86
Add New IPsec table 51
6 Add New SNMP Trap Destination table 36
64 byte frames counter 88 Add New Static ARP Entry table 71
65-127 byte frames counter 88 Add New Static Route table 48, 74
Add New Transrating Group table 305, 320
A Add New TS table 131
About ROSA NMS 578 Add New User table 12
About sub page 9 Add New VLAN table 78
About the web browser user interface 7 Add PMT Rule table 240, 241
AC 361 Add PMT Setting table 236, 237, 244
AC Manager Component 358, 409, 579 Add Preconfigured Services table 178
AC Start Delay 372 Add Preconfigured Trigger table 517
AC Start Delay parameter 389 Add Preconfigured TS table 124, 163
AC stop delay 372 Add Private Data rule type 392
Access Criteria 361, 409 Add relation dialog 453
Access Criteria Configuration dialog 419, 420, Add Row command 46
422, 423, 424, 426 Add Server to List command 42
Access Criteria information 422 Add Service dialog 414
Access Criteria list 419, 422 Add Standalone Snap-in dialog 620
Access Criteria tab 419 Add Standard EIS command 404
Access Rights 361, 364 Add Standard EIS dialog 404
Accessing the IPsec Management Console 619 Add Standard PSIG dialog 407
Action Log 610 Add Table command 246
Action parameter 350, 351 Add Target IP dialog 565

4011746 Rev P 671


Index

Add Time Offset Descriptor table 267 Alarms related to outgoing services 534
Add Unit dialog 452, 455 Alarms related to outgoing Transport Streams
Add/Remove Snap-in dialog 620 532
Adding a Service to the Services List 414 Alarms sub page 510, 511, 512
Adding a Transport Stream 413 Algorithm Optimization parameter 303
Adding Access Criteria information 422 All Alarms table 510
Adding Components to a Service 415 Annex A FEC sending arrangement 159
Adding Conditional Access System 419 Annex B FEC sending arrangement 159
Adding ECMG Descriptor Rules 392 Applies to Data ID(s) parameter 400
Adding EMMG Descriptor Rules 400 Applies to ECM ID(s) parameter 392
Adding individual Transport Streams 131 Apply command button 8
Adding IPsec peers 51 ARP parameter 83
Adding login information 15 ARP sub page 71, 72
Adding PMT descriptors 236 ARP table entries 71
Adding preconfiguring service loss alarm triggers ASI input port configuration 57
517 ASI input type 178, 196, 250, 346
Adding security accounts 12 ASI Interface Card
Adding Service Component Tracking Rules 595 Concept 4
Adding Services to a Transrating Group 307 Introduction 2
Adding SPTSs to Multi-TS Transrating Groups Principle 5
323 ASI Interface Card mode 442, 443
Adding static route entries 49, 71 ASI output port configuration 59
Adding the Appropriate Snap-In 620 ASI port configuration 56
Adding Time Offset Descriptors 267 ASI Port numbering 56
Adding tracking rules 207 ASI port parameters 62
Adding VLAN port pairs 78 Assigning a backup Transport Stream 476
Additional features 442 Assigning a Service to a Transport Stream 414
Additional TS Info parameter 411 Assigning Access Criteria 424
Administrator security group 10 Assigning Access Criteria to Services or
Advanced parameters 389 Components 426
Advanced Settings dialog 438 Assigning Backup Services 470
Advanced Settings table 149, 150 Assigning ECMG interfaces 386
Advanced tab 149, 152, 389 Assigning EIS interfaces 404
Advanced tab page 149, 152 Assigning EMMG interfaces 396
Advanced TS Settings table 152 Assigning PSI/SI generator interface 407
Advertising server 342 Async Sources alarm 502
AF Insertion Rate parameter 444 Asynchronous Operation 449
Alarm message reporting 510 ATSC input standard 120
Alarm monitoring 501 Authentication Methods tab 632
Alarm overview 502 Auto Negotiation parameter 64, 69
Alarm severity 509 Auto Pass Rules 153
Alarms 502, 509, 525 Auto Referenced time base selection 120
Alarms details related to incoming services 531 Auto time base selection 120
Alarms details related to incoming Transport Auto type 206
Streams 528 Automatic Channel ID Selection parameter 386
Alarms details related to outgoing services 535 Automatic ECM ID Mode 434
Alarms details related to outgoing Transport Automatic mode 259
Streams 533 Automatic Start parameter 432
Alarms related to incoming services 529 Available Modules box 565
Alarms related to incoming Transport Streams Available Standalone Snap-ins box 620
527 Available VLAN IDs parameter 80

672 4011746 Rev P


Index

B Bit rates overview of services within incoming


Transport Streams 546
Backup - Main Delays parameter 470, 476 Bit rates overview of services within outgoing
Backup Device parameter 490, 498 Transport Streams 550
Backup Mode parameter 464, 490 Bit rates overview of services within Transrating
Backup parameter 195, 196 Groups 555
Backup scenarios 468 Bit rates overview of Transrating Groups 554
Backup Script parameter 490, 498 Bit rates overview tables 541
Backup Services sub page 470, 472 Bite Rate parameter 146, 460
Backup sub page 24, 26, 466, 497, 524 Block aligned FEC linearisation 159
Backup tab 498 Block CA Info parameter 275
Backup to main service assignment 468 Blocking components 185
Backup to Main Transport Stream Assignment Blocking service components 200
475 Board parameter 476, 615
Backup trigger 468, 475 Board X Trace 610
Backup TS table 476, 482 Boundary parameter 68, 450
Backup Type parameter 450 Bouquet ID parameter 246
Bad Packets parameter 173 Broadcast frames counter 88
Bandwidth Exceeded alarm 502 Buffer underrun counter 88
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System Fixed Bypassing IP security 54
Key scrambling 442 Bytes parameter 240, 241, 244
BAT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
Begin Debouncing parameter 511, 512 C
BISS mode 1 scrambling 442
CA ID parameter 206
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Default parameter 460
CA SubsystemID parameter 386, 419
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Max parameter 460
CA system 360
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Min parameter 460
CA System Properties dialog 421
Bit Rate (Mbps) - Target parameter 460
CA SystemID parameter 386, 419
Bit Rate Budget 455
CAM 361
Bit Rate Budget tab 455
Capture Settings table 615
Bit rate figures 537
Capturing Live Network Data 615
Bit rate limiting 297
Card branch 97
Bit rate overload protection 298
Card configuration 55
Bit rate reduction 298
Card filter 290
Bit Rates - Video - Fixed/VBR parameter 455
Card name 55
Bit Rates - Video Default parameter 455
Card Not Operational alarm 507
Bit rates in service overview trees 538
Card parameter 91, 114, 195, 198, 206, 215,
Bit rates overview of components within an
231, 250, 290, 346, 470
incoming service 543
Card representation mode 112
Bit rates overview of components within
Card Settings table 55, 443
outgoing services 551
CAS 360
Bit rates overview of components within
CAT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
outgoing Transport Streams 552
CC error alarm 502
Bit rates overview of components within
Certificate key 18
Transport Streams 547
Changing scrambler properties 382
Bit rates overview of incoming services 542
Changing Access Criteria properties 423
Bit rates overview of incoming Transport
Changing advanced Transport Stream settings
Streams 544
149, 150
Bit rates overview of outgoing services 553
Changing backup switching parameters 484
Bit rates overview of outgoing Transport Streams
Changing Conditional Access System properties
549
421

4011746 Rev P 673


Index

Changing default advanced Transport Stream Checking bit rates overview of components
settings 152 within outgoing services 551
Changing default PMT descriptor rule parameters Checking bit rates overview of components
244 within outgoing Transport Streams 552
Changing default service auto pass rules 182 Checking bit rates overview of components
Changing default service loss trigger alarms 519 within Transport Streams 547
Changing default tracking rules 212 Checking bit rates overview of incoming services
Changing default TS loss alarms triggers 522 542
Changing DPI settings outgoing services 278 Checking bit rates overview of incoming
Changing ECMG Descriptor Rules 394 Transport Streams 544
Changing ECMG Specific Parameters 386 Checking bit rates overview of outgoing services
Changing EIS interface connection parameters 553
405 Checking bit rates overview of outgoing
Changing EMMG Descriptor Rules 402 Transport Streams 549
Changing EMMG specific parameters 399 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing GbE port backup parameters 466 incoming Transport Streams 546
Changing IPsec connection defaults 649 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing IPsec filter 53 outgoing Transport Streams 550
Changing login information 15 Checking bit rates overview of services within
Changing ORB Trace Level 612 Transrating Groups 555
Changing outgoing service settings 274 Checking bit rates overview of Transrating
Changing PSI/SI generation mode 250 Groups 554
Changing PSIG interface connection parameters Checking bit rates overview tables 541
408 Checking EMM Component parameters 215
Changing scrambling parameters 378 Checking individual merged components 196
Changing scrambling settings outgoing services Checking merged services 195
275 Checking output bit rates 549
Changing SDT settings 263 Checking Private Data component parameter
Changing security account settings 12 221
Changing service backup switching parameters Checking service component settings 206
472 Checking service routing 272
Changing Service Properties 416 Checking Statmux Pool settings 460
Changing service settings 272 Checking the input bit rates 542
Changing the ASI Interface Card Mode 443 Checking Trace Logs 612
Changing Transport Stream Properties 416 Checking transrating comparison 314, 331
Changing transrating board settings 303 Checking unreferenced components settings
Changing Transrating Group parameters 309 231
Changing Transrating settings 321, 327 Choose Destination Location page 561
Changing transrating specific outgoing service Choose File dialog 19, 26, 237
settings 276 Client ID parameter 215, 221
Channel Closed by CA System alarm 502 Clock 41
Channel ID parameter 215, 221 Clock sub page 41, 42, 43
Check SCG at Provision Time parameter 382 Coarse Delay parameter 302, 303
Check Scrambling Control Group at Provisioning Cold reboot 29
Time Option parameter 382 Collapsing trees 96
Checking AD Server IP Address 353 Column FEC Stream IP parameter 160, 161,
Checking alarms 525 169, 171
Checking bit rates in service overview trees 538 Column IP parameter 163
Checking bit rates overview of components Column Socket Type parameter 163
within an incoming service 543 Communicating with computers that do not
support IPsec 627

674 4011746 Rev P


Index

Communication for Bad Scramblers command Concept 4


438 Introduction 2
Communication messages 428 Principle 5
Communication parameter 450 Co-Processor Not Operational alarm 507
Communication setup 428 Count parameter 18, 80
Communication started 428 Country Code parameter 267
Communication Status column 427, 430 CP 361
Communication stopped 428 Creating a New Filter Action 627
Communication Timeout Parameters 438 Creating an SPM resource 452
Community String parameter 36 Creating an SPTS 137
Community strings 38 Creating Configuration Files 595
Community Strings table 38 Creating outgoing Transport Streams 127
Comparison sub page 314, 316 Creating Transrating Groups 305
Component branch 105 Critical severity level 509
Component description 206 Cryptoperiod 361
Component sub page 193, 207, 208, 209, 211 Cue insertion device 344
Component Tag component tracking rule 200 Cue Messages 342
Component tracking rule 206 Current Activation parameter 39
Components Tracking Rules table 207, 208, Current parameter 206, 215, 221, 231
209, 211 Custom DPI Mapping Entries 350
Concept 4 Custom PID Mapping table 350, 351, 352
Conditional Access Module 361 Custom PID Settings table 193, 196, 199
Conditional Access System 360 Custom PIDs sub page 193
Conditional Access System Information 419 Custom Security Method Settings dialog 627
Conditional Access vendor 361 Custom Settings FEC streams 163
Configuration page 35, 46, 47, 62, 86, 87 Custom type 206
Configuration settings 24, 26 Customer support 9
Configuration tab 382, 386, 389, 396, 399, 400, Customize Advanced Key Exchange Settings
402, 404, 405, 406, 407, 408, 427, 430, 438 dialog 649
Configure TOT command 143 Customize Data Protection Settings dialog 649
Configuring Access Criteria 409 Customized IPsec Settings dialog 649
Configuring alarms 509 CW 361
Configuring device backup settings 497 CWG 361, 362
Configuring device operational failure alarm
524
D
Configuring DTF Transport Streams 444 D parameter 155, 160, 161, 169, 171, 173, 174
Configuring IPsec on Windows 618 Data ID parameter 215, 221
Configuring Outgoing Transport Streams 141 Data integrity and encryption (ESP) parameter
Configuring security 12 627
Configuring service loss alarm triggers 515 Data integrity and encryption parameter 649
Configuring splice channels 346 Data parameter 236, 422
Configuring transport stream loss alarm triggers Data protection parameter 649
520 DC-II input standard 120
Connection with CA System lost alarm 502 DCM
Connections table 386 Browsing 7
Control frames counter 88 Browsing through a tree 7
Control tab 432, 433 DCM Blacklist parameter 498
Control word 361 DCM Device Driver 579
Control Word Generator 361, 362 DCM device parameter 498
Co-Processor Card DCM Inputs tree 96, 107

4011746 Rev P 675


Index

Browsing 7 Destinations Overview table 83


Locating a passed service 117 Destinations sub page 83
Settings 107 Detailed Service Bit Rates Overview table 541,
DCM IPs 632 543, 551
DCM IPsec Filter 627, 632 Detailed Service Status Overview table 525,
DCM IPsec Filter Properties dialog 627 531, 535
DCM Outputs tree 96, 107 Detailed Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview
Browsing 7 table 541
Locating a passed service 117 Detailed TS Bit Rates Overview table 539, 541,
Settings 107 546, 550
DCM Policy Properties dialog 632 Detailed TS Component Bit Rates Overview
DCM.ApplyComponentRules macro 593, 598 table 541, 552
DCM.ImportSIData macro 593, 602 Detailed TS Status Overview table 525, 528
DCM.RemoveRules macro 593, 600 Device Backup Settings table 497
DCM.SwitchStreaming macro 593, 604 Device backup using ROSA EM 485
Deactivating the DCM 39 Device clock 41
Default Gateway parameter 71, 74, 174 Device configuration 33
Default Input FEC Settings table 166 Device Host ID parameter 18
Default mode 160, 161 Device is in Service Mode alarm 507
Default NIT in PAT table 260 Device name 34
Default Output FEC Settings table 174 Device Name parameter 411
Default Response Rule Authentication Method Device Operational Failure alarm 485, 492, 507,
632 524
Default Service Auto Pass Rules table 182 Device Operational Failure Trigger table 524
Default Service Backup Settings table 473, 519 Device related alarms 507, 511
Default service loss trigger alarms 519 Device Role parameter 497
Default Settings sub page 92, 93, 110, 125, 146, Device settings 24
166, 174, 244, 253, 473 Device Status Overview table 536
Default SI table playout 258 Device time 41
Default SI Table Playout table 253, 258 Device Trace Settings table 611
Default Tracking Rules table 212 Digital Program Insertion 339
Default TS Backup Settings table 484, 522 Digital Transport Formatter 442
Default TS loss alarms triggers 522 Digital Transport Formatter data packets 442
Default values 125, 146, 166, 244, 253, 257 Directory Default (Kerberos V5 Protocol)
Default VLAN Settings table 152 Activate 632
Defining Access Criteria 419 Disable Mode parameter 67
Defining SNMP Trap destinations 36 Disabled mode 160, 161, 163, 166, 169, 171,
Delay parameter 43, 457 173, 174, 259
Delete command 288, 313, 329 Disabling alarm message reporting 510
Delete core files 613 Disabling login information 16
Deleting IPsec peers 51 Display Login screen info text parameter 15
Deleting security accounts 13 Display mode 92
Deleting static ARP entries 72 Display Mode table 92, 93, 110
Deleting tracking rules 211 Do Not Insert rule type 392
Deprovisioning failed message 430 Don't Switch to Backup Source in Service Loss
Deprovisioning succeeded message 430 parameter 468, 473
Descriptor Rule Properties dialog 394 Don't Switch to Backup Source in TS Loss
Descriptor Rules tab 400, 402 parameter 475, 484
Destination - IP Address parameter 460 Downloading MIBs 608
Destination - UDP Port parameter 460 Downloading Single Trace Log Files 612
Destination IP Unresolved alarm 502 Downloading Trace Logs 612

676 4011746 Rev P


Index

DPI 339 Elementary Stream node 105


DPI settings outgoing services 278 EMM components 214
DPI Settings table 346, 350, 351 EMM Generated table 214, 220
DPI Start/Stop table 354 EMM PID display mode 92
DPI sub page 346 EMM PID Source parameter 396
DPI tab page 272 EMM PIDs main node 105
DPI Trace 610 EMM Section Grouping parameter 396
Drop on SPTS EMM Settings sub page 217, 218
desired action parameter 107, 110 EMM Settings table 215
Drop TS on GbE Port EMMG 364, 396
desired action parameter 107, 133 EMMG Descriptor Rules 400
DTF 442 EMMG interfaces 380, 389
DTF data packets 442 EMMG Name parameter 396
DTF license 17 EMMG Properties dialog 400, 402
DTF Transport Stream 444 EMMG Specific Parameters 396, 399
DTF_CONCENTRATOR license 17, 442 EMMs 361, 364
DTF_SCRAMBLING license 17, 442 EMMs table 215, 218
Duplicated Packets counter 167 Enable Hot Backup feature 389
DVB Common Scrambling Algorithm 360 Enable Hot Backup parameter 39
DVB input standard 120 Enable parameter 67
DVB Simulcrypt compliant scrambler 358 Enabled mode 259
Enabled parameter 476
E Enabling alarm message reporting 510
ECM ID Mode 424, 434 Encapsulate parameter 444
ECM PID component tracking rule 200 Encapsulated Security Payload Header (ESP) 50
ECM PID Source parameter 386 Encoder Dropout alarm 502
ECM_ID 365 Encoders table 460
ECMG Descriptor Rules 392 Encryption algorithm 627
ECMG Name parameter 386 Encryption algorithm parameter 649
ECMG Properties dialog 389, 392, 394, 395 End Debouncing parameter 511, 512
ECMG Specific Parameters 386 Enter ID parameter 392, 400
ECMG Type parameter 386 Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG)
ECMGs 384 interfaces 380
ECMs 361, 362 Entitlement Control Message Generator
ECMs service passing rules 181 interfaces 380
EIS 362, 365 Entitlement Control Messages 361, 362
EIS interface connection parameters 405 Entitlement Management Message Generator
EIS interfaces 380 364, 384, 396
EIS Name parameter 404 Entitlement Management Message Generator
EIS Type parameter 404 interfaces 380
EIT only for <service> filter 261 Entitlement Management Messages 361, 364
EIT Present/Following parameter 263 Error Intervals (ms) table 512
EIT sch TS settings table 250 ES ECM PID component tracking rule 200
EIT Schedule Flag parameter 263 ES ECMs service passing rules 181
EITa p/f 250, 255, 261, 269 ES Output PID parameter 209, 595
EITa sch 246, 250, 255, 261, 269 ES PID component tracking rule 203
EITa sch after 8 days 250, 255, 261, 269 ES PID parameter 200, 206
EITa sch first 8 days 250, 255, 261, 269 ES service passing rule 181
EITo pf 246, 250, 255, 261, 269 ES Type parameter 205, 206
EITo sch 246, 250, 255, 261, 269 ETR290 1st priority alarms 502
Elementary Stream Level Scrambling 369 Event Information Scheduler 362, 365, 404

4011746 Rev P 677


Index

Event Information Scheduler interfaces 380 FEC statistics 166


Event logging 437 FEC Streams parameter 163, 166, 174
Exclude EIT (p/f and sch) filter 261 FEC Temperature alarm 507
Excluded Encoders table 450 File Download dialog 24, 270
Executing the DCM.ApplyComponentRules File Name parameter 24, 269, 270, 612, 613
Macro 598 Filter Action General Options 627
Executing the DCM.ImportSIData Macro 602 Filter Action Name 627
Executing the DCM.RemoveRules Macro 600 Filter Action tab 632
Executing the DCM.SwitchStreaming Macro Filter parameter 80
604 Filtering Card Trace Logs 611
Expanding trees 96 Filtering parameter 64
Expiration Date parameter 18 Find Active Source command 117
Expired parameter 18 Find Destination command 117
Export command 270 Find Source command 117
Export Device Settings to File command 24 Finding a service in a tree 116
Export to File command 269 Finding a Transport Stream in a tree 116
Exporting configuration settings 24 Fine Delay parameter 302, 303
Exporting device settings 24 First Input PID parameter 226
Exporting PSI 269 First IP Address parameter 78
Exporting Trace Log Files 613 First Output PID parameter 226
Extended Coarse Delay mode 302 First Source IP Address parameter 80
Extended TR delay 303 First Subnet Mask parameter 78
Fixed (Unique within System) ECM ID Mode
F 434
Fan Failure alarm 507 Fixed (Unique within TS) ECM ID Mode 434
FCS/CRC error counter 88 Fixed Packets counter 167
FEC 155 Fixed Video Rate parameter 455
FEC 1D mode 160, 161, 163, 166, 169, 171, Flash Status dialog 565
173, 174 For all Applicable Rows command 208, 209
FEC 2D mode 160, 161, 163, 166, 169, 171, Force Audio 3 output standard mode 141
173, 174 Force Uplink output standard mode 141
FEC Card Force Video output standard mode 141
Concept 4 Forced Name parameter 274
Introduction 2 Forced PCR time base selection 120
Principle 5 Forced SID parameter 274
FEC Error Generation table 173 Format parameter 37, 460
FEC errors 173 Forward Error Correction 155
FEC L/D Error alarm 502 Fragments counter 88
FEC latencies 159 Frames parameter 460
FEC license 17 Frames Received OK (Counters) table 88
FEC overhead 159 Frames Received OK counters 88
FEC overhead parameter 160, 161 Frames Transmitted OK (Counters) table 88
FEC packet transportation 158 Frames Transmitted OK counters 88
FEC Profiles 155 Free CA Mode parameter 263
FEC requirements 159
G
FEC Scheme limitations 157
FEC Schemes 157 G 48, 74
FEC sending arrangement 159 GbE Interface Card
FEC settings for incoming Transport Streams
160
FEC Settings table 161, 169, 171

678 4011746 Rev P


Index

Concept 4 Concept 4
Introduction 2 Introduction 2
Principle 5 Principle 5
GbE interface parameters 69
GbE Multicast input type 178, 196, 250
I
GbE Name and Network Settings table 64 I/O Settings table 57, 59, 61
GbE port backup 464 ICIM Policy Properties dialog 632
GbE port backup parameters 466 ID for <servicename> dialog 150, 414
GbE port backup scenarios 464 ID parameter 141, 146, 149, 152, 460
GbE port configuration 64 IDCM_ResId parameter 598
GbE port settings 64 Identify device by parameter 586
GbE Settings table 67 Identify Me utility 31
GbE statistics 88, 91 IGMP Multicast Groups 80
GbE Statistics sub page 88, 91 IGMP Settings table 80, 82
GbE UDP Boundary Settings table 68 IGMP sub page 80, 82
GbE Unicast input type 178, 196, 250 IIOP Protocol Driver 579, 586
General EIS type 404 Image legend 8
General PSIG type 407 Import Data From File parameter 237
Generate Alarms parameter 512 Import Device Settings from File parameter 26
Generate All EITa sch mode 250 Importing configuration settings 26
Generate EITa sch first 8 days mode 250 Importing device settings 24
Generate FEC errors 173 Importing PMT descriptors 237
Generate mode 250 Importing PSI 269
Generate Test Message command 510 Importing SI Data 602
Generated EMMs table 215, 217, 218 Include Core Files parameter 613
Generated Entitlement Management Message Incoming Service Bit Rate diagram 314, 331
Packet Identifier display mode 92 Incoming services
Generating test messages 510 Modifying Settings 118
Global (Counters) table 88 Representation mode 112, 115
Global Alarm Settings parameter 512 Viewing 96
Global counters 88 Increment Scheme parameter 146
Good Packets parameter 173 Indeterminate severity level 509
Guest security group 10 Information severity level 509
GUI Trace 610 Inner Loop Descriptor Order Rules table 241,
GUI version information 9 243, 244
Inner Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table
H
240, 243, 244
Hardware configuration 34 In-point 340
Hardware key 54 Input - Backup parameter 272
Hardware Key Inserted alarm 54 Input bit rates 542
Heartbeat Network Interface parameter 497 Input bit rates tables 541
Heartbeat Protocol Error alarm 507 Input Board Type Delay parameter 302, 303
Heartbeat UDP Port parameter 497 Input Card parameter 153, 178, 193, 196, 226
Hesule web server application 18 Input -Card parameter 272
High definition 17 Input -Card parameter 595
Housing Input EMM table 214, 220
Input filter 290
Input Gen. and Private Data PIDs parameter 93
Input IP Address parameter 153, 178, 193, 196,
226, 476
Input -IP Address parameter 272

4011746 Rev P 679


Index

Input -IP Address parameter 595 Integrity algorithm 627


Input Multiplexing table 444 Integrity algorithm parameter 649
Input -Name parameter 272 Integrity and Encryption Algorithms dialog 649
Input -ON ID parameter 272 Interface C 55
Input parameter 138, 190, 192, 214, 263, 308 Interface Card related alarms 502
Input PID Insertion Channel parameter 351 Interface parameters 64, 69
Input PID Main parameter 350, 351 Interface sub page 55, 57, 59, 61, 64, 67, 68, 86,
Input PID parameter 193, 196, 209, 226, 595 87, 303, 443, 455
Input port configuration 57 Internet Key Exchange (IKE) 50
Input Port parameter 153, 178, 193, 196, 226, Interval parameter 256, 257, 258
444 Introduction 2
Input -Port parameter 272 Invalid Opcode counter 88
Input -Port parameter 595 IP Address dialog 641
Input Service Status Overview table 525, 529 IP Address increment scheme 146
Input Services table 138, 177, 190, 192, 308, IP Address parameter 36, 43, 46, 48, 51, 64, 69,
325 71, 74, 83, 86, 114, 124, 131, 141, 195, 198,
Input SID parameter 178 205, 206, 215, 231, 250, 290, 386, 470, 565
Input -SID parameter 272 IP Address Range parameter 565
Input Standard parameter 120, 122, 123, 124, IP Alias 10/100 Port table 47
125 IP Alias GbE Port table 47
Input -TS ID parameter 272 IP Alias Port parameter 86
Input TS Status Overview table 525, 527 IP Alias table 46, 86
Input TS table 184 IP Aliasing mode 45, 46, 85, 86
Input Type parameter 153, 178, 193, 196, 226 IP Aliassing 45, 85
Input UDP Port parameter 153, 181, 193, 196, IP Filter Description and Mirrored property 627
226, 476 IP Filter List tab 632
Input -UDP Port parameter 272 IP Filter Properties dialog 627
Input -UDP Port parameter 595 IP Only filtering 64
Insert IP Address Range parameter 80 IP parameter 163
Insert parameter 392 IP security
Insert PID Range parameter 226 Bypassing 54
Insert Range command 80, 226 Introduction 50
Insertion channel 340 IPsec packets 50
Insertion Channel - Card parameter 278 Key Exchange 50
Insertion Channel - Multicast IP Address IP Security Policies on Local Computer 620
parameter 278 IP Security Policies on Local Computer
Insertion Channel - Port parameter 278 parameter 620
Insertion Channel - SID parameter 278 IP Security Policy Management 620
Insertion Channel - Type parameter 278 IP Security Policy Name 632
Insertion Channel - UDP Port parameter 278 IP Statmux Configuration 450
Insertion Channel Active alarm 502 IP Statmux Controller 446, 448
Insertion Channel parameters 346 IP Statmux Controller Setting 450
Insertion to Primary Channel substitution 340 IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA EM
Installed Drivers dialog 580, 584 498
Installed parameter 18 IP Traffic Security. 627
Installing license file 19 IP-Based Statistical Multiplexing 448
Installing ROSA Drivers 579 IPsec packets 50
Installing the DCM Macros 593 IPsec parameter 48, 53
Installing the Upgrade-It software package 561 IPsec peers
InstallShield Wizard dialog 561
Integrating into ROSA 577

680 4011746 Rev P


Index

Adding 51 Logging on 11
Deleting 51 Login information
IPsec Settings tab 649 Adding 15
IPsec Settings table 51, 53 Changing 15
Irdeto M_Crypt ECMG type 386 Disabling 16
Introduction 15
J Login page 11
Jitter parameter 43 Logout 11
Join or Modify Multicast Group table 80 lONID parameter 602, 604
Joining GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups 80 Low Memory alarm 507
Joint command 80 lPID parameter 602
lPort parameter 600, 604
K lSID parameter 600
Key Exchange 50 lStreaming parameter 604
Key exchange algorithm parameter 649 lTSID parameter 602, 604
Key exchange parameter 649 lUDPPort parameter 600, 604
Key lifetime parameter 649
M
Key parameter 18, 444, 641
MAC & IP filtering 64
L MAC Address parameter 69, 71
L parameter 155, 160, 161, 169, 171, 173, 174 MAC Only filtering 64
Language parameter 206, 209, 415, 595 Macro Component 579
Last Input PID parameter 226 Macro Detail dialog 598
Last Poll parameter 43 Macros tab 598
Latency parameter 160, 161 Main - Backup Delay parameter 470, 476
Launching MMC 619 Main Service Source table 470
lCard parameter 600, 604 Main to Backup Delay parameter 497
lDCM_ResId parameter 600, 602, 604 Mainboard Trace 610
Leaving GbE ports to IGMP Multicast groups Maintenance sub page 29, 31, 615
80, 82 Major severity level 509
LEDS 31 Make Task dialog 584
Legend 8 Making task instances 584
Legend sub page 8 Manage Filter Actions tab 627
Length/Type out of range counter 88 Management - Port parameter 460
Leverage Bit Rate command 455 Manual (Custom) mode 346
License file 17, 19 Manual mode 346
License overview 18 Map Name parameter 453
License Overview table 18 Map Resources tab 586
Licenses 358 Mapping a DCM into ROSA NMS 586
Licenses sub page 18, 19 Matching behavior component tracking rule 201
Licensing 17 Max Bit Rate parameter 276, 301, 310, 327
Link Loss alarm 502 Max. - Video Rate parameter 457
Link Loss and UDP Loss trigger alarm 464 Max. Bandwidth parameter 396, 407
Link Loss trigger alarm 464 MD5 627
Load Balancing 384 Mediaguard Compact CA Descriptor mode
Load Components parameter 411 parameter 120, 122, 123, 124, 125
Load Model from Devices dialog 411 Menu appearance parameter 107, 110
Locating a passed service in a tree 117 Merged Service Source table 470
Log On As dialog 20, 608 Merged Services table 195, 198
Log tab 437 Merging components 190
Logging off 11 Merging individual components 193

4011746 Rev P 681


Index

Min - Video Rate parameter 457 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - name
Min Bit Rate parameter 276, 301, 310, 327 dialog 641
Minor severity level 509 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Profile
Mirror of Port parameter 61 dialog 641
Mirror port configuration 61 New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Mirroring parameter 67 Requirements dialog 641
Missing FEC Stream(s) alarm 502 New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Rule
Missing in PAT - service loss alarm trigger 514 Type dialog 641
Missing Packets counter 167 New parameter 209, 215, 217, 221, 223, 231
MMC main screen 619 New Resource dialog 586
Mode parameter 39, 46, 91, 160, 161, 163, 166, New Rule Properties dialog 632
169, 171, 173, 174, 248, 250, 259, 346, 515, New/Link Map dialog 453
517, 521, 524 NIT 246, 255, 261, 269
Modifying incoming service settings 118 NIT in PAT table 259
Modifying incoming Transport Stream settings NITa 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
120 NITo 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
Modifying PMT descriptors 235 No Components to Scramble
Modifying tracking rules 209 CP Extension alarm 502
Modules parameter 611 No DTF Concentrator License Available alarm
MPTS - all Services type Transrating Group 502
300, 305 No DTF Scrambling License Available alarm
MPTS transrating 300 502
MTR 442 No ECMG Connection Available alarm 502
Multi Transport Receiver 442 No ECM's available
Multicast column socket type 163 CP Extension alarm 502
Multicast frames counter 88 No EMM resources available alarm 502
Multicast IP Address assignment 130 No FEC License Available (Decoding) alarm
Multicast IP Address parameter 80, 346 502
Multicast row socket type 163 No FEC License Available (Encoding) alarm
Multicast socket type 124, 163 502
Multicast type 160, 346 No scramblers 428
Multiplexing 95 No scramblers message 430
Multi-TS Transrating Groups 320 Non block aligned FEC arrangement 159
Muxing sub page 138, 177, 214, 308, 325 NTP client 343
mystro-videoport MIB 37 NTP Clock Offset alarm 507
NTP server 42, 343
N NTP Server Configuration parameter 42
Nagra NagraVision ECMG type 386 NTP Server IP Address parameter 42
Name parameter 34, 35, 55, 57, 59, 62, 64, 69, NTP Servers table 42
114, 195, 196, 205, 206, 236, 263, 290, 305, NTP Statistics 43
309, 320, 321, 346, 392, 400, 419, 422, 452, NTP Statistics command 43
455, 460, 586, 641 NTP Statistics sub page 43
Network ID parameter 246 NTP Statistics table 43
Network PID insertion 259 Number Format parameter 410, 433
Network Settings table 53 Number parameter 62, 69
New Authentication Method Properties dialog NumberFormat parameter 410, 433
632
O
New Connection Security Rule Wizard -
Authentication Method dialog 641 Obtaining license files 18
New Connection Security Rule Wizard - Off mode 346
Endpoints dialog 641 Offset parameter 43

682 4011746 Rev P


Index

ON ID display mode 92 Overrule Max. Number of Streams parameter


ON ID parameter 92, 114, 141, 195, 196, 205, 389
206, 215, 231, 246, 290, 411, 413, 415 Overrule Min. CP Duration parameter 389
Online product info 9 Overrule Recommended CP Duration parameter
Opening the Upgrade-It tool 565 404
Operational Temperature alarm 507 Overrule Repetition Period parameter 389
ORB Timings 610 Overrule Start Delay parameter 389
ORB Trace 610 Overrule Stop Delay parameter 389
ORB Trace Level parameter 612 Overrule Transition Start Delay parameter 389
Ordering PMT descriptors 241 Overrule Transition Stop Delay parameter 389
Original Network Identifier display mode 92 Overruling ECMG Channel Status Message
Other alarms 502 Parameter Values 389
Outer Loop Descriptor Order Rules table 241, Overruling the Scrambling Control Configuration
243, 244 439
Outer Loop Descriptor Removal Rules table Oversized frames counter 88
240, 243, 244 Overwrite the Database Model parameter 411
Outgoing Service Bit Rate diagram 314, 331
Outgoing service settings 274
P
Outgoing services P 53
Viewing 96 Package version information 9
Out-point 340 Packet Format parameter 57, 59, 62
Output - Name parameter 272 Packet Identifier display mode 92
Output - SID parameter 272 Packet Reordering mode 160, 161, 163, 166
Output bit rates 549 Packets Out of Range counter 167
Output bit rates table 541 Parameter Detail dialog 598, 600, 602, 604
Output channel 340 Pass ECMs parameter 181, 182
Output Channel - Mode parameter 278 Pass EMMs rules 127, 153
Output Channel - Name parameter 278 Pass ES ECMs parameter 181, 182
Output Channel - PMT Mode parameter 278 Pass ESs parameter 181, 182
Output Channel parameter 346 Pass Services rule 127, 153
Output ES Type parameter 193, 196 Pass Through rate control 310, 327
Output filter 290 Pass Through transrating mode 301
Output GbE Ports table 138 Pass Unreferenced PIDs rule 127, 153
Output Mode parameter 59, 62 Passing all services 183
Output parameter 138, 190, 192, 263, 308 Passing components 185
Output PID parameter 226, 230, 231, 444 Passing EMM components 214
Output port configuration 59 Passing individual components 187
Output Protocol parameter 131, 141, 146 Passing individual services 176
Output Rate parameter 131, 141 Passing Private Data components 220
Output Service Status Overview table 525, 534 Passing rules 181
Output Services table 190, 192 Passing service components 200
Output SID parameter 193, 196, 595 Passing Transport Streams to a port 133
Output Standard parameter 131, 141, 146 Passing unreferenced components 226
Output Streaming parameter 39, 67 Password parameter 10, 11, 12, 20, 608
Output Transport Stream table 184 PAT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
Output Transport Streams table 177, 214, 220 PAT Error alarm 502
Output Transrating Groups table 308, 325 PAT Error parameter 512
Overload Protection 296 Pause frames counter 88
Overrule AC Stop Delay parameter 389 PCR component tracking rule 200
Overrule Max. Comp. Time parameter 389 PD PID display mode 92
PDG 368

4011746 Rev P 683


Index

Peer IP Address parameter 497 Preconfiguring Services


Performing a Manual Communication Adding 178
Restoration 438 Introduction 178
Performing a manual device restore action 490 Removing 179
Performing a Manual Transport Stream Backup Preconfiguring TS loss triggers 521
Transition 482 Predefined Coarse Delay mode 302
PID display mode 92 Present parameter 195, 196
PID error - service loss alarm trigger 514 Primary channel 340
PID Error (Audio/Video) parameter 512 Primary Channel - Name parameter 278
PID Error (Data) parameter 512 Primary Channel - SID parameter 278
PID Error alarm 502 Primary Channel parameter 278
PID Error parameter 515, 517 Primary to Insertion Channel substitution 340
PID List parameter 514 Principle 5
PID Multiplexing table 226 Priority parameter 141, 146, 149, 150, 152, 276,
PID parameter 92, 205, 206, 209, 215, 231, 236, 301, 310, 327, 386, 457, 460
250, 261, 414 Private Data components 220
PID Type parameter 514, 515, 517 Private Data Generator 368
Please, reboot server (via ROSA)! message box Private Data Packet Identifier display mode 92
580 Private data parameter 392, 400
PMT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269 Private Data PIDs table 221, 223, 224
PMT Descriptor Rules 146 Private Data table 214, 220
PMT descriptors 235 Product information 9
PMT error - service loss alarm trigger 514 Pro-FEC Code of Practice (COP) #3 release 2
PMT Error alarm 502 155
PMT Error parameter 512 Properties dialog 389
PMT Mode parameter 346 Properties tab 490
PMT section exceeds 1K alarm 502 Protocol parameter 649
PMT Settings table 236, 238 Provisioning failed message 430
PMT sub page 235, 236, 237, 238, 240, 243 Provisioning succeeded message 430
Poll Int parameter 43 Proxy Name parameter 215, 221
Pool Bit Rate parameter 455 PS 1 Failure alarm 507
Pool ID parameter 457 PS 2 Failure alarm 507
Popup window with Transport Stream bit rates PSI SI generator interfaces 380
539 PSI/SI generation mode 250
Port backup 464 PSI/SI Generator 367, 407
Port backup scenarios 464 PSI/SI generator interfaces 407
Port Bandwidth Exceeded alarm 502 PSI/SI information 246
Port branch 98 PSI/SI output mode 250
Port Mirroring 56 PSI/SI table playout rate 255
Port numbering 56, 64 PSI/SI/PSIP Overview table 539
Port Pair parameter 78, 80 PSIG 367
Port pair settings 67 PSIG interface connection parameters 408
Port pairs 64, 67 PSIG interfaces 380
Port parameter 71, 83, 86, 114, 195, 198, 205, PSIG Name parameter 407
206, 215, 231, 250, 290, 346, 386, 470, 476 PSIG Type parameter 407
Port representation mode 112, 113 PSU
Power Up Activation parameter 39
Power Up alarm 507
Pre Shared key parameter 51, 641
Preconfigured Transport Streams 124, 163
Preconfiguring service loss alarm triggers 517

684 4011746 Rev P


Index

Concept 4 Removing individual services 285


Introduction 2 Removing merged services 198
Principle 5 Removing multiple services 286
Removing multiple Transport Streams 289
Q Removing outgoing services 285
Quality Controlled Statistical Multiplexing Removing PMT descriptors 238, 240
449 Removing PMT rules 243
Quality Limit parameter 457 Removing preconfigured services 179
Removing preconfiguring service loss alarm
R triggers 518
Rate Control parameter 276, 310, 327 Removing Private Data components 224
Rate Limited rate control 310, 327 Removing PSIG Interfaces 408
Rate Limited transrating mode 301 Removing Service Component Tracking Rules
Rate Limiting 296 600
Rate parameter 141 Removing Services from a Transport Stream
Reach parameter 43 418
Read Community parameter 38 Removing Services from the Services List 417
Read community string 38 Removing single Transport Stream 288
Re-apply the Database Model at Startup Removing static route entries 49, 72
parameter 439 Removing Time Offset descriptors 267
Reboot after Upgrade function 565 Removing Transport Streams 288, 417
Rebooting 28 Removing Transrating Groups 313, 329
Received Channel Error Message alarm 502 Removing unreferenced components 233
Reception Errors (Counters) table 88 Removing VLAN port pairs 79
Reception Errors counters 88 Reordered Packets 167
Re-Compressing of Services 296 Representation mode incoming services 112,
Re-Compressing of Transport Streams 296 115
Ref ID parameter 43 Requested PID could not be allocated alarm 502
Ref Type parameter 43 Requests for Secure Communication 632
Refresh parameter 91 Required authentication for inbound and
Region ID parameter 267 outbound connections parameter 641
Reload command button 8 Reserved Bit Rate parameter 455
Remaining Time parameter 18 Reset Board Bit Rates table 557
Remapping components 185 Reset Scrambling command 439
Remapping EMM components 217 Restarting 28
Remapping Private Data components 223 Restarting bit rate measurement 557
Remapping PSI tables 261 Restore Mode parameter 490
Remapping service components 200 Restore Script parameter 490, 498
Remapping unreferenced components 226, 230 Restoring Communication 438
Removal Warning in Tree parameter 107, 110 Retry Count parameter 586
Remove all Services command 287 Revert Delay (s) parameter 464
Remove from Output command 285 Revertive parameter 464, 470, 476
Removing Access Criteria information 422 RFC1157 36
Removing Assignments 426 ROSA Element Manager 486, 498
Removing Components from a Service 418 ROSA NMS 578
Removing Conditional Access System 420 Routes sub page 48, 49, 74, 75
Removing ECMG Descriptor Rules 395 Routes to Destinations 83
Removing ECMG Interfaces 389 Routing parameter 83
Removing EIS interfaces 406 Routing tab 178, 179, 272, 286
Removing EMM components 218 Routing tab page 178, 179, 272, 286
Removing EMMG Descriptor Rules 402

4011746 Rev P 685


Index

Row FEC Stream IP parameter 160, 161, 163, SD/HD Mismatch alarm 502
169, 171 SD/HD parameter 274
Row Socket Type parameter 163 SDT 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
RTP output protocol 141 SDT parameter 263
Running Status parameter 263 SDT Settings table 265
SDTa 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
S SDTo 246, 250, 255, 261, 263, 269
SA Specific EIS type 404 Search command 116
SA Specific PSIG type 407 Search Next command 116
Same IP and UDP + 2, UDP + 4 FEC streams Searching a service in a tree 116
163, 166, 174 Searching a Transport Stream in a tree 116
Same UDP and IP + 1, IP + 2 FEC streams 163, Second IP Address parameter 78
166, 174 Second Subnet Mask parameter 78
Save As dialog 24, 269, 270 Security 10
Save command 269 Configuring 12
SCG 365 Security accounts 10, 12, 13
SCG Accept Delay parameter 382 Security Accounts table 12, 13
SCG provisioning message 365 Security Group parameter 12
Scramble only Audio/Video parameter 382 Security groups 10
Scramble parameter 444 Security Log 610
Scrambler Properties 382 Security Method dialog 649
Scrambler Properties dialog 382 Security methods parameter 649
Scramblers corresponding with ON ID=X Security page 12, 13
TS ID=Y dialog 435 Select Computer or Domain dialog 620
Scrambling 357, 361 Selective Services type Transrating Group 300,
Scrambling Control 427 305
Scrambling Control Group 365 Sending Arrangement parameter 169, 171, 174
Scrambling Control Group Accept Delay Sending Arrangements 159
parameter 382 Service Auto Pass Rules table 153, 181
Scrambling Control Group provisioning message Service auto passing rules
365 Changing defaults 182
Scrambling Control Task 358, 427, 579 Introduction 181
Scrambling levels 369 Switching on or off 181
Scrambling license 17, 358 Service backup 467
Scrambling not started alarm 502 Service Backup Settings table 470
Scrambling parameter 275, 378 Service Bit Rates Overview table 541, 542, 553
Scrambling settings outgoing services 275 Service branch 102
Scrambling Settings table 275 Service components settings 205
Scrambling tab page 272, 275, 378 Service Components Settings table 206, 207,
Scrambling-Specific Parameters 380 208, 209
Script parameter 490 Service definition 17
SCS 361, 362 Service grooming 290
SCS Configurator 358, 380, 579 Service Grooming table 293
SCS Configurator dialog 382, 386, 389, 392, Service ID parameter 414
394, 395, 396, 399, 400, 402, 404, 405, 406, Service Identifier display mode 92
407, 408 Service in Backup (Service Loss) alarm 502
SCTE 30 278, 342 Service in Backup (TS Loss) alarm 502
SCTE 35 278, 344 Service Level Scrambling 369
SCTE-30/35 mode 278, 346 Service loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger
SCTE-35 Only (Custom) mode 278, 346 520
SCTE-35 Only mode 278, 346 Service Loss alarm 502

686 4011746 Rev P


Index

Service loss alarm triggers 514 SID parameter 92, 114, 122, 123, 124, 195, 196,
Service Loss at Output alarm 502 205, 206, 209, 290, 346, 517
Service Loss Trigger Mode parameter 519 Simulcrypt Scrambling 371
Service Loss Trigger Options parameters 519 Simulcrypt Synchronizer 361, 362
Service Name parameter 414, 416 Slot Details box 565
Service parameter 246 SNMP 36
Service passing rules 181 SNMP sub page 36, 37
Service Properties dialog 416 SNMP Trace 610
Service Provider Name parameter 263 SNMP Trap Destination Setting table 36, 37
Service Provider parameter 414, 416 SNMP Trap destinations 36, 37
Service re-multiplexing 176 SNMP Trap format 37
Service representation mode 112, 114 SNMP Trap table 37
Service Routings table 272, 286 Socket Type parameter 124, 163, 476
Service settings 272 Software upgrade 559
Service Settings table 118, 119, 274, 286, 472, Sort GbE TS in Tree by parameter 107, 110
515, 518 Sort Services in Tree by parameter 107, 110
Service sub page 118, 178, 286, 378, 517, 518 Source - IP Address parameter 460
Service Type parameter 263 Source IP Address parameter 80
Service View sub page 96 Source Stream Combining 442
Services list 414 Splice channels 346
Services sub page 119 Splice Insert Cue messages 344
Services table 314, 331 Splice Request messages 342
Services to Access Criteria list 426 Splicing Event Duration 342
Session key perfect forward secrecy parameter Splicing license 17
627 SPM 452
Setting the Communication Timeout parameters SPM resource 452
438 SPM Resource in ROSA 455
Setting up Bit Rate Budget 455 SPTS Transrating 317
Setting up IP statmux 452 Standalone Device Backup 492
Setting up maps 453 Standalone tab 620
Setting up Statistical Multiplexing Parameters Stand-Alone VBR parameter 455
457 Standard Coarse Delay mode 302
Setting up the IPsec connection 641 Standard definition 17
Setting up the Transport Stream Model 410 Standard ECMG type 386
Setting Up the TS Model Manually 413 Standard EIS Properties dialog 405
Settings menu 410, 434, 438 Standard PSIG Properties dialog 407
Settings sub page 515 standard TR delay 303
Settings tab page 272, 274 Start Delay 372
Severity level 509 Start IP Address parameter 146
Short-cut menu 7 Start Streaming all TSs command 283
Show All filter 261 Start UDP Port parameter 146
SI Distributor 579 Starting or Stopping Streaming 604
SI Table In Tree table 246 Starting scrambling 430, 436
SI Table Playout parameter 146, 256 Starting streaming 282
SI Table Settings table 248, 250, 259, 261, 270 Starting the Scrambling Control Task 432
SI Table sub page 248, 250, 256, 261, 270 Stat Muxed rate control 310, 327
SI Tree 246 Stat Muxed transrating mode 301
SI View sub page 246, 269 State parameter 62, 69, 482
SID 460, 470 Static ARP Settings table 71, 72
SID display mode 92 Static ARP table entries 71
Static route entries

4011746 Rev P 687


Index

Adding 48 Switching on or off service auto passing rules


Introduction 48 181
Removing 49 Sync byte error - Transport Stream loss alarm
Static Route Settings table 48, 49, 74, 75 trigger 520
Static Route table 74, 75 Sync Byte Error alarm 502
Static routes 48 Sync loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger
Static routes table 48 520
Statistical Multiplexing 448 Synchronization parameter 41
Statistical re-multiplexing 298 Synchronization Type parameter 42
Statmux mode 460 Synchronizing the Scrambling Control Task 433
Statmux parameter 457 Synchronizing with NTP server 42
Statmux Pool 448 Synchronous Operation 449
Statmux Pool branch 102 System Settings table 35, 39
Statmux Pool Manager 452, 579 System sub page 39, 48, 51
Statmux Pool Setting table 460
Statmux Pool settings 460
T
Statmux Pools branch 102 Table parameter 269
Statmux Settings of the Encoders 460 Tag parameter 205, 206, 209, 236, 240, 241,
Statmux Settings table 450 244, 595
Statmux tab 457 Tally parameter 43
Status New parameter 595 Target IP Address parameter 457
Status parameter 444 Targets parameter 565
Steps to take Task intances 584
Device backup using ROSA EM 489 TCP Port parameter 396, 404, 407
IP Statmux Device Backup Using ROSA EM TDT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
498 Technical support 9
Scrambling 375 Test Message alarm 507
Standalone device backup 493 Test messages 510
Stop All EITa sch mode 250 The Check for New Service ID upload 410
Stop delay 372 The Clear & Reload TS Model upload 410
Stop Streaming all TSs command 284 This IP address or subnet parameter 641
Stop Streaming command 283 Time Base Selection parameter 120, 122, 123,
Stop, mode 250 124, 125
Stopping scrambling 430, 436 Time Offset Descriptor table 267
Stopping streaming 282 Time Offset Descriptors 267
Stopping the Scrambling Control Task 433 Time Out parameter 586
Stratum parameter 43 Time synchronization 343
strConfigFile parameter 598 Time to Live parameter 149
Stream ID parameter 215, 221 Time Zone parameter 267
Stream loss - Transport Stream loss alarm trigger Time Zone Selection parameter 41, 42
520 Timing Parameters 372
Stream Type component tracking rule 200 To Create a New IPsec Policy 632
Stream Type parameter 187, 209, 595 To Unassign IPSec 639
Streaming 282 Too many encoders in pool alarm 502
Streaming parameter 131, 133, 141 Too many encoders total alarm 502
strIPAddress parameter 600, 604 Toolbars 9
strSiDataFileName parameter 602 ToS parameter 149, 150, 152
Subnet Mask parameter 48, 64, 69, 74 TOT 246, 250, 255, 261, 269
Sum of CBR TS parameter 131 Total Bit Rate parameter 131, 141, 305, 309,
Super_Cas_ID 365 320, 321, 444
Total Bytes received counter 88

688 4011746 Rev P


Index

Total Bytes transmitted counter 88 Transrating Group branch 104


Total frames received counter 88 Transrating Group Settings table 305, 310, 320,
Total frames transmitted counter 88 321, 327, 329, 330
TR Delay parameter 303 Transrating license 17
TR Group Name parameter 276 Transrating mode 301
Trace Export table 613 Transrating problem alarm 502
Trace Level parameter 611 Transrating Services Settings table 276
Trace Logs table 612 Transrating specific outgoing service settings
Traces sub page 611, 612, 613 276
Tracking Rule command 206 Transrating sub page 309, 310, 320, 327, 329,
Tracking Rules 206 330
Tracking Type parameter 595 Transrating tab page 272, 276
Transition start delay 372 Tree
Transition stop delay 372 Browsing 7
Transmission errors (Counters) table 88 Finding Services 116
Transmission errors counters 88 Finding Transport Streams 116
Transparent Generated mode 250 Settings 107
Transparent Loop Through Transport Streams Tree View sub page 115, 116
Introduction 129 Trigger Alarm parameter 464
Passing 139 Triggering Splicing Events Manually 354
Undo Loop Throught command 139 Triggers parameter 521
Transparent mode 250 TS Advanced sub page 150, 212
Transparent output standard mode 141 TS Auto Pass Rules 153
Transport Stream advanced settings 149 TS Auto Pass Rules table 153
Transport Stream auto pass rules 127, 153 TS Bit Rates Overview table 541, 544, 549
Transport Stream backup 474 TS branch 99
Transport Stream Backup scenarios 468, 475 TS Check TimeOut parameter 438
Transport Stream backup trigger 475 TS Component Settings table 230, 231, 233
Transport Stream branch 99 TS Components sub page 221, 223, 224, 226,
Transport Stream creation methods 130 230, 231, 233
Transport Stream Identifier display mode 92 TS Default Settings table 125, 146
Transport Stream Loss Alarm Triggers 520, 521 TS FEC sub page 163, 173
Transport Stream Model 410 TS FEC table 160, 161, 171
Transport Stream Properties dialog 415 TS GbE Port parameter 615
Transport Stream representation mode 112, 113 TS ID display mode 92
TransportStream dialog 413 TS ID parameter 92, 114, 141, 195, 196, 205,
TransportStream Initialization Error 428 206, 215, 231, 246, 290, 411, 413, 415
TransportStreams - Services tab 411, 413, 414, TS Input sub page 122, 123, 124, 160, 476, 482,
415, 416, 417, 418, 438 521
TransportStreams list 426 TS IP Address box 615
Transrater delay 302 TS IP parameter 173
Transrater Trace 610 TS Loss alarm 502
Transrating 295 TS Loss sub page 521
Transrating board settings 302 TS Loss table 521
Transrating Board Settings table 303 TS Loss Trigger Mode parameter 522
Transrating comparison 314, 331 TS Loss Trigger Options parameters 522
Transrating Comparison command 316 TS Output sub page 131, 143, 145, 153, 181,
Transrating examples 333 289, 305
Transrating group 300, 305, 307, 313, 320 TS Ping TimeOut parameter 438
Transrating Group Bit Rates Overview table TS representation mode 112, 113
541, 554

4011746 Rev P 689


Index

TS Settings table 122, 123, 131, 143, 145, 289, Use UDP Port parameter 396
444 User Account Control dialog 641
TS sync loss - service loss alarm trigger 514 User Name parameter 10, 11, 12, 20, 118, 119,
TS Sync Loss alarm 502 608
TS tab 182 User Selected PCR PID Error alarm 502
TS tab page 182, 212 User Time parameter 41
TS UDP Port 615 User Time table 41
TS-Service Backup tab page 484, 519, 522 Users security group 10
TTL parameter 149, 150, 152 Using DCM Scripts 593
Type of Service parameter 149
Type parameter 18, 57, 62, 69, 160, 161, 195,
V
198, 205, 206, 209, 215, 221, 231, 240, 241, Valid Packets counter 167
244, 250, 305, 346, 392, 415, 443, 470 Value parameter 598, 600, 602, 604
Version 9
U
Version Info sub page 23
UDP boundary 68 Version information 22
UDP Loss alarm 502 Video quality 302
UDP output protocol 141 Video Rate Mode parameter 455
UDP parameter 160, 161, 163, 169, 171, 173, Viewing incoming services 96
195, 198, 206, 215, 231, 250, 290, 470 Viewing outgoing services 96
UDP Port + 1 increment scheme 146 Viewing PSI/SI information 246
UDP Port + 2 increment scheme 146 Viewing service grooming 290
UDP Port parameter 114, 124, 131, 141, 205, Viewing Trace Logs 610
346 Virtual Local Area Network 77
UDP stream loss - service loss alarm trigger 514 VLAN
UDP Stream Loss alarm 502 Adding VLAN port pairs 78
Undersized frames counter 88 Introduction 77
Undo Loop Throught command 139 Limitations 77
Unicast column socket type 163 Removing VLAN port pairs 79
Unicast row socket type 163 VLAN ID parameter 78, 141, 146
Unicast socket type 124, 163 VLAN identifier parameter 149
Unicast type 160, 346 VLAN ON parameter 146, 149, 150, 152
Units dialog 452, 455 VLAN port pairs
Unreferenced Pid Error alarm 502 Adding 78
Unreferenced PIDS main node 105 Introduction 77
Unreferenced Pids Maximum Number Reached Removing 79
alarm 502 VLAN Priority parameter 141, 149
Unsolicited IGMP Message parameter 80 VLAN Settings 146
Update all channels table 346 VLAN Settings table 78, 79, 141, 143, 146
Update All table 310, 327 VLAN sub page 78, 79
Update All Transrating Groups table 320 VLAN tagged counter 88
Update all TS table 145, 150, 171, 321
Update License File parameter 19
W
Upgrade-It dialog 565 Warm reboot 29
Upgrade-It software package 561 Warning severity level 509
Upgrade-It tool 561, 565 Web browser user interface
Upgrading software 559
Upgrading the DCM software 565
Usage parameter 18
Use Default Settings parameter 131
Use this string (preshared key) 632

690 4011746 Rev P


Index

Introduction 6
Logging on or off 11
Security 10
Security accounts 10, 12, 13
Toolbars 9
Version 9
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security
dialog 641, 649
Windows Firewall with Advanced Security on
Local Computer dialog 649
Write Community parameter 38
Write community string 38

4011746 Rev P 691


Index

692 4011746 Rev P


Scientific-Atlanta Europe NV Luipaardstraat 12 B-8500 Kortrijk, Belgium
www.scientificatlanta.com
Cisco, Cisco Systems, the Cisco logo, the Cisco Systems logo, and Scientific Atlanta are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc. and/or its affiliates in the United States and
certain other countries.
All other trademarks shown are trademarks of their respective owners.
Product and service availability subject to change without notice.
2008 Scientific-Atlanta Europe NV. All rights reserved.
April 2008 Printed in Belgium Part Number 4011746 Rev P

S-ar putea să vă placă și